Owner’s Manual
Graphic
FOREWORD













FOREWORD
Thank you for choosing Mahindra vehicle.
We are privileged to welcome you to the Mahindra family.
Your vehicle represents Robust Quality, Ruggedness, Safety, Precision Workmanship and Distinctive Styling , which are our traditional values.
This documents contains important information on vehicle operation, that will help you make full use of the technical features available. To exercise better control on road, we suggest you to please take time to read, understand and familiarise with vehicle and its features. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
When it comes to service, note that your Mahindra Authorised Dealer knows your vehicle best, has company trained Technical Experts, Mahindra Genuine Parts and very much cares about your satisfaction.
We extend our best wishes for safe and pleasurable motoring
Graphic

MAHINDRA & MAHINDRA LTD.

Important Information – Quick Reference
We strongly urge that you read the information provided in pages referred hereunder which will help in road safety and prevent inconvenience
1
Warranty Coverage.............................................................................................
Refer WSIG* (P.g. 14)
2
Roadside Assistance ....................................................................................
Refer WSIG* (P.g. 9)
3
Schedule Service (Free/Paid).................................................................
Refer WSIG* (P.g. 23)
4
Maintenance Schedule & Lubrication Chart.................................................................................
Refer WSIG* (P.g. 24 & 28)
5
Location Of Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).............................................................................
Refer (P.g. 2-23)
6
Location Of Fuse Box And Fuse Details Details.................................................
Refer (P.g. 2-5)
7
Changing A Flat Tyre............................................................
Refer (P.g. 2-13)
8
Understanding The Warning Lamps................................................................
Refer (P.g. 4-5)
9
Understanding The Airbag Function..........................................................
Refer (P.g. 7-1)
10
Use Of Seat Belts And Child Restraint......................................
Refer (P.g. 6-6 & 6-12)
11
Co driver lift and slide seat.........................................................
Refer (P.g. 6-4)
12
Convertible Soft Top.....................................................
Refer (P.g. 9-23)
13
If Your Vehicle Is Submerged..................................................................................
Refer (P.g. 14-22)
14
Driving Through Water.........................................
Refer (P.g. 14-23)
15
OFF Road Driving Precautions Precautions.....................................
Refer (P.g. 14-22)
16
Opening And Closing The Hood.....................................
Refer (P.g. 17-4)
17
Location Of Battery And Its Maintenance.....................................
Refer (P.g. 17-6 & 17-18)
*Warranty and Service Information Guide
Note: In view of our policy of continuously improving our products, we reserve the right to alter specifications, designs or features without prior notice and without liability. We recommend you to refer the Variant Matrix in the Brand official website or contact the nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer for the list of features applicable to your vehicle.
The vehicle's software and security measures are subject to ongoing development. Similar to computers and mobile device operating systems, the software and security features of the car might also receive irregular updates.
1 GENERAL AND SAFETY PRECAUTION
1.1 Servicing and Summary Data
We suggest that you record the vehicle servicing data in the Warranty and Service Information Guide for future references.
We recommend you always use Mahindra Genuine Parts when performing repairs on the vehicle.
For all issues concerning the vehicle and for any need of Genuine spare parts, contact the Mahindra Authorised Dealer
1.2 Safety Symbols
Carefully read, understand and follow the safety symbols/ instructions given in this manual.
Legend of the Symbols : To emphasis the information and procedures regarding safety, use, maintenance, etc.,
The following symbols are used throughout the manual:
DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury and/or property damage.
NOTICE indicates important information relevant to the vehicle, the vehicle's use or to sections of this manual to which particular attention must be paid for optimum use of the vehicle.
If you see this symbol, it indicates “no,” “ do not,” “do not do this,” or “never”.
Graphic
1.3 General Safety Information and Instructions
1. First-aid kit is placed in the glove box of the vehicle. Ensure it is not taken out of the vehicle at any point of time.
2. Please note that throughout this manual, reference is made that “an accident” could occur. An accident could cause you or a bystander to sustain personal injury, or result in property damage.
3. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays or wear in the seat belt webbing, or loose buckles, retractors, anchors or other loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
4. The lifespan of Mahindra products depends on many factors. Improper use, abuse or harsh use in general may compromise the integrity of the vehicle and significantly reduce its lifespan. The vehicle is also subject to wear over a period of time. Please have your vehicle regularly inspected by a Mahindra Authorised Dealer or a qualified Technician . If the inspection reveals any damage or excessive wear, immediately replace, or have the component serviced.
5. The vehicle identification plates are the only legal identification reference; hence it is necessary to keep them in good condition. Never modify data on the plates or remove them. It is illegal to remove or alter the numbers in the VIN plate.
6. Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. When the vehicle is fully loaded, drive at a slow speed, especially when turning. Note that the center of gravity of the vehicle changes when the vehicle is fully loaded, and also if luggage is mounted on the roof carrier.
1.4 To Users of a Mahindra Vehicle
When first driving the vehicle after long periods of non-usage, you may experience a temporary drive disturbance. This is a characteristic of the tyres and should be no reason for concern. The condition should correct itself within 5-15 kilometers. of driving. If the disturbance persists, have the vehicle checked by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
Driving and Drugs/Medication : Your driving ability can be seriously impaired through the use of prescription or non-prescription drugs or medication (even cough syrup). If you are taking any sort of drug or medication, be sure that it will not affect your driving ability.
Mobile Phones Warning : Use of electronic devices such as mobile phones, handheld devices, computers, portable radios or other by the driver while driving is dangerous. In exceptional condition, if use of a mobile phone is necessary despite this warning, use a handsfree system to ensure that the hands are free to drive the vehicle. Even handsfree do not ensure distraction free drive. Please comply with the legal regulations in your country, concerning the use of communication equipment in vehicles .
Driving Long Distances
When driving long distances, follow these tips to have a safe journey:
•  Take breaks at regular intervals
•  Lack of sleep or fatigue will impact your ability to drive safely
•  Exercise your eyes by shifting the focus of your eyes to different parts of the road
•  Use stimulating beverages such as coffee or tea
•  Relax and stay calm
Running-in: Driving smoothly during first 1,000 kilometers. will help to prevent abnormal and premature system wear. Proper running-in will improve the life of drivetrain and vehicle components.
A new engine may consume more oil during the first 1,000 kilometers. of running. This should be considered as a normal part of break-in and not interpreted as any problem with the engine.
Mahindra Genuine Parts: Mahindra uses high quality parts for building the vehicles. In the event that any parts need replacement, we recommend that you use only Mahindra genuine parts.
Non-Mahindra parts may harm vehicle performance and will not be covered by your Mahindra warranty.
The warranty does not cover problems caused by using non genuine parts
Mahindra Genuine Accessories
A wide selection of quality accessories are available through your Mahindra Authorised Dealer. These accessories have been specifically engineered to allow you to personalize your vehicle to suit your requirements and complement its style and aerodynamic appearance.
Each accessory is made from high quality materials and meets Mahindra's rigid engineering and safety specifications. Every Mahindra accessory installed according to the Mahindra installation provisions comes with the respective accessory warranty.
Consult your Mahindra Authorised Dealer for detailed information about accessories available for your specific model variant.
For maximum vehicle performance and safety considerations, always keep the following information in mind:
•  The company shall not be liable / responsible for any damages / injuries, including consequential damages / injuries, resulting due to fitment of unauthorised aftermarket accessories and / or tapping / cutting wires in the wiring harness When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front and rear axle. Consult Mahindra Authorised Dealer for specific weight information
•  Bull bars and nudge guards are not recommended
•  Accessories causing any change in vehicle specifications like wheel rims, bull bars, etc., may affect the performance of safety systems
•  Mobile communication systems such as two-way radios, telephones and theft alarms that are equipped with radio transmitters and installed in your vehicle should comply with the local regulations and should be installed only by your Mahindra Authorised Dealer and can potentially affect the vehicle performance.
Vehicle Safety
When leaving your vehicle unoccupied:
•  Always remove the ignition key when you park the vehicle
•  In case of PKE, please lock and take the key fob with you
•  Close all the windows completely and lock all the doors
•  Do not leave any valuables in your vehicle. If you must leave something in your vehicle, hide them and securely lock all the doors
When Sleeping in Your Vehicle
1. Do not sleep in a parked car with closed windows. In particular, if you stay or sleep in the car with the engine running and the air conditioner or heater turned on, you can suffocate to death
2. Sleeping in a closed space with the engine running puts you at high risk of suffocation from the exhausts
3. While sleeping, you may accidentally touch the gear shift lever or accelerator and thereby cause an accident
4. While sleeping in the car with the engine running, you may accidentally step on the accelerator, thereby overheating the engine and exhaust pipe and causing a fire
Hazardous Materials: Do not store any flammable items or disposable lighters in the console box or other spaces. In hot weather, they can explode and cause a fire.
Fire Extinguisher: For safety, we strongly recommend that you have fire extinguisher in your vehicle. Keep it ready for use at any time. Be familiar with how to use it
When Passing the Intersection or Railway Crossing
When passing the intersection or railway crossing, stop the vehicle to check the safety and drive through as fast as you can while using low speed gear and without shifting the gear. If the engine is turned off in the middle of the intersection or railway crossing, get someone to help you and move the car to a safe place quickly.
Do not Switch off the Engine While Driving
Do not switch off the engine while driving. Otherwise, it makes the steering wheel heavier, influence the brake performance and consequently dangerous
System Safety Mode : The protective measures including illumination of engine warning lamp and reduced engine power are taken (engine turned off in extreme case) when there is a critical fault in the system or a malfunction in the major electrical or fuel system. This indicates the system entering the safety mode to protect the vehicle’s drive system.
•  If the safety mode is activated, pull over and stop the vehicle to a safe location immediately and contact your Mahindra dealer. Then drive slowly or have the vehicle towed to a Mahindra Authorised Dealer according to the dealer’s instruction and have your vehicle checked by a Technician
•  If you continue to drive in this state, normal driving is not maintained due to the fixed engine rpm and engine can stop. But even more importantly, continued driving with this state may damage the drive system
Do Not Modify This Vehicle: If unauthorised modifications are made on the vehicle, the company is not liable for repairing the modified parts even during the term of warranty. Other part problems caused by modification are also not covered.
•  The vehicle you bought is equipped with a large number of precision parts that have passed through countless experiments and tests.
•  These parts are deeply and systematically interwoven. Therefore, if any part is modified or altered without authorization, may under perform or cause critical damage to the vehicle and human life
Protecting Our Environment: As a responsible citizens, all of us have an important role to play in protecting our environment. Judicious vehicle usage and ensuring hazardous waste disposal (including cleaning and lubrication fluids) are important steps towards this initiative.
Body Repairs: If your vehicle is in a collision, contact Mahindra Authorised Dealer to ensure that it is repaired with Mahindra Genuine Parts. Mahindra has collision repair centers that meet strict requirements for training, equipment, quality, and customer satisfaction. Some repair shops and insurance companies might suggest using non-original equipment to save money. However, these parts do not meet Mahindra’s high standards for quality, fit and corrosion resistance. In addition, non-genuine parts or equipment might lead to damages or failures of the vehicle’s systems.
End of Line Disposal
Composition: Vehicle is made from steel, Aluminum, Lead, Copper, Wood, other plastics & miscellaneous parts. These materials are reusable by recycling them through a proper procedure. Some are hazardous to environment and living beings to be disposed as per local pollution board regulations.
Disposal: As batteries are made of lead, lithium & Iron phosphate with solvents as electrolyte which are harmful. They can impact on environment and are to be disposed as per local pollution board regulations. Certain components of this vehicle such as seat belt pre-tensioner, airbag and battery may contain hazardous material. Special handling may be required for service or vehicle end-of-life disposal.
Similarly ABS & other plastic panels, materials used are to be disposed to accredited agencies for recycling.
Most of other materials are reusable, hence components are to be segregated as per their composition as hazardous and non-hazardous, disposed to accredited recycling agencies. Hence it is advised to contact Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further information
End of life advisable for disposable of product.
For more details:
https: //www.mahindra.com/sustainability
https: //youtu.be/Q5CMl3VcuNU
1.5 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Graphic
Graphic
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) plate is located on the below the driver seat. Open the velcro and will find the VIN number.
1.6 Engine Number
Engine number sticker available on vacuum pump cover near Turbo charger. Engraving Engine number location is available on engine Block crankcase near starter motor.
Graphic
1.7 Front Overview
Graphic
A
Head Lamp High / Low Beam
B
Front Camera*
C
Front Windshield Wiper
D
Sunroof* / Skyroof*
E
Outside Rear View Mirror
F
Rear Door Handle
G
Fuel Tank lid
H
Foot Step*
I
Antenna
J
Side Repeater
K
Hood Latch
L
Turn Indicator
M
Park Sensors*
N
Fog / Cornering Lamp*
O
Front Tow Hook
P
Day Time Running Lamp (DRL)*/Parking Lamp
* - If equipped
1.8 Rear Overview
Graphic
A
Turn Signal Lamp
B
Rear Flip up Window
C
High Mounted Stop Lamp
D
Rear Wiper*
E
Rear Wiper Washer
F
Rear Stop Lamp
G
Reverse Lamp
H
Spare wheel
I
Park Assist Sensors
J
Rear View Camera*
K
Rear Swing Gate key hole
L
Rear Reflector
M
Rear Swing Gate Handle
N
Tail Lamp
* - If equipped
1.9 Instrument Panel Overview
Instrument Panel Overview
Graphic
A
IP Branding Plate
B
Grab Handle
C
Passenger Airbag
D
HVAC Controls
E
Infotainment Screen*
F
Steering controls Switches
G
Horn Pad/Driver Airbag
H
Steering wheel
I
Instrument Cluster
J
Driverside Switch Bank
K
USB Port
L
Wireless Charger*
M
Can/Bottle holder
N
Driver Side Arm Rest
O
Rear Ticket Holder
P
2nd Row USB Port
Q
Parking Brake
R
4WD/2WD Shift Lever
S
Manual Transmission* / Automatic Transmission Gear Lever*
T
Center Fascia Switch Bank
U
Glove Box
* – If equipped
1.10 ADRENOX Connect (If equipped)
Graphic
The Adrenox connect mobile app provides information in your mobile phone about location & status of the vehicle and allows to control certain vehicle features in a secured way for both Android and iOS platform.
Kindly use the ADRENOX connect mobile app for connected car related features.
1.10.1 KYC ( Know Your Customer) Registration
To activate connected car features including access to Adrenox mobile App, KYC process must be completed successfully.
•  Customer must produce valid mobile number, communication address & email ID for KYC registration. for registration purpose.
•  Preferred mobile number entered during the KYC process will be the login for Adrenox mobile app.
•  After successful KYC registration, customer must download the “ADRENOX connect” mobile application from Google Play store or iOS app store.
1.10.2 Login & Registration
Follow the below steps for Login and Registration:
Graphic
•  You can select sign up option from login page which redirects to sign up page
•  Then enter registered Mobile number given in KYC form for connected services and click on Generate OTP
•  OTP with a validity will be sent to the same mobile number
•  If OTP is not received, you can request the OTP again by clicking on "Resend OTP"
•  After entering valid OTP, click on “Verify My account”
•  On successful verification you will be notified with a message " Account Verified"
•  You will be directed to "Terms and Condition" with "I Agree" option on successful authentication
1.10.3 Forgot/Change Password and Change Pin
This Feature allows the existing user to change Password and change PIN.
In case user forgets the Password and PIN below flow helps to create PIN and password.
Forgot your password
In case you forget your password:
•  Tap on the Forgot Password? link from login page
•  In forgot password page, enter the registered mobile number for connected services and click on Generate OTP
•  Enter the OTP and click on Next button
•  Enter New Password and Confirm Password and tap on Save button
Change your password
To Change your password on app if you are already logged in:
•  Tap on the top Left corner from home screen
•  Click on My Account and select Change Password
•  Page will open with Old password, New password and Confirm password fields
•  Fill all the required field and tap on save button
1.10.4 ADRENOX connect Features
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
Alerts
Over Speed Alert
When your car exceeds the set speed limit. This speed limit value can be set under alert configuration in mobile application
High Engine Temperature Alert
Alerts when Engine temperature beyond the predefined limit
Tyre Pressure Alert
Alerts on excessive/very low and high tyre pressure and navigate to nearby petrol station
Lamp Status Alert
Alerts when vehicle park lamp left in ON condition while locking the vehicle
Notifies when the vehicle park lamp is left in ON condition and helps to turn OFF remotely via mobile application
Vehicle Start/Stop Alert
Notifies when normal vehicle start /stop event is detected
Door Open Alert
Notifies when any of the doors open while vehicle is moving and also when you trigger for door lock and the door remains open unintentionally
Geo-Fence Alert
Alerts when your vehicle moves out of a set boundary area
Helps you to create virtual boundary for any region and will be notified whenever your vehicle moves in or out of that boundary
Unauthorized vehicle entry Alert
Alerts the user when any unauthorized entry in the vehicle is detected
Low Fuel Alert
Identifies low fuel level and notifies in your mobile application. Helps you to nearby fuel station
Route Deviation Alert​
Alerts the user when the vehicle deviates from the pre-defined path
Time Fencing Alert 
Notifies you when any movement of vehicle is detected during set time period
Seat Belt Alert
Notifies you whenever the driver/ co-driver is not wearing the seat belt during vehicle movement in mobile application
Insurance expiry​ Alert
Suggests in advance to renew the Insurance as expiry date of Insurance approaches
Notifies you in advance when the insurance is about to expire
PUC expiry​ Alert
Notifies you in advance when the PUC is about to expire
Engine Idle Alert​
Alerts when engine idling is detected for a set period of time. Time can be configured in mobile application
Personalised Safety Alert
Alerts the user via a personalised beloved ones voice prompt when the vehicle crosses the speed limit
PKE / RKE low battery alert
This feature alert’s the user when key battery is low
Low DEF alert
This feature alert’s the user when DEF level is low
DPF choke alert
This feature alert’s the user when Diesel Particulate filter is about to choke
Location Based Service
Live tracking
GPS based vehicle tracking system for tracking vehicle’s location anywhere and at any point of time
Helps to provide the real time vehicle location when vehicle is in movement
Helps in sharing the vehicle location for a set time to your family and friends
Save Route / Save Place
Provision to save a route /place
Find my car
Helps to identify the vehicle’s location and directs you to locate your vehicle
Share my car location
Share your car's location with friends and family
Push to car 
Allows the user to push routes/location from the mobile app to the vehicle
Ecosense​
Provides the details about the driving behavior for each trip
Trip History
Provides detailed information about the trips
Trip Replay
Provides glimpse of the trip in a form of a short video
Pit Stops​
Provides information and navigational access to nearby restaurant, ATM, Mahindra Dealership and so on
Trip tagging
Allows user to tag the trips as personal/official
Restroom suggestion
Allows user to search & navigate to nearby rest room facilities from Mobile app
Read Vehicle Status
Check door status
Allows the user to view the current status of the vehicle door
Check tyre pressure
Allows the user to view the current status of tyre pressure
Check lamp status
Allows the user to view the current status of the lamp
Check ODO
Allows the customer to check the odometer of the vehicle
My SUV info
Essential information about the vehicle like VIN, Variant and so on
Check AC Status
Allows the user to view the current status of the AC
Check Distance to empty
Helps to check distance to empty range i.e. the distance can be covered with the available fuel
Seat Belt Status
Helps the user to check the Driver/Co-Driver seat belt is buckled or not
Safety
E-Call​
In case of accident, Emergency call will be triggered from vehicle, SMS will be sent to M4U & Emergency contacts along with the current vehicle location.
SOS Button
In case of SOS is initiated, SOS call will be triggered from vehicle, SMS will be sent to M4U & Emergency contacts along with the current vehicle location
Road Side Assistance
Allows the user to reach out for help in case of vehicle breakdown
Remote Function
Remote Skyroof control
Allows the user to remotely control Skyroof using mobile app
Remote Start/ Stop
Allows the user to remotely start or stop the vehicle using mobile app
Remote Climate control
Allows the user to remotely configure the in- vehicle temperature during remote start using mobile app
Remote window Up/Down
Allows the user to remotely control the Driver window (with anti-pinch) using mobile app
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Provide access to the vehicle by remotely locking and unlocking the doors when vehicle is stationary
Remote Lamp On/Off​
Allows the user to remotely turn on or off the lamps using mobile app
Locate my SUV
Allows the user to remotely locate the vehicle by turning on the horn and lights
Partner Features
Horoscope
Allows the user to view daily fortune as per his/her zodiac sign.
Just dial ​
Allows the user to search for various services using the Just Dial app in the infotainment
India Today
Allows the user to browse through news using India Today app in the infotainment
Weather Update
Allows the user to view weather information using the Accuweather app in the infotainment
Travel Explorer
Allows the user to search for amusement places and more using the Travel Advisor app in the infotainment
Ticker Tape
Allows the user to view market shares & trends using Ticker tape app on infotainment
Others
E-Manual
E-Manual section in mobile apps provides videos with instructions, guidance, or information about AdrenoX features.
In-Home Alexa
Allows the user to check the vehicle status and perform remote function using Alexa (voice commands)
Valet Mode
Allows the user to set the vehicle in a predefined state when giving the vehicle for valet parking. The default PIN to access the Valet mode will be 1234
Contact us
Any Query / Enquiry about the product, Get info on Mahindra. Send an Inquiry on any car model. Dealers will get back to the customer on details
Fuel Diary​
Maintains a systematic log of the all the fuel filling events and provides a clear representation of the fuel filled and the amount spent
mGreetings
Greetings to the user on special occasions
Do-Not Disturb ​
Avoids distraction while driving by not pushing any AdrenoX Connect app notification when mobile is detected in the vehicle
Journey Planner​
Allows the user to plan a journey by providing some basic information
Request app Access​
Allows the user to share the vehicle access to two more users
My Documents​
Storage and retrieval of documents such as Driving license, Insurance, PUC etc
Profile Manager
Allows the user to connect the mobile app profiles with the vehicle profile thereby providing sync between both
To-do list
Allows the user to create time based/location- based events that remind the user at the specified time
Smart Wearables
Allows the user to perform all the read and remote functions through the smart watch (applicable for both Android and iOS)
Pick up Reminder
Allows the user to create an event that reminds the user at the specified time
Service Booking
Allows the user to schedule a service by directing to the M4U app
Driver on call
Allows users to search for nearby drivers availability for hire through Mobile app
Owners Manual
Allows users to view User manual document on infotainment
M-Lens
Allows users to scan the tells tales from mobile camera & provides detailed information on the tell-tale function on Mobile app
Toll Dairy
This Feature helps to check the toll amount for the selected route & toll amount can be recharged via Adrenox App as well. Feature also provides you alert whenever your toll balances goes low.
Personalized Greetings
Personalized welcome message, which will be configurable by the user & he/she will be welcomed with the audio uploaded by them (Ex: Kids voice, Favorite music, Favorite hero dialogues)
Subscription Manager
Allows user to view details of AdrenoX service subscription & enables for renewal of Subscription on Mobile app
Software Update
Allows user to download & install latest software updates provided by OEM
Calendar
Allows user to sync calendar from mobile & view the important events on infotainment system.
Manufacturer update
Allows users to receive announcements made by OEM on Offers, Product launch, Maintenance etc., on mobile app
Social connect
Allows users to share personal experience on vehicle such as Trips, Saved favorite locations on social media platforms such as Whatsapp, twitter etc., through mobile app
Mahindra Download Manager
Allows users to update partner apps to latest version for seamless experience
In Car Voice Assist
Allows user to pair & access Alexa voice assistant inside vehicle. Explore Alexa’s services such as Trending events, News, Weather, Navigation, music etc.,
In-home Alexa
Allows the user to check the vehicle status and perform remote function using Alexa (voice commands)
Eco Sense Leader Board
Based on Eco score, The user’s driving pattern will be ranked for Country, state & district wise
2 SEATS AND SEAT BELTS
2.1 Driver seat
2.1.1 Sitting in the Correct Position
Graphic
Follow the tips below for a comfortable and safe journey;
•  Sit in an upright position with the base of your spine pressed against the seat back
•  Adjust the head restraint as close as possible to the above specified position, with the top of the head restraint even with the top of your head
•  Maintain sufficient distance between yourself and the steering wheel. Maintain at least a ten inch (10") distance from the centre of the steering wheel to your chest
•  The top curve of the steering wheel should align with your chin for ideal road visibility
•  Adjust your seat and seat back angle such that your wrists rest on top of the steering wheel freely
•  Ensure your legs are in a bent position while fully depressing the clutch pedal
The seat should be adjusted while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel and your view of the instrument panel controls.
Never adjust the driver's seat while the vehicle is in motion. The seat may unexpectedly move and cause the driver to unintentionally operate the accelerator or brake, or turn the steering wheel, causing loss of control of the vehicle, an accident or serious personal injury. Adjust the driver's seat only when the vehicle is not in motion.
Never put objects under the seats. They may interfere with the seat-lock mechanism or unexpectedly activate the seat position adjusting lever, causing the seat to suddenly move, resulting in loss of control of the vehicle, an accident or serious personal injury.
While adjusting the seat, do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts. This may lead to injuries.
2.1.2 Front Seat
Front Seat Slide
Move the seat forward or backward by lifting the adjustment lever located under the seat front and release once the desired position is reached.
Graphic
While adjusting the seat, make sure the latch engages fully and the seat is locked firmly in the desired position. An unlocked seat may move in a sudden stop or collision, causing injury to the person in that seat. Push and pull on the seat to be sure it is locked.
Front Seat Recline
To adjust the seat back, lift the recline lever located on the outboard side of the seat, lean back and release the lever at the desired position. To return the seat back, lift the lever, lean forward, and release the lever.
Graphic
The seat belts provide maximum protection in a frontal or rear collision when the occupants are sitting up straight and well back in the seats. If you are reclined, the lap belt may slide past your hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or the shoulder strap may contact your neck.
When returning a extremely reclined seat back to its upright position, make sure you support the seat back while operating the lever.
Driver Seat Height Adjust
Lift/Push the seat height adjustment lever located on the outboard side of the driver seat to raise/lower the seat. Adjust the seat height such that you are able to depress the clutch pedal completely.
Graphic
It is recommended to adjust the seat height only when the vehicle is stationary.
Driver and Co-Driver Ventilated Seats (if equipped)
Seat Ventilation is a special feature with an additional air circulation of the driver and Co-driver seats.
It ventilates the seat temperature for comfortable driving.
Graphic
The active ventilation fans blows air to the occupant contact area with seat inserts through small vent holes on the surface of the seat cushions and seat backs.
You can use the seat ventilation whenever you feel excessive heat or sweating in contact surfaces between occupant and seat.
Seat ventilation will be working in vehicle cranking condition only.
•  The ventilated seat uses the interior air for ventilation. Make sure that it is used together with the air conditioner
•  The ventilated seat is not a cooling/heating seat which blows out cold air from it
•  Don’t put your hand in the bottom of the cushion when the ventilated seat is in operation. Otherwise, the running ventilation fan may cause you to be frightened or injured
•  If there is any problem with the seat ventilation system, Contact Mahindra Authorised service center for further assistance.
•  Do not place any sharp or heavy object on the passenger seat as this could damage the ventilation system by cracking the seat upholstery.
•  If any liquid spills, clean it up right away. Wait until the seat is dry before using the air ventilation feature. The performance of the seat ventilation system may be impacted by liquid contact.
•  Do not use the ventilated seat in the following situations:
–  The seat is not occupied.
–  There are objects on the seat, such as a child seat, newspapers, Plastic bags.
•  Never use a solvent to clean the seats, including petrol, paint thinner, benzene, alcohol or alcohol-based products.
•  In above condition, the ventilated seat will operate for a short period of time and will be turned off for better functionality of ventilation fan
•  If small vent holes on the surface of the seat cushions and seatbacks are clogged with dust and dirt, the air flow from the ventilated seat may weaken. In this case, clean the seat surface by the vacuum cleaner
Control Switch - Seat Ventilation:
The driver and co-driver Seat Ventilation switch is equipped in the center fascia switch panel.
Graphic
A
Co-Driver Ventilated Seat Control Switch
B
Driver Ventilated Seat Control Switch
User will be able to modify the airflow with three different level through by using seat ventilator switch. And Seat ventilation levels will be displayed in infotainment screen.
Graphic
For every short press on the seat ventilation switch, the levels shall be changed by one step to another step like OFF → Level 3 →Level 2 → Level 1 → OFF
Again, a short press on the same switch will enable the feature.
Control Switch – Power Seat (Driver Side only) (if equipped)
Graphic
The Power seat control switch is provided side of the driver seat in the valence cover.
It is advanced 6-way electrical adjustments for the driver seat. It is equipped with electrically-operated power slider, power recliner and power height adjustment mechanisms.
The graphics on the switches guide you to the function it has been assigned.
Graphic
•  Power seats will be operated even when the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” position. However, to prevent battery discharge, operate your seats when the engine is running
•  Do not use two or more seat adjustment buttons simultaneously. It can damage the motor. Be sure to operate the electric seat button one by one
•  Do not forcibly operate any power adjustment switch if the seat comes in contact with other object and cannot be adjusted anymore
•  If the power seats are not operational, the seats should be checked and fixed before any driving
2.2 Second Row Seats
The second row seat has a 60:40 split configuration a foldable armrest.
Graphic
Loading luggage on the seats is dangerous. The luggage can become a projectile that could hit and injure passengers in a sudden stop or collision. Luggage should always be kept on the floor.
To avoid serious injury, do not sit on or place objects on a folded seat back while the vehicle is moving.
Second Row Seat Folding
Graphic
To adjust the second row seat back, lift the recline lever located on the outboard side of the seat, lean back and release the lever at the desired position. To return the seat back, lift the lever, lean forward, and release the lever.
Second Row Seat Folding (For Luggage)
Graphic
The 2nd Row 60/40 P seat back can be folded to load cargo on top of it. Operate the lever on the side of the 60/40 P seat. This lever actuates the backrest fold mechanism. Release the lever once the backrest has folded completely.
Graphic
Graphic
To bring the seat back to upright position and push the seat back until it locks into the desired reclining position.
Second Row Armrest (If equipped)
Graphic
The Second Row 60P seat features armrest with cup holder.
Graphic
To open the armrest, simply pull on the tab given at the top of the armrest (as shown).
When armrest is not required, push back the armrest into the 60P backrest.
Rear Seatback Holding Latch
Graphic
Before returning the folded seat back to the normal position. Pull the rear seat belt out of the seat back so that the seat belt is not jammed with the holding latch.
•  Do not fold or unfold the rear seat when the vehicle is moving
•  Make sure that there is nobody on the folded seatback and in cargo area
•  If you put sharp or heavy objects on the seatback, there might be some damage to the seatbacks or even to the seats
•  Without completely lowering the second row head restraints or with excessively reclined front seat back, there may be some damage to the head restraints or the centre console if the second row seats are folded
•  Take care that there are no objects placed on the rear seat cushion before folding the rear seat back down as any sharp features in the object may damage the seat cover
•  All necessary driver’s seat adjustments should be made before any driving
•  Make sure that your seat is completely locked after adjusting
•  Any object that might damage the seat should not be placed on the seat
•  Removed or improperly adjusted head restraints can result in serious head and neck injuries in case of a collision. Make sure that the head restraints are in place and adjusted before driving
•  Do not recline the seat back more than needed for comfort while vehicle is in motion. The seat belt is the most effective when the passenger sits back and straight up in the seat. If the seat back is reclined too much, then the risks of sliding under the lap belt and getting injured are increased
•  Do not leave children unattended in parked vehicles. This can cause unexpected accident
•  You can be hurt by the edges of the mechanism of the seat when trying to get the small objects (cigarette lighters, coins, credit cards) under the seat or caught between the seat and the centre console. Wear protective gloves to prevent injury
•  Never try to adjust the seat while the vehicle is moving
•  Unexpected movement of the seat or seat back can cause loss of control
•  Take care not to bother the passenger behind you when adjusting the seat position
•  Sit upright in the centre of the seat and wear the seat belt properly
•  Do not place any objects in the path of seat back movement. Any obstruction in this path prevents the seat back from being locked, causing severe injuries or death during a collision
•  Always raise the seat back to the proper upright position before driving
•  Never drive the vehicle with the seat folded. In a collision, you will be seriously killed or injured as you lose the protection the seat belt can provide
•  To avoid unexpected accidents including severe injuries and death, sit in the position so that the distance between the steering wheel and your chest is at least 10 inches, as long as you are comfortable with driving
•  Do not place a cigarette lighter on the floor or between the seats. The gas in the lighter container under the seat is potentially flammable when it is released from the container when the seat is moved
•  Additional cushion between you and the seat cushion reduces the frictional force and could make you slide under the seat belt. This could result in serious injury or death
•  Do not insert your hands under the seat or in the path of the seat movement when adjusting the seat. Your hands or fingers could get trapped between the seat and the frame
•  Do not ride with the seat back reclined too much. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision, which could result in severe injury or death. Also, you cannot be protected by the seat belt and the belt can strangle you or even cut into your stomach. Therefore, sit up straight in your seat by keeping your seat back upright while driving
•  When returning the seat back to the upright position, hold the seat back with your one hand and pull the release lever with the other hand. The more the seat back is reclined, the greater the restoring force of the seat back is. If you do not hold the seat back while adjusting the seat back, you could be injured by the restoring force
2.3 Seat Belt
2.3.1 General Warnings and Instructions
At least once each month, inspect the seat belt webbing for any cuts, tears, or other signs of wear (such as fraying along the edges). Also inspect the anchors, retractors, and buckles to be sure they are tight and operational.
•  All occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belt no matter how short the trip in order to minimize the risk of severe injury in the event of a crash. In an accident, an un-belted passenger becomes a projectile, and can cause serious injury to himself or another passenger.
•  In a rollover crash, an un-belted person is significantly more likely prone to Injury than a person wearing a seat belt
•  In order to be properly buckled, you must always sit up straight and keep your feet on the floor in front of you. The lap part must be worn low and tight across your hips, just touching the top of your thighs. While fastening the seat belt, the shoulder strap of the seat belt must pass over your chest and top of your shoulder. It must never touch your neck, face, the side of your shoulder, arm, or pass under your arm. The belt must always be flat against your body and not twisted in any way. Nothing, such as an arm rest, a pocketbook, or any external objects should be between you and the seat belt. Improperly worn of a seat belt will reduce the protection in an accident.
•  Seat belts should be adjusted as tightly as possible, consistent with comfort to properly secure the wearer in the seat.
Graphic
Graphic
•  The seat belts provided for your vehicle are designed for adults must be properly used and maintained.
•  For usage of adult seat belt to secure children, refer to section of manual for child seat positions and use a child restraint systems
•  Passengers should not move out of or change seats while the vehicle is in motion. Passenger who does not wear the seat belts will be under a high risk of thrown against the vehicle inside hard parts, against other occupants or out of the vehicle during emergency stop or collision.
•  Do not use any accessories on seat belts or modify in any way the seat belt system. Devices claiming to improve occupant comfort or reposition the seat belt can reduce the protection provided by the seat belt and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash
•  An accident or emergency stop, can damage your seat belt system, even if the accident is “minor”. Please have your Mahindra Authorised Dealer inspect the seat belt system after an accident
•  Please be aware that any unsecured item in your vehicle, such as your pet, unsecured child restraint system, a laptop or mobile phones, can become a projectile in the event of an accident or sudden stop, causing injuries to occupants in the vehicle
Never use a damaged seat belt system. A damaged seat belt will not provide protection in an accident, resulting in serious injury.
•  Seat belt systems are prone to abuse. They are not indestructible. They must be handled with care to avoid damage
•  Keep the belts clean and dry. Belt retraction may become difficult if the belts and webbings are soiled. If they need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Never use bleach, dye, or abrasive cleaners. These chemicals will severely weaken the belts
•  Retractors in 3-point type seat belts retract the seat belts when not in use. The inertia lock and coil spring allow the belts to remain comfortable on users during normal driving. During accidents or abrupt stops, inertia locks restrict the sudden forward movement of the wearer
Seat Belts - Patients: Persons with serious medical conditions should also wear a seat belt. Consult your doctor for specific recommendations before travel.
Seat Belts - Pregnant Women: Pregnant women must also wear seat belts. Consult your doctor for specific recommendations.
Graphic
The lap belt should be worn snugly and as low as possible over the hips. The shoulder belt should be worn across your shoulder, but never across the stomach area. When worn properly, the seat belt will protect both the mother and the foetus in an accident or emergency stop.
A pregnant woman should never wear the seat belt across the stomach area. This could lead to serious injuries to the foetus and/or the pregnant mother.
Never wear twisted seat belts. Excessive forces will be transferred from the belt to the wearer, in a collision, resulting in serious personal injury.
Each seat belt is meant for use by one person only. Using one seat belt for more than one person at a time is dangerous. The seat belt will not be able to absorb the impact forces properly leading to serious injuries.
Never wear a belt around a child being carried on the occupant's lap. This could lead to serious injuries.
Seat Belt Usage is Necessary to:
•  Reduce the possibility of being out from your vehicle during an accident.
•  Reduce the possibility of injuries to upper body, lower body and legs during an accident
•  Hold the driver in a position which allows better control of the vehicle
Children who are too large for child restraint systems should always occupy the rear seat and use the vehicle seat belts. The lap portion should be snug fastened on the hips and as low as possible and the shoulder belt should be rout across the child's shoulder, not across neck or face. If you are unable to position the belt across the child's shoulder, the child should be seated in a booster seat. Frequently check the seat belt to be sure it remains snug and in position. A squirming child could cause the seat belt to come out of position.
2.3.2 Seat Belt Configuration
Graphic
To protect you and your passengers in the event of an accident, it is highly recommended that the seat belts should be used by all occupants inside of your vehicle.
Seat Belt Types with respect to Location
Seat Location
Seat Belt Type
Driver Seat
Seat belt with Retractor Pretensioner & load limiter (RPLL)
Co-Driver Seat
Seat belt with Retractor Pretensioner & load limiter (RPLL)
2nd Row LH (40P)
Seat belt with Emergency Lock Retractor (ELR) for outboard occupant
2nd Row RH (60P)
Seat belt with Emergency Lock Retractor (ELR) for outboard and center occupant
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR): The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) allows the driver seat belt to freely extend and retract with occupant movement, yet locks the belt during a sudden stop or upon impact.
Retractor Pretensioner & load limiter (RPLL): A pretensioner is designed to retract some of the webbing of a seat belt the instant a collision occurs, tightening the seat belt to restrain occupants quickly and reducing the amount they are thrown forward in a moderate or severe frontal crash.
Load limiters help protect occupants from seat belt-inflicted injury. In the event of a crash, the pretensioner restrains the occupant until certain amount of force is applied. At this point the load limiter releases the webbing gradually so as not to exert too much force on the chest of the occupant.
2.3.3 Seat Belt Pretensioner
Graphic
In the event of a crash being detected, the belt pretensioner locks the seat belt by drawing back the seat belts on the driver’s and passenger’s torso and pelvis to prevent the driver and passenger being thrown forward. The seat belt pretensioner combined with the seat belt and airbag further increases safety.
Its activation through Airbag ECU is signalled by pulling down of the metallic cable and removes slack in in seat belt.
To obtain the highest degree of protection from the action of the pretensioning device, wear the seat belt on shoulder keeping it firmly close to the chest and bottom part of the seat belt on pelvis.
In case of side impact collisions, front air bags are not inflated, but seat belt pretensioners located in the same position with impact direction will be deployed together with side air bag
Deployed seat belt pretensioners cannot be deployed again. Have the deployed seat belt pretensioners replaced by an Authorised dealer.
Graphic
Operation of pretensioner: When a severe frontal impact occurs, seat belt pretensioners pull back the seat belts immediately to restrain the occupants to their seats.
Graphic
Operation of load limiter: After frontal collision, the load limiter releases the seat belt to prevent the occupant from being injured due to belt force.
Fastening the seat belt: Even if seat belts are not worn, the air bag will deploy in case of impact, collision triggered. In addition, airbags can protect occupants when the occupants are wearing their seat belts. Airbags may cause injuries to occupants if they do not wear or inappropriately use their seat belts.
•  Before driving, all occupants should fasten their seat belts. If not, the occupants can seriously be injured in a collision or sudden manoeuvring of the vehicle
•  Sometimes you may have to apply strong force to pull the webbing out of the retract
•  Each seat belt should be used by only one occupant at a time
•  Seat belts and airbag’s can significantly minimise possible injury to occupants. But they cannot perfectly protect occupants from fatal collisions or injury
•  Modifications and improper maintenance for the safety systems could cause serious injury. The safety systems including seat belts should be checked and repaired by only a Mahindra Dealer or Mahindra Authorised Service centre
•  An infant or small child should always be restrained in an infant or child restraint
2.3.4 Fastening the Seat Belt
Graphic
Graphic
•  Adjust the seat as needed, sit up straight and well back in the seat.
•  To fasten your seat belt, pull the webbing out of the retractor and insert the metal tab into the buckle.
Graphic
•  An audible “click” would be heard when the tab locks into the buckle. Pull up on the shoulder strap to tighten the lap belt across your hips.
•  The seat belt retractor will pull in any slack in the shoulder strap. A slow and easy motion will allow the belt to extend and let you move your body around freely.
•  Periodically check the seat belt as you ride to be sure it remains snug and in position. If there is a sudden stop or impact, the belt will lock into position. It will also lock (restrict) if you try to lean forward too quickly.
If the driver or co-driver seat belt is not fastened when the ignition is switched ON, the seat belt warning lamp illuminates and chimes beat will turn till seat belt fastened. Refer “Warning Lamps” in the “Instrument Cluster Features” chapter for further details.
2.3.5 Seat Belt Release
Graphic
To release the belt, press the buckle release button and allow the belt to retract. If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it out and check for kinks or twists. Then make sure it remains untwisted as it retracts.
The word “CENTER” is marked on the seat belt buckle positioned on LH side for the rear center seat occupant to wear seat belt correctly. The buckles are designed so that an outboard seat belt tongue cannot be inserted into the wrong buckle.
To unfasten the seat belt, push the red colour button engraved with “PRESS” on the buckle and retract the seat belt slowly while holding the belt or/and the belt tongue. 
Never insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent from properly latching the tongue and may cause damage to the buckle mechanism, thereby making the seat belt ineffective in an accident, resulting in serious personal injury.
2.3.6 Seat Belt Height Adjuster
Graphic
You can adjust the height of the shoulder belt anchor for maximum comfort and safety of both front seats. If the height of the seat belt is too near your neck, you will not be getting the most effective protection.
The shoulder portion of the belt should be adjusted so that it lies across your chest and midway over your shoulder nearest to the door and not your neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster to an appropriate position while pressing the height adjuster button. Release the button to lock the anchor into position. Try sliding the height adjuster to make sure that it has locked into the position.
Adjust the shoulder belt height sitting well back in the seat. Do not adjust the seat belt height while vehicle is in motion.
Ensure that the seat belt is securely fastened over the center of your outer shoulder, Positioned it in such a way that belt is away from your face and neck while still staying attached to your shoulder. Improper seat belt adjustment may lessen the seat belt's effectiveness in an event of accident or collision.
2.3.7 Driver and Passenger Seat Belt Reminder Indication
Graphic
The driver and passenger seat belt reminder warning symbol lamp will blink in instrument cluster if driver or passenger doesn’t wear the seat belt and will be continuous until belt is buckled. Chime will be activated when vehicle travels more than 500 metres or attains 25 Kms/Hrs of speed while vehicle is in motion which will be ON for 95 seconds
2.3.8 Passenger Occupant Detection System (PODS) & Seat Belt Reminder Indication
Graphic
Graphic
PODS detects the presence of occupant in the front passenger and on all rear seating locations.
Graphic
If Occupant is present on front passenger and any of the rear passenger seats and not wearing the seat belt, Seat belt reminder warning symbol lamp will glow on the vehicle instrument cluster panel and will be continuous until the seat belt is buckled. It should be noted that the PODS require a minimum weight hence children may not be detected by PODS. Along with this warning symbol, a Chime in Cluster will be ON for 95 seconds for front seat belt reminder and 60 seconds for rear passenger seat belt reminder. Do keep in mind that after market seat covers also may deteriorate the occupant detection senor performance, don’t use the non recommended/non authorized seat covers.
Graphic
Graphic
Seat belt reminder warning lamp for passenger seat may glow in case of child is present in passenger seat.
Strong advice not to carry children in front seat without child restraint seat. Also do not use adult seat belt which is designed to harness person taller than 140cm Always ensure Passenger Airbag is turn OFF before you carry child on passenger seat. We strongly urge that children should be in middle row using the child seats with the ISO FIX
2.4 Child Restraint System (CRS) Fitment using the seat belt system
2.4.1 Child Restraint
When carrying infants or small children, an appropriate child restraint system should always be used. The child restraint system should be appropriate for your child’s weight and height and properly fit on the car’s seat. Accident statistics indicate that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) rather than in the front seat. If passenger seat to be use for child carrying then it is mandatory to OFF the Passenger Airbag by following the instructions and using options provided (refer the user manual)
If child presents on passenger seat also seat belt reminder warning symbol lamp will glow and it is strongly not recommended to carry children in front seat without child restraint seat and using the adult seat belt which is provided to use for persons taller than 140cm. Always ensure Passenger Airbag is turn OFF before you carry child on passenger seat.
2.4.2  Securing Methods of Child Restraint System
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by seat belts or the latch system (ISOFIX & Top tether seat - if equipped).
•  Infants and tiny children should always be restrained in an infant or child restraint system (CRS).
•  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat with front passenger airbag ON condition. A child in a rear-facing child restraint installed in the front seat can be seriously injured if the front passenger airbag deploys. Secure a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat (if equipped).
•  A front-facing child restraint should be secured in the rear seat whenever possible. If installed in the front passenger seat, adjust the seat as far back as it will go. When installing a child restraint system, follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer..
•  When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
•  In a collision an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby, can become a missile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap can become so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are..
•  Do not allow a child in the cargo areas while the vehicle is moving condition.
•  If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back
•  Please note that the three-point seat belt is designed for a person who is taller than 140 cm
2.4.3  Infant and Child Safety
Child Seat
Children that are too small to use the seat belts must be properly secured in a child restraint system (CRS).
•  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger seat with front passenger airbag, because of the danger that an inflating passenger airbag could impact the rear-facing child restraint and kill the child. Passenger Airbag turn OFF is mandatory to use passenger seat to carry child.
•  Use only the recommended and suitable child restraint systems. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use of the child restraint system in vehicle.
•  Do not carry your child on your lap while driving. You cannot resist against the impact pressure in an accident. The child could be crushed between you and the parts of vehicle
•  Remember that a child restraint seat left in a concealed vehicle can cause it to be very hot. Check the seating surface before putting your child in the child restraint
•  When your child restraint is not in use, remove it from the vehicle or keep it secured with a seat belt to prevent it from being thrown forward in case of a sudden stop or an accident
•  When installing a child restraint system, do not let the seat belts come across the child’s neck, follow the installation instructions
Table of vehicle handbook Information on Child Restraint Systems Installation Suitability for Various Seating Positions
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Mass Group
Front Passenger (with ON/OFF Switch)
Rear out board
Rear Center
Mounting method of Child seat in vehicle
With Passenger Airbag ON
With Passenger Airbag OFF
O ~ up to 10 kg (0 ~ 9 months)
 X
U
U
U
Rear facing seat using 3-point seat belt
O+ ~ up to 13 kg (0 ~ 2 years)
X
U
U
U
Rear facing seat using 3-point seat belt
I ~ 9 to 18 kg (9 months ~ 4 years)
X
U/UF
U
U
Rear facing/forward facing seat using 3-point seat belt
II ~ 15 to 25 kg (4 years ~ 6 years)
UF
UF
U
U
Forward facing seat/Booster seat using 3-point seat belt
III ~ 22 to 36 kg (6 years ~ 12 years)
UF
UF
U
U
Forward facing seat/Booster seat using 3-point seat belt
U: Suitable for “universal” category restraints approved for use in the mass group
UF: Suitable for forward-facing “universal” category restraints approved for use in the mass group.
L: Suitable for particular child restraints given on attached list. These restraints may be of the “semi-universal” categories
X: Seat position not suitable for children in the mass group.
It is strongly recommended to carry the children with Child Restraint System (CRS) at rear seats for good safety. Child sitting on the Passenger seat with Passenger airbag ON condition may cause serious injury or even death during collision due to airbag deployment forces. It is Must to Turn OFF the Passenger airbag before allowing to child to sit on the Passenger seat.
•  User must read and follow the instructions provided in manual for the Child Restraint System installations in vehicle using the Adult Seat belt system (or) using the ISOFIX & Top-tether feature
•  Failure to follow all the warnings and instructions could be a Serious risk to Child safety or even may lead to death, if an accident occurs.
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
•  Do not leave /allow children to stand in front of vehicle holding grab handle when the passenger airbag in ON condition.
•  If a child is seated in front seat it may cause serious injury or even death during accident when PAB deploys due to force
•  Never install a rearward facing child restraint system on front passenger seat when passenger airbag is ON condition while on ride.
•  Properly read and follow the instructions provided by the manufacture for installation of child restraint system.
•  Never hold a child in your lap or arms when the vehicle is moving condition, sudden braking or while collision child may thrown on away/trapped in vehicle, which could cause serious risk
•  Don’t modify the passenger seat or forcefully fit the child restraint system which is having ISOFIX fixing provision can damage the seat.
2.5 Child Restraint System (CRS) Installation Using ISOFIX & Top Tether
How to use the ISOFIX Lower Latch Anchor/ISOFIX Rods
1. ISOFIX Marking
2. Latch Anchor/ISOFIX rod
Graphic
•  The ISOFIX lower latch anchors (rods) are located in rear seats bottom position. Their locations (1) are shown in the illustration
•  Insert the child restraint attachments into the ISOFIX lower latch anchors (rods) until it clicks. Refer Child seat installation manual.
•  Do not use the seat belt for installing the ISOFIX child restraint
ISOFIX system is a standardized method of fitting child seats that eliminates the need to use the standard adult seatbelt to secure the seat in the vehicle. This enables a much more secure and positive location with the added benefit of easier and quicker installation.
•  When using the “ISOFIX” lower latch system (rod), all unused vehicle rear seat belt metal latch plates or tabs must be latched securely in their seat belt buckles and the seat belt webbing must be retracted behind the child restraint to prevent the child from reaching and taking hold of un-retracted seat belts. Unlatched metal latch plates or tabs may allow the child to reach the un-retracted seat belts which may result in strangulation and a serious injury or death to the child in the child restraint.
•  Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle
How to use the Top Tether/Rear Anchor
There are two top tether rods/rear anchors on the seat base back side of the rear row front facing seats.
Graphic
1. Remove the headrest from the rear row seat
2. Place the child restraint on the rear row seat
3. Connect the tether connector in child restraint to the top tether rod/ rear anchor. Securely tighten the child restraint by adjusting the webbing of the child restraint system (CRS) tether connector. Follow the clear instructions provide in the CRS manual
•  The top-tether/ rear anchor is the supplemental device to secure the child restraint system after engaging it by the ISOFIX rod/lower latches. Therefore, do not secure the child restraint system only with the seat back anchors. The increased load may cause the hooks or anchors to break, causing serious injury or death.
•  If a child restraint is not properly secured to the vehicle and a child is not properly restrained in the child restraint, the child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision. Always follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installation
•  Make sure the latches of the child restraint system are Firmly latched to the ISOFIX rod/lower latches. In this case, you can hear the “click” sound/ latch indications provided on seat.
•  Incorrectly installed child restraint system may cause an unexpected personal injury.
•  Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints
•  The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct top tether rod/rear anchor provided on seat back.
•  Don’t put the top tether strap over the head restraint of rear row seat which is not the correct methods and may cause risk.
•  Rock the child restraint to check if it is securely installed. Refer to instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child restraint.
•  Do not install the child restraint of such size if it hinders the operations of front seat which may cause problem to front occupants.
Table of Information on ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems Installation Suitability for Various ISOFIX Positions
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Table of Vehicle Handbook Information on ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems Installation Suitability for Various ISOFIX Positions
Mass group
Size Class
Fixture
Vehicle ISOFIX Seating Positions
Front Passenger
Rear out board
Rear Center
Carrycot (Newborn Baby)
F
ISO/L1
X
X
X
G
ISO/L2
X
X
X
Group 0: up to 10kg (~9 months)
E
ISO/R1
X
IL
X
Group 0+: up to 13kg (~0 – 2 years)
E
ISO/R1
X
IL
X
D
ISO/R2
X
IL
X
C
ISO/R3
X
IL
X
Group I 09 to 18kg (~9months – 4 years)
D
ISO/R2
X
IL
X
C
ISO/R3
X
IL
X
B
ISO/F2
X
IUF/IL
X
B1
ISO/F2X
X
IUF/IL
X
A
ISO/F3
X
IUF/IL
X
Group II (15 to 25kg)
   
X
IL
X
Group III (22 to 36kg)
   
X
IL
X
Key of letters be inserted in the above table
IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in this mass group.
IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIXchild restraint systems (CRS). These CRS may be are those of the ‘specific vehicle’, ‘restricted’ or ‘semi-universal’ categories.
IU: Suitable for using rearward facing child restraint system with ISOFIX & Top-tether (or) ISOFIX Base with Support leg.
X: Seat position not suitable ISOFIX child restraint systems in this mass group and/or this size class.
A - ISO/F3: Full-Height Forward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System (height 720mm)
B - ISO/F2: Reduced-Height Forward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System (height 650mm)
B1 - ISO/F2X: Reduced-Height Second Version Back Surface Shape Forward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System (height 650mm)
C - ISO/R3: Full-Size Rearward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System
D - ISO/R2: Reduced-Size Rearward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System
E - ISO/R1: Infant-Size Rearward-Facing Child Restraint System
F -ISO/L1: Left Lateral Facing position Child Restraint System (carry-cot)
G - ISO/L2: Right Lateral Facing position Child Restraint System (carry-cot)
Use the manufacturer recommended Child Restraint System (CRS) and locations to fit in vehicle. Please read the installation instructions provided in manual carefully before use.
Table of Vehicle Handbook Information on i-Size Child Restraint Systems for Installation in Various seating Positions
Restraint device figure
Front Passenger (With ON/OFF Switch)
Rear out board
Rear Center
With Passenger Airbag ON
With Passenger Airbag OFF
i-Size Child Restraint System
X
X
i-U
X
Key of letters be inserted in the above table
i-U: Suitable for i-Size “universal” Child Restraint System forward and rearward facing.
i-UF: Suitable for forward-facing i-Size “universal” Child Restraint System only.
X: Seating position not suitable for i-Size “universal” Child Restraint systems.
Recommended Child Seat to Use in Vehicle: Mahindra & Mahindra recommends Britax Romer DUALFIX / PRO M i-Size child seats for up to 18 Kg children. These seats are available at Mahindra dealerships.
Mass Group
CRS Manufacturer
Model
Type
Installation in Vehicle
Attachment Method
Group 0  : up to 10 kg (0 to  9 months)
Britax Römer
DUALFIX / PRO M
i-Size
Rearward facing
ISOFIX base frame with support leg
Group 0+ : up to 13 kg (0 to 2 years)
Britax Römer
DUALFIX / PRO M
i-Size
Rearward facing
ISOFIX base frame with support leg
Group I : 9 to 18 kg (9 months  to  4 years)
Britax Römer
DUALFIX / PRO M
i-Size
Rearward facing
ISOFIX base frame with support leg
2.6 Warning for Child Restraint
•  Use only the approved Child Restraint System (CRS) for better safety of your child.
•  Mahindra is not responsible for the personal injury and property damage due to the defect of child restraint system.
•  Use the proper type of child restraint system suitable for the weight and size for your baby.
•  Use the child restraint system at recommended seating location only and follow the instructions.
•  Child restraint has 5 categories based on the weight as below:
1
GROUP 0 : 0 ~ 10KG
4
GROUP II : 15 ~ 25KG
2
GROUP 0+ : 0 ~ 13KG
5
GROUP III : 22 ~ 36KG
3
GROUP I : 9 ~ 18KG
   
•  Group 0 & 0+ : Rear-facing child restraint fitted on the rear seat (use of ISOFIX with Base & Support Leg is recommended).
•  Group I: Forward-facing child restraint fitted on the rear seat (use of ISOFIX & Top Tether is recommended).
•  Group II & III: Booster seat fitted on the rear seat with seat belt fastened. Always follow the installation procedure and use instructions provided by the manufacturer of the booster seat.
2.7 Cautions for ISOFIX Seat usage
•  The anchor provided on rear seat base back is the supplemental device to secure the child restraint system after engaging it by the lower latches. Therefore, do not secure the child restraint system only with the seatback anchors. The increased load may cause the hooks or anchors to break, causing serious injury or death.
•  If a child restraint is not properly secured to the vehicle and a child is not properly restrained in the child restraint, the child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision. Always follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installation.
•  Make sure the latches of the child restraint system are latched to the lower latches. In this case, you can hear the “click” sound and color indications.
•  The child restraint seat strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct seatback anchor provided on the rear seat base back side behind the seat carpet. Follow the instructions provided on the seat back for the details of anchor location.
•  Make sure that the child restraint system is firmly secured by rocking it in different directions.
•  Incorrectly installed child restraint system may cause an unexpected personal injury.
2.8 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
This vehicle is equipped with airbags, Seat belt pretensioners and airbag ECU. The airbags are Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) and are designed to provide further protection to the vehicle occupants in addition to the primary protection provided by the seat belts and seat belt pre-tensioners.
The primary components of the system are the sensors which measure the crash severity. In the event of a significant frontal impact, the SRS airbags inflate to work in conjunction with the seat belts and help reduce injuries mainly to the driver's and front passenger's head/chest.
Seat belts are the primary restraint system in the vehicle. An airbag provides supplemental protection in addition to the seat belts.
All occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belts to minimise the risk of severe injury in the event of a crash.
Airbags are more effective in reducing injuries when the seat belts are worn.
2.8.1 Airbags
Your vehicle is equipped with the following airbags:
Graphic
A:Driver Airbag
B: Front Passenger Airbag
C: Side impact Airbag (If equipped)
D: Two curtain airbags (if equipped)
Graphic
Driver’s Airbag : A frontal airbag for the driver in Steering wheel hub
Graphic
Passenger’s Airbag : A frontal airbag for the front passenger in the passenger side instrument panel
An airbag is not designed to deploy in every type of crash. Depending on the type of accident or impact, the front airbags independently deploy thereby protecting the occupants. It is not necessary that ALL the airbags deploy during an accident.
To minimise the risk of severe injury in the event of a crash, every passenger must always wear their seat belt (see the chapter on Seat Belts in this manual). The airbags inflate very quickly with great force. Do not position any part of your body too close to airbag, you or especially children could be seriously injured/killed by a deploying airbag.
2.8.2 Driver and Front Passenger Airbag
Your vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (Airbag) and lap/shoulder belts at both the driver and front passenger seating positions. The indications of the system's presence are the letters “AIRBAG” embossed on the airbag pad cover in the steering wheel and the passenger's side front panel pad above the glove box.
The SRS is designed to deploy the front airbag only when an impact is sufficiently severe and when the impact angle is less than ± 30° from the forward longitudinal axis of the vehicle.
Driver Airbag
Front Passenger Airbag
Graphic
Graphic
Front airbag are not intended to deploy in side-impact, rear impact or rollover crashes. In addition, front airbag will not deploy in frontal crashes which are below the prescribed deployment threshold where risk of serious injuries is low.
Do not place any objects over the airbag or between the airbag and yourself.
2.8.3 Side Impact Airbag (If equipped)
Graphic
Your vehicle is equipped with side impact airbag in both the front seats. The purpose of the airbag is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection during side impacts or collisions.
Graphic
Graphic
The side impact airbags are designed to deploy only during certain side-impact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and point of impact. To minimise the risk of severe injury in the event of a crash, every passenger must always wear their seat belt (see the chapter on Seat Belts in this manual). The airbags inflate very quickly with great force. Do not position any part of your body too close to airbag, you or especially children could be seriously injured/killed by a deploying airbag.
•  In the case of a side collision, the curtain airbag may be deployed together with the relevant side airbag on the side the collision occurs
•  The side impact airbag is supplementary to the seat belt systems and is not a substitute for them. Therefore, your seat belts must be worn at all times while the vehicle is in motion. The airbags deploy only in certain side impact conditions severe enough to cause significant injury to the vehicle occupants
•  For best protection from the side impact airbag system and to avoid being injured by the deploying side impact airbag, all seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened. The driver's hands should be placed on the steering wheel at the 9:00 and 3:00 positions. The passengers arms and hands should be placed on their laps
•  Do not use any accessory seat covers. Use of seat covers could reduce or prevent the effectiveness of the system
•  Do not install any accessories on the side or near the side impact airbag
•  Do not place any objects over the airbag or between the air bag and yourself
•  Do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the door and the seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the supplementary side impact airbag inflates
Do not cover the front seats with anything. It hinders the air bag inflation
An airbag is not designed to deploy in every type of crash. Depending on the type of accident or impact, the front airbags independently deploy thereby protecting the occupants. It is not necessary that ALL the airbags deploy during an accident.
2.8.4 Side Curtain Airbag (If equipped)
The side curtain air bags are contained between right above the front and rear doors and the end of the vehicle roof.
The Side Curtain air bags are located along sides of the roof rails on the A & B pillars. They are designed to help protect the heads of the front seat occupants and the rear outboard seat occupants in certain side impact collisions. The curtain airbag are designed to deploy depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and impact. The curtain airbag are not designed to deploy in all side impact situations, collisions from the front or rear of the vehicle or in rollover situations.
Graphic
Graphic
•  In the case of a side collision, the side airbag may be deployed together with the relevant curtain airbag on the side the collision occurs
•  In order for side and curtain airbag to provide the best protection, both front seat occupants and outboard rear occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belts properly fastened. Importantly, children should sit in a proper child restraint system in the rear seat
•  When children are seated in the rear outboard seats, they must be seated in the proper child restraint system. Make sure to position the child restraint system as far away from the door side as possible, and secure the child restraint system in a locked position
•  Do not allow the passengers to lean their heads or bodies onto doors or place objects between the doors and passengers when they are seated on seats equipped with side and/or curtain airbag
2.8.5 Passenger Air Bag ON/OFF Instruction
For TFT Cluster Variants
The passenger airbag activation/deactivation option is available in instrument cluster menu.
Select Passenger Airbag Activation/Deactivation option in SETTINGS menu to activate/deactivate (not inflatable) of front passenger airbag as per below steps as per reference images
1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button.
Graphic
2. Press OK to enter setting. Press UP/DOWN to navigate to Passenger Air bag option.
Graphic
3. Press OK to select following screen will appear.
Graphic
4. Use Up/Down buttons to navigate to the option. Press OK to select Pop-up will appear to confirm selection.
Graphic
5. Press OK to select a option. Confirm your selection by selecting OK or Cancel.
For Digital Cluster Variants
The passenger air bag activation/deactivation option is available in instrument cluster menu.
Select Passenger Airbag Activation/Deactivation option in SETTINGS menu to activate/deactivate (not inflatable) the front passenger airbag as per below reference images
Graphic
1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button.
Graphic
2. Press OK to enter setting. Press Up/Down button to navigate to Passenger Airbag option
Graphic
3. Press OK to Select following screen will appear. Use Up/Down button to navigate to the option. Press OK to select, a pop-up will appear to confirm the selection.
Graphic
4. Press OK to select a option. Confirm your selection by selecting OK or Cancel.
If your select Airbag ON/OFF the following indicator will appear.
Passenger Airbag OFF Indicator
Graphic
This Warning indicator glows on center fascia switch on IP when turning the passenger airbag ON/OFF switch to “OFF” position to disable the passenger airbag.
Passenger Airbag ON Indicator
Graphic
This Warning indicator symbol glows on center fascia switch on IP when selecting the passenger airbag “ON” option to enable the passenger airbag.
2.8.6 Airbag System Malfunction Lamp
Graphic
Airbags do not require any regular maintenance of service. The airbag system malfunction lamp illuminates 6 seconds including precheck when the ignition is ON, and it turns OFF.
This lamp monitors airbag sensor assembly, airbag sensors, indicator lamp, seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies, inflators, interconnecting wiring and power sources.
If either of the following conditions occur, there is a malfunction of the airbags or seat belt pre-tensioner. Immediately contact your Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
•  The lamp does not glow when the ignition is switched ON or glows beyond six (6) secs. after switching the ignition ON
•  The lamp comes ON at any other time, even briefly
•  The lamp comes ON intermittently
Never make any modifications to your vehicle which could affect the performance of your airbag system. In particular, changes to the vehicle frame, bumpers, bull bar, front fenders, ride height, suspension, seat belts, interior trim, seats or steering wheel (especially covers, pads or other trim), could prevent proper deployment of the airbag. If you need to make any modifications to accommodate any disability you may have, please contact your Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
Never try to open or strike the airbag cover. If the airbag cover is cracked or damaged in any way, the airbag may not function as intended. Take the vehicle to an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
Even if the airbags do not deploy during an accident, take your vehicle to an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for a thorough inspection of the airbag and seat belt systems, no matter how minor the accident. The airbag system could have been damaged, and may not work as intended in the future, resulting in serious injury.
2.8.7 Airbag Inflation/Deployment
The airbag sensors constantly monitor the forward deceleration of the vehicle. If an impact results in a forward deceleration beyond the designed threshold level, the system triggers the airbag inflators. This initiates a chemical reaction which quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas.
Upon deployment, tear seams moulded directly into the pad covers separate under pressure from the expansion of the airbags. Further opening of the covers allows full inflation of the airbags. A fully inflated airbag, in combination with a properly worn seat belt, slows the driver's or the passenger's forward motion, reducing the risk of head and chest injury.
After complete inflation, the airbag immediately starts deflating, enabling the driver to maintain forward visibility and the ability to manoeuvre or operate other controls.
Deployment of the airbags happen in a fraction of a second, producing a loud noise releasing a ‘white smoke’ and residue along with a non-toxic gas. This does not indicate a fire. This smoke may remain inside the vehicle for some time, and may cause some minor irritation to the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to wash off any residue with soap and water as soon as possible to prevent any potential skin irritation. If you can safely exit the vehicle, you should do so immediately.
Airbag deployment may cause windshield to break.
•  Do not modify, remove, strike or open the seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies, airbag sensor or surrounding area or wiring. Failure to follow these instructions may prevent them from activating correctly, cause sudden operation of the system or disable the system, which could result in serious injury
•  Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hot for several minutes after deployment. The airbags inflate only once
•  Do not cover the steering wheel, instrument panel with any object (e.g. dash panel covers) which may prevent the airbags from inflating properly
•  The airbags inflate with considerable force. While the system is designed to reduce serious injuries, primarily to the head and chest, it may also cause other, less severe injuries to the face, chest, arms and hands. These are usually in the nature of minor burns or abrasions and swelling, but the force of a deploying airbag can also cause more serious injuries, especially if an occupant's hands, arms, chest or head is in close proximity to the airbag module at the time of deployment. Sit straight and well back into the seat. Move your seat as far back as practical to allow room for airbag inflation, while still allowing you to properly operate/drive the vehicle
Graphic
The front passenger should never sit on the edge of the seat, stand near the glove compartment, rest feet or other parts of the body on the dashboard when the vehicle is moving.
The driver or front passenger who is too close to the steering wheel or dashboard can be seriously injured during airbag deployment.
•  The driver must sit as far back as possible from the steering wheel while still maintaining control of the vehicle
•  The front passenger must sit as far back as possible from the dashboard
•  Sitting improperly or out of position can cause occupants to be shifted too close to a deploying airbag, strike the interior structure or be thrown from the vehicle resulting in serious injury
Graphic
Graphic
•  Always sit upright with the seat back in an upright position, on the seat cushion centre with your seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and your feet on the floor
•  All vehicle occupants must be properly restrained using the seat belts
•  All infants and children must be placed in the rear seat of the vehicle in a child restraint seat and be properly restrained by seat belts
•  Front airbags can injure occupants improperly positioned in the front seats
•  Even with airbags, improperly belted and un-belted occupants can be severely injured when the airbag inflates. Always follow the precautions about seat belts, airbags and occupant safety contained in this manual
•  Do not place items under the front seats. Placing items under the front seats could interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing components and wiring harnesses
2.8.8 Child Restraint and Airbag
Graphic
Graphic
Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an airbag in front of it
In addition, do not place front-facing child restraints in the front passenger’s seat either. If the front passenger airbag inflates, it could cause serious or fatal injuries to the child.
This is indicated also on stickers that are located at the following position.
•  On the front passenger’s sun visor
Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rear-facing child restraint on a seat protected by an airbag in front of it!
Never put a child restraint in the front passenger’s seat. If the front passenger airbag inflates, it can cause serious or fatal injuries.
Never hold an infant or child on your lap. The infant or child could be seriously injured in the event of a crash. All infants and children should be properly restrained in appropriate child safety seats or seat belts in the rear seat.
Instal the child restraint system on the rear outboard seats, and securely lock the child restraint system in position with the help of ISOFIX.
Always Buckle Children (ABC) in the back seat. It is the safest place for children of any age to ride.
2.8.9 Airbag Deployment
Graphic
The images shown in this section are for illustrative purpose only. They may not look like your model/variant or vehicle.
Front Airbag: Front airbag are designed to inflate in a frontal collision depending on the intensity, speed or angles of impact of the front collision.
2.8.10 Airbag Non-deployment
Impacts below a pre-determined threshold level may not cause the airbag to deploy in the following cases:
Collision with Utility Poles or Trees -
Graphic
Airbags may not inflate if the vehicle collides with objects such as utility poles or trees, where the point of impact is concentrated to one area and the full force of the impact is not delivered to the sensors.
In case of less severe frontal accidents, seatbelts alone are effective to reduce the severity of injury to occupants, seatbelt pretensioners may trigger to further reduce the severity of injury in such accidents and airbags are may not intended to deploy
Under-ride Situations -
Graphic
Running under a truck may not provide the decelerations necessary for airbag deployment. Airbags will not inflate in this “under-ride” situation where deceleration forces that are detected by sensors are significantly low.
Rear-end Collisions -
Graphic
Frontal airbags are not designed to inflate in rear collisions, where occupants are moved backward away from the airbags by the force of the impact. In this case, inflated airbags would not be able to provide any additional benefit.
Frontal Impact -
Graphic
Frontal impact beyond 30º range from head-on to the vehicle.
Potholes or Stepped Surfaces -
Graphic
Driving into a big pothole, stepped surface or hitting the far side of a hole/incline will not inflate the airbag.
Rollover -
Graphic
Airbags will not inflate in rollover accidents where airbag deployment would not provide protection to the occupants.
Frontal Side Swipe Impact -
Graphic
Frontal offset impact to the vehicle may not provide the deceleration force necessary for airbag deployment. In an angled collision, the force of impact may direct the occupants in a direction where the airbags would not be able to provide any additional benefit, and thus the sensors may not deploy any airbags.
Side airbags and side curtain airbags may inflate in a strong impact.
Side airbags and side curtain airbags may inflate even in a frontal collision, if there is a strong impact to the lateral direction.
Graphic
A frontal collision occurs when the front ends of two vehicles collide
Graphic
When a vehicle hits a curb or bump
Graphic
When a vehicle falls into a deep hole or ditch
Graphic
When a vehicle experiences a hard landing or fall
Side airbags and side curtain airbags may not inflate
Graphic
In the event of a side impact to the vehicle body, excluding the passenger compartment, several areas of the vehicle are typically affected.
Graphic
Graphic
When a vehicle is impacted from the side at an oblique angle
Graphic
When a vehicle is impacted from the side by a high-hood vehicle
Graphic
When a vehicle is impacted from the side by a motorcycle or bicycle
2.8.11 Airbag Service
Airbag Replacement: Self-servicing or tampering with the airbag system is dangerous. An airbag could accidentally deploy causing serious injuries, or will not deploy when there is a need. Always take your vehicle to an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for inspection and repairs.
Removing SRS Related Parts: We do not recommend removing the instrument panel, steering wheel, seats or airbag related parts or sensors by any individual or garages which are not recommended. Airbags could accidentally activate and cause serious injuries, or they may not deploy when there is a need. Visit an Mahindra Authorised Dealer if these parts must be removed.
Airbag Disposal: Improper disposal of an airbag or a vehicle with live airbags can be extremely dangerous. Approach an Mahindra Authorised Dealer to do these jobs.
Airbag Repair: If the front airbag cover or instrument panel airbag cover shows signs of damage or having been removed, the vehicle should be towed to the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer for repair. Do not attempt to self repair or reinstall the cover.
Airbag Maintenance: For cleaning the airbag covers/areas, use only a soft dry cloth or one which has been moistened with plain water. Solvents or cleaners could adversely affect the airbag covers and proper deployment of the system.
3 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FEATURES
3.1 Instrument Cluster
3.5” color and monochrome Display
Graphic
A
Tachometer/RPM Gauge
F
Fuel Gauge
B
Temperature Gauge
G
Drive Mode
C
Time
H
Odometer
D
Outside Ambient Temperature
I
Trip A, B & DTE
E
Speedometer
J
Gear Display
Graphic
Digital Cluster
Graphic
A
Speedometer
G
Gear Display
B
Time
H
Odometer
C
Drive Info
I
Digital Speedo Meter
D
Outside Ambient Temperature
J
Current Drive Mode
E
Tachometer/RPM Gauge
K
Fuel Gauge
F
Temperature Gauge
 
Instrument Cluster Screen Flow – Digital
Graphic
3.1.1 Tachometer
The tachometer indicates the real-time engine speed in thousands of RPM (revolutions per minute). Each division is 500 RPM (TFT) 1000 RPM (Digital). Operating the engine at very high RPM may lead to excessive engine wear and low fuel economy. Maintain steady engine speed below 2500 RPM and do not accelerate or decelerate abruptly.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
Do not over-accelerate the engine during idling, this can cause severe engine damage and would be treated as abuse of the engine which is not covered by warranty.
3.1.2 Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the real-time road surface speed of the vehicle in kilometres per hour.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
The vehicle speedometer is affected by size of the tyres used. If the size of the tyres are changed from those fitted at the factory, the speedometer might not display the correct road surface speed and distance travelled.
Over Speed Alert Buzzer
•  Primary level: Buzzer will trigger single chime in every 110 seconds when the vehicle speed reaches 80 kmph. once primary level chime is triggered, it will continue playing until speed is reduced to 76 kmph or goes beyond 120 kmph.
•  Secondary level: Buzzer will trigger periodic chime when the vehicle speed reaches 120 kmph and chime will continue playing until vehicle speed is reduced to 114 kmph. Below this speed primary level chime will be triggered and will continue till 76 kmph.
3.1.3 Odometer
The odometer records and displays the total distance traveled in km. Odometer cannot be reset.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
3.1.4 Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
The engine coolant temperature gauge functions only when the ignition is switched ON. It indicates the instantaneous engine coolant temperature. The coolant temperature varies with changes in weather, load on engine and driving pattern.
TFT
Graphic
If the gauge moves beyond the normal operating range toward “H” mark. it represents that engine is overheating. This will also be notified through blinking or continuously ON Engine high temperature lamp.
Digital
Graphic
If the gauge moves beyond the normal operating range toward “H” mark. it indicates the engine overheating that may damage the engine. Allow engine to cool. In such situations switch OFF the AC and observe any improvements in the temperature gauge. If not, stop the vehicle and allow the engine to cool down. Check the coolant level in the coolant reservoir and top-up if required. If the engine is still overheating, contact your nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
Never remove the Degassing tank cap when the engine is hot. The engine coolant is under pressure and could splash on to skin/eyes causing severe burns. Wait for the engine to cool down before adding coolant to the reservoir.
Do not continue driving the vehicle with an overheated engine. This will lead to damage of engine components and engine seizure.
3.1.5 Fuel Level Gauge
The fuel level gauge functions only when the ignition is switched ON. It gives the status of the fuel level in the fuel tank. F indicates the tank is full (57 +/- 2 litres), E indicates the tank is empty.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
When the fuel level reaches the reserve, the last bar will be displayed and low fuel telltale will be ON (approx 12 litres). when the fuel tank is completely empty, last bar goes off from display and low fuel telltale will be blinking . The amount of fuel required to fill the tank up may be less than the specified tank capacity, as a small amount of reserve fuel always remains in the tank.
On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank, the fuel level may fluctuate or the last bar may flash earlier than usual. Always check the fuel level when the vehicle is on level road. If the last bar is still off and telltale is blinking even after filling sufficient fuel, contact your Mahindra Authorised Dealer as soon as possible.
When all the bars in the display starts blinking/flashing, contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer at the earliest.
It is highly recommended to start the fueling at ignition OFF condition and turn on the ignition only when fueling is finished to get correct fuel level.
IGN ON fuel filling may lead to inconsistency and can cause for DTE fluctuation.
3.1.6 Gear information
Gear information shows the actual gear in which user has to drive the vehicle.
Based on the various parameters, it will also suggest to change the gear for better fuel economy with up/down recommendation.
Operating Condition (Applicable for MT) : UP/DOWN arrow along with numeral recommends shifting to that gear.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
3.1.7 Outside Ambient Temperature (if equipped)
This Screen shows the outside ambient temperature.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
Changing the Units (TFT): Once you reach to OAT screen, Long Press the SET switch to change the units. You can choose between degree Celsius and degree Fahrenheit.
For Digital cluster the unit changing is available in infotainment settings
3.1.8 Drive Mode (if equipped)
Drive modes shall change driving characteristics by changing elements such as Engine power, Traction control, Climate control and Steering efforts. The vehicle has selectable drive modes like Zip, Zoom, Snow, sand and mud which have their own distinct pre-set configurations. The selection of drive mode is made via dedicated button or switches.
Graphic
TFT: Drive selection menu part of cluster will display the current drive mode.
Digital: Drive selection menu part of infotainment and cluster will display the current drive mode like Zip, Zoom, Snow, Sand and Mud.
Graphic
Refer Drive modes in the “Starting and Driving chapter” for further details
3.1.9 Terrain Mode (if equipped)
Terrain Mode System is designed to adjust the vehicle’s driving dynamics for the type of terrain you’re driving on. It uses throttle position, vehicle speed, and steering angle to determine how your vehicle is responding compared to your commands. Torque is then adjusted front to rear and side to side in a split second to enhance traction
Graphic
TFT: Drive selection menu part of cluster will display the current terrain mode.
Digital: Drive selection menu part of infotainment and cluster will display the current terrain mode like Normal, Snow, Sand and Mud.
Graphic
Refer Terrain Modes in the “Starting and Driving chapter” for further details
3.1.10 Digital Speedo Meter
Digital speedometer displays the speed of the vehicle numerically. It provides immersive experience by having option to switch off the lights of Speedometer and Tachometer.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
TFT:
Turning the lights off : Once in Digital Speedometer screen, Long Press OK button to turn the lights OFF. Long press the OK button to turn ON the lights again.
Note: Digital speed will be displayed in the speedo gague
3.2 Drive Summary
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
This screen will appear when Ignition is turned off. Following information will be displayed:
1
Distance in IGN cycle
It displays the total distance travelled in an Ignition cycle.
2
Drive time in IGN cycle
It displays the total time for which engine was ON in the Ignition cycle.
3
DTE
It represents the current DTE value.*
4
4x4 Not engaged
4x4 Not engaged is displays the distance travel in an ignition cycle without 4x4 engage distance.*
* - It represent few variants only it will display
3.3 Instrument Cluster Control Switches
Graphic
Instrument cluster control switches located in the driver side switch bank.
1
UP button: Used to scroll vertically
2
DOWN button: Used to scroll vertically
3
MENU button: Horizontal scrolling i.e., change in menu
4
OK button: Select a option
The right most steering wheel switches are used to control the instrument cluster menus
Graphic
A
Menu button: Horizontal scrolling i.e., change in menu
B
UP button: Used to scroll vertically up direction
C
OK button: Select a option
D
Down button: Used to scroll vertically down direction
E
Favorite button: Select a Favorite option
3.4 Drive Information
In Drive Information, Drive Time and Average Speed will get displayed in screen.
Drive Information or Drive info is represented by Steering wheel icon.
TFT: It can be accessed by pressing MENU button in either driver side switch bank or steering wheel UP/DOWN switches.
Digital: Drive time is available in drive Info menu and can be accessed using UP/Down switch in the steering wheel switch.
Graphic
3.4.1 Trip Meter
TFT: Two trip meters are available with max range of 9999.9 km. These are available in drive info menu and can be accessed using Steering wheel UP/DOWN switch or driver side switch bank switches.
Digital: Select TRIP A / TRIP B available in drive Info menu and can be accessed using UP/Down switch in the steering wheel switch. Trip meter can be reset by long press of OK. Resetting trip will reset average speed and drive time associated with the particular trip.
Variants
Trip A
Trip B
Min
Max
Min
Max
TFT
0
9999.9
0
9999.9
Digital
0
9999.9
0
9999.9
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
Trip meter has to be reset whenever battery is disconnected due to various reasons.
Else Average Speed and Driving Time may not match with trip value.
3.4.2 Average Speed
Average Speed is calculated based on the total distance covered and time taken from the start of this trip cycle.
TFT: Under drive info menu, this page can be accessed using UP/DOWN button. Data on this page can be reset at their respective trip pages.
Digital: Average speed is available in drive Info menu and can be accessed using UP/Down switch in the steering wheel switch.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
3.4.3 Driving Time
Drive Duration is the elapsed time from the start of this trip cycle.
Once Drive Information is selected, Drive Duration is displayed on the Screen.
Under drive info menu, this page can be accessed using UP/DOWN button. Data on this page can be reset at their respective trip pages.
Drive Duration is the elapsed time from the start of this trip cycle. This trip timer will reset to 00:00, once it has reached the maximum value of 99:59. 
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
3.4.4 Clock Screen
For high variants (TFT and Digital), Clock and date is in sync with infotainment system. Any change in infotainment will reflect on cluster.
TFT
Graphic
Steps to set time (Type 1)
1. Browse to settings, using MENU button
2. Press OK to enter.
3. Select Clock and then clock setting to change system time.
4. Press OK to change to particular digit. Highlight will change to "Dash". In this state, you can use UP/DOWN button to change time.
5. Press OK to confirm the current change and move to next digit.
6. System time will change only when you confirm the edited time.
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
3.4.5 REGEN (If equipped)
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
This page will appear only when vehicle is capable of Park regeneration (DPF lamp ON or Blinking) along with REGEN telltale.
Long Press Ok button to start Park regeneration.
Refer fuel emission control section for details on Park regeneration.
3.5 Fuel Info
TFT: Fuel computer is represented by fuel tank icon. It can be accessed using MENU button. It displays data related to fuel consumption pattern of vehicle.
It can be accessed by pressing MENU button in driver side switch bank or steering wheel switches.
Digital In Fuel info, Average Fuel Economy (AFE), Distance to Empty (DTE), Instantaneous Fuel Economy (IFE) and DEF Level will get displayed in screen (Diesel).
Fuel info can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel.
Graphic
It displays data related to fuel consumption pattern of vehicle.
Use OK button to enter Fuel info page.
3.5.1 Average Fuel Efficiency (AFE)
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
TFT
In Fuel Computer, AFE can be accessed using UP/DOWN button.
AFE is calculated based on the Last AFE reset cycle.
AFE can be reset by long press of OK button in driver side switch bank or steering wheel switch.
Digital
AFE can be reset by long press of OK button in Steering wheel.
Additional options to change AFE reset to every ignition ON or after every fuel refill are present in the settings menu.
3.5.2 Instantaneous Fuel Economy (IFE)
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
Instantaneous Fuel Economy is calculated based on your current driving pattern. More bars on display means vehicle is consuming less fuel, less number of bars implies it is consuming more fuel.
3.5.3 Distance to Empty (TFT)/Range (Digital)
TFT: Distance to Empty is the approximate distance that can be covered with the available fuel. In Fuel Computer, DTE can be accessed using UP/DOWN button.
Digital Range can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
3.5.4 DEF Level (If equipped)
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
Instrument cluster will display the amount of DEF present in the DEF tank
3.5.5 ECO Sense (if equipped)
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
It displays the average Eco Score from your Ecosense screen in the Infotainment.
3.6 Vehicle Information (If equipped)
Graphic
Vehicle info can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel switch.
It displays data related to TPMS, 4WD*, Roll and Pitch* (Digital), Compass Altimeter* (Digital), Power and Torque* (Digital) information.
Use OK button to enter Vehicle info page
* - Applicable for few variants
3.6.1 Tyre Pressure (if equipped)
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
Tyre Pressure is an electronic system designed to monitor the air pressure inside pneumatic tyres.
This system will alert the driver if the tyre pressure falls below the low pressure or raises above high pressure warning limit for any reason. Including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tyre. The Tiretronics will continue to alert the driver periodically and will not turn off untill the tyre pressure is inflated to the recommended pressure.
Refer Tiretronics chapter for more details.
3.6.2 Roll and Pitch (If equipped)
Graphic
This screen referring to seems to be displaying the Roll and Pitch angles of a vehicle. These angles are crucial for understanding the vehicle's orientation and movement dynamics.
3.6.3 Power and Torque (If equipped)
Graphic
This screen indicates real-time information about the vehicle’s current power and torque output relative to their maximum achievable values.
3.6.4 Compass and Altimeter
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
Compass This screen indicates the direction in which the vehicle is traveling. It usually shows directions such as North (N), South (S), East (E), and West (W), along with intermediate directions (NE, NW, SE, SW). The compass helps the driver maintain their intended direction and aids in navigation.
Altimeter This shows the vehicle's height above sea level, The altimeter is particularly useful in off-road driving, aviation, or any situation where knowing the elevation is important.
3.6.5 4WD Distribution
TFT
Graphic
1. If 4WD high is currently engaged, it will show “4H” with animation.
2. Similarly for 4WD Low, it will show “4L” with animation.
3. If 4WD lever is at 2WD or neutral, only wheels and axles will be shown without any animation.
Digital
Graphic
1. Any mode to 4WD High: alert with “4H” and animation will be displayed
2. Any mode to 4WD Low: alert with “4L” and animation will be displayed.
3.7 Navigation (If equipped) (Applicable for all Digital Variants)
Navigation can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel. It displays data related to map view which is displayed in infotainment. Use OK button to enter Navigation page.
Graphic
Cluster will display the Navigation information Like Turn By Turn Navigation and Full / Partial Map view from Android auto (If available) or native navigation or carplay (If available).
Partial Screen Navigation
Turn by Turn Navigation
Graphic
Graphic
To enter Full navigation if you are at partial Navigation screen, Long Press the OK switch to view full map.
Full Screen Navigation
Graphic
To enter partial navigation if you are at Full Navigation screen, Long Press the OK switch to view partial map.
3.8 Driver Assist (ADAS) (If equipped)
Graphic
Driver Assistance can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel switches.
Use OK button to enter Drive page
Driver Assistance Menu View
Non Driver Assistance Menu View
Graphic
Graphic
Long press up button shall enter into LKAS setting (if equipped)
Refer “Advanced Driver Assistance System” chapter for more details.
Cluster will display the below features in Driver Assistance Menu:
1. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
2. Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)
3. Lane Keep Assist System (LKA/LDW)
4. High Beam Assist System (HBA)
5. Smart Pilot Assist System (SPA)
3.9 Display Layout (If equipped)
Cluster selected Themes:
Graphic
Display Layout can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel/driver side switch bank.
Use OK button to enter Display Layout page
Display layout  provides immersive experience by having different skin option based on user choice.
Normal Skin - Default Skin
Graphic
Information Skin: Cluster shall display all the information with different visual layout.
Graphic
Minimal Skin: Cluster shall display minimal information which is required for less informative.
Graphic
Display Layout shortcut : Long press menu button shall enter into display layout directly
3.10 Tire Direction Monitoring System (If equipped)
Graphic
Graphic
This feature is available as an Alert as well as standalone page.
Alert: Intuitively notifies the user before start of drive. Alert will trigger if conditions are met. Refer alert section. Based on direction alert may go out or can be continuously ON.
Standalone page: User can navigate to this page to check current direction of tire even while driving.
3.11 Warning History
TFT
Graphic
This feature allows you to check the live warnings in the instrument cluster. It is represented by exclamation mark inside a triangle.
Steps to access:
1. Use Menu Switch to access the warning history.
2. Once you are on screen as in Figure 1, Press OK to enter the warning history.
3. Use Up/Down to access all the available warning.
Warning X/Y: Y represents total live warnings at current time
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
Alert History can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel/driver side switch bank.
Use OK button to enter Alert History page
Graphic
Graphic
Alert history allows to check any active applicable vehicle warnings in the instrument cluster display.
Live warnings shall displayed in the cluster center display area and warning count will decrease if viewed in the warning history page.
Graphic
Applicable alerts will be stored in warning history until they are live.
3.12 Cluster Settings - TFT
Settings can be accessed by pressing MENU switch
Graphic
Graphic
To enter inside settings, press OK. Following settings are available:
1. Clock (if sync not available) 2. Temperature unit (if applicable) 3. Passenger Airbag
1. Clock (if sync not available)
Clock
Time Format
Graphic
Graphic
2. Temperature unit (if applicable)
3. Passenger Airbag
Graphic
Graphic
3.12.1 Passenger Air Bag ON/OFF
The following instructions to be followed to select the passenger airbag ON/OFF
Graphic
1. Press the MENU button provided in the switch panel and navigate to Settings Option.
Graphic
2. Press OK button to enter in settings and following screen will appear.
Graphic
3. Press Up/Down buttons to navigate to Passenger Airbag ON/OFF option.
Graphic
4. Once select the Passenger ON/OFF option, Press OK to confirm selection and following message will appear on screen.
5. Confirm the option by selecting “Ok or Cancel” using Up/Down and Press the OK button.
6. Repeat the above steps for the Vice-versa of Passenger Airbag ON/OFF selection.
3.12.2 Cluster Setting – Digital
Graphic
Settings can be accessed by pressing MENU switch
To enter inside settings, press ok.
Use UP / DOWN button to navigate setting features
Following settings are available:
1. Assistance (If equipped)
2. AFE Auto Reset
3. Passenger Air Bag
4. Blind View Monitoring (If equipped)
5. TPMS – Auto Learn (If equipped)
6. Tyre Fill Assist (If equipped)
7. Sound
8. Clock Type
9. Factory Reset
3.12.2.1 Driver Assistance (If equipped)
Graphic
1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button.
Graphic
2. Press OK to enter setting. Press Up/Down button to navigate to Driver Assistance option.
Graphic
3. Press OK to enter Driver Assistance option. Use Up/Down button to navigate driver assistance features and press OK button to select the corresponding feature options.
Graphic
4. Use Up/Down button to navigate to the options and press OK button to select the corresponding option.
Above procedure is applicable for all other Driver Assistance features.
Refer to Advanced Driver Assistance System chapter for more details.
3.12.2.2 AFE Reset
Graphic
1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button.
Graphic
2. Press OK to enter setting. Press Up/Down button to navigate to AFE Auto Reset option
Graphic
3. Press OK to enter AFE Auto Reset option. Use Up/Down button to navigate to the option. Press OK to select.
After Ignition : After a predetermined time where the vehicle’s ignition is OFF the AFE will reset.
After Refuelling : Refuelling at ignition OFF and then driving will reset the AFE.
3.12.2.3 Blind View Monitoring (if equipped)
Graphic
1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button.
Graphic
2. Press OK to enter setting. Press Up/Down button to navigate to Blind View Monitoring Option
3. Press OK to Enable / Disable the Blind View Monitoring Option.
3.12.2.4 TPMS-Auto Learn (if equipped)
Graphic
1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button.
Graphic
2. Press OK to enter setting. Press Up/Down button to navigate to TPMS-Auto Learn Option
3. Press OK to Enable / Disable the TPMS-Auto Learn Option.
3.12.2.5 Tyre Fill Assist (if equipped)
Graphic
1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button.
Graphic
2. Press OK to enter setting. Press Up/Down button to navigate to Tyre Fill Assist Option
3. Press OK to Enable / Disable the Tyre Fill Assist Option.
3.12.2.6 Sound
Turn Indicators, Notifications Sound and Lane Departure Warning (If applicable) are having options to select different sounds and Volume level adjustment.
Graphic
1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button.
Graphic
2. Press OK to enter setting. Press Up/Down button to navigate to Sound Option.
Graphic
3. Press ok to enter Sound Option. Use Up/Down button to navigate to the option. Press OK to enter Sound Options
Graphic
4. Press OK to enter Turn Indicator Tone
Graphic
4. Use Up/Down button to navigate to the option. Press OK to select.
Graphic
5. Use Up/Down button to Select the volume Level. Press OK to enter Volume Option.
Graphic
6. Up/Down button to select the volume levels. Press OK to select. Once selected it will return to previous page.
Above procedure is applicable for notification Sound and Notification Volume
3.12.2.7  Clock Type
Graphic
1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button.
Graphic
2. Press OK to enter setting. Press Up/Down button to navigate to Clock Type Option.
Graphic
3. Press ok to enter Clock Type option. Use Up/Down button to navigate to the option. Press OK to select.
3.12.2.8 Factory Reset
Graphic
1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button.
Graphic
2. Press OK to enter setting. Press Up/Down button to navigate to Factory Reset Option.
Graphic
3. Press OK to Select following screen will appear. Use Down button to select Confirm.
Graphic
4. Press OK to start factory reset process.
1. To go to the main settings screen from any settings menu, use Up/Down buttons to go to the top of the menu screen and press the OK button.
2. In the settings screen, if no option is selected for a long time. The screen will go to the previous displayed screen.
3.12.2.9 Passenger Air Bag
Graphic
1. Navigate to Setting menu using MENU button.
Graphic
2. Press OK to enter setting. Press Up/Down button to navigate to Passenger Airbag option
Graphic
3. Press OK to Select following screen will appear. Use Up/Down button to navigate to the option. Press OK to select, a pop-up will appear to confirm the selection.
Graphic
4. Press OK to select a option. Confirm your selection by selecting OK or Cancel.
3.12.3 Vehicle Condition Related Warning (if equipped)
Following are the warning information available:
Display (TFT)
Display (Digital)
Operating Conditions
Graphic
Graphic
This alert will come when ABS related malfunction is detected
Graphic
Graphic
This alert will come when EBD related malfunction is detected
Graphic
Graphic
This message is displayed when the engine check warning lamp is turned ON and engine has been running.
Graphic
Graphic
This message comes on when the ESP system is faulty, and engine has been running.
Graphic
Graphic
This message comes when cruise mode is turned OFF manually using switch.
Graphic
Graphic
This message comes when cruise mode is turned ON.
Graphic
Graphic
This message comes when Cruise Standby mode is enabled while driving.
Graphic
Graphic
When the engine oil pressure warning light is ON and engine has been running.
Graphic
Graphic
This message comes when engine temperature high telltale is ON and engine has been running. Indicates that engine temperature is high.
Graphic
Graphic
This message will get pop up when HDC control is necessary. HDC actively controlling the brakes to maintain vehicle speed while descending hills
Graphic
Graphic
This message will get pop up when HDC feature is disabled by pressing the HDC button in driver side switch bank again or HDC activation conditions are override.  
Graphic
Graphic
This message will pop up when HDC feature is enabled by pressing the HDC button driver side switch bank. HDC function is ready for action but activation conditions are not met.
Graphic
Graphic
This alert is displayed when the Hill Descent Control function is not available because of a malfunction in the system. (If equipped)
NA
Graphic
This alert is displayed when the Hill Hold Control function is not available because of a malfunction in the system.
Graphic
Graphic
This alert will come when Remote key fob battery is low . (if Equipped).
Graphic
Graphic
This alert will be displayed when key is left in barrel and IGN is turned OFF and door is opened. ( if equipped )
Graphic
Graphic
This message comes when brake fluid level is low and engine has been running.
Graphic
Graphic
This message comes when fuel level warning lamp is ON or Blinking and engine has been running.
Graphic
Graphic
This message comes when passenger airbag is turned OFF.
Graphic
Graphic
This message comes when you try to move the vehicle when park brake is still engaged.
Graphic
Graphic
This message comes on when the tail lamps are ON with the ignition in the "OFF" state.
Graphic
Graphic
This message comes when vehicle has crossed scheduled service limit.
Graphic
NA
This message comes when you try to change settings while driving the vehicle (i.e., vehicle speed is greater than 2kmph). This message comes with a timeout of 5 secs, after that is goes to TRIP A screen through settings screen.
Graphic
Graphic
This message comes when you are driving vehicle above 120 kmph. (if equipped)
Graphic
Graphic
This message comes when water is detected in fuel filter and engine has been running. It is applicable for diesel variants only.
Graphic
Graphic
This message comes when either of driver or passenger (if occupied) seatbelt is unbuckled.
Graphic
Graphic
The warning screen will be displayed if Automatic Light functionality is turned ON.
Graphic
Graphic
The warning screen will be displayed if Automatic Light functionality is turned OFF.
Graphic
Graphic
The warning screen will be displayed if Automatic Wiper functionality is turned ON.
Graphic
Graphic
The warning screen will be displayed if Automatic Wiper functionality is turned OFF.
NA
Graphic
The alert is displayed when ignition is off and any door is opened, if a mobile is placed on the wireless charging tray, an alert will appear on the cluster.
NA
Graphic
This alert is displayed when a coin or metallic object is placed on the antiskid mat & the phone is kept on the object leading to poor charging of phone. This will also be displayed if the phone is detected in a incorrect position on the charging tray. The must be cleared and adjust the phone to allow it to charge optimally.
NA
Graphic
This alert is displayed when the NFC cards placed between the mobile and wireless charging pad, Charging will not happen for 30 seconds and will get notified, to remove and protect the card.
Graphic
Graphic
This alert is displayed when EPS related malfunction is detected in engine running condition.
Graphic
Graphic
This alert remains on display for 60 seconds or until the passenger fastens their seat belt. It will pause and display back if there is an important alert is present.
Graphic
Graphic
This alert is displayed when ignition is turned ON without pressing the brake pedal in AT Variants.
Graphic
Graphic
This alert is displayed when Zip mode is activated.
Graphic
Graphic
This alert is displayed when Zoom mode is activated.
Graphic
Graphic
This alert is displayed when Snow mode is activated.
Graphic
Graphic
This alert is displayed when Mud mode is activated.
Graphic
Graphic
This alert is displayed when Sand mode is activated.
Graphic
Graphic
This alert will display, whenever the turning off the engine without shifting the gear “P” (AT Variants)
Graphic
Graphic
This alert is displayed whenever turning the on the without pressing the clutch (MT Variants)
Graphic
Graphic
This message is displayed when driver tries to turn ON engine with the gear lever not positioned at P or N (AT Variants)
Graphic
Graphic
This message is displayed when the driver changes the gear to 4H mode.
Graphic
Graphic
This message is displayed when the driver changes the gear to 4L mode.
Graphic
Graphic
This message will display, If try to disable the ELD when the vehicle is running.
Graphic
Graphic
This message will display whenever ELD is engaged in 4 Wheel drive mode
Graphic
Graphic
This message will display when the vehicle speed exceed 40 kmph when in ELD mode.
Graphic
Graphic
This message will display when ELD is Malfunctioning.
Graphic
Graphic
This message will display, If 4WD is not activated, when engage ELD
NA
Graphic
This message will display when engage ELD if ITA is already activated.
NA
Graphic
This message indicates the selected speed level from Level 1 to Level 7.
NA
Graphic
This message displayed, when SCA is engaged.
NA
Graphic
This message will displayed when SCA in malfunction state.
NA
Graphic
This message will display whenever try to engage ITA without terrain mode.
NA
Graphic
This message will displayed when ITA in malfunction state
3.12.4 Smart Key Alerts
Display (TFT)
Display (Digital)
Operating Conditions
Graphic
Graphic
The warning will be triggered when key is inside the vehicle and you try to do Passive lock operation.
Graphic
Graphic
The warning will be triggered when vehicle is in cranked or in ignition ON condition, but key is not inside the vehicle.
Graphic
Graphic
The warning will be triggered when start/stop switch stuck for more than 1 min.
Graphic
Graphic
The warning will be triggered when user need to keep the key in key mark engraved in near park brake and then press the start/stop switch to turn ON the vehicle.
Graphic
Graphic
The warning will be triggered when Key Fob battery is Low.
Graphic
Graphic
The warning will be triggered when any door is open and user trying to do passive lock operation.
3.12.5 Steering Lock Alerts (if equipped)
Display (TFT)
Display (Digital)
Operating Conditions
Graphic
Graphic
This is a temporary malfunction of ESCL and the message is displayed if the vehicle needs to be attempted to start while turning the steering wheel.
Graphic
Graphic
This is a temporary malfunction of ESCL and the message is displayed if the steering column is not locked
Graphic
Graphic
The message is displayed if the system check-up is required since the ESCL system is malfunctioning.
Graphic
Graphic
The message is displayed if ESCL coding checkup is required. (Corresponding signal transmitted, with no coding between SKM and ESCL)
3.12.6 Tyre Direction Monitoring System (TDMS) Alert
Tyre direction monitoring system or TDMS assists you when vehicle has just started and you are about to move the vehicle. It tells you about the current direction in which tyres are aligned at very beginning of manoeuvring the vehicle.
TFT
DIGITAL
<Level 5>
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
<Level 3>
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
<Level 0>
Graphic
Graphic
Operating Conditions
Tyre alignment is displayed in 6 levels (level 0 to level 5) depending on the alignment degree when the ignition switch is turned to "ON" position from "OFF" position.
Working Conditions:
1. When vehicle speed is zero and parking brake engaged.
2. When vehicle speed is zero and vehicle is in neutral and clutch is not engaged.
3.12.7 Door Open Alerts
TFT
DIGITAL
Operating Conditions
Graphic
Graphic
Passenger door open
High: with animation
Low: No animation
Graphic
Graphic
Driver door open
High: with animation
Low: No animation
Graphic
Graphic
Hood Open
High/Low: Blinking
Graphic
Graphic
Rear door (LH) open
High: with animation
Low: No animation
Graphic
Graphic
Rear door (RH) open
High: with animation
Low: No animation
Graphic
Graphic
Tailgate open
High/Low: Blinking
3.12.8 Functional Safety Alert
TFT
DIGITAL
Graphic
Graphic
Instrument cluster shall monitor some of the internal parameters and if misbehavior found it will enable “Contact Dealer” alert.
Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately when “Contact Dealer” alert displayed in cluster.
For TFT Alert will be displayed for 5 secs
3.12.9 DPF is Clogged (if equipped)
DPF is clogged message will appear when the DPF is clogged. Contact Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately for assistance.
TFT
Digital
 
Graphic
3.12.10 Emission Control Alerts (Applicable for Diesel only)
Refer Emission control chapter
3.13 Warning Lamps Overview – Diesel
3.5” color and monochrome Display
Graphic
Digital Cluster
Graphic
3.14 Warning Lamps
The phenomenon of warning lamps flashing momentarily when ignition is turned ON is called pre-check. This is self check done by the cluster at every ignition ON.
Symbol
Warning Lamp/Tell Tale
Lamp Pre-check
Lamp Status
Action/Remarks
Graphic
Left Turn Indicators
No
Slow or Fast Blinking
Indicates left turn lamp is blinking
Slow Blinking: Normal operation
Fast Blinking: One / more left turn lamp bulb has fused. Have the bulb replaced
Graphic
OBD Check Lamp
Yes
Continuously ON or Blinking
Telltale will always be ON till engine starts after which it will turn OFF. Telltale ON even after start of engine indicates an emission system related failure. Contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.
Graphic
Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning Lamp
No
Continuously ON
Telltale will always be ON till engine starts after which it will turn OFF. Telltale ON even after start of engine indicates low engine oil pressure. Contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
Graphic
Engine Start/Stop telltale*
No
Continuously ON or Blinking
CONTINUOUSLY ON: Engine is in auto stop mode Blinking: Stop/Start is about to stop the engine FAST BLINKING: Stop/Start is inhibited due to unhealthy battery conditions
Graphic
Door Ajar Warning Lamp
No
Continuously ON
Indicates one or more doors are open
Graphic
AT Malfunction indicator Lamp*
YES
Continuously ON or Blinking
Telltale is used to indicate an AT fault. Telltale Continuous ON means AT Fault. Contact Authorized Mahindra Dealer immediately if the MIL Lamp doesn’t turn off after an ignition reset.
Blinking Telltale implies overheating of clutch due to abuse conditions. This is only to warn the customer and to prevent a clutch damage. Telltale will turn off once the clutch temperature becomes normal.
Graphic
Airbag Warning Lamp
Yes
Continuously ON
Indicates malfunction of the airbag system. Contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
Graphic
Water in Fuel warning Lamp*
Yes
Continuously ON
Indicates water in fuel filter. Drain the water from filter or contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for assistance
Graphic
Battery Charging System Warning Lamp
No
Continuously ON
Telltale will be ON in ignition ON But engine is OFF. If it is ON in engine ON condition, it represents malfunction in charging system. Contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for assistance
Graphic
Right Turn Indicators
No
Slow or Fast Blinking
Indicates right turn lamp is blinking
Slow Blinking: Normal operation
Fast Blinking: One /more right turn lamp bulb has fused. Have the bulb replaced
Graphic
ABS Warning Lamp
Yes
Continuously ON
Indicates malfunction of the ABS system. Contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
Graphic
Check Engine Lamp
Yes
Continuously ON or Blinking
Indicates a potential malfunction in the Engine System, contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
Graphic
Overspeed Alert *
No
Continuously ON
Telltale will blink when vehicle is running at speed greater than 120 kmph
Graphic
DPF Indicator Lamp *
Yes
Continuously ON
If the DPF indicator is ON in the engine running condition then DPF regeneration has not happened. Follow the instructions mentioned in the “EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM”
Graphic
Parking Lamp
No
Continuously ON
Indicates Park Lamp is ON
Graphic
Immobilizer
No
Continuously ON or Blinking
Slow Blinking in IGN ON: vehicle has been turned on using an invalid key.
Fast Blinking/Continuously ON: Indicates a system malfunction
Contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
Graphic
DEF Indicator Lamp*
Yes
Continuously ON
It indicates that either DEF Level is low or incorrect DEF has been filled or DEF Dosing is malfunctioning. Follow the instructions mentioned in the “EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM”
Graphic
Head lamp High Beam Indicator
No
Continuously ON
Indicates Head lamp high beam is ON
Graphic
Front Fog Lamp Indicator *
No
Continuously ON
Indicates front fog lamps are ON.
Graphic
Seat Belt Warning Lamp
No
Continuously ON
If telltale is not turning OFF even after fastening the seat belt, contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer for assistance
Graphic
Low Fuel Warning Lamp
No
Continuously ON or Blinking
Telltale ON indicates that the fuel in the tank has reached the reserve level. Telltale blinking indicates a failure in the fuel gauge. Contact Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.
Graphic
High Coolant Temperature Warning Lamp
No
Continuously ON or Blinking
Telltale ON indicates that the engine coolant temperature is high. Telltale blinking indicates very high coolant temperature
Graphic
HHC Malfunction
No
Continuously ON
Indicates malfunction of Hill Hold Control. Contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
Graphic
HDC
No
Continuously ON
Indicates malfunction of Hill Descend Control. Contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
Graphic
Park Brake / EBD / Low Brake Fluid Telltale / EPB / Brake pad worn out*
Yes
Continuously ON
Either one of the below conditions:
1. Park Brake might be engaged
2. Brake fluid level might be low
3. There is some concern in ABS/EBD failure.
4. Front Brake Pad wear worn out. Please contact Mahindra Dealer.
Graphic
ESC Malfunction Warning Lamp
Yes
Continuously ON or Blinking
Blinking: Indicates ESC has taken control of the vehicle stability
Continuously ON: Indicates a malfunction in the ESC system. Contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
Graphic
ESC OFF Lamp
Yes
Continuously ON
Indicates ESC OFF
Graphic
Glow Plug Indicator*
No
Continuously ON
Indicates a malfunction in the starting system. Contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
Graphic
REGEN Indicator Lamp*
NO
Continuously ON or Blinking
ON: Regeneration is required
Blink: Regeneration is in progress
Graphic
Cruise Control Indicator *
Yes
Continuously ON
Indicates vehicle is in Cruise mode
Graphic
EPS Warning Lamp*
After Pre-check Continuously ON till Engine Starts
Continuously ON
Indicates malfunction on Electronic Power steering system. Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately
Graphic
Automatic Emergency Braking System OFF telltale*
No
Continuously ON
Indicates AEB system is turned off by user.
Graphic
Lane Keep Assist System*(LKA)
No
Continuously ON
Indicates LKA system is in Standby state
Graphic
No
Continuously ON or Blinking
Indicates LKA system is in Active state Blinking: LKA system providing Warning to the user
Graphic
No
Continuously ON or Blinking
LKAS System fail/Malfunction. This warning message is displayed if there is a problem with LKAS system.Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately Blinking: Camera not calibrated properly
Graphic
Lane Departure Warning System*(LDW)
No
Continuously ON
Indicates LDW system is in Standby state
Graphic
No
Continuously ON or Blinking
Indicates LDW system is in Active state Blinking: LDW system providing Warning to the user
Graphic
No
Continuously ON or Blinking
LDW System fail/Malfunction. This warning message is displayed if there is a problem with LDWS system. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately Blinking: Camera not calibrated properly
Graphic
Smart Pilot Assist*
No
Continuously ON
Indicates Smart Pilot Assist is in Standby state
Graphic
No
Continuously ON or Blinking
Indicates Smart Pilot Assist is in Active state
Graphic
No
Continuously ON
Smart Pilot Assist system fail/Malfunction. This warning message is displayed if there is a problem with SPA system. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
Graphic
Adaptive Cruise Control*
No
Continuously ON
Indicates Adaptive cruise control system is in standby state.
Graphic
No
Continuously ON
Indicates Adaptive cruise control system is in active state.
Graphic
No
Continuously ON
Indicates Adaptive cruise control system temporarily not available due to temporary abnormal condition. Check if radar is blocked and clean.
Graphic
No
Continuously ON
Indicates malfunction of Adaptive cruise control system. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.
Graphic
Auto Vehicle Hold*
No
Continuously ON
Indicates Auto Vehicle Hold in standby Mode.
Graphic
No
Continuously ON
Indicates Auto Vehicle Hold in Active Mode.
Graphic
No
Continuously ON
Indicates malfunction of Auto Vehicle Hold. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
Graphic
EPB Malfunction*
Yes
Continuously ON
Indicates malfunction of Electric Parking Brake. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
Graphic
High Beam Assist*
No
Continuously ON
Indicates high beam assist function is enabled/active.
Graphic
Tiretronics*
Yes
Continuously ON or Blinking
Indicates low/high tyre pressure or possible malfunction in Tiretronics. Refer to Tiretronics section in INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FEATURES/WHEELS AND TYRES chapter for further details
Graphic
4WD Low
No
Continuously ON or Blinking
Blinking: Indicates 4 wheel drive low engagement is in progress.
ON: 4 Wheel drive low is engaged.
Graphic
4WD High
No
Continuously ON or Blinking
Blinking: Indicates 4 wheel drive high engagement is in progress.
ON: 4 wheel drive high is engaged..
Graphic
Electronic Locking Differential (ELD)
No
Continuously ON or Blinking
Indication will display whenever ELD engaged
Graphic
Intelligent Turn Assist
No
Continuously ON or Blinking
Blinking: Indicates Intelligent Turn Assist (ITA) function is Active.
ON: Indicates Intelligent Turn Assist (ITA) function is standby/available for activation.
Graphic
Smart Crawl Assist
No
Continuously ON
Indicates Smart Crawl Assist is activated.
* – If equipped
3.14.1 Warning Lamps in the Instrument Cluster
3.14.1.1 Turn Lamps
Graphic
The turn lamp arrows in the instrument cluster flash showing the direction indicated by the turn signals. A sudden increase in the rate of flashing indicates failure of one or more of the lamp bulbs. Have them replaced as soon as possible.
3.14.1.2 Cruise Indicator (if equipped)
Graphic
The cruise control lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes off in about 3secs. indicating normal status. The lamp blinks if the accelerator is depressed, while in cruise mode.
When SET+ button in the steering wheel is pressed, cruise control is activated and the lamp illuminates indicating the vehicle is in cruise mode.
When CRUISE OFF button in the steering wheel is pressed, the cruise mode is deactivated and the lamp goes OFF indicating that the vehicle is not in cruise mode.
If the lamp does not illuminate when the vehicle is in cruise mode or does not go OFF when the vehicle is out of cruise mode, there is a possible malfunction in the lamp or the cruise control system. Have the vehicle checked by an Authorised Mahindra Dealer.
3.14.1.3 Water-in-Fuel Warning Lamp (if equipped)
Graphic
The water-in-Fuel warning lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes OFF after about 3 secs. The lamp illuminates when the accumulation of water in the fuel filter reaches the maximum permissible limit. The fuel filter needs to be drained. Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer.
Do not continue driving the vehicle with the Water-in-Fuel Warning Lamp ON. This may result in fuel pump / other fuel system component damage, which will not be covered by the limited warranty.
3.14.1.4 Immobiliser
Graphic
Immobiliser Lamp flashes intermittently (few secs. frequency) once the ignition is switched OFF and the vehicle security system is armed (when locked using the RKE/PKE).
Fast blinking indicates a malfunction in the engine immobiliser system. Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately.
3.14.1.5 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Malfunction Lamp
Graphic
The ABS malfunction lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes OFF after about 3 secs. If the ABS malfunction lamp continues to remain ON or illuminates while driving (and the brake system warning lamp is OFF), ABS will not operate. But the brake system will still operate conventionally. In this condition, the wheels can lock during severe braking. Have the vehicle checked by an Authorised Mahindra Dealer as soon as possible.
However, if ABS malfunction lamp and brake warning lamp are simultaneously glowing, there is a severe malfunction in the ABS. Operate the vehicle with extreme care and have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at an Authorised Mahindra Dealer.
3.14.1.6 Parking Brake Lamp
Graphic
The lamp illuminates when Parking brake is engaged or when brake fluid level is low or there is malfunction in EBD. If the lamp illuminates while driving, do the following:
A fault with EBD is indicated by illumination of the brake as well as ABS warning lamps.
•  Check if the parking brake/ Electric parking brake is engaged. If yes, disengage it
•  Check if brake fluid level is low. If yes, top-up brake fluid to the required level
•  Check if front brake pad is worn out. If yes, replace the front brake pads
Clean the top of the brake fluid reservoir before removing the cap. Make sure no dirt, impurities or other items fall into the reservoir. Do not leave the cap off for more than a few minutes. Any contaminants, impurities or moisture in the brake fluid can affect brake operation, resulting in an accident.
If the brake warning lamp comes ON while driving, the brake system might not be working properly. The pedal might be harder to operate or might go closer to the floor and it can take longer to stop. Pull off the road carefully and stop the vehicle. Have the vehicle towed to the nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer for checks or repairs.
Driving the vehicle with the brake warning lamp ON or when you suspect brake trouble is very dangerous and could result in serious injuries. Have your vehicle towed to an Authorised Mahindra Dealer.
When the EBD system is not functioning the vehicle could be unstable during the hard braking. Therefore you must pay attention to the driving conditions while this warning light.
3.14.1.7  Electric Parking Brake Malfunction (EPB) (If equipped)
Graphic
The EPB Lamp illuminates, when there is a malfunction in EBP. The lamp illuminates when the ignition switch is turned ON and then goes off after about 4 seconds.
If the warning lamp is turned on, have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Mahindra Dealer or Authorised Mahindra Service Centre
If you must park the vehicle with faulty EPB, safely pull over and stop the vehicle on a flat surface and shift the gear selector lever to the P position
3.14.1.8 Park Lamp
Graphic
The Park lamp indicator illuminates whenever park lamp is switched ON through Combination switch. During ignition OFF, if park lamp is ON with driver door open, buzzer alert will be audible.
3.14.1.9 Airbag Warning Lamp (if equipped)
Graphic
The airbag warning lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and tell tale goes off in 3 secs. irrespective of engine condition. If the lamp remains ON continuously or flash intermittently, contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately.
Following conditions indicate airbag malfunction:
•  Lamp fails to go OFF after engine is started
•  Lamp does not illuminate at all
•  Illuminates while driving
Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately when the airbag warning lamp indicates a system malfunction. The airbag may not deploy when needed, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly or unnecessarily, which may result in personal injury.
3.14.1.10 HHC malfunction (if equipped)
Graphic
HHC Malfunction Lamp turn ON if there is any malfunction in hill hold control system of the vehicle.
3.14.1.11 HDC Malfunction (if equipped)
Graphic
The lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned ON and goes off after about 4 seconds. Hill Descent Control or HDC malfunction warning lamp indicates malfunction in HDC system. Contact nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
If the warning lamp is turned on, have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Mahindra Dealer or Authorised Mahindra Service Centre
3.14.1.12 Door Ajar Warning Lamp
Graphic
The door ajar warning lamp illuminates when any of the doors including the hood and back door are open during ignition ON. The buzzer chimes when the vehicle speed more than 8 kmph. The lamp and chime goes OFF when all the doors are closed properly.
3.14.1.13 Low Fuel Warning Lamp
Graphic
When the fuel level in the fuel tank falls below the reserve limit, the low fuel warning lamp is illuminated. Refuel sufficiently and the lamp goes out. If the lamp continues to remain ON even after refuelling, contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer.
3.14.1.14 ESC OFF Lamp (if equipped)
Graphic
The ESC OFF lamp lluminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes OFF after about 3 secs. The ESC OFF lamp illuminates when the ESC has been switched OFF manually.
3.14.1.15 ESC System Warning Lamp (if equipped)
Graphic
The ESC system warning lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes OFF after about 3 secs. While driving, if the ESC system warning lamp blinks, it indicates that ESC has taken control of the vehicle stability. If the lamp remains ON, it indicates the malfunction in the ESC System. Contact the nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer.
3.14.1.16 Front Fog Lamp (if equipped)
Graphic
The front fog lamp telltale indicates the status of the front fog lamp. The front fog lamp can be switched ON only when the parking lamp is ON.
Fog lamp will turn ON, if fitted in the vehicle.
3.14.1.17 Engine Stop/Start Lamp (if equipped)
Graphic
The engine Stop/Start lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes OFF after about 3 secs. The Engine Stop/Start lamp flashes when the vehicle/engine is about to stop through the Engine Stop/ Start System. The lamp illuminates continuously when the vehicle/engine has been switched OFF by the Engine Stop/Start System. On restarting the vehicle / engine again by using the clutch/key, the lamp goes out.
3.14.1.18 Tiretronics (if equipped)
Graphic
The Tiretronics lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes OFF after about 3 seconds.
System Malfunction: Tiretronics lamp Blink for approx. 90 sec & then Continuous ON.
System Warnings: Tiretronics lamp Continuous ON.
System malfunction: System fail to function normally due to system failure/Sensor failure.
System Warning : indicated Low/High Tire pressure, High Temperature, Air Leakage.
3.14.1.19 Seat Belt Warning Lamp
Graphic
The seat belt warning lamp illuminates and the buzzer chimes reminding the driver/co-driver to fasten the seat belt when the ignition is ON. The lamp will continue to illuminate till the driver/co-driver fastens the seat belt properly.
3.14.1.20 Glow Plug Indicator (if equipped)
Graphic
Glow plug indicator illuminates when the ignition is turned ON and Glow plug is activated. It automatically goes OFF when the glow plug reaches the required temperature. Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer if the glow plug lamp does not illuminate with ignition ON or illuminates while driving.
3.14.1.21 Head Lamp / High Beam Lamp
Graphic
The head lamp high beam telltale illuminates whenever the head lamps are switched ON to high beam or when the head lamp flash is used.
3.14.1.22 OBD Check Lamp
Graphic
The OBD check lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and remains ON till the engine is started indicating normal status. If the lamp remains ON, it indicates a potential malfunction.
There may be a malfunction in:
•  The fuel management system
•  The emission control system
•  Systems which affect emissions
Such malfunctions may result in excessive emissions. Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately.
3.14.1.23 EPS Warning Lamp (if equipped)
Graphic
The EPS warning lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and it goes OFF when engine is in running condition after about 3 secs. The lamp Indicates malfunction on Electric Power steering system. Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately.
When EPS is failed. vehicle can still be driven with increase in steering effort.
3.14.1.24 Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning Lamp
Graphic
The low engine oil pressure warning lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes OFF when the engine is started. If the lamp remains ON even after starting the engine, or illuminates while driving, stop immediately, check the oil level after 2-3 minutes. If low, add engine oil to the “MAX” level and check status. If problem persists, contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately.
Operating the vehicle with the low oil pressure warning lamp ON could cause sudden unexpected engine failure and loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Do not run the engine with low oil pressure warning indicator ON. This may result in engine damage, which will not be covered by the limited warranty.
3.14.1.25 Check Engine Lamp
Graphic
The check engine lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes out in 3 secs. indicating normal status. The lamp blinks or illuminates continuously if there is a fault in the engine management system. Switch OFF the engine immediately. Contact the nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer for necessary repairs.
3.14.1.26 Battery Charging System Warning Lamp
Graphic
The battery charging system warning lamp illuminates when the battery is not being charged or when there is a malfunction in the alternator.
This lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes out as soon as the engine is started. If the lamp continues to remain ON even after starting the engine, it is an indication that the battery is not being charged or there is a malfunction in the alternator. Check the alternator drive belt for looseness/breakage. If the drive belt is okay, switch OFF all unnecessary electrical equipment and recheck. Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer for further assistance.
3.14.1.27 High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Lamp
Graphic
The high engine coolant temperature warning lamp flashes when the coolant temperature is above 110ºC. It starts to flash when the temperature reaches 110ºC and will be continuously ON with buzzer alert when the temperature reaches 114ºC.
Do not continue driving the vehicle with an overheated engine. This may result in engine damage, which will not be covered by the limited warranty.
3.14.1.28 Over Speed Warning Lamp (If equipped)
Graphic
Overspeed warning lamp will start blinking when vehicle speed is above 120kmph. When speed starts to decrease, lamp will keep blinking till 114 kmph.
3.14.1.29 AT Warning Lamp (if equipped)
Graphic
The AT warning lamp illuminates when the ignition switch is turned ON and goes out as soon as the engine is started.
In a continues multiple aggressive launch condition, Clutch over heating possible.
If the clutch is overheated, the lamp will blink when you try to drive away the vehicle from standstill condition. The lamp will go OFF once the clutch temperature is back to normal.
Creep functionality of AT will be disabled during the clutch over heating and the same will be restored once the clutch temperature returns to Normal. This will prevent further abuse and damage of clutch by overheating.
If the lamp remains ON even after starting the engine, or illuminates while driving, there is a possibility of malfunction in AT system. Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately.
In a clutch overheated condition, the MIL will blink only when the driver tries to move the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal but will remain ON if the vehicle is in standstill or driving.
AT Warning lamp will blink in case of clutch overheating. Follow the below mentioned steps during this condition:
•  Pull the vehicle to the kerb and STOP the vehicle
•  Shift the gear to Neutral
•  Wait till the warning lamp turns-OFF
•  If the warning lamp keeps blinking and not turning-OFF, Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately
3.14.1.30 DPF Indicator Lamp
Graphic
If the DPF indicator is ON in the engine running condition then DPF regeneration has not happened. Follow the instructions mentioned in the “‘EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM”.
3.14.1.31 DEF Indicator Lamp
Graphic
If the DEF indicator is ON in the engine running condition then DEF Level is low or incorrect DEF has been filled or DEF Dosing is malfunctioning. Follow the instructions mentioned in the ‘EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM”.
3.14.1.32 REGEN Indicator Lamp
Graphic
It indicates the DPF Manual Regeneration is Required.
Also it is ON when manual regeneration is in progress
3.14.1.33 Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) (If equipped)
The AVH Lamp illuminates, there is a malfunction in AVH.
Graphic
Illuminates
There is a malfunction in AVH
Graphic
Illuminates
AVH is in Standby mode
Graphic
Illuminates
AVH is in Active mode
•  When the AUTO HOLD switch is operated, the AUTO HOLD system will be switched to READY mode and the "AUTO HOLD" indicator on the instrument cluster will be illuminated in white.
•  Operating the AUTO HOLD switch again turns off the indicator and deactivates the AUTO HOLD system.
If the yellow AUTO HOLD warning lamp is turned on, have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Mahindra Dealer or Authorised Mahindra Service Centre
3.14.1.34 Smart Pilot Assist Warning Lamp (If equipped)
Graphic
The warning light illuminates on the display when SPA system is in fail/Malfunction

Graphic
Illuminates
SPA system is in Standby state
Graphic
Illuminates
SPA system is in Active state
Graphic
Illuminates
SPA system is in Not Working/Fail state
The warning light illuminates When the radar sensor/Camera sensor or cover is blocked with dirt or snow or if there is permanent failure.
•  Check the radar sensor and cover and clean them by using a soft cloth.
•  Check if there is foreign matter on the Front camera lens.
If the problem is not solved, we recommend you to contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further assistance.
3.14.1.35 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Warning Lamp (if equipped)
Graphic
Indicates Adaptive cruise control system temporarily not available due to temporary abnormal condition.
Graphic
Illuminates
ACC system is in Standby state
Graphic
Illuminates
ACC system is in Active state
Graphic
Illuminates
ACC system temporarily not available due to temporary abnormal condition
Graphic
Illuminates
ACC system is Not Working/Fail State
The warning light illuminates When the radar/camera sensor or cover is blocked with dirt or snow.
•  Check the radar sensor and cover and clean them by using a soft cloth.
•  Check if there is foreign matter on the Front camera lens.
If the problem is not solved, we recommend you to contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further assistance.
Graphic
Indicates permanent failure of Adaptive cruise control system. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.
3.14.1.36 High Beam Assist Lamp (if equipped)
Graphic
This warning light illuminates when the driver sets HBA ON/OFF via cluster and Auto Light Switch to ON and Head Lamp Switch to High.
•  Check if the system is affected by the weather. (e.g. fog, heavy rain, etc.)
•  Check if there is foreign matter on the Front camera lens.
If the problem is not solved, we recommend you to contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further assistance.
3.14.1.37 Automatic Emergency Braking ON/OFF Warning Lamp (if equipped)
Graphic
The warning light illuminates on the digital display, when user turned OFF the AEB system. The driver can monitor the AEB ON/OFF status on the digital display. If the warning light remains ON when the AEB is activated, we recommend you to have the system checked by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further assistance
3.14.1.38 Automatic Emergency Braking Warning/Malfunction Lamp (if equipped)
Graphic
This warning lamp Indicates temporary or permanent fault in Automatic Emergency braking system.
The warning light illuminates When the radar/camera sensor or cover is blocked with dirt /snow or if there is permanent failure.
•  Check the radar sensor and cover and clean them by using a soft cloth.
•  Check if there is foreign matter on the Front camera lens.
•  If the problem is not solved, we recommend you to contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further assistance.
3.14.1.39 LKA System Warning Lamp (if equipped)
Graphic
If there is a problem with the LKAS system, a message (Lane Keep Assist unavailable) will appear for a few seconds. If the problem continues the LKAS failure indicator (yellow) will illuminates. We recommend you to Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further assistance.
Graphic
Illuminates
LKA system is in Standby state
Graphic
Illuminates
LKA system is in Active state
Graphic
Illuminates
LKA system is in Not Working/Fail state
When there is a problem with the system, do one of the following:
•  Check if the system is affected by the weather. (e.g. fog, heavy rain, etc.)
•  Check if there is foreign matter on the Front camera lens.
•  If the problem is not solved, we recommend you to contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further assistance.
LKA System Warning Lamp with blinking:
If the Front Camera (FCM) is not calibrated properly, this warning lamp blinks continuously. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.
3.14.1.40 LDW System Warning Lamp (if equipped)
Graphic
If there is a problem with the LDW system, a message (Lane Departure Warning unavailable) will appear for a few seconds. If the problem continues the LDWS failure indicator (yellow) will illuminate . We recommend you to Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further assistance.
Graphic
Illuminates
LDW system is in Standby mode
Graphic
Illuminates
LDW system is in Active state
Graphic
Illuminates
LDW system is in Not Working/Fail state
When there is a problem with the system, do one of the following::
•  Check if the system is affected by the weather. (e.g. fog, heavy rain, etc.)
•  Check if there is foreign matter on the Front camera lens.
•  If the problem is not solved, we recommend you to contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further assistance.
LDW System Warning Lamp with blinking:
If the Front Camera (FCM) is not calibrated properly, means this warning lamp blinks continuously. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.
3.14.1.41 4WD Low
Graphic
This lamp indicates that the vehicle is running in the 4WD low gear. Driving in this mode gives maximum traction while driving on all adverse conditions.
3.14.1.42 4WD High
Graphic
This lamp indicates that the vehicle is driven in the 4WD high gear. Driving in this mode gives more traction while driving on cross-country roads .
3.14.1.43 Electronic Locking Differential (ELD) (If equipped)
Graphic
The lamp glows continuously to indicate that the Electronic Locking Differential (ELD) is engaged. When the ELD is engaged, both the LH and RH wheels of the rear axle rotate at the same speed, providing better traction in off-road or slippery conditions.
Blinking lamp indicates, that the system is unable to engage the ELD due to various constraints. Refer ELD section for more information
3.14.1.44 Intelligent Turn Assist (ITA) (If equipped)
Graphic
When the ITA lamp glows continuously, it indicates that the ITA system is engaged. This system will brake the rear inner wheel while making tighter turns during off-road conditions to enhance vehicle maneuverability and control.
Blinking: When ITA is active, it indicates that braking is happening on the inner rear wheel to assist with tighter turns during off-road conditions. This enhances vehicle maneuverability and traction control. Refer ITA section from brakes for more information.
3.14.1.45 Smart Crawl Assist (SCA) (If equipped)
Graphic
When the SCA lamp glows continuously, it indicates that the SCA function is selected and available for activation during off-road trails. This feature enhances vehicle control and stability in challenging terrains. Refer SCA section from brakes for more information.
4 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM - Applicable for Diesel
The emission control system is a highly effective system which controls exhaust emissions from the engine and crucial for meeting emission norms specified by law.
Your vehicle is equipped with the following emission control systems for meeting BS VI emission norms.
1. Diesel Oxidation Catalyst (DOC)
2. Selective Catalytic Reduction(SCR)
3. Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
In order to ensure proper function of the emission control systems, it is mandatory to get your vehicle inspected and maintained by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer. The maintenance schedule in this manual need to be followed.
It is also extremely important to use correct grade of fuel, Confirming to IS 1460; 2017 BS VI Specification.
4.1 Diesel Oxidation Catalyst (DOC)
A diesel oxidation catalyst (DOC) is an after treatment component that is designed to convert carbon monoxide (CO) and hydrocarbons (HC) into carbon dioxide (CO2) and water (H2O).
4.2 Selective Catalytic Reduction(SCR)
Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) is an advanced active emission control technology system that injects a liquid-reducing agent through a special catalyst into the exhaust stream of a diesel engine. The reductant is called as Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF). The DEF sets off a chemical reaction that converts nitrogen oxides into nitrogen and water which is then expelled through the vehicle tailpipe.
4.2.1 Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) MaxiCLEAN
To enable SCR system work efficiently and to ensure emission compliance, It is recommended to use MaxiCLEAN DEF meeting IS 17042 (or) ISO 22241 specification.
Refilling DEF is part of regular maintenance service. DEF consumption is highly dependent on driving conditions/pattern. It may be necessary to refill DEF reservoir in-between the scheduled service, You need to monitor DEF Indicator Tell Tale and symbols/text messages displayed on infotainment screen / Cluster.
MaxiCLEAN DEF is available at all the Mahindra Authorised Dealers in variable packs. Individual DEF Packs may have specific filler neck, for filling DEF in the vehicle. While refilling DEF, Ensure no spillage on the body of self and vehicle to avoid any stains or inconvenience.
It is unlawful to tamper with or remove any component of the after treatment system. It is strongly recommended not to use DEF which is not meeting above specification. Further, this may lead to emission non-compliance and warranty will be void.
•  Use Genuine DEF MaxiCLEAN always.
•  Incase of non-availability of above Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) complying to IS 17042 (or) ISO 22241 specification can be used.
•  Never attempt to use agricultural grade urea mixed with water. Agricultural grade urea does not meet the necessary specifications and the after treatment system of your vehicle may be damaged.
•  Total DEF quantity inside the DEF Tank should never be more than 20 liters. Overfilling may result in system/component failure.
•  DEF quality and purity can be ensured only if it is stored properly. Hence ensure the storage of DEF in cool, dry place between storage.
•  Do not add urea to DEF and do not dilute with water. This may cause after treatment system damage.
•  While refilling DEF inside tank, be careful not to allow any foreign particles, liquids, wiping paper/clothing fibers or lint to get inside the system. These may clog or damage the system.
•  If DEF is spilled over vehicle components and metal surfaces, rinse with water or wipe off with sponge and water. DEF residues will corrode the components and metal surfaces, painted body panels.
•  DEF is not a fuel additive and must not be added to the diesel fuel tank. If DEF is mixed with the diesel fuel, engine/fuel system could get damaged.
•  In such a case , do not start the engine and immediately contact nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer for assistance.
4.2.2 Contamination/ Incorrect DEF
In the event that incorrect or contaminated fluid is filled inside DEF Tank, contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer to determine the appropriate repair direction.
4.2.3 Handling of DEF
•  Ensure that DEF does not come into contact with skin, eyes, or clothing
•  Keep DEF out of the reach of children
•  In case if any part of the body is in contact with DEF, clean affected area immediately with plenty of water
•  If DEF contacted with eyes, flush with plenty of water immediately and seek medical help.
•  If DEF is swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water, drink plenty of water immediately and seek medical help.
•  Don’t store DEF refill containers inside the vehicle. Ammonia vapors may escape from container which have a pungent odor and are particularly irritating for skin, mucous membranes and eyes. Inhaling ammonia vapors may cause burning eyes, nose and throat, as well as cough and watering eyes.
•  When opening the DEF filler cap, ammonia vapors may escape. Refill DEF in a well ventilated area only.
•  If Diesel Exhaust Fluid is spilled on metal surfaces rinse and clean immediately with water. Failure to do so may leave permanent corrosive stains on the metal surfaces which cannot be removed.
4.2.4 DEF Operating Condition
DEF will freeze at -11°C (12.2°F). This is natural phenomenon. The DEF system in the vehicle is designed considering this and does not require any external heating or additives to avoid freezing.
The Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) system purges to prevent damage from freezing. Do NOT disconnect battery power within 20 minutes of switching the ignition key off. Failure to comply may result in vehicle or property damage.
4.2.5 Refilling DEF
Your Vehicle DEF Filler Neck is located near the Fuel filler Neck. The DEF storage tank is located under the body.
Following below steps to refill the DEF:
Graphic
1. Park the vehicle on level ground and switch OFF the ignition.
2. The fuel lid is manually locked/unlocked from outside by using conventional key.
3. Rotate the DEF filler cap in anti-clockwise direction and remove.
4. Fill DEF from the Container Pack. Each container pack has unique mouth and filling provision. Ensure utilizing the same and avoid spillage. Example. 10 Lit. Pack provided with filler tube.
5. Fill DEF as required. Maximum Storage capacity 20 litre. Minimum filling 5.0 liter.
6. Rinse with water or use sponge wetted with water to clean the components/surfaces in case of DEF spills over.
7. Put the DEF filler cap back in its place and tighten in the clock wise direction, then close the fuel lid shut.
8. Switch the ignition ON
9. Verify that there is no warning regarding DEF low level. If DEF Level Low warning is still appearing, Check enough quantity filled, If still problem persist Contact nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.
10. DEF is being monitored through iSmart tool during regular service at dealership and quantity will be filled accordingly.
It is highly recommended to DEF filling always at Ignition off condition only
4.3 Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
The Diesel particulate filter (DPF) is an integral part of the vehicle exhaust gas emission reduction systems and it removes the soot from (Particulate matter) the exhaust gas. Unlike a disposable air filter, the DPF is regenerative filter. Regeneration is triggered automatically according to the driving conditions which burns of the accumulated particles/soot. In other words, the active burning by engine control system and high exhaust gas temperature caused by normal/high driving condition burns and removes the accumulated soot. The process is called as DPF Active Regeneration.
However, if the vehicle continues to be driven at either of the following conditions the accumulated soot may not be automatically removed because of low exhaust gas temperature.
1. Heavy traffic driving conditions, especially in city
2. Frequent short trips
3. Low speed for a long time
Graphic
When more than a certain amount of soot deposited, the DPF lamp illuminates.
If the DPF lamp turns ON or Blinking while driving the vehicle, then it indicates DPF regeneration has not occurred successfully. At this moment, we suggest DPF regeneration must be done through a specific methodology. The same is as mentioned below:
Take vehicle to highway and drive for 20–30 mins @ speeds above 60 kms/hr until the lamp to turns off
(or)
Perform DPF Park Regeneration
DPF park regeneration is only possible when the REGEN telltale is ON in the instrument cluster
•  Park the vehicle safely in a well ventilated levelled open space and free of any flammable material.
•  Shift the gear lever to Neutral with the engine running and apply the parking brake.
Graphic
Graphic
•  REGEN screen will appear in the drive info menu of instrument cluster when the REGEN telltale is ON
•  REGEN screen will go OFF if REGEN telltale turns OFF.
•  When in the REGEN screen of the drive info menu, long Press OK button to start park regeneration.
•  Once regeneration starts, “In Progress” text will appear below REGEN. The engine idle speed will increase indicating regeneration has started..
•  Park Regeneration can take up to 30 minutes to complete. Once completed the REGEN warning lamp in the instrument cluster will turn OFF. The engine’s idling speed also returns to normal
Park Regeneration process may not start if CHECK ENGINE LAMP or OBD are ON in the cluster. Take vehicle to Mahindra authorised dealer for assistance.
When Park regeneration is happening do not press the Accelerator, Brake or Clutch pedals as this will cancel the regeneration process.
When Park regeneration is happening, switching off the ignition will cancel the regeneration process. The park regeneration process may not start if requested when the engine is switched ON again. Take the vehicle to highway and drive for 20–30 minutes @ speeds above 60kms/hr until DPF warning lamp turns OFF
(or)
Take vehicle to Mahindra authorised dealer for assistance
Diesel Fuel
It is recommended to use the regulated automotive diesel fuel confirming to IS 1460: 2017 spec only.
If the diesel fuel with high sulfur content (more than 10 PPM) and unspecified additives are used, it can cause the DPF system damage and emission warranty issues.
•  During the regeneration process, take care the vehicle is not near any flammable materials as you may observe hot emission gases from exhaust pipe.
•  In order to avoid burns & personal injury, stay yourself away from exhaust system.
•  Follow speed limits & traffic regulations as defined by local jurisdiction while doing forced regeneration.
4.4 Alerts in Cluster
4.4.1 DPF Alert
DPF is clogged
Graphic
DPF Alert message will appear when the DPF is clogged. Contact Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately for assistance.
4.4.2 DEF Alert
Introduction
Graphic
DEF Tell Tale will get illuminated and relevant messages will be flashed on Cluster screen due to any of the following reasons:
•  DEF level low
•  Incorrect DEF detected
•  DEF dosing malfunction
It is unlawful to tamper with or remove any component of the after treatment system. It is strongly recommended not to use DEF which is not meeting above specification. Further, this may lead to emission non-compliance and warranty will be void.
4.4.3 DEF Level Indication
When DEF level in tank fall below pre-defined values, warnings are flashed in four stages. These four warning stages are explained below:
E31
E32
E33
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
E34
E35
 
Graphic
Graphic
 
Irrespective of the warning stages, once DEF level is low, 5.0 liter of DEF needs to be filled. If the warnings continue even after refill, contact nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.
In absence of DEF level low warning, refilling is not recommended.
Total DEF quantity inside the DEF Tank should never be more than 20 liter. Overfilling may result in system/component failure. Only Mahindra Authorised Dealer will be able to correctly determine quantity of DEF present inside tank. Hence if you are refilling the DEF yourself, fill only 5.0 liter, in case DEF Low level warning is flashed.
If the DEF warning lamp turns on due to the DEF level, refill the DEF tank. Failure to refill may cause the engine start restriction.
4.4.4 DEF Quality
If SCR system detects quality of DEF inside the tank is not meeting IS 17042 (or) ISO 22241 specification, warnings will flashed in four stages. These four warning stages are explained below:
E11
E12
E13
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
E14
E15
 
Graphic
Graphic
 
If the DEF warning lamp turns on due to the DEF quality, see contamination/incorrect fluid for corrective action. Failure to correct may cause the engine start restriction.
4.4.5 DEF Dosing Malfunction
If SCR system detects any malfunction due to failures in components or tampering, warnings are flashed in four stages. These four stages are explained below:
E21
E22
E23
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
E24
E25
 
Graphic
Graphic
 
If the DEF warning lamp turns on due to dosing malfunction, see your Mahindra Authorised Dealer to have this repaired. Failure to repair the system may cause the engine start restriction.
4.5 Regen Alerts
Regen Aborted
Regen Completed
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Regen Not Started
Regen Requested
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Regen Required
Regen Started
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Procedure for initiating REGEN:
1. If REGEN telltale is ON, navigate to Above page will be available only if regeneration can be done in vehicle and REGEN TT is ON.
2. Hold OK to start regeneration.
3. Once REGEN has started, Text in page will change to REGEN In Progress.
4.6 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
4.7 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale -Assames
Graphic
Graphic
4.8 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale -Bengali
Graphic
Graphic
4.9 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Gujarathi
Graphic
Graphic
4.10 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Hindi
Graphic
Graphic
4.11 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Kannada
Graphic
Graphic
4.12 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Malayalam
Graphic
Graphic
4.13 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Marathi
Graphic
Graphic
4.14 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Oriya
Graphic
Graphic
4.15 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Tamil
Graphic
Graphic
4.16 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Telugu
Graphic
Graphic
5 OPENING AND CLOSING THE VEHICLE
Your THAR comes with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) or Passive Keyless Entry (PKE) depending on the variant. The keys operate all locks in your vehicle including those of the doors and ignition with steering lock.
Graphic
Key Tag: Your key has a unique tag number which will be used incase of key lost. It is given on the tag attached to the key. It is recommended that you record the key tag number and store in a safe place.
Never leave the key in the ignition switch with children in the vehicle. A child could switch on the ignition, start the engine, operate power windows and other controls, or move the vehicle, resulting in personal injuries to the by stander and/or children seated inside.
5.1 Doors
5.1.1 To Open a Door from Inside
Pull the door lever away from the door and push the door outward to open.
Graphic
5.1.2 To Open a Door from Outside
Pull the door handle firmly outwards to unlock and swing the door open.
Front Side
Rear Side
Graphic
Graphic
5.1.3 Locking / Unlocking Individual Doors from Inside
Individual doors can be locked/unlocked from inside by the respective door lock tabs.
Lift the lock tab outwards to unlock or press the tab inwards to lock that particular door.
Graphic
A : Lock
B : Unlock
Locking the driver door from inside activates the central locking system, thereby locking ALL the doors of the vehicle. Refer to Central Locking section for further details.
5.1.4 Manual Locking / Unlocking Doors from Outside
The driver door can be manually locked/unlocked from outside by using conventional key. The key is bi-directional; you can insert it into the keyhole either way. Turn the key anti-clockwise to unlock or clockwise to lock the door.
Graphic
A : Unlock
B : Lock
A keyhole is provided in the driver door to lock/unlock the doors manually from outside.
Locking the driver door from outside activates the central locking system, thereby locking ALL the doors of the vehicle. Refer to Central Locking section for further details.
5.1.5 Locking / Unlocking the Swing Gate
Graphic
To manually lock/unlock Swing Gate by using the key, turn the key anti-clockwise /clockwise respectively.
5.2 Central Locking System
All doors of the vehicle including swing gate can be simultaneously locked or unlocked from the driver door.
5.2.1 Central Locking / Unlocking All Doors from Outside
To manually lock/unlock all the doors from outside using the conventional key, turn the key anti-clockwise /clockwise respectively in the driver door keyhole.
Graphic
A : Unlock
B : Lock
If any doors are open when central locking is activated, the system locks the open doors when they are closed.
Central locking ALL the doors in the vehicle can also be done using the Remote key. Refer the relevant sections in this chapter for more details.
5.2.2 Central Locking / Unlocking All Doors from Inside
Press the driver door lock tab down (A) to lock or lift the lock tab up (B) to unlock all doors simultaneously.
Graphic
A : Lock
B : Unlock
Graphic
Graphic
Driver can simultaneously lock/unlock all the doors by pressing this switch as shown in the image.
5.2.3 Rear Swing Gate
Graphic
To manually unlock the swing gate by using the key when opening the rear swing gate.
Hold flip window and open the swing gate fully and slowly remove pressure from flip window and it will get open.
Graphic
Graphic
   
while closing swing gate, first close flip window and hold in place and close swing gate.
5.3 Control Switches – Power Windows
The driver door switch bank is located on the driver door armrest/handle and controls and the various functions:
Type 1(if equipped)
Graphic
Type 2 (if equipped)
Graphic
A
Driver Door Window Switch
D
Window Lock Switch (if equipped)
B
Rear RH Window Switch
E
Rear LH Window Switch
C
Center Door Lock Switch (if equipped)
F
Passenger’s Window Switch
5.3.1 Power Window Switch
Power windows can be operated only when the ignition is “ON” position.
The driver can operate all the power windows in the vehicle through the quadruple switch on the driver door armrest/handle.
Type 1 (if equipped)
Type 2 (if equipped)
Graphic
Graphic
Other passengers in the vehicle can raise or lower their respective window glasses individually by using the separate switches provided on each of the door trim pads/armrests.
To lower/raise the window glass push/pull, the power window switches respectively.
Graphic
Do not operate the power windows frequently. This will drain the vehicle battery.
If you operate the switches often during a short period of time, the system might become inoperable for a certain duration to prevent damage due to overheating. The system will return to normal functioning shortly.
It is recommended to operate one window switch at a time.
While operating the power windows, check for obstructions like head, hand, etc. which may lead to personal injuries.
5.3.2 Door Lock/Unlock Switch (if equipped)
Graphic
The Door lock/unlock switch is located on the driver door trim. Driver can simultaneously lock/unlock all the doors by pressing this switch as shown in the image.
5.3.3 Power Window Lock Switch (if equipped)
The main power window quadruple switch in the driver door trim has a power window lock switch to enable or disable operation of rear passenger window switches.
Graphic
Graphic
To disable the rear passenger power windows, press the window lock switch down.
To revert to normal operation, press the window lock switch again.
5.3.4 Smart Power Window with Anti-Pinch
This is applicable for driver door only (if equipped)
Smart power window is one of the significant safety features with the anti-pinch function, which automatically reverses the direction of glass if an obstruction is detected during the auto up mode.
Graphic
Graphic
This feature consists of three functions:
•  Auto UP
•  Auto DOWN
•  Anti-Pinch during Auto UP
Auto UP: Pull the power window switch up for a moment and release. The glass moves all the way up automatically. You do not need to hold the switch till the glass closes.
Auto DOWN: Press the power window switch down for a moment and release. The glass moves all the way down automatically. You do not need to hold the switch till the glass comes down.
Anti-Pinch during Auto UP: During Auto UP if any obstacle is detected with the force value ranging between 70~100 N (~7-10 kg), the controller senses the load and reverses the direction of the glass to downward direction for almost full stroke length.
If the force against the glass is less than the specified value, then this function does not operate. So, While operating the power windows, check for obstructions like head, hand, etc. which may lead to severe personal injuries.
If power window anti-pinch is used continuously for more than 8 times, the power window express feature will have thermal cut off and it will not operate for 20 seconds and after that for one cycle it will operate and once the temperature comes to nominal, then it will start operating normally.
5.4 Child Safety Rear Door lock (If equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with left and right-side child safety rear door locks. When the lock mechanism is engaged, the rear door(s) cannot be opened from the inside. The door(s) can only be opened from the outside.
Graphic
To activate the child safety right rear door lock, push the lever down (A) till you hear a distinct click indicating the activation of the child lock.
To de-activate the child safety right rear door lock, pull the lever up (B) till you hear a distinct click indicating the deactivation of the child lock.
If the rear doors are not operable from inside, ensure that the child safety locks have been disabled.
Mahindra strongly recommends that the child safety rear door locks be used whenever there are children travelling in the rear seat.
5.5 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Graphic
A: LED
B: Lock
C: Search (Panic Alarm)
D: Unlock
The front side of the RKE has three control buttons, Unlock, Lock and Search buttons. The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system operates on Radio Frequency (RF). You can insert the key into the ignition with either side up.
5.5.1 To Lock the Vehicle with RKE
Graphic
Press the LOCK button on the key fob for locking and arming the vehicle.
Hazard lamps flash once - if all the doors in the vehicle are locked successfully using RKE.
Hazard lamps flash five times along with an alarm - if any of the doors, bonnet in the vehicle are open.
5.5.2 Unlock the Vehicle with RKE
Graphic
Press the UNLOCK button on the key fob to unlock and disarm the vehicle.
‘Magic lamps’ are activated (selected variants) / Hazard lamps flash twice
Upon the remote lock, if any of the doors are not closed properly or are left open, the hazard lamps will flash five times to indicate the same.
5.6 Smart Key System/Passive Keyless Entry (PKE) (if equipped)
Smart Key System enables you to enter or exit your vehicle without the need to manually lock/unlock the doors. You can start/stop, lock or unlock the vehicle using Smart Key. To do this, you only need to carry the Smart Key with you.
Graphic
A : LED
B : Lock
C : Search
D : Unlock
E : Mechanical key release button
Remote Key Panic alarm feature is not available in Smart Key variants.
The front side of the Smart Key has three control buttons: Lock (B)Search button (C), Unlock (D).
There is also a emergency key release button (E), which releases a mechanical key for emergency purposes (E.g. when PKE battery is low).
Graphic
Press the mechanical key release button to open the key blade.
•  Do not cover the key grip with any material that cuts off RF waves
•  Do not leave the key exposed to high temperatures for a long period, such as on the dashboard or hood under direct sunlight
•  Do not put the key in any liquid or wash it in an ultrasonic washer
•  The Smart Key can malfunction if exposed to moisture or static electricity
Carrying the Smart Key along with you, you can lock or unlock the doors and tail door and even start and stop the engine without inserting the key. Functions of the buttons on a Smart Key is similar to the remote keyless entry.
5.6.1 Engine START/STOP Button (If equipped)
The engine can be started or stopped by the presence of the Smart Key inside the vehicle.
Graphic
Whenever the doors are opened, the engine start/stop button will be illuminated and go off after few seconds.
Upon any fault identification by the system in the start/stop switch, an alert would be provided in the Instrument cluster. Please visit the nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately to rectify the problem.
Even with the failure in the start/stop switch, vehicle's normal function may work which depends on the severity of the failure. Please visit the nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer to rectify the problem immediately.
Engine start/stop button positions: To operate the engine start/stop switch to its intended function, Smart Key should be inside the vehicle.
OFF: To turn off the engine, stop the vehicle and press the engine start/stop button once. Status LED in the engine start/stop button goes OFF to indicate the OFF position.
If the engine is not switching off by pressing the engine start/stop button (one press), press and hold the engine start/stop button for more than 3 seconds or rapidly press and release the engine start/stop button 3 times within 3 seconds. On doing so, the vehicle ignition status is changed to ACC position till 30 seconds, then it will change to OFF position. Contact the nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer at the earliest.
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic anti-theft steering column lock. The steering wheel locks when the engine start/stop button is in OFF position to protect against the theft. The steering wheel locks automatically when the driver door is opened or 25 seconds after engine start/stop button changes to OFF position. If the steering wheel is not locked properly when you open the driver door and on attempting to lock the vehicle, a warning chirp along with the hazard blinks thrice. Try locking the steering wheel again (by toggling Engine Start/Stop button). If the problem is not solved, we recommend to take the vehicle to nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately.
ON: To switch ON the ignition, press the engine start/stop button when the switch position is in OFF/ACC without depressing the brake pedal and with the Smart Key inside the vehicle. Status LED in the engine start/stop button will turn Red to indicate the IGN ON position and the vehicle is ready for starting.
Keeping the vehicle in ignition ON position for longer time without engine running, would drain the battery. Turn OFF the ignition if engine is not to be started.
Vehicle ignition would not turn to ON position on any of the following conditions:
•  If the electronic steering lock is not getting unlocked
–  A warning would be displayed in the Instrument cluster. If the steering wheel doesn’t unlock properly, press the start/stop button while turning the steering wheel right/left to release the tension on the lock.
Graphic
Graphic
Still, if you are not able to turn ON the IGN, please contact the nearest Authorised Mahindra Service Centre.
•  Steering wheel not lock warning
–  If the electronics Steering Wheel not getting even all locking conditions are satisfy then then ESCL will display this warning
Graphic
Graphic
•  Electronic Steering lock module (ESCL) not learned warning.
Graphic
Graphic
–  A warning would be displayed in the Instrument cluster. If the steering wheel does not pair with PKE ECU in this case please contact Mahindra dealership to check system.
•  Steering wheel malfunction warning:
–  A warning would be displayed in the Instrument cluster. If the steering wheel lock unit has system failure. in this case please contact Mahindra dealership to check system failure.
Graphic
Graphic
•  If the key is not detected inside the vehicle or far away from the driver which is not in detectable position
Graphic
Graphic
–  A warning would be displayed in the Instrument cluster along with a beep sound for a few secs. Bring the Smart Key inside the vehicle if not in the vehicle or keep the key away from any electronic gadgets to allow the system to detect the key
–  If still the key is not detected, the key battery might be low. Press the start/stop button once and while the status LED in the button is blinking RED, Keep the key fob on the key mark engraved near the park brake and press the start stop button twice to turn on ignition.
Graphic
Graphic
•  When engine start/stop button is ON or engine is in running condition with vehicle at standstill and if any door is opened, the system checks for the Smart Key. If the Smart Key is not inside the vehicle, an alert in the Instrument cluster is displayed along with a chirp for 5 times to indicate key not detected inside
Graphic
Graphic
Bring the Smart Key inside the vehicle or keep the key in the detectable position whenever you are inside the vehicle.
Starting the vehicle : To start the engine, press the brake and press the engine start/stop button once with the key inside the vehicle. The engine can be started from any position (OFF / ON) of the start/stop switch.
Ensure the TGS is in neutral position before starting.
If engine start/stop button is pressed without pressing the brake pedal, engine will not start and the vehicle power modes will change as follows: OFF→ ON →OFF→ ON
If the engine start/stop button is pressed from the OFF position directly, along with the brake in depressed position, there may be a small delay in the engine cranking. This is normal and not to be taken as a fault.
Never press the engine start/stop button while the vehicle is in motion except in an emergency. This will result in the engine turning off and loss of power assist for the steering and brake systems. This may lead to loss of direction control and braking function, leading to an accident.
Once the engine is started, it would not stop even if the key is not inside the vehicle. Before leaving the driver seat, always make sure engine start/stop button is in OFF position and always take the Smart Key with you. Vehicle safety and security would be affected if these precautions are not followed.
Emergency stop: To turn the engine OFF in an emergency, press and hold the engine start/stop button for more than 3 seconds or panic press rapidly press and release the engine start/stop button 3 times within 3 seconds. On doing so, the vehicle ignition is changed to ACC position.
BACK up Start: If the key fob battery is low, the key may not be detected. In such a situation, press the start/stop button once while the status LED in the button is blinking red color , keep the key fob on key mark engraved near park brake and then press the start/stop switch twice to turn ON the ignition and repeat the same procedure to start engine.
Graphic
Graphic
If key fob battery is detected low by the system, an alert would be triggered while turning OFF the ignition. Change the battery by following the procedure as mentioned in the section for battery replacement.
Graphic
Graphic
Key fob battery low can be detected only if the key has been continuously used in the vehicle. Keeping the key outside the vehicle for longer duration and then using it with the drained battery cannot be detected.
5.6.2 Smart Key Warning
When a smart key is left inside the vehicle and all doors are closed, LCD display shows this message for 5 seconds if you lock the door using the other smart key.
Graphic
Graphic
LCD display shows this message if you leave the vehicle with the Smart Key when the Start/Stop button is ON or Start position.
Graphic
Graphic
LCD display shows this message for 5 seconds if the Smart Key battery is weak when you press the Start/Stop button. Replace the battery with new one.
Graphic
Graphic
LCD display shows this message when start fails due to the battery discharged Smart Key etc.
Graphic
Graphic
LCD display shows this message for 5 seconds when there is malfunction on the Start/Stop button . If the message appears constantly, bring your vehicle to Authorised Mahindra Dealer for checkup.
Graphic
Graphic
5.6.3 Vehicle Locking/Unlocking in an Emergency Situation
If the Smart Key does not operate normally, you can lock or unlock the doors by using the mechanical key:
1. To remove the mechanical key, press and hold the release button in the side of the key fob and pull the mechanical key head.
2. Insert the key into the keyhole in the door nearer to the door handle. Turn the key towards the rear of the vehicle to unlock and turn it towards the front to lock.
3. To reinstal the mechanical key, put the key into the key fob and push it until a click is heard
It is strictly not advisable to leave the key fobs in the vehicle. Vehicle can be started by any unauthorised person.
A maximum of 2 Smart Keys can be registered to a single vehicle. If you lose a key, we strictly recommend to contact Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately to block the lost key and to get a new key.
The Smart Key may not work if any of the following occurs:
•  The Smart Key is close to a radio station, airport or an area where there is a possibility of large radio transmissions which can interfere with the normal operation of the Smart Key
•  The Smart Key is near a mobile or a cellular phone or some electronic gadgets like Laptop/Tablets. The signal from the Smart Key could be blocked by normal operation of your cell phone or smartphone. Avoid placing the Smart Key and your electronic gadgets in the same trouser or jacket pocket or in the bag and maintain adequate distance between the two devices
•  Another vehicle Smart Key is being operated close to your vehicle
•  Smart Key kept inside the glove box or top bin in the instrument panel may not be detected sometimes. Keep the Smart Key in the visible zone or in your pocket for getting it detected
•  Keep the Smart Key away from the water or any liquid. If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to exposure to water or liquids, it will not be covered by your manufacturer’s vehicle warranty
Make sure the vehicle ignition is in OFF state, whenever leaving the vehicle even with the key. By keeping the vehicle ignition in ON/ACC state will hamper the vehicle security.
Do not hand over the Smart Key to any unauthorised person or service provider. Your vehicle security system may be compromised in doing so.
5.7 Remote Battery
Battery Specification
Battery Voltage
3 V
Battery Capacity
225 mAh
Battery Model No.
2032
Remote Battery Replacement
If the Remote operation is inconsistent when any of the buttons are pressed, then it indicates that the Remote battery is weak.
Graphic
`
The rear side of the Remote is snap fitted. Flip open the key blade and use two fingers on the side of the fob and gently pry open the battery cover.
Use a small flat head screwdriver to gently pry out the battery to and discard the same. Insert new batteries of 3V type (Battery No. 2032). While fitting the new battery, ensure the positive side of the batteries face up. Align both the halves of the Remote casing and press to snap fit. Check operation of the Remote.
While prying the Remote case, take care not to damage the battery.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board.
Pull out the battery and discard the same. Insert new battery of same type. While fitting the new battery, ensure the positive side of the batteries face up. Align both the halves of the Remote casing and press to snap fit. Check operation of the Remote.
The Batteries are Lithium Ion batteries. They should be kept away from children.
This product contains a lithium button cell. If the button cell is swallowed, severe internal burns can occur within a mere two hours and lead to death.
Keep new or removed batteries away from children. If the battery compartment does not close securely, discontinue use and keep away from children. If you think that batteries have been swallowed or stuck in any part of the body, seek medical help immediately.
5.8 Remote function
5.8.1 Auto Locking
All doors will get locked automatically when;
•  All doors are closed properly
•  Vehicle speed is greater than 20 kmph
Auto Locking ON DOOR OPEN — Once the auto lock has been activated, if any door is opened when the vehicle speed is below 5 kmph, then the auto lock will reactivate only if all doors are closed, the vehicle speed goes above 20 kmph and the master actuator is in the unlock position.
Auto Locking ON MASTER ACTUATOR UNLOCK — Once the auto lock has been activated, if the master actuator was unlocked at any vehicle speed, then the auto lock will reactivate only when the vehicle speed goes below 5 kmph and further crosses 20 kmph.
5.8.2 Auto Unlocking
Auto Unlock of all doors will happen in the following conditions ;
•  When Ignition is switched from ON to OFF, OR
•  In the event of a crash
5.8.3 Auto Re-locking
Auto Re-lock of all doors will happen when;
•  No door status change for 45 sec after unlocking the vehicle using RKE/PKE
5.8.4 Search (Panic) Function
Graphic
Press the SEARCH/PANIC button on the RKE to locate the vehicle in a parking lot. Panic alarm can also bring attention to the vehicle and surrounding area, warning about an intruder or seek for help when key is in key barrel.
When the SEARCH/PANIC function is ON, the hazard lamps flash along with an alarm for 30 sec. In this mode;
•  Pressing the SEARCH button again switches OFF the alarm
•  Pressing the UNLOCK button switches OFF the alarm and unlocks all doors
The search function works both during the Locked/Unlocked conditions of the vehicle. In the muted condition, When the RKE Search function is ON, only hazard lamps would flash and alarm chirps would not be audible.
5.8.5 Mute/Un-mute Function
Graphic
The horn chirps can be muted / un-muted. Press the LOCK & SEARCH buttons together for 3 sec. to toggle between MUTE/UN-MUTE mode. Hazard lamps will flash once to indicate the change in status.
In the un-muted condition, Horn chirps can be heard during RKE Lock when any of the door open (5 Chirps) .
In the muted condition, only hazard would flash and horn chirps would not be audible.
5.8.6 Theft Detent Warning System
Arming of Vehicle: Once all the doors are closed and locked with remote by pressing lock button, Theft Detent warning system would get activated.
Theft Detent Trigger: If any one tries to manipulate the Ignition or manually opens the doors or manually unlocks the doors, Theft Detent warning system alarm is activated by blinking the turn lamps and blowing Burglar horn for 27 secs. Once the alarm is triggered, it can be disabled by pressing unlock button on remote or switching on the Ignition by using valid key.
5.8.7 Remote Key Operating Range
Graphic
Using RKE, you can lock/arm or unlock/disarm the vehicle from distances approximately 9 m (30 ft) This is in open area.
If there is reduction in RKE range, please follow the steps below:
•  Check the distance: The RKE may be too far from the vehicle. Stand closer to the vehicle during rain or bad weather
•  Check the location: Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signals. Take a few steps to the left or right, hold the RKE higher, and try again. Moreover, closeness to a radio transmitter such as radio station tower, airport transmitter, mobile or CB radios may lead to reduction in range of RKE
•  Check the RKE battery: See battery replacement procedure, given later in this section
•  If the RKE is still not working correctly, contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer
5.9 PKE Center Console Antenna in Back Up Mode
Graphic
The Key fob is to be kept as shown in the image, key mark engraved near park brake, when the system requests, like in the case of the below error message in the instrument cluster.
Graphic
Graphic
This message is displayed only when the PKE system fails to detect the key fob which is inside the vehicle when the user is trying to Switch ON the ignition.
On pressing the Start/Stop switch 1st time with the key fob in the key mark engraved near park brake. The Start-stop switch LED will blink in red color, with the above error message will be displayed again in the cluster.
In this case, if you press the Start/Stop switch again before the above error message in the instrument cluster goes away the 2nd time, the vehicle will start in Back-Up mode, if the Clutch(MT)/Brake(AMT) pedal is pressed.
5.10 If PKE/RKE Key fob is Lost
If you have lost the programmed RKE, contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for procuring a new RKE.
While programming a new key set, you will have to submit all the keys available with you to an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
There is a limitation (max 2 keys at a time) to the number of keys that can be programmed. The minimum time frame required to supply the duplicate keys is 20 days after all the formalities are completed. Please contact the dealer to understand the formalities involved.
If the key is stolen or lost, communicate to an Mahindra Authorised Dealer to de-activate the function of the lost or stolen key. This is essential to avoid unauthorized access using the misplaced key.
Only RKE transmitters programmed to your vehicle electronics can be used for remote locking and unlocking of your vehicle.
5.11 Key Fob Limitations
When the vehicle key fob is not working properly, It may be due to Radio Frequency (RF) interference caused by an external source like transformer, Amateur Radio, etc.. which emits power levels that is higher than the vehicle Key Fob. This interference may be resulting in RF signal not being received by RKE/PKE system controller.
Customer may not get Panic due to this non-function of key fob. After moving from the interference Zone, Key Fob may start working properly.
If still key fob not working then contact Mahindra Authorised service center for assistance.
5.12 Precautions while Handling RKE:
•  Do not cover the key grip with any material that cuts off RF waves
•  Do not leave the key exposed to high temperatures for a long period, such as on the dashboard or hood under direct sunlight
•  Do not put the key in any liquid or wash it in an ultrasonic washer
5.13 Engine Immobiliser System
An Engine Immobiliser System is a security system that prevents the vehicle from being operated by an unauthorised keys. The Engine immobiliser prevents the engine from being started unless it recognises signals from the correct coded key.
The system is automatically activated when the key is removed from the ignition.
5.13.1 Features of the Immobiliser System:
•  Prevents the vehicle being started by anyone not in possession of the correct vehicle key
•  The vehicle is automatically protected after the key is removed from the ignition. At every ignition ON, if the vehicle does not recognise the correct key code, the engine check lamp will illuminate/blink and the engine cannot be started
•  The vehicle will not be protected until the key has been taken out of the ignition
If the engine check lamp flashes or remains continuously illuminated after the ignition being switched ON, there is a system malfunction. Contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.
Inserting the correct coded key in the ignition and switching the ignition ON, automatically deactivates the system. This enables the engine to start.
In the event of the vehicle not starting with the correct key, switch off the ignition for a minimum of 1 minute and attempt to start the vehicle again.
Do not modify, remove or disassemble the engine immobiliser system. Any unauthorised changes or modifications can affect proper operation of the system and will void your warranty.
5.14 Opening/Closing the Hood
Graphic
The hood release lever is located in the driver side foot well area below the instrument panel.
To open the hood, follow the steps as shown below;
1. Pull the catcher locks from the hood mounting bracket to release the hood as shown in the image
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
2. Lift the hood.
Graphic
3. Support the hood by the stay rod
•  Do not open the hood immediately after a drive; the engine compartment will be very hot
•  Always double check to be sure that the hood is firmly latched before driving away. If it is not latched properly, the hood could open while the vehicle is being driven, causing a total loss of visibility, resulting in an accident
•  Do not move the vehicle with the hood in the raised position, as vision is obstructed
Parking of Engine Hood on Windshield is not recommended and may damage Windshield frame, Glass and Hood.
Park the Engine Hood with Stay rod.
Follow the below steps to close the hood;
1. Remove the stay rod from the hood panel and place it in the retaining clip.
2. Lower the hood slowly and allow it to fall by its own weight.
3. Firmly press the catcher locks in the hood mounting bracket. This ensures that locks the hood in its fully closed position
5.15 Fuel-Lid Opening and Closing
Graphic
The fuel lid open switch is located in the driver side switch bank. Press the switch to open the fuel lid door.
Graphic
Graphic
Turn the fuel cap counter-clockwise to open. Refuel and put the cap back in its place and tighten in the clockwise direction till three distinct clicks are heard. Close the fuel lid shut.
Ensure the fuel cap and lid are securely closed before starting the vehicle.
5.15.1 Refilling DEF (Applicable for Diesel Variant)
To enable SCR system work efficiently and to ensure emission compliance, It is recommended to use MaxiCLEAN DEF meeting IS 17042 (or) ISO 22241 specification.
Graphic
Graphic
Do not fill the Diesel fuel in the DEF tank. Which will causing the severe damage to the system.
5.16 Manual Fuel Door Override
Graphic
Open the trim on luggage compartment
Pull the mechanical Fuel lid lever as shown in the illustration to unlock the fuel lid.
Turn the fuel cap counter-clockwise to open. Refuel and put the cap back in its place and tighten in the clockwise direction till three distinct clicks are heard. Close the fuel lid shut.
Then push the mechanical Fuel lid lever as shown in the illustration to lock.
Ensure the fuel cap and lid are securely closed before starting the vehicle.
6 CONVENIENCE SYSTEMS I
6.1 Mirrors
6.1.1 Control Switch – Electric ORVM (if equipped)
ORVM Adjustment: The electric exterior mirror adjustment switch is located on the driver door hand rest. The joystick on the switch can be used to select the left/right mirror and also to adjust the respective mirror.
Graphic
Graphic
6.1.2 Outside Rear View Mirror (ORVM)
Graphic
Integrated exterior rear view mirrors on both the sides facilitate maximum rear view information to the driver.
Both the ORVM’s are hinged and can be manually folded or unfolded. This avoids hindrances in narrow areas and parking slots. Make sure that you fully engage the mirror in its support, while folding or unfolding.
Do not overestimate the distance of the objects that you see in the mirrors. Objects seen in convex mirrors are much closer than they appear.
6.1.3 Interior Rear View Mirror (IRVM)
IRVM
Front Sensor
Graphic
Graphic
The reflection rate of the inside rearview mirror can be automatically adjusted by the light intensity from a vehicle behind you by pressing the auto dimming IRVM ON/OFF switch on infotainment screen.
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
While pressing the switch, its corresponding indicator comes on. Pressing the switch once more turns off the indicator and deactivates the function.
•  Under the following conditions, auto dimming function may not operate properly
•  When the rear vehicle’s head lamp is not beamed directly to the inside rearview mirror’s sensor
•  When the rear window has a dark tinted glass
•  When the gear selector lever is in the R position, auto dimming function will be cancelled to obtain the best rearview
•  For your safety, never adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion
•  The electrolyte may come out when the mirror is broken. Do not allow it to contact your skin or eyes. If you accidentally get it in your eyes, flush with water and see your doctor
•  For your safety, adjust the mirror before driving off the vehicle
Manual Type (if equipped)
Graphic
The interior mirror has day and night (anti-glare) positions. The night position reduces glare from head lamps of vehicles behind you. Flip the tab on the bottom edge of the mirror to select the day or night position.
6.2 Power Outlets
The USB outlets are provided on the centre bezel below the center facia switch bank
The Type ‘C’ Charging Port (A) shown in the image is only for charging.
The Type ‘A’ USB Port (B) shown in the image can be used as an input for the music system.
You can connect iPods, USB memory sticks and other devices as an input to listen to music through the vehicle speakers.
Graphic
A: Type ‘C’ Charging Port
B: Type ‘A’ USB Port
It is recommended to connect an input device only when the vehicle is stationary. Attempting to do so while driving may distract your attention and potentially lead to accidents.
Second Row “C” Type Charger Outlet
Graphic
“C” type charger outlet is provided on the rear side of the floor console below the 2nd row AC vents.
It can be used only for charging and it is intended to be used by second row passengers.
12V - Power Outlet
The 12V power outlet socket is provided below the rear AC vents. Electrical equipment/appliances like mobile phone charger, cigarette lighter, etc. can be used in the outlets.
Graphic
The power sockets function only when the ignition is in ACC or ON positions. It is recommended to use the power sockets when the ignition is ON to avoid battery drain.
To avoid serious injury:
•  Close the power outlet cap when not in use
•  Do not allow children to use or play with the power outlet
•  When using electrical appliances, strictly follow the manufacturer's instruction manual
•  Never use the power outlet for electric heaters while sleeping
•  Never insert foreign objects into the power outlet
•  Never use malfunctioning electrical appliances
•  Never insert inappropriate or badly fitting plugs into the power outlet
Do not modify, disassemble or repair the power outlet in any way. Doing so may result in unexpected malfunction or fire, which could cause serious damage to equipment and/or personal injuries. Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer for any necessary repairs.
To prevent injuries and accidents, secure all electrical appliances before use. Do not use any appliance that may:
•  Distract the driver while driving, or hamper safe driving
•  Result in a fire or burn injuries due to the appliance rolling, falling or overheating
•  Emit steam, while the windows of the passenger compartment are closed
•  Remove the plug from the power outlet after using the electric device. Leaving the electric device plugged in for more time may cause the battery to drain
•  Do not use the power outlet to connect electric accessories or equipment that are not designed to operate on 12V
•  Some electronic devices can cause electronic interference when plugged into the power outlet. These devices may cause excessive audio noise and may interfere with other electronic systems or devices in your vehicle
6.3 Wireless Mobile Charging (If equipped)
Graphic
A wireless mobile charging unit is located in front of the center console below the front USB ports.
The wireless charging will work in ignition ON, Cranking and Engine ON conditions only. It will not work when the vehicle is in accessory mode or in ignition OFF condition.
Follow the below steps to charging mobile in wireless mobile charger.
To start wireless charging, place the smartphone in the center on the antiskid mat and turn the ignition ON. Phone charging indication will appear on the Infotainment screen.
Mahindra Wireless mobile phone charger is a Qi compliant charger. Qi-certified phones only can be charged from all models.
Refer to your smart phone’s user manual or the website of the manufacturer to check whether your smartphone supports QI wireless charging.
Qi certified mobile phones upto 7 inches can be used for charging in the space provided.
Note: Mobile Phones size are calculated by measuring diagonally from the upper left-hand corner of the screen to the lower right-hand corner of the screen. 
Recommended to place the phone on the center of the wireless charger for best results.
Before charging remove the phone cover/case to improve charging efficiency
When your phone stops charging wirelessly due to overheating, it'll resume once it cools down. The phone's temperature limit is lower than the chargers, and using multiple features while charging can also cause it to get hot and slow down or stop charging for battery protection.
When either the wireless charger or the mobile phone gets too hot, wireless charging stops until it cools down, then resumes automatically.
If any metallic object such as coins is placed between the wireless charger and the smart phone, the charging will be stopped & a warning “Foreign object detected’ will be displayed on the cluster. Remove the coin or the metallic object. This is done to stop heating of the metallic object which might hurt the driver or the passengers.
Users can periodically clean the WLC pad to remove dust and liquid spills, allowing it to dry before placing the mobile on the pad.
Do not place mobile upside down and misaligned position from the charging pad. It may not charge or give a warning on the cluster. and don’t put any liquid, dust particles or flammable object in WLC pad.
Do not place any smart key on the charging pad.
Do not place the mobile with any metallic object and NFC cards on WLC, might spoil the card and charging will not happen for 30sec.
Do not cover the WLC pad while your phone is charging. It could make your phone hot and slow down the charging.
Do not keep any Debit/Credit card between the phone & the charger. It may damage the card. A warning is displayed on the cluster for the same.
The wireless charger might have issues if your vehicle is near places with strong radio waves or electrical interference, like TV towers, power plants, gas stations, big displays, or airports.
6.4 Utility Holders
6.4.1 Can/Cup/Bottle Holders (if equipped)
Console Storage with Armrest (If equipped)
Graphic
Graphic
You can use the console storage by lifting up the console lid with the knob.
To avoid possible theft, do not leave valuables in the storage compartment.
Do not store items that are damageable or cause noises since they can move around in the compartment while driving.
Do not store any flammable materials such as cigarette lighter in the console box or other space. In hot weather, they may explode and cause a fire.
By pressing up the console knob, you can use the compartment in the console storage.
The console storage can be used as an armrest for both the driver and the passenger.
You can store a max. 10-inch mobile device (Galaxy tab, iPad, etc.) in the centre console storage.
Front Cup Holder
Graphic
The cup holder located in the floor console between the front seats, It can be used for small cups or cans that are closed or have a lid.
Rear Cup Holder and armrest (If equipped)
Graphic
The cup holders are located on both the left and right side trims.
Only sealed cups/cans with lid to be used in the cup holders.
Use caution when using the cup holders. A spilled beverage that is very hot can injure the driver or passengers. Spilled liquids can also damage interior trim and electrical components.
Any spilled beverage can also startle the driver and cause loss of control of the vehicle, resulting in an accident.
Never place objects other than cups or cans in the cup holder. These objects can be thrown out in the event of a sudden stop or an accident, possibly injuring the passengers in the vehicle.
Bottle Holder
Graphic
Bottle holders are located on both the front door lower trims. You can use them to store maps, papers, small books, bottles, etc.
Only sealed/closed bottles are to be used in the bottle holders.
6.4.2 Glove Box
The instrument panel houses a glove box on the passenger side.
It is also recommended to keep copies of all vehicle documents in the glove box for reference when needed.
Graphic
Graphic
Do not overload the glove box.
Do not store loose or small metal objects inside the glove box. This will lead to rattling while the vehicle is driven on bad roads.
To avoid the possibility of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, the glove box lid should be kept closed when the vehicle is in motion.
6.4.3 Sun Visor
Graphic
The sun visors can be used for either frontal or sideward shade, to reduce glare or to shut out direct rays of the sun. The sun visor can be swivelled to the side, to provide shade from the glare of the sun.
In certain variants, a vanity mirror is provided on the back of the front passenger sun visor.
6.5 Grip Handle and Luggage Hook
Grip Handle
Graphic
The grip handles are provided above the front row outboard seats.
6.6 Horn
Graphic
Press the pad on the steering wheel to blow/sound the horn.
The horn functions even when the ignition has been switched OFF.
Horn will get activated when horn switch/pad is pressed
It will get deactivated when horn switch/pad is released or after 10 sec of continuously pressing.
If Horn Switch Input is ON for more than 10 sec, Horn will get deactivate after 10 sec.
6.7 Speakers & Tweeters
Graphic
Graphic
Speakers : Speakers are located on the bottom of Instrument panel and roof central member near twitters.
Graphic
Tweeters: Tweeters are located on the roof panel.
Tech Pack Variant:
Graphic
Speakers and Tweeters: Speaker and Tweeter are located in door trims.
Graphic
Sub woofer: It is located on the right-side trim.
6.8 Magazine Pocket (If equipped)
Graphic
The magazine pocket is on the right side trim. It can hold lightweight papers/books/magazines, etc.
Do not place large or hard objects in the magazine pockets. Do not put heavy objects in the magazine pockets.
6.9 Switch Bank (If equipped)
Driver side Switch bank is located on the RH side of driver on the Instrument panel.
You can check the vehicle information and choose vehicle settings using the switches.
Graphic
S.NO
Switches
S.NO
Switches
A
Fuel Lid Open
E
Turn Assist
B
ESP OFF
F
FPAS OFF
C
Foot Lamp
G
HDC
D
Smart Crawl Assist*
H
Engine Stop/Start button *
6.10 Center Fascia Switches
Graphic
S.NO
Switches
S.NO
Switches
A
Ventilated Seat Co-Driver
E
Terrain Mode 4*4
B
PAB ON indicator
F
Electronic Locking Differential (ELD)
C
PAB OFF indicator
G
Ventilated Seat Driver
D
Hazard warning switch
   
6.11 Microphone (if applicable)
Type 1
 
Graphic
Graphic
The microphone is located on the front of roof. It is used when talking on the phone. The person you are speaking to can be heard from the front speakers.
To use the hands-free system, you must pair your Bluetooth® phone in the system.
6.12 Follow-Me Home (FMH) Non RKE
This feature helps the driver and passengers to easily get out of the vehicle during poor light conditions. The head lamp low beam is turned ON for about 20 seconds, assisting the passengers to find their way.
To enable FMH;
•  Ignition transition from ON to OFF
•  Park lamp ON to OFF
•  Ignition key is out
•  Open Driver door
•  Head lamp low beam will turn ON for 20 seconds
To disable FMH
•  FMH ON 20 seconds expires
•  Park lamp transition from OFF to ON
6.13 Follow-Me Home (FMH) RKE
This feature helps the driver and passengers to easily get out of the vehicle during poor light conditions. The head lamp low beam is turned ON for about 20 seconds, assisting the passengers to find their way unless cancelled by the UNLOCK signal from the RKE.
To enable FMH;
•  Ignition transition from ON to OFF
•  Park lamp ON to OFF
•  Ignition key is out
•  Double press RKE LOCK
•  Head lamp low beam will turn ON for 20 seconds unless cancelled by the UNLOCK signal
To extend FMH;
•  The first RKE LOCK command will be used for locking all doors
•  Successive RKE LOCK commands will be used for toggling the current status of the head lamp low beam
•  Each time FMH is extended, the head lamp low beam will be kept/turned on for the next 20 seconds
•  If no extension is provided for 3 mins, FMH will get expired
To disable FMH
•  Park lamp transition from OFF to ON
•  Ignition off to any other states
•  FMH ON 20 seconds expires
•  Max time of 3 mins has elapsed and no extension of FMH
With FMH mode ON, if the UNLOCK signal is received twice from RKE; the feature gets deactivated and cannot be extended further. Also, the doors are unlocked and vehicle disarmed.
6.14 Lead Me to Vehicle (LMV) (RKE)
LMV is the feature that switches the head lamp ON in low beam for 20 sec helping the passengers to reach the parked vehicle safely and comfortably at night.
To enable LMV;
•  Ignition key is out
•  Press UNLOCK button twice on the RKE
•  Park lamps OFF
•  System will unlock all doors and disarm the vehicle followed by head lamp turning ON for 20 sec
If FMH has already expired, LMV would turn ON in the 2nd Press RKE Unlock.
To extend LMV;
•  Successive UNLOCK commands received from RKE is used for toggling the current status of the head lamp low beam
•  Each time LMV is extended the low beam will be kept/turned on for next 20 seconds
To disable LMV;
•  LMV ON 20 seconds expires
•  LOCK command is received from RKE
•  Ignition off to any other states
•  Park lamp is switched ON
6.15 Lamps
6.15.1 Interior Lamps
The Roof lamp is located in the roof above the front & Rear seats. The lamp can be switched on using the switch on the lamp.
Graphic
Graphic
A
Map Reading Lamp- LH
C
Map Reading Lamp- RH
B
Door Mode Switch
   
Do not leave the Roof lamp in permanent ON mode. This will drain your vehicle battery.
The Roof lamp switch has three operation modes to choose from;
1. The lamp remains permanently ON in this position irrespective of the door open status
2. The lamp remains permanently OFF in this position
3. The lamp remains in AUTO mode in this position. The operation of the Roof lamp in Auto mode is as follows;
•  Roof lamp switches ON, dims and goes OFF after a preset delay once RKE unlock is performed
•  Roof lamp switches ON when any of the doors is/are open
•  Roof lamp switches ON when Ignition on to ignition off all doors closed condition
•  Roof lamps dim and go OFF after a preset delay upon closing of all doors during IGN OFF condition
•  Roof lamps dim and go OFF immediately on RKE lock or manual key lock after all doors are closed
•  If any of the doors are not closed properly, then the Roof lamps switch OFF automatically after a preset duration (during Key removal from key Barrel) or once the vehicle speed > 20 kmph
•  Roof lamps go OFF with ignition ON and all doors closed properly
Map Reading Lamp (if equipped):
Graphic
Map reading lamps are located on the both sides of the roof near the grab handle above the second-row seats.
Do not leave the roof/map reading lamp in permanent ON mode. This will drain your vehicle battery.
6.15.2 Exterior Lamps
Lighting Control Stalk: The lighting control stalk is located on the right-hand side of the steering wheel and is a part of the combination switch.
It controls operations of parking lamps, head lamps, head lamp beam selection, high beam flashing, front/rear fog lamps and turn signals when the ignition switch is ON.
Graphic
Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk clockwise aligning the “arrow” on the stalk to Position “OFF” to switch OFF all lamps.
i) Turn Signals
Graphic
A: Turn Signal - Left xxxxx B: Turn Signal - Right
Taking a Right Turn:
•  Push the lighting control stalk clockwise to indicate a right turn. The instrument cluster arrow lamp pointing towards the right flashes along with the right side turn signal lamps (front, rear & ORVM) with chime indicating your intention of turning towards right
After you have completed your right turn, the stalk will automatically return to the neutral position switching OFF turn indicator lamp.
Taking a Left Turn :
•  Push the lighting control stalk anti-clockwise to indicate a left turn. The instrument cluster arrow lamp pointing towards the left flashes along with the left side turn signal lamps (front, rear & ORVM) with chime indicating your intention of turning towards left
•  After you have completed your left turn, the stalk will automatically return to the neutral position switching OFF turn indicator lamp.
If the turn signal lamps on the instrument panel flash faster than normal, there may be a possibility that one or more of the turn signal lamp bulbs have blown. Replace the blown bulb immediately.
Changing Lanes:
The system is equipped with One Touch Lane Indicator function which can be used to signal a lane change
To signal a lane change, move the light control stalk clockwise or anti-clockwise to the limit point of free movement of the lever and release. The turn signals will flash three times and stop.
The turn signals will continue flashing as long as the lighting control stalk is held in the limit point of free movement.
ii) Parking Lamp ON
Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk clockwise/downward aligning the “arrow” on the stalk 2nd position from the top position to switch ON the parking lamps.
Graphic
The tail lamp, license plate lamp, instrument panel illumination lamps and all interior switches are also activated when the parking lamp is switched ON.
The Park lamps will be switched OFF automatically after opening the driver door. If a user still wants a park lamp they must turn OFF & turn ON manually.
Park Lamp Warning Buzzer: A warning buzzer sound will be provided if the park lamp is left ON with ignition OFF, as soon as driver door is opened.
iii) Head Lamp “AUTO” Function
Graphic
Auto head lamp switches ON the head lamp based on the outside ambient light sensed by the RLS sensor. This is useful when travelling through tunnels or low light areas.
Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk clockwise/upward aligning the “arrow” on the stalk to the 3rd position from top to switch ON Auto head lamp function
•  Do not clean the sensor with detergent or wax
•  On a foggy, snowy, rainy, or cloudy day, be sure to use manual mode. The turning on or off time of the lamps varies depending on the weather, season, or circumstances
•  Any aftermarket sunfilm or spray may cause the lighting system to malfunction
•  When the switch is turned to the “AUTO” position, room, tail, and head lights might blink for a very short time. It is a normal phenomenon recognising the automatic setting
•  There may be a difference between ambient light intensity sensed by the RLS sensor and the human eye. Hence it is possible that during low light conditions, the head lamp is activated early as the RLS sensor senses it as low intensity. This is a normal behaviour.
iv) Head Lamp ON
Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk clockwise aligning the “arrow” on 1st position from the top to switch ON the head lamps.
Graphic
v) Head Lamp Low/High Beam: Switch ON the head lamp, and push the lighting control stalk down (away) from steering wheel to switch ON the head lamp high beam & lift/pull the lighting control stalk up again towards the steering wheel to switch ON the head lamp low beam. In head lamp high beam, the high beam tell-tale lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates indicating high beam option selected.
Graphic
A
Low Beam
B
High Beam
Your vehicle head lamps are vented and moisture may be collected on the inside of the head lamp lens under certain climatic and geographical conditions. This moisture will evaporate once the head lamps have been switched ON for a few minutes.
vi) Head Lamp Flash: Pull the lighting control stalk towards the steering wheel to instantaneously flash the head lamp high beam and Low beam.
Graphic
Head Lamp Levelling System
Graphic
When the vehicle is either fully or partially loaded, it may have an upward inclination disturbing the head lamp aiming. A correct head lamp setting provides good visibility to the driver with minimum inconvenience to other road users.
To properly aim the head lamp beam, use the head lamp levelling switch.
This switch is located on the right side of the steering column shroud in the instrument panel. This switch has three positions marked as 0, 1 & 2.
Select the suitable switch position depending on the pay load as advised in the table.
Switch Position
Vehicle Loading Condition
0
Driver only or Driver with front passenger
1
Driver + Front passenger + Rear seat occupied
2
All seats occupied
3
All seats occupied with luggage OR Driver with luggage at extreme rear side
The headlights can only be adjusted when the low beam is switched ON.
6.15.3 Hazard Warning Lamp
Graphic
The hazard warning lamp switch is located below the AC controls on the instrument panel.
Use the hazard warning lamp when your vehicle is stationary or to warn other road users to be cautious while passing your vehicle.
To turn the hazard warning lamp ON, press the switch input. All the turn signal lamps flash. To turn OFF, press the switch again.
Hazard lamps are also switched ON during the following conditions;
•  Crash — Hazard would be turned on for 30 mins
•  Panic Braking — Hazard lamps are turned on automatically for 10 seconds during panic braking condition to indicate following traffic.
Pressing the hazard switch twice deactivates this feature.
6.15.4 Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) / Rear Park Lamp (if equipped)
To enable DRL/Rear Park Lamp: In daytime whenever the vehicle is in running and park lamp switch is in OFF position, DRL / Rear Park Lamp is enabled.
To disable DRL: Whenever the vehicle is in running and park lamp is ON, DRL will get switch to park mode
If customer doesn’t want the DRL/Rear Park Lamp to be ON, he can disable through infotainment settings.
6.15.5 Fog Lamps (If equipped)
Fog lamps (if equipped) are to be used along with head lamp low beam, to improve the vision during foggy and misty conditions.
Front Fog Lamps ON: To switch ON the front fog lamps, first switch ON the parking lamps, rotate the inner rotary switch on the lighting control stalk clockwise aligning the front fog lamp icon to the “arrow” on the inner fixed stalk as shown.
The front fog lamp indicator in the instrument cluster indicates the operation status.
Graphic
Fog lamps will turn ON only if parking lamp is ON due to Park light input or Auto light input.
Fog Lamps OFF: Align the “marking” of inner rotary switch on the lighting control stalk to the “OFF” position on the inner fixed stalk as shown to switch OFF the fog lamps.
Graphic
6.15.6 Rear Defogging
There are heating grids on the tailgate glass. Be careful not to damage the heating grids while cleaning inside of the tailgate window.
Do not coat the tailgate window with commercial anti-glare film. When the metal anti-glare film and two-tone anti-glare film is used, the sensitivity of the heating grids can be deteriorated.
If any transmitter or receiver is close to the antenna, it can interfere with the communication of the antenna.
The heating element of the glass is activated only when the engine is ON. When the glass heater switch is pressed, the heating elements of the rear windshield and outside rearview mirrors are turned on simultaneously.
6.16 Windshield Wipers
6.16.1 Wiper Control Stalk
Graphic
A: Flick- Wipe (MIST)
B: Off
C: Intermittent (INT)/AUTO
D: Low Speed (LO)
E: High Speed (HI)
F: Rotary Switch
Wiper Off: The wipe function is OFF when the wiper control stalk is in neutral position (B).
Flick-Wipe (Mist): Push the wipe control stalk to position (A) for a flick-wipe, hold to operate the wipe continuously (simultaneously lift the wiper stalk towards the steering wheel to operate the wash). The stalk automatically comes back to position (B) when released.
Intermittent (INT) (If equipped):Intermittent (INT) mode wiping is selected when the wipe control stalk is pushed down to position (C). In the INT mode, the wiper operates on preset intervals. The delay between each wipe can be varied by rotating the wiper speed intensity rotary switch (F).
Auto Mode (if equipped): Auto mode wiping is selected when the wipe control stalk is pushed down to position C. In the AUTO mode, the wiper operates based on rain intensity.
The delay between each wipe can be varied by rotating the wiper speed intensity rotary switch (F).
When the ignition key is in the “ON” position, the wiper will automatically operate once if the wiper switch is turned from the “OFF” to the “AUTO” position.
Low Speed Wiping: Push the wipe control stalk down to the position (D) to operate the wiper at a fixed low speed.
High Speed Wiping: Push the wiper control stalk down to position (E) to operate the wiper at a fixed high speed.
6.16.2 Wipe/Wash
Pull/Lift the wiper control stalk towards the steering wheel from any position to activate wipe/wash function. Washer fluid from front washer reservoir is pumped and sprayed onto the windshield. The wipers wipe the windshield 3 times after the washer spray is stopped. Hold the stalk in position for continuous spray of washer fluid.
Graphic
When wiper is in OFF or Intermittent mode:
After completion of the wipe/wash cycle, wipers return to their bottom position.
If the wipers are in Intermittent mode and DWELL delay is less than or equal to 5 secs., then the wiper will continue in the Intermittent mode.
If the wipers are in Intermittent mode, and DWELL delay is more than 5 secs., then a further single wipe will be performed 5 secs. after the wash/wipe cycle. After the drip wipe (last wipe), wiper returns to normal Intermittent wipe.
The wipe/wash function can be activated only when the ignition is in “ON” position.
6.16.3 AUTO Wash (if equipped)
Graphic
When Auto Washer switch is pressed once, Washer fluid from front washer reservoir is pumped and sprayed onto the windshield for 2 seconds. The wipers wipe the windshield 4 times
After that, again Washer fluid from front washer motor will turn ON for 1.5 seconds and the wipers wipe the windshield 3 times
AUTO wash function will work only when the wiper switch is in OFF mode.
6.16.4 Rear Wiper-INT Mode
Graphic
Rotate the outer rotary switch on the wiper control stalk to align the “arrow” on the stalk to the rear wipe “ON” position to operate the rear wiper in INT mode. In this mode, the wiper operates on preset intervals of 4 seconds.
6.16.5 Rear Wiper-ON Mode
Graphic
Rotate the outer rotary switch on the wiper control stalk to align the “arrow” on the stalk to the rear wipe “ON” position to operate the rear wiper continuously .
6.16.6 Rear Wash
Graphic
Push the wiper control stalk towards back side from any position to activate wipe/wash function. The rear windshield wash & wipe operates 3 to 4 times or as long as the stalk end is Push/Pull to the rear wash position. Wiping will continue for 3 times after releasing the stalk end switch.
If you switch OFF the ignition before switching OFF the wiper, the blades stop at random on the windshield. Switch ON the ignition and move wiper stalk to 'MIST' position to return the wipers to the park position, provided the wiper stalk is in OFF position.
Using a windshield washer in freezing temperatures could be dangerous. The washer fluid could freeze on the windshield, and block your vision resulting in an accident. If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40 deg C, use washer fluid with anti-freeze protection.
•  Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry. It may lead to scratches on the glass
•  It is recommended not to use the wiper when the windshield glass is covered with debris, snow or leaves. Clean the glass before using the wiper to avoid damage to the wiper blades and glass
•  Do not operate the windshield washer for more than 10 secs. or when the reservoir is empty
6.16.7 Windshield Washer Jet - Front & Rear
There are two nozzles with triple adjustable washer jets in the front (on the bonnet). Using a pin, the eye ball jets can be adjusted precisely for direction. Always direct the washer jet to hit the middle of the windshield. This will enable the wiper blade to wipe the complete width of the windshield.
Front
Rear
Graphic
Graphic
In the rear, one nozzle with triple adjustable washer jets are provided for the rear windshield wash. Adjust the nozzle to direct the washer jet to hit the middle of rear windshield using a pin. Rear windshield washer fluid is supplied from front washer reservoir located in the motor compartment.
7 CONVENIENCE SYSTEMS 2
7.1 Sunroof (if equipped)
A sunroof will make the driving experience more enjoyable by bringing light and sunshine into the vehicle.
It provides a real open air feeling along with pure driving fun, with fresh air, your driving experience automatically becomes significantly more relaxed.
A sunroof allows air to flow evenly from above the driver, which is much quieter and less intrusive than wind blowing through a side window
Graphic
The sunroof cover opens and closes manually.
•  Even though the sunroof can be operated when the ignition key is in the ON position (the engine is not running), operating the sunroof repeatedly with the engine turned off will run down the battery. Operate the sunroof while the engine is running
•  When a desired sunroof operation is completed, release the switch. If you keep pressing the switch, it could cause a malfunction. Especially in winter, never operate the sunroof if moving areas are iced. Wait until the areas are deiced
•  When leaving the vehicle unattended, be sure to completely close the sunroof. Otherwise, there is a great risk of vehicle theft. Or, the interior of the vehicle will be wet when it rains or snows
•  When operating the sunroof, be aware of safety conditions before operation. Parts of the body can be trapped
•  Clean up the circumference of sunroof regularly. Otherwise, operating the sunroof may cause a noise due to foreign material and dirt
•  Opening the sunroof or driving with the sunroof open after a car wash or rain may lead to water entering
•  Close the sunroof while driving in the dusty environment. The dusts or particles entered can cause operating problems
•  If a roof rack system is installed on the vehicle roof or any cargo is secured to the roof rack, do not operate the sunroof. If you are required to operate the sunroof, carefully check that the roof rack system does not interfere with the sunroof and it is safe to open the sunroof
•  Make sure that no passenger sticks out head, hand or any part of his/her body out of the sunroof opening while driving. There is a risk of personal injury when the vehicle is stopped suddenly
•  Before operating the sunroof, make sure that no head, hand, finger, or any object is capable of being trapped. There is a risk of personal injury or even death
7.1.1 Sunroof Operations
Sunroof Open
Push up the switch briefly
When pushing up the sunroof switch briefly, the sunroof is completely opened.
Push up and hold the switch: manual sliding open
The sunroof is opened as long as pushing up the switch.
Graphic
Graphic
Sunroof Smart Open by Key Fob Unlock Button
Graphic
Graphic
•  Sunroof can be opened by long press unlock button.
•  Sunroof movement can be stopped by pressing lock/unlock button during movement.
Sunroof Close
Graphic
Graphic
Pull down the switch briefly: auto sliding close
When pulling down the sunroof switch briefly, the sunroof is automatically closed completely. To stop the sunroof, pull or push the switch at desired position while moving.
Pull down and hold the switch: manual sliding close
The sunroof is closed as long as pulling down the switch.
Sunroof Smart Close by Key fob Lock button
Graphic
Graphic
•  Sunroof can be close by long press lock button.
•  Sunroof movement can be stop by pressing lock/unlock button during movement
If anti-pinch is detected 3 times continuously within 10 seconds, then smart close though Remote key will not work for next 30 sec. User can manually close sunroof through switch from console.
Sunroof Smart Close while Raining
Graphic
If Rain sensor is equipped: In auto wipe mode or wiper LOW or HIGH mode, when wiper is ON for predefined time, cluster will request user feedback for closing the sunroof. Using Steering “selection button/ center button” user can choose to close the Sunroof.
In RLS variant, Sunroof will close automatically while rain is detected or after the defined time(12 hours) during the vehicle is in Ignition OFF and locked state.
Graphic
•  In Non Rain Sensor variant Once wiper is turned ON for a predefined time, cluster will request user feedback for closing the sunroof Using Steering switch button User can close the sunroof.
Graphic
Sunroof Smart Control by Voice Recognition
User can open and close sunroof via Voice command through Alexa during Ignition ON
Graphic
Sunroof Control by Authorised Mobile Phone Application
User can open and close sunroof via mobile phone with authorized application in Ignition OFF
7.1.2 Sunroof Tilting Operation
Tilt UP : The rear side of the sunroof is tilted up when pulling down the sunroof switch with the sunroof closed.
Tilt DOWN : The rear side of the sunroof is tilted down when pushing up the sunroof switch with the sunroof tilted up.
Graphic
Graphic
Anti-Pinch Function
Graphic
To prevent any body parts from being trapped by the sliding sunroof, an Anti-Pinch Function automatically opens the sunroof when an object is trapped.
•  This safety function is available for the auto sliding sunroof close
•  Sunroof safety function is supplemental and not always operable depending on circumstances (e.g. any electrical device in the vehicle, etc.), therefore, the driver should check safety at all times before operating the sunroof
When operating the sunroof, be aware of safety conditions before operation. Parts of the body can be trapped.
Do not stick out any part of your body out of the sunroof even in stationary.
Improper use of the power sunroof can result in serious personal injury.
•  Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle – particularly if they have access to the vehicle key. Unsupervised use of the remote control vehicle key makes it possible to lock the vehicle, start the engine, turn on the ignition and operate the sunroof.
•  Never stand or sit on sunroof glasses or roof. This can cause severe damage and would be treated as abuse of the sunroof which not covered by warranty.
•  Never keep the Luggages / weights on top of the roof/sunroof.
•  Any wet area found on the headliner shall be reported an Authorised Mahindra Dealer Immediately.
•  Never close the sunshade during the sunroof glass is in open condition. This can cause the sunshade damage and would be treated as abuse of the sunroof which not covered by warranty.
•  Without pinch protection, the power Sunroof will close with enough force to cause serious personal injury.
•  Always be careful when closing the power Sunroof
•  Pinch protection cannot prevent fingers or other parts of the body from being pressed against the edge of the roof; may result in injuries
•  If the power Sunroof malfunctions, pinch protection may not function properly. Visit a Mahindra Authorized Dealer or an authorized Mahindra Service Facility for assistance.
Sunroof Open Warning Buzzer :When opening the driver’s door after the ignition key is removed with the sunroof open, the buzzer will sound to alert you that the sunroof is opened. The buzzer will automatically turn off when closing the door. After this, the buzzer will not sound even though the door is opened again.
Wind Buffeting: When you drive this vehicle with the window or sunroof open at a certain position, you may feel some pressure upon your ears or hear some noises similar to those from a helicopter. This happens because of an influx in air through the window or sunroof and its resonance effect. If this happens, adjust by opening the window or sunroof.
Battery Discharge or Power Failure while Operating Sunroof: If the sunroof is stopped midway due to a discharged battery or power failure, you need to do Initialization and Self Learning of sunroof. In addition following cases need the Initialization and Self Learning of sunroof.
•  The sunroof does not completely close or open by operating the switch once
•  The sunroof slides back to close. But the operation does not stop even after a complete close and tilts up the sunroof
•  The opening gap remarkably decreases for the sliding open or tilt up
•  The sunroof does not work
•  Operation of the sunroof switch does not do anything or work properly.
•  The operating process is not same as before due to discharged or disconnected battery.
Initialization and Self Learning Procedure
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Condition for Re-Initialization the sunroof:
After the fitment of Sunroof onto the vehicle body ,it must be Re-initialized.
In some cases, if the vehicle battery has been disconnected during Sunroof movement and reconnected or is dead or replace the fuse, the sunroof must be initialized. Otherwise Express (one touch) function (open/close/tilt) and pinch protection function will be deactivated.
Initializing Procedure
To Re-initialize the sliding sunroof, use the following procedure.
1. Turn ON the ignition
2. Sunroof to be in TILT position. Press the ‘sunroof close switch’ and hold it for 9 to 10 seconds. During this process, Sunroof makes clicking sound at Tilt position.
3. Close Sunroof by again pressing Open switch.
4. The Re-Initializing command is complete, Check if the Express open/close features are working.
If the initializing procedure is not completely performed, then it has to be run again from step 2.
Self Learning Procedure:
1. Sliding sunroof shall be in CLOSE position.
2. Press ‘sunroof close switch’ and keep the switch pressed continuously. Do not release the switch and wait for following actions to perform.
3. Once Sliding sunroof reaches to TILT position, will start its cycle after 5 sec, delay.
4. Sunroof start to self - learning, run from Tilt - Close - Partial Open – close.
5. Overall approx. 16 to 18 seconds @13.5V required to complete self-learning.
6. The Self learning command is complete.
If the reversals noticed  while closing the sunroof in a certain weather condition, Perform the self learning procedure to closing  the sunroof properly
•  To help prevent damage, remove ice and snow from the sunroof before opening or tilting it in winter season
•  Always close the Sunroof before leaving the vehicle or if it begins to rain. If the Sunroof is open or tilted, rain could enter the vehicle interior and cause extensive damage to the electrical system. This could result in further vehicle damage.
•  Remove leaves and other objects from the Sunroof guiderails regularly either by hand or using a vacuum cleaner.
•  If the power Sunroof malfunctions, pinch protection may not function properly. See a Mahindra Authorized Dealer or an authorized Mahindra Service Facility
•  During sliding sunroof (one touch/manual) open operation, the sunshade will also open in synchronization with sliding sunroof glass.
•  During sliding sunroof (one touch/manual) close operation, the sunshade will not close in synchronization with sliding sunroof glass.
7.1.3 Sunroof Service Checking Procedure
Graphic
Graphic
•  Open the Sunroof
•  Check all 4 Rail channel corners for mud or Dust/Leaf present in it
Graphic
•  Move the leafs/Dust to centre of rain channel and then remove it by hand
Do not blow air in drain hose channel before cleaning it manually – as the bigger leaves may go inside and block drain hose.
•  After cleaning of all visible particles, blow air into drain hose channel area to clean hose for mud in this area
•  Now pour 1 litre of water in rain channel and check if water is draining or not
If water is not draining kindly contact the Mahindra Authorised Dealer or Mahindra Authorised Service Centre.
High Pressure washer nozzle jets should not be directed towards Sunroof seals.
Do not use High pressure water on Sunroof area.
It is recommended to wipe the seals with damp micro-fiber cloth during cleaning.
Sunroof rails and drain area should be cleaned using air blower.
7.2 Skyroof
Graphic
A skyroof will make the driving experience more enjoyable by bringing light and sunshine into the vehicle.
It provides a real open air feeling along with pure driving fun, with fresh air, your driving experience automatically becomes significantly more relaxed.
A skyroof allows air to flow evenly from above the driver, which is much quieter and less intrusive than wind blowing through a side window.
•  Even though the skyroof can be operated when the ignition key is in the ON position (the engine is not running), operating the skyroof repeatedly with the engine turned off will run down the battery. Operate the skyroof while the engine is running.
•  When a desired skyroof operation is completed, release the switch. If you keep pressing the switch, it could cause a malfunction. Especially in winter, never operate the skyroof if moving areas are iced. Wait until the areas are deiced.
•  When leaving the vehicle unattended, be sure to completely close the skyroof. Otherwise, there is a great risk of vehicle theft. Or the interior of the vehicle will be wet when it rains or snows.
•  When operating the skyroof, be aware of safety conditions before operation. Parts of the body can be trapped.
•  Clean up the circumference of skyroof regularly. Otherwise, operating the skyroof may cause a noise due to foreign material and dirt.
•  Opening the skyroof or driving with the skyroof open after a car wash or rain may lead to water entering.
•  Close the skyroof while driving in the dusty environment. The dusts or particles entered can cause operating problems.
•  If a roof rack system is installed on the vehicle roof or any cargo is secured to the roof rack, do not operate the skyroof. If you are required to operate the skyroof, carefully check that the roof rack system does not interfere with the skyroof and it is safe to open the skyroof.
•  Make sure that no passenger sticks out head, hand or any part of his/her body out of the skyroof opening while driving. There is a risk of personal injury when the vehicle is stopped suddenly.
•  Before operating the skyroof, make sure that no head, hand, finger, or any object is capable of being trapped. There is a risk of personal injury or even death.
7.2.1 Controls and functions

Graphic
Switch Position
Switch Press
Operation
0
Switch Home / Neutral Position
1
Short Press
Tilt Open
2
Short Press
Skyroof Express Open
Long Press
Skyroof Manual Open
3
Short Press
Tilt Close / Skyroof Express Close
Long Press
Tilt Close / Skyroof Manual Close
4
Short Press
Tilt Close / Skyroof Express Close
Long Press
Tilt Close / Skyroof Manual Close
5
Short Press
Rollo Shade Express Open
Long Press
Rollo Shade Manual Open
6
Short Press
Rollo Shade Express Close
Long Press
Rollo Shade Manual Close
Toggle switch for the skyroof to operate. Home/Neutral position of the Switch (0). To operate the sliding skyroof and Rollo shade Pull or Push or Tilt the switch as shown in image, after every operation switch goes to Home position automatically.
You must switch ON the ignition to operate the skyroof.
7.2.2 Rollo Shade Open
Graphic
Press the Open switch to position (5) for Rollo Shade Express (Short Press) open. Manual (long press) open to stop at desired position.
7.2.3 Rollo Shade Close
Graphic
Push the Close switch to position (6) for Rollo Shade Express (Short Press) close. Manual (long press) close to stop at desired position.
7.2.4 Skyroof Open
Graphic
•  Push up the switch to position (2) for Skyroof Express (Short Press) open. Manual (long press) open to stop at desired position.
•  Skyroof will open followed by rollo shade open.
•  Pull down the switch to position (3) or (4) to stop at desired position while opening.
Skyroof Smart Open by Key Fob Unlock Button
Graphic
•  Skyroof and Rollo shade can be opened by long press unlock button.
•  Skyroof will open followed by Rollo shade open.
•  Skyroof / Rollo shade movement can be stopped by pressing lock/unlock button during movement.
7.2.5 Skyroof Close
Graphic
•  Pull down the switch to position (3) or (4) for Skyroof Express (Short Press) close. Manual (long press) close to stop at desired position.
•  Rollo shade will not be closed followed by Skyroof.
•  Push up the switch to position (2) to stop at desired position while closing.
Skyroof Smart Close by Key fob Lock button
Graphic
•  Skyroof and Rollo shade can be close by long press lock button
•  Rollo shade will be closed followed by Skyroof
•  Skyroof/Rollo shade movement can be stop by pressing lock/ unlock button during movement
If anti-pinch is detected 3 times, the one touch close function deactivated and skyroof to be close manually by Pull down the switch (Position 4) continuously till fully close. After fully close the one touch function is activated.
Skyroof Smart Close while Raining
Graphic
If Rain sensor is equipped: In auto wipe mode or wiper LOW or HIGH mode, when wiper is ON for predefined time, cluster will request user feedback for closing the Skyroof. Using Steering “selection button/ center button” user can choose to close the Skyroof.
In RLS variant, Skyroof and Rollo shade will close automatically while rain is detected or after the defined time (12 hours) during the vehicle is in Ignition OFF and locked state.
Graphic
•  In Non-Rain Sensor variant Once wiper is turned ON for a predefined time, cluster will request user feedback for closing the Skyroof Using Steering switch button, User can close the Skyroof.
Skyroof Smart Control by Voice Recognition
Graphic
User can open and close skyroof via Voice command through Alexa during Ignition ON
7.2.6 Skyroof Control by Authorised Mobile Phone Application
Graphic
User can open and close skyroof via mobile phone with authorized application in Ignition OFF
7.2.7 Skyroof Tilt Open/Close
Graphic
Tilt Up: Push Up the switch to position (1) for Skyroof Tilt Open from the Skyroof closed condition.
Skyroof will Tilt Open following Rollo shade half open.
Tilt Down: Pull Down the switch to position (3) or (4) for Skyroof Tilt Close from Skyroof Tilt Open condition.
Rollo shade will not be closed followed by Skyroof Close.
7.2.8 Anti Pinch Function (If equipped)
To prevent any body parts from being trapped by the Skyroof/Rollo shade, an Anti-Pinch Function automatically opens the Skyroof/Rollo shade when an object is trapped.
•  This safety function is available for the Skyroof & Rollo shade.
•  The anti-Pinch function is deactivated just before the Skyroof/Rollo shade closes.
•  Skyroof/Rollo shade safety function is supplemental and not always operable depending on circumstances (e. g. any electrical device in the vehicle, etc.), therefore, the driver should check safety at all times operating the Skyroof/Rollo shade.
•  When operating the Skyroof, be aware of safety conditions before operation. Parts of the body can be trapped.
•  Do not stick out any part of your body out of the Skyroof even in stationary.
•  Improper use of the Skyroof can result in serious personal injury.
•  Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle – particularly if they have access to the vehicle key.
•  Unsupervised use of the remote-control vehicle key makes it possible to lock the vehicle, start the engine, turn on the ignition and operate the Skyroof.
•  Never stand or sit on Skyroof or roof. This can cause severe damage and would be treated as abuse of the skyroof which not covered by warranty.
•  Never keep the Luggage / weights on top of the roof/ Skyroof.
•  Any wet area found on the headliner shall be reported an Authorized Mahindra Dealer Immediately.
•  Without pinch protection, the power Skyroof/Rollo shade will close with enough force to cause serious personal injury.
•  Always be careful when closing the Skyroof /Rollo shade. Pinch protection cannot prevent fingers or other parts of the body from being pressed against the edge of the roof; may result in injuries.
•  If the Skyroof/Rollo shade malfunctions, pinch protection may not function properly. Visit a Mahindra Authorized Dealer or an authorized Mahindra Service Facility for assistance.
7.2.9 Emergency Close Feature
The express (One Touch) / Manual (long press) Skyroof Close function may not work due to -
•  Consecutive several attempts to close Skyroof and Rollo Shade.
•  Pinch protection is only for closing Skyroof and Rollo shade.
•  Excessive Ice / Dirt accumulation on the Skyroof Glass / guide rails.
Follow the emergency close command as below:
•  Emergency close feature can be used, if Sliding Skyroof or Rollo shade consecutive reversal movement observed 3 times then continue with step 2 as below to use Emergency close feature.
•  On the 4th attempt continuously Pull the Skyroof close switch to position (4) until it closes completely to ensure occupant privacy, safety & theft prevention from Skyroof open window. This is Emergency Close Feature.
•  Once the Skyroof or Rollo Shade is completely closed, release the switch.
•  Alternatively, User may wait for min. 30 seconds before operating Skyroof and Rollo Shade, then Skyroof can be operated with Normal Functions.
•  If the Skyroof doesn’t operate as above, Contact Authorised Mahindra Dealer for assistance.
7.2.10 Wind Buffeting
When you drive the vehicle with the window or skyroof open at a certain position, you may feel some pressure upon your ears or hear some noises similar to those from a helicopter. This happens because of an influx of in air through the window or skyroof and due to its resonance effect. If this happens, adjust by opening the window or skyroof
7.2.11 Initializing The Power Skyroof
Conditions for Initialization & Self-Learning Procedure :
If the vehicle battery has been disconnected during skyroof / Rollo shade movement and reconnected or it is dead or any fuse is replaced, the skyroof / Rollo shade must be initialized. Otherwise Express (one touch) function (open/close/tilt) and pinch protection function will be deactivated.
•  After the fitment of Skyroof onto the vehicle body, it must be initialized.
•  Whenever the Skyroof motors are removed and refitted or replaced without Skyroof removal from vehicle.
•  Whenever the Skyroof glasses is removed and refitted or replaced without Skyroof removal from vehicle.
•  In some cases, if the vehicle battery has been disconnected during sliding Skyroof/Rollo shade movement and reconnected or is dead or replace the fuse, the Skyroof must be initialized. Otherwise, Express (one touch) function (open/close/tilt) and pinch protection function will be deactivated.
•  If the Skyroof/Rollo shade is stopped midway due to a discharged battery or power failure.
•  The Skyroof/Rollo shade does not completely close or open by operating the switch once.
•  The Skyroof slides back to close. But the operation does not stop even after a complete close and tilts up the Sliding Skyroof.
•  The opening gap remarkably decreases for the sliding open or tilt up.
•  The Skyroof/Rollo shade does not work.
•  Operation of the Skyroof switch does not do anything or work properly.
•  The operating process is not same as before due to discharged or disconnected battery.
Initializing command procedure:
To initialize the Skyroof & Rolloshade, use the following procedure.
1. Turn ON the ignition
(Pre condition shall be Close position for both skyroof and Rollo shade)
2. Close the skyroof fully by pushing ‘skyroof close switch’ (4) and keep the switch pushed for 1-2 seconds after the roof is fully closed, till clicking sound comes from skyroof .
3. Close the Rollo shade fully by pushing ‘ Rollo Shade close switch’ (6) and keep the switch pushed for 1-2 seconds after the Rollo shade is fully closed, till clicking sound comes from Rollo shade.
4. The Initializing command is completed, Check if the Express open/close features are working.
If the initializing procedure is not completely performed, then it has to be run again from step 2.
If there is no automatic action of Skyroof and Rollo shade over 5 seconds, the teaching has been failed, then it must be run again from step 2.
If Skyroof and Rollo shade movement not happening in step 2, then reset & initialization procedure to be followed.
7.2.12 Self Learning The Power Skyroof
Self learning command procedure:
1. Self-learning must be performed when skyroof/ rollo sunshade assembly is replaced or when false anti-pinch reversal movement (reversal without any obstruction) is noticed
2. . Keep the skyroof in tilt open pushing ‘skyroof tilt open switch (2)’ and push the skyroofclose switch (4) continuously. Do not release the switch and wait for following actions to perform.
3. Sliding skyroof will start opening after 5 sec pause and close automatically. Release the Switch to complete the procedure.
4. Keep the Rollo little open (Approx 100mm) by pushing ‘Rollo Shade open switch (5)’ and push the Rollo close switch (6) continuously. Do not release the switch and wait for following actions to perform.
5. Rollo will start opening after 5 sec pause and close automatically. Release the Switch to complete the procedure.
6. The Self learning command is complete.
Incase skyroof and Rollo Shade Close switch is released in the middle of procedure, repeat from step 1.
•  Self-learning procedure can be done only after the Initialization procedure.
•  Self-learning procedure need to start within 4 seconds after Initialization, if not started within 4 seconds, then again initialization procedure to be performed.
•  If the switch released in-between the self-learning procedure, then again initialization procedure to be performed.
7.2.13 Reset & Initialization Procedure
To Reset & Initialization the Skyroof, use the following procedure.
Re-Initialization:
1. Turn ON the ignition
(Pre condition shall be Open or Close position for both skyroof and Rollo shade)
2. Close the skyroof fully by pushing ‘skyroof close switch’ (4) and keep the switch pushed till clicking sound comes from skyroof after closing (May take more than 8 seconds if one touch was still working) .
3. Close the Rollo shade fully by pushing ‘ Rollo Shade close switch’ (6) and keep the switch pushed till clicking sound comes from Rollo after closing (May take more than 8 seconds if one touch was still working) .
4. The Re-Initializing command is completed, Check if the Express open/close features are working. If the Initializing procedure is not completely performed, then it has to be run again from step 2.
Re-Learning:
1. Self-learning must be performed when skyroof/ rollo sunshade assembly is replaced or when false anti-pinch reversal movement (reversal without any obstruction) is noticed
2. Keep the skyroofin tilt open pushing ‘skyroof tilt open switch (2)’ and push the skyroofclose switch (4) continuously. Do not release the switch and wait for following actions to perform.
3. Sliding skyroof will start opening after 5 sec pause and close automatically. Release the Switch to complete the procedure.
4. Keep the Rollo little open (Approx 100mm) by pushing ‘Rollo Shade open switch (5)’ and push the Rollo close switch (6) continuously. Do not release the switch and wait for following actions to perform.
5. Rollo will start opening after 5 sec pause and close automatically. Release the Switch to complete the procedure.
6. The Self learning command is complete.
Incase skyroof and Rollo Shade Close switch is released in the middle of procedure, repeat from step 1.
If the reset procedure is not completely performed, then it must be run again from step 1. (Reset function not happened can be identified, by Skyroof & Rollo shade not closing step by step during the procedure)
•  To help prevent damage, remove ice and snow from the Skyroof before opening or tilting it in winter season.
•  Always close the skyroof before leaving the vehicle or if it begins to rain. If the Skyroof is open or tilted, rain could enter the vehicle interior and cause extensive damage to the electrical system. This could result in further vehicle damage.
•  Remove leaves and other objects from the Skyroof guiderails regularly either by hand or using a vacuum cleaner.
•  If the Skyroof/Rollo shade malfunctions, pinch protection may not function properly. See a Mahindra Authorized Dealer or an authorized Mahindra Service Facility.
•  The Rollo Shade can be opened and closed independently when the sliding Skyroof is in closed position.
•  During sliding Skyroof express (one touch) open/tilt operation, Rollo shade will also open in synchronization with Sliding Skyroof (Express - Complete Open Feature).
•  During sliding Skyroof express (one touch) close operation, Rollo Shade will not close in synchronization with sliding Skyroof.
Do not remove vehicle battery while skyroof is in motion
7.2.14 Skyroof Service Checking Procedure
Graphic
•  Open the skyroof
•  Check all 4 Rail channel corners for mud or Dust/ Leaf present in it
Graphic
•  Move the leafs/Dust to center of rain channel and then remove it by hand
Do not blow air in drain hose channel before cleaning it manually – as the bigger leaves may go inside and block drain hose.
Graphic
•  After cleaning of all visible particles blow air into drain hose channel area to clean hose for mud in this area
•  Now pour 1 liter of water in rain channel and check if water is draining or not
If water is not draining kindly contact the Mahindra Dealer or Mahindra Authorised Service Centre.
•  High Pressure washer nozzle jets should not be directed towards skyroof seals and Rubber components.
•  Do not use High pressure water on skyroof area.
•  It is recommended to wipe the seals with damp micro fiber cloth during cleaning.
•  Skyroof rails and drain area should be cleaned using air blower.
7.3 Power Window and Skyroof Smart Close and Open (If equipped)
This feature is applicable only for driver door power window (if equipped with anti pinch operation)
7.3.1 Smart operations in Ignition OFF State
a). Using PKE/RKE Key Fob
•  Skyroof & Power Window Smart Close- During ignition off with all doors closed, if the key fob lock button is pressed for more than 1 second, then doors will get locked and Skyroof & power window will get closed automatically.
•  Skyroof & Power Window Smart Open- During ignition off, if the key fob unlock button is pressed for more than 1 second, then doors will get unlocked and Skyroof & Power window will be opened along with blower ON in fresh air mode (for approximately 40 seconds)
If any of the doors status is not changed for 45 seconds, doors will get locked, Skyroof will get closed but power window will be left open
b). Using Adrenox Command
Adrenox command will work only when
1. Ignition is off and
2. Doors in locked state and
3. Key fob is not inside the vehicle
Vehicle Controls
Graphic
Skyroof Smart Open/ Close
Graphic
Power Window Smart Open
Graphic
Power Window Smart Close
Graphic
Graphic
User set PIN will be required to execute AdrenoX commands
c). Timer Based Control (Applicable only for RLS variants)
Skyroof Smart Close - During ignition off, if Skyroof is open for more than a predefined time (for approximately 12 hours), skyroof and sunshade will get closed automatically.
d). Rain detection based control (Applicable only for RLS variants)
Skyroof Smart Close - During ignition off and doors are in locked condition, If rain is detected skyroof & sunshade will be automatically closed.
7.3.2 Smart operations in Ignition ON State
a). Using Alexa Voice Command
User can open and close Skyroof via voice command through Alexa during Ignition ON.
. .Alexa, Open Skyroof ....... .Alexa, Close Skyroof
User can open and close driver side power window via Voice command through Alexa during ignition ON (will open/close only driver side window)
. .Alexa, Open Windows....... .Alexa, Close Windows
b). While Wiper is ON
Skyroof & Power Window Smart Close- During ignition ON condition, if front wiper is ON for approximately around 10 seconds (varies based on wiper modes), a notification requesting user confirmation for closing the Power Window & Skyroof will be displayed. On confirming the same, both will be closed.
Graphic
7.4 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEM
HVAC system provided in the vehicle enables occupants to automatically/manually adjust air flow distribution pattern, air flow rate, air intake mode and air temperature inside passenger compartment.
By appropriately adjusting the control knobs/switches provided on the FATC/ETC control panel, located on instrument panel, occupant’s comfort can be ensured.
HVAC system also helps in defogging / de-misting the windshield and windows. Air flow direction can be further controlled by adjusting louvres of air vents. An air filter is provided at the inlet of HVAC blower.
Engine coolant is utilized to heat the cabin air. For cooling the cabin air, an air conditioning circuit based on the vapor compression refrigeration cycle is used. The air conditioning system uses a refrigerant along with a suitable lubricating oil.
Although being non-ozone depleting, the refrigerant is a greenhouse gas, hence once allowed to escape in the atmosphere, it adversely affects the environment by contributing to global warming/climate change
Refrigerant used in the system is a hazardous liquefied gas and is under high pressure. The refrigerant is colorless and has ethereal or faint sweetish odor. Exposure of refrigerant to the skin or eyes may cause irritation and frostbite. It can also cause suffocation, dizziness and loss of concentration. When mixed with compressed air or certain other refrigerants, it may form a flammable mixture. Never try to service the HVAC system yourself which would involve refrigerant handling.
- If you sleep while operating the air conditioner or heater with all the windows closed, You may suffocate to death due to lack of ventilation.
Multiple vents are provided for distributing the air, being force-circulated by HVAC blower, throughout the passenger compartment.
To ensure sufficient air flow and hence adequate HVAC system performance, the air flow path should be kept free of obstructions. Keep the system’s air intake, located near the plenum appliqué, free of snow, leaves and other debris. Also keep the area in front of the air vents free of any obstruction inside the cabin.
7.4.1 HVAC Overview
Graphic
A
Side De-misting Vents
D
Center Vents
B
Windshield Defrost Vents
E
Foot Vents
C
Side Vents
F
HVAC Controls
7.4.2 Center/Side Vents
Graphic
Center Vents
Two center vents are located below the audio system on the instrument panel. Both the center and side vents provide air flow to the front seat passengers. Rotate the knob ( A) clock wise to shut off the air flow and anti-clockwise to allow the air flow through the air vent. Direct air to the desired direction by the adjusting knob (A).
Graphic
Side Vents
There are two side vents located one each at the left and right side of the instrument panel.
Rotate the knob ( A) clock wise to shut off the air flow and anti-clockwise to allow the air flow through the air vent. Direct air to the desired direction by the adjusting knob (A).
Graphic
Defogger Vents: There are five defogger vents in your vehicle: two side defogger and three windshield defogger vents.
They are located just below the windshield. The side defogger vents prevent the front windows from defogging.
Graphic
Second Row AC Vents: The second row AC vents are located on the rear side of the center console.
7.4.3 Electronic Temperature Control (if equipped)
Graphic
A
Temperature control Knob
E
Rear Defogger switch
B
Air distribution/Mode switches
F
Recirculation mode switch
C
Front defogger switch
G
A/C switch
D
Blower speed control knob
   
Temperature Control Knob: By operating the temperature control knob, temperature of air being discharged from various vents can be adjusted to the desired level. Engine coolant is utilized to heat, whereas the air conditioner is used to cool the air inside the AC unit. Based upon selected position of the temperature control knob, the desired discharged air temperature can be obtained.
Graphic
By rotating the knob anti-clockwise and setting it to the extreme left position, maximum cooling is obtained. When the knob is rotated clockwise, the discharged air progressively starts getting warmer and at the extreme right position, hot air is discharged.
Blower Speed Control Knob: The blower force-circulates the air through the HVAC unit and distributes it throughout the passenger compartment.
Blower is OFF when the blower speed control knob is set to small (Blower Symbol) position (extreme left). To switch-ON the blower, rotate the control knob clockwise which progressively increases the blower speed.
Graphic
A/C switch: This button turns the air-conditioner ON or OFF.
When the air conditioner is functioning, air gets cooled and de-humidified before being circulated inside the cabin. In hot weather conditions, it will take a slightly longer time to cool the interior as compared to cooler weather. Fuel consumption will be relatively higher if the vehicle is being driven with the air conditioner ON.
Graphic
AC will function only when both engine and blower are switched ON.
•  In certain operating conditions when the engine gets overheated, the engine management system may switch off the air conditioner intermittently
•  The air conditioner should be operated at least for ten minutes once every fortnight, even during winter months. This allows AC system components to get lubricated periodically and ensures optimum system
•  During extreme cold weather conditions, the air conditioner may not function until temperature of the air near the evaporator rises above a predefined threshold
•  When air conditioner is ON, moisture is extracted from the air. The resulting condensate is drained off from the vehicle. It is therefore normal, if you see a small pool of water under your vehicle
Re-circulation Mode (Re-circulation mode switch ON): To set the HVAC system to recirculation mode, press the recirculation mode button. The LED on the button illuminates, indicating the recirculation mode is active. In this intake mode, the air from inside the passenger compartment will be sucked by the blower and utilized further to ventilate /cool / heat the cabin.
For quick cabin cooling/heating or while driving through dusty/polluted region, re-circulation mode can be selected for short periods. Driving with this mode active, may lead to better fuel economy and longer HVAC filter life. However, running the air conditioner in re-circulation mode for long will make cabin air too dry and oxygen level drops inside cabin the turning the air stale. On the contrary, keeping air intake control in recirculation mode for long, with air conditioner switched OFF, will make cabin air too humid and windshield and window are more likely to become foggy. Hence, never drive in recirculation mode for long, shift back to fresh air mode intermittently.
Graphic
Never keep recirculation mode selected continuously for long period. Prolonged use of the HVAC system in recirculation mode may cause windshield/windows to mist/fog-up, impairing visibility which can lead to an accident, endangering you and others.
Fresh Air Mode (Re-Circulation Mode Switch OFF): To set the HVAC system to fresh air mode, press the re-circulation mode button again. The LED on this button switches OFF, indicating that fresh air mode is active. In this intake mode, fresh air from outside the vehicle is sucked by the blower and utilized further to ventilate /cool / heat the cabin.
Graphic
Air Distribution/Mode switches
The air flowing out of various vents can be controlled by the air distribution/mode switches.
•  Face Mode — When face mode switch is pressed, air is discharged from the Center vents and side vents. This mode is most suitable for directing air flow towards the face of the passengers
Graphic
•  Face-Foot Mode — When Face-Foot mode switch is pressed, air is discharged from the Center vents, Foot vents and side vents. This mode is most suitable for directing air flow towards both the face and feet of passengers at the same time
Graphic
•  Foot Mode — When foot mode switch is pressed, air is discharged from the two foot vents. This mode is most suitable for directing air flow towards the feet of passengers seated on front seats
Graphic
•  Foot and Front Defogger Mode — When foot and front defogger mode switch is pressed air is discharged from the foot vents, side defogger vents and windshield defogger vents. This mode is most suitable for directing air flow towards the feet of passengers while de-misting/defogging.
Graphic
•  Front Defogger Mode — When Front Defogger mode switch is pressed air is discharged from the side defogger vents and windshield defogger vents. This mode is most suitable for directing air flow towards the front windshield to ensure de-misting / defogging.
Graphic
Rear Defogger Switch (If equipped): Rear defogger switch is located on the ETC control panel. Press the switch once to activate the rear defogger. The LED on the switch illuminates upon activation and the rear defogger heats the rear windshield clearing the fog / mist. Switch OFF the rear defogger by pressing the switch once as soon as the fog / mist is cleared.
Graphic

If the rear defogger switch is not switched OFF manually, it will turn OFF automatically after a pre-defined time, based on ambient temperature. If you want to switch the rear defogger ON again, press the rear defogger switch again.
On second and subsequent activations of the rear defogger in the same ignition cycle, the rear defogger ON time will be half the duration of the first activation
7.4.4  Fully Automatic Temperature Control (if equipped)
Graphic
A
Blower Speed Control knob
F
Recirculation Mode Switch
B
Front defogger switch
G
Temp control knob
C
Rear Defogger switch
H
A/C ON Switch
D
Mode Switch
I
OFF switch
E
Auto Mode Switch
J
MAX A/C Switch
Graphic
Above mentioned switches/knobs in FATC control panel is pressed/Rotated, respective icons and changes are displayed in the infotainment screen.
Blower speed control switches : You can adjust the airflow by rotating the Blower speed control knob with ignition ON. If you adjust the airflow using blower speed control knob in AUTO mode, the AUTO indicator on Infotainment screen goes off and the operation mode is changed to the manual mode.
Graphic
Blower speed can be increased by rotating the control knob clockwise and blower speed can be decreased by rotating the control knob counter clockwise.
The air conditioner does not operate by directly pressing the blower speed control switches if the A/C switch is not pressed. However, the air flows due to the fan operation.
AUTO switch: If you press the AUTO switch with AC ON, AUTO indicator appears on Infotainment screen and the set temperature is maintained while the airflow and air distribution are automatically controlled.
Graphic
The indicator lamp lights up while AUTO switch is operating, and the lamp turns off when press the other switches to turned OFF.
Front Defogger switch: Use this switch for quick defogging with the engine ON.
When you press this switch, its indicator lamp turns ON, and the airflow direction is changed to the windshield and door glasses while outside air comes in with A/C operation.
Graphic
At this time A/C, front defogger and Fresh air indicators shows up in the Infotainment screen. If you press the switch again, front defogging stops with the indicator lamp turns off and the mode returns to the previous operation. While the front defogger switch is operating, its indicator lamp turns ON and the lamp turns off when the front defogger mode switch is turned OFF.
OFF switch: You can turn off the AC by using this switch.
Graphic
Recirculation mode switch: If you press this switch with AC ON, the indication lamp lights turn up and the air recirculation indicator on Infotainment display is displayed.
Graphic
If you press this switch again, the indication lamp turns off and the air source selection is changed to Fresh air intake mode.
Do not use recirculation mode in the vehicle for extended periods of time with every window closed. Doing so can cause headache, drowsiness and fogged window due to lack of oxygen
If exhaust gas comes in, there is a danger of carbon monoxide poisoning. Set to the fresh air intake mode after passing through a dusty or polluted area with air recirculation mode in operation.
Automatic selection of the fresh or Re-circulation mode
When the front defogger switch is pressed, outside air automatically comes in. When the switch is pressed again, the previous mode is restored.
Mode switch
Each time you press this switch with IGN ON, the air distribution mode is changed and displayed as shown in the figure below.
When you press this switch in AUTO mode (AUTO indicator ON), the system is changed to the semi-auto mode (AUTO indicator OFF).
Graphic
Graphic
Face-Mode
Graphic
Foot-Mode
Graphic
Face/Foot-Mode
Graphic
Foot/Defogger-Mode
When choosing foot mode, some air flows out from windshield defogger vents , Side defogger vents and side vents.
Driver temperature control knob: To adjust the temperature as desired, rotate the temperature control knob. The temperature decreases, when the temperature control knob is rotated in anti-clockwise direction & temperature increases, when the temperature control knob is rotated in clockwise direction
Graphic
A/C Switch: This button turns the air-conditioner ON or OFF.
Graphic
MAX A/C switch: MAX AC mode can be used to attain MAX cooling in a short period of time.
Graphic
When MAX AC switch is pressed
1. In cabin temperature is set to minimum
2. Blower fan speed is set to Max
3. Air intake mode is set to recirculation mode
4. Air distribution mode is set to Face mode
Rear Defogger Switch: Rear defogger switch is located on the FATC control panel. Press the switch once to activate the rear defogger. The LED on the switch illuminates upon activation and the rear defogger heats the rear windshield clearing the fog / mist. Switch OFF the rear defogger by pressing the switch once as soon as the fog / mist is cleared.
Graphic
If the rear defogger switch is not switched OFF manually, it will turn OFF automatically after a pre-defined time, based on ambient temperature. If you want to switch the rear defogger ON again, press the rear defogger switch again.
On second and subsequent activations of the rear defogger in the same ignition cycle, the rear defogger ON time will be half the duration of the first activation.
7.4.5 FATC – Auto Operation Mode
Graphic
1
Blower Speed Control Knob
2
Auto Indicator ON
3
Temp Control Knob
Use only when the engine is running.
1. Press the AUTO switch.
2. AUTO indicator is displayed on the Infotainment Screen.
3. Set the desired cabin temperature with the temperature control knob.
4. The temperature of the passenger compartment is automatically maintained according to the set temperature.
When you use the blower speed control knob, mode switch (air source selection switch) or defogger switch during the auto operation mode, AUTO indicator on the display goes out and the air conditioner system can be controlled manually.
7.4.6 FATC – Manual Operation Mode
Graphic
1
Blower Speed Control Knob
3
Recirculation Mode Switch
2
Mode Switch
4
Temp Control Knob
Use only when the engine is running.
1. Press AC ON switch
2. Set the desired temperature by rotating the temperature control knob
3. Adjust the blower speed by rotate the blower speed control knob
4. Select the air flow by pressing the air distribution/mode switch
5. Select the air source mode by pressing recirculation mode switch
In manual mode, the AUTO indicator on display does not come on and you can manually adjust the climate conditions by controlling the temperature, blower speed, mode (air distribution), A/C, air source selection, and infotainment. selection control switches.
To activate the auto operation mode, press AUTO switch.
7.4.7 FATC – Climate Control Through Infotainment Screen
Climate Control Setting also can be done through infotainment screen.
Graphic
•  Go to application page in infotainment Screen then select climate control.
•  Under Climate control screen select Climate icon
•  All HVAC setting can be changed by pressing respective symbols or buttons in climate screen
Graphic
Graphic
7.4.8 Remote Cooling
Graphic
Remote cooling feature allows user to control Cabin climate settings from outside the vehicle.
•  During remote cooling operation , Cabin temperature settings will be changed to default 18 deg C in Auto mode for both driver and co-driver to achieve faster cooling.
•  Vehicle cabin will be cooled down before entering vehicle. Thus, making cabin more comfortable for the passengers when they enter the car that was parked in the hot sun
Activate Remote Cooling feature
Graphic
Remote cooling starts by automatically once we press "start engine" button in the Adrenox connect mobile App
In Automatic transmission vehicle
•  All Doors closed
•  Fuel level is greater than 10 liters
•  Gear is in PARK position
•  Vehicle should be in Standstill
Graphic
When vehicle is started remotely using Adrenox connect mobile App, By default Cabin climate settings will be changed to 18 deg C in Auto mode.
In remote Engine start condition user will have access to control below Cabin climate setting under Climate settings
1. Duration time : User can select the time duration for which remote cooling will be active using Adrenox connect mobile App, Duration can be selected from minimum of 2 mins to maximum of 15 mins.
2. Cabin Temperature settings: User can change temperature settings during Remote cooling
3. Front defrost: User can Activate /De-activate front defrost during remote cooling by selecting front defrost option in mobile app
4. Rear Defrost: User can Activate /De-activate Rear defrost during remote cooling by selecting Rear defrost option in Adrenox connect mobile App,
Once vehicle is started remotely customer will get feedback in the Adrenox connect mobile App,
Graphic
Remote cooling can be De-activated by using Mobile App. if vehicle is already in Remote start condition by Pressing start engine button, Remote cooling will be deactivated.
In Mobile App customer will get notification if Remote cooling is failed.
Remote cooling operation is suggested to be used while vehicle is parked in open sunny area for long duration. It is recommended not to operate Remote cooling when vehicle is parked in a closed environment.
7.4.9 Rapid Cabin Cooling
Rapid Cabin Cooling In FATC
For rapid cooling of the cabin, the following AC settings are recommended:
•  Make sure that all the windows are fully closed
•  Fully open the vents and adjust Louvres to direct air toward face
•  Turn ON AC
•  Press MAX AC Switch
Rapid Cabin Cooling In ETC
For rapid cooling of the cabin, the following AC settings are recommended:
•  Make sure that all the windows are fully closed
•  Set the blower to maximum speed
•  Fully open the vents and adjust Louvres to direct air toward face
•  Set the air distribution control to face mode
•  Set air intake control to recirculation mode
•  Turn the air conditioner ON
•  Set the temperature control knob to extreme left (coolest) position
For faster cabin cooling, you can select re-circulated air intake mode initially. Once passenger compartment reaches a comfortable temperature, shift to fresh air mode. Also blower speed and temperature control knob can be re-adjusted as desired.
If your vehicle was parked in the hot sun with all the windows closed, drive the vehicle with windows open for the first few minutes. This will help in venting the hot interior air out and allow the air conditioner to cool the cabin quickly. In case you are leaving the vehicle parked in sun frequently then activate the Active Cooling Option.
7.4.10 Rapid Cabin Heating
For rapid heating of the cabin, the following AC settings are recommended:
1. Make sure that all the windows are fully closed.
2. Set the blower to maximum speed.
3. Set the air distribution control to foot mode.
4. Set air intake control to recirculation mode.
5. Set the temperature control knob to extreme right (hot) position.
6. For de-humidified heating, switch the air conditioner ON. So on rainy conditions if the heater is ON then also keep the AC ON.
For faster cabin heating, you can select re-circulated air intake mode initially. Once passenger compartment reaches a comfortable temperature, blower speed and temperature control knob can be re-adjusted as desired.
In extreme cold weather conditions, the engine coolant takes time to get heated up. Hence, it might take a while for hot air discharge, even when blower is running and temperature control dial is set to hot position.
7.4.11 HVAC Points to Remember
•  For quickly defogging/de-misting outside of front windshield, it is advisable to operate the windshield wiper/washer for few times intermittently
•  If snow has deposited on windshield, use ice scraper to remove ice deposited before using wiper
•  In freezing weather, warm the front windshield with the defogger before using the windshield washer. Also use a washer fluid having anti-freezing properties. These will help prevent the washer fluid from freezing on your windshield
•  Dirty/contaminated windshield would make misting / fogging-up worse. Always keep the inside and outside of windshield clean
•  Reduced air flow because of clogged HVAC filter or any other obstructions in air flow path may lead to inadequate defogging/de-misting performance. If air flow seems to have considerably reduced, get the filter cleaned or replaced immediately. Air flow path should be kept free of obstructions
•  Reduced cooling performance from air conditioner may lead to inadequate defogging/de-misting. If cooling effect seems to have dropped considerably, get the air conditioning system checked by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer
Your vehicle is equipped with a HVAC filter. If the AC performance is considerably low, it is recommended to have the HVAC filter checked at the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
Keep in mind that a choked filter will also lead to poor cooling.
Never operate HVAC system with the filter removed. This may result in premature failure of system components.
8 ADVANCE VEHICLE FEATURES
8.1 Surround View System (If equipped)
Surround View System assists in parking and low speed maneuvering by providing views of vehicle’s surroundings with the help of 4 cameras located in the front grille, rear bumper and on both exterior mirrors.
When driver activates SVS by switch while driving forward above 15 km/h vehicle speed , it assists by providing rear surroundings view.
Before using the system, Make sure that the camera lenses are clean and not covered by any dust or other obstructions that may impair the system.
Disclaimer
•  The cameras in Surround View System provide only the view and do not detect or alarm if any obstacles are in the view. Driver must check for the surrounding for any possible collisions with obstacles.
•  There is a noticeable blind area of about 20cm where the cameras cannot see around the periphery of the vehicle. Driver must be careful to check for any obstacles in the blind areas.
•  Surround View System provides the views by stitching the views from the four cameras with respect to their geometric orientations. If the position or the installation angle of any of the camera is changed e.g. after a collision, then do not use the feature for safety reasons as the image stitching may not be correct.
•  If the exterior mirror is folded or out of place then image stitching may not be correct.
•  Use the Surround View System only when all the doors and the tailgate are closed.
•  The area around the vehicle is shown using the camera images and the car image is a standard graphic shown by the system. Hence the car image shown on the screen is not real and may not represent your actual vehicle.
•  Objects and obstacles above the camera height or out of the field of view of the cameras are not displayed.
•  Camera lenses distort the actual view surroundings to capture more coverage. The objects appear are altered and may not be dimensionally same as real as on the screen.
•  The accuracy of the orientation decreases when the vehicle is raised/lowered based on the occupant’s weight.
The display screen shows the direction in which the rear of the vehicle is travelling when showing rear view. The front of the vehicle swings out more than the rear of the vehicle. Maintain sufficient distance to the obstacles so that the exterior mirrors or the corners of the vehicle does not collide with any obstacles.
8.1.1 SVS Activation and Deactivation
Use any of the following methods to activate SVS
Graphic
•  Select “Surround View” Icon from Infotainment screen.
•  System activates when the ignition is ON and the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position regardless of vehicle speed or switch position.
SVS deactivates when one of the following action is performed
Graphic
•  Driver presses “Close button” in Infotainment screen.
•  When SVS hard icon is pressed again.
•  When driver activates SVS through Reverse gear or at lower speeds (< 15 km/h) then SVS display goes off if vehicle speed exceeds 15 km/h while driving forward.
When reverse gear is engaged, SVS cannot be deactivated by SVS hard switch press.
SVS is a supplementary driving assist function. Always check the vehicle's surroundings for safety. Do not solely rely on what is displayed on the screen. What you see on the screen may differ from the actual vehicle's location.
8.1.2 SVS Views
SVS provides different Views, Drive blind spot view monitor, Video Recording, Parking Guidelines, Parking Assistance etc. to assist the driver. In certain views, you can rotate 3D surroundings. Refer below sections on how to use each function
How to select Views
•  To display the icon bar, touch the notch in top middle of screen.
•  Touch an icon 1-8 to select a desired view.
Graphic
To select 3D surroundings view, first press Icon and then desired view.
When you touch car model in the bird’s eye view area, an oval will appear with 8 camera icons to switch different 3D views.
Graphic
•  Swipe your finger drawing an oval shape to view complete 360 degree surroundings or you can swipe clockwise / anti-clockwise in top/bottom area of screen to view the 3D surroundings.
3D Surroundings View will not be available at vehicle speed above 15 km/h
Graphic
Graphic
Oval in bird’s eye view will be automatically hidden after 8 second of no operation.
Sl. No
Icons
Description
1.
Graphic
This view assists you with front surroundings view for maneuvering in front of the vehicle.
2.
Graphic
This view assists you with front surroundings view for maneuvering in rear of the vehicle.
3.
Graphic
This view helps you with left side view near the front tire when parking.
4.
Graphic
This view helps you with right side view near the front tire when parking.
5.
Graphic
This view helps you to see the objects closer to rear bumper.
6.
Graphic
This view helps you to see the objects closer to front bumper.
7.
Graphic
In these views, you can see the areas surrounding the vehicle in 3D.
8.
Graphic
You can have each camera wider view (almost 180 degree view) by pressing this icon which helps in crossing junctions.
Also When you are in 3D surroundings mode , you can have 3D surroundings in full screen view by pressing this icon.
you can exit full screen view by touching icon.
9.
Refer Image No: W53C302
This view is bird’s eye view / 2D top view which gives top down view of vehicle surrounding by stitching all four camera images.
10.
Refer Image No: W53C302
When you touch this area, front surroundings view will be seen in the left screen area
11.
When you touch this area, rear surroundings will be seen in the left screen area
12.
When you touch this area, left surroundings will be seen in the left screen area
13.
When you touch this area, right surroundings will be seen in the left screen area
14.
Graphic
You can view SVS settings option using this Icon.
15.
Graphic
You can capture screen shot of Infotainment screen using this Icon.
Default View Selection: You can select 2D or 3D as default view and when you activate SVS , it shows 2D or 3D surroundings view based on your selection.
If you select 2D view, you can select Normal or Wide View as default view to be shown whenever you activate SVS.
Graphic
To select default view, touch SVS Settings icon and then touch
Graphic
Graphic
Automatic Side View: Touch SVS settings icon and enable Automatic Side View. You can see left/right 3D view in Infotainment when left/right turn indicator is activated in forward /D gear.
A pop-up message on the screen appears
When:
- The tailgate is opened.
- The driver's door is opened.
- The passenger's door is opened.
Surround view system displays the combined images from the four cameras. Therefore, the displayed image may be different from the actual vehicle position and parking guideline, etc. Make sure that no persons or animals or any objects/materials are in the maneuvering area. Pay attention and ensure safety before maneuvering the car.
Transparent Bottom View (If equipped)
When you touch on SVS car in bird’s eye view, SVS car changes to semi-transparent and view beneath the ground (Transparent Bottom View) will be visible once the vehicle starts moving as lane marking under vehicle bottom is visible in below image.
Graphic
Until the vehicle moves, the bottom portion is shown as black opaque box
Touch again on SVS car in bird’s eye view to revert to opaque car model.
Transparent Bottom View will not be available at vehicle speed above 15 km/h
Transparent bottom view is based on image stored in the memory based on past few image frames taken some time back and doesn’t display live feed. Pay attention and ensure safety before maneuvering the car.
8.1.3 Static & Dynamic Guidelines
Disclaimer
Static and dynamic guidelines can be used as references only and may differ if camera orientation is altered due to passenger occupancy.
Graphic
Dynamic Guidelines indicate the path the vehicle will traverse with the current steering angle.
•  Static Guidelines indicate the placement of the vehicle with respect to the parking slot.
•  During parking, you can compare the Static guidelines against the Parking Slot Lines to know if your vehicle placement is in line with the parking slot lines.
•  Color coding (Amber, Green, Blue) on the static lines help in assessing the distance of the obstacles [at the ground plane] from the vehicle’s boundary.
Graphic
•  Dynamic Guidelines blue indicate the path the vehicle will traverse with the current steering angle.
You can select from settings to have parking guidelines (Static and Dynamic) in 2D or/and 3D Views.
8.1.4 Parallel and Vertical (Perpendicular) Parking Assistance
Disclaimer
Parallel and Perpendicular Parking are only assistance and driver should take care of surrounding for collisions.
A. Vertical/Perpendicular Parking
Step 1: Selecting the Perpendicular Parking Mode
Drive ahead of the parking slot so that Camera can have the parking slot view.
•  It is driver’s responsibility to identify the suitable parking area to park car safely.
Graphic
Graphic
Choose Vertical Parking icon from SVS settings. Below overlays (Ref Img No: W53H71) will appear on either side.
Step 2: Keeping the Vehicle Ready for parking
•  Move the vehicle either forward or backward so that the end point of the shortest arc [either blue or green, based on the side in which the vehicle will be parked], is coinciding with the parking slot line. (Blue arc line as shown in the image (Ref Img No: W53H71)
•  Once it is done, turn the steering wheel in the direction of the parking slot, till the rack end/extreme end move of steering wheel.
Step 3: Parking the Vehicle
•  Start Reversing the vehicle until the static lines are parallel to the parking slot lines. Then, keep the steering straight, and reverse car until the vehicle is in final position in the slot. Parking is Complete
•  Steering will be straight if both dynamic and static lines are overlapping
Graphic
•  In the below image (Ref Img No: W53H84) vehicle is in line with the parking slot lines, so at this instance, the steering should be made straight.
B. Parallel Parking
Step 1: Choose the Parallel Parking Mode
•  Drive ahead of the parking slot, so that Camera can have the parking slot view and choose Parallel parking icon
Graphic
from settings.
Graphic
Two green rectangular boxes will appear on either side as below image(Ref Img No: S52G15)
Step 2: Keeping the Vehicle Ready for parking
•  Move the vehicle forward or backward, so that the one of the rectangular box is placed inside the parking slot
•  Make sure there are no obstacles in the green parking slot after orange pole.
•  Turn the steering wheel in the direction in which parking is intended.
Step 3: Park the Vehicle
•  Hold the steering in the current position once selecting the parking area after turning the steering wheel as the area color turns green as in below image screens.
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
•  Now start reversing the vehicle. An arc will appear on the screen as below image(Ref Img No: W53H78). Stop reversing the vehicle when the arc touches the end of parking Slot
Graphic
•  Now turn the steering in the opposite direction until the rack end/ extreme end move of steering wheel [i.e full rotation] and start reversing the vehicle. Below screen(Ref Img No: W53H70) will appear.
•  Continue reversing the vehicle until the static lines are parallel to the parking slot lines. Then, keep the steering straight, and keep reversing the vehicle until the vehicle is in final position in the slot. Parking is Complete
Graphic
•  Steering will be straight as below (Ref Img No: W53H73 if both dynamic and static lines are overlapping.
8.1.5 Blind-Spot View Monitor
Blind-Spot View Monitor displays the driver's and passenger's side rear view area including some blind area which cannot be viewed from rear view mirror.
To activate the BVM, select Blind View Monitor from Instrument Cluster Settings.
When the left/right turn indicator is activated, respective video feed (left/right BVM) will be displayed in Instrument Cluster.
Left Side
Right Side
Graphic
Graphic
To turn off BVM, deactivate turn indicator.
Other Instrument Cluster warning messages and screens takes priority over BVM hence BVM may not be available always when you activate it.
BVM view may not be visible clearly during night time due to camera limitations.
BVM is only view and may not detect, alert or control if any vehicles in blind area. Like all assistance function, BVM has limitations. Sole-reliance on the system may result in a collision.
Objects are closer than they appear. Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to change the lane before doing so may result in crash and serious injury or death.
8.1.6 Drive Video Recording (If equipped)
The cameras installed on the vehicle body record the video of the vehicle surroundings during driving which can be used for fault diagnosis, accident evidence identification and to capture special event during driving.
SD card is used to store the recorded video.
When there is no SD card, system shows “No SD card” text.
General and Emergency Recording
When the engine is started, video recording starts and files are saved in “General Video” folder inside DVR interface.
In General Video Folder, the old recording files will be overwritten cyclically to keep the latest recordings.
It will be disabled in setting or if already in DVR screen it will come out when vehicle speed > 5 kmph or Blind View Monitor is ON or Vehicle is in Reverse Gear.
You can record special event during driving by SVS hard switch long press (approximately 4 seconds). These videos are saved in “Emergency Video” folder inside DVR interface.
Emergency Video Recording
Videos of deployed crash, Automatic Emergency Braking events etc. are also saved in “Emergency Video” folder inside DVR interface.
Emergency Videos will be recorded and saved in memory when the conditions met and battery connection is intact and not disturbed by any means.
Video clips stored in the Emergency Folder can’t be overwritten and can be deleted by user only..
How to access DVR screen
Open SVS settings and touch the "Drive Video Recording" icon to access the DVR function.
Below screen appears with “Live View”.
Graphic
A: General Video
B: Emergency Video
Under the DVR display interface, click "Back" icon to exit the DVR screen.
The recording mark and recording time appear on the “Live View” screen when a video is getting recorded.
"Live View" can be accessed even if there is no SD card.
Video Playback
•  Under DVR interface, click "Emergency Video" folder or "General Video" folder to replay any video file.
•  Saved video file name is as per date and time of recorded video. Video files are saved with .AVI file extension.
Eg. File Name - 20151203_163028.AVI
20151203 - YYYYMMDD (Y-Year, M-Month, D-Day)
163028 - HHMMSS (H-Hour,M-Minute, S-Second)
•  Click the “edit” button to delete/move video files.
Current recording will get paused during video playback.
Graphic
Playback and editing interface show as below:
Graphic
1: To close a video
2: To replay previous video
3: To play video fast backward
4: Pause/play
5: To play video slow forward
6: To replay next video
DVR Settings
Graphic
•  In DVR mode, click setting button to enter the setting interface.
•  Video length setting: DVR video clip recording time can be selected as 3 minutes or 5 minutes based on settings.
When memory is full, System shows a text message for user to delete files.
8.1.7 SVS Troubleshooting
•  When there is any error in system/camera lost connection, the corresponding camera view on screen shows green color with an icon indicating camera error. Visit nearest Mahindra Service Center for assistance.
•  In case of malfunction , system shows a pop-up message "Please Contact Service Center"
8.1.8 System Limitations
•  Surround View System is subject to certain system limitation and may be unavailable or only partially available in the following situations:
-During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)
-At night or in very dark places.
-Display may get flicker, if the area around cameras area is lit by LED or fluorescent lighting.
-If there is a sudden change in temperature, from cold to hot areas.
-If your vehicle got damaged and if any camera position and the settings got changed.
-When rain, snow, dirt or an object adheres in front of the camera lens..
-When the head lights are not bright due to dirt on the lens of if the aiming is not adjusted properly.
-When strong light rays falls on the camera. (For example, the light directly shines on the front of the vehicle at sunrise of sunset).
-When a sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or under a bridge).
•  Video may get blur if camera is exposed to bright light and area around is dark/shadowed.
•  SVS Camera images are reproduced slightly delayed and not in real time due to processing and stitching.
•  Sometimes during SVS activation , you may not see stable video feed as some parameters update happens.
•  When SVS is used in the area with AC light sources , black bands might be seen running in the video feed.
•  If video file is corrupted , you may observe black screen while replaying the video and system will reset to default view.
•  During video playback, you may observe green screen sometimes.
•  DVR may not record properly if the power is interrupted in between of usage. e.g during crash, low battery, removal of battery and other reasons.
•  Use SD card as fresh and formatted before first use and do not swap SD cards frequently.
•  SVS is only a supplementary function and may display obstacles from a distorted perspective.
•  Avoid using SVS if you are having eye color blindness or impaired color vision.
•  Objects above the ground or hanged may appear to be far away than they are. But in reality, objects shall be closer to your car. In such cases, avoid using guidelines to judge the distance. Since it leads to mis-adjustments and increase the risk of collision with your car.
•  SVS video is shown based on driver activation but it cannot be used to see a complete surrounding view which cannot replace the driver for looking into exterior and interior view mirrors.
•  Some obstacles are hard to depict and thus very difficult recognize due to stitched images, hence sole-reliance on the system may result in a collision.
System Maintenance
•  Always keep all camera lens clean. Foreign materials on the camera lens can cause system error and reduced visibility.
•  Always use clean water & soft nonabrasive cloth to clean the lens
•  Don’t clean the camera lens and the area around the cameras with a power washer.
•  When SVS parts need to be replaced due to damage/ non-functioning / any other reason or abnormal video with "No Panoramic Calibration" text , Visit nearest Mahindra Service Center for recalibration.
•  Always clean camera lens smoothly and don’t apply much pressure.
8.2 Rear View Camera (RVC) (if equipped)
Graphic
Rear View Camera is located at center of the spare wheel.
Rear View Camera assists the driver while reversing & manoeuvring the Car at lower speeds. It has the following features:
1. Normal Mode and Full Screen Mode
2. Static & Dynamic Guidelines
8.2.1 Feature Description
1. Normal Rear View
By selecting view icon, Rear View camera provides view of vehicle's rear surrounding on the Infotainment screen.
TFT
Normal Mode
Full Screen Mode
Graphic
NA
Digital
Normal Mode
Full Screen Mode
Graphic
Graphic
It overcomes limitation of IRVM, where ground is visible only after longer distance from vehicle rear. Whereas with the RVC, the ground will be visible closer to Vehicle’s Rear.
2. Static & Dynamic Guidelines
Guidelines shall assist the driver in understanding the position/placement of the vehicle with respect to the surroundings by displaying overlays with representation for the ego vehicle movement when driven straight and when driven in a path.
Dynamic Guidelines indicate path, the vehicle will traverse with current steering position.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
S.No
Icons
Description
1.
Screen Capture
To capture the current screen and save it in gallery.
2.
Automatic View switching
To toggle between front and rear view.
3.
Full screen
To change view to full screen mode.
4.
Guidelines
To enable and disable static and dynamic guidelines.
This will help the driver in adjusting the steering, towards hitting any obstacles.
Colour coding on the Static guideline help in assessing the distance of obstacle from the vehicles’ rear. In the RVC Video, Red coloured section of Static Line falls on a object, then the object is within 0.5 meter distance from the vehicle’s rear. Likewise, Amber indicates till 1 meter, Green indicates 1-2 mts.
8.2.2 Entry and Exit Conditions
Entry Conditions
Whenever you apply the reverse gear, the infotainment will enter into ‘Rear View Camera Mode’ and displays the video without close button.
You can view reverse video with close button, by selecting Reverse View Camera Option present on Infotainment Screen, irrespective of the gear position.
Below is the path: App drawer -> Reverse View Camera.
Rear view screen when enter through infotainment displays video with close button, then again when reverse gear is engaged rear view without close button will be displayed
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
You cannot enter RVC Mode, through the infotainment screen button, if the vehicle is in forward gear and vehicle speed exceeds 20 kmph.
Exit Conditions
•  Infotainment has entered ‘RVC Mode’ due to reverse gear, then when driver disengages reverse gear to any other gear then Rear view mode will be closed/changed to front view depending on the gear
•  Infotainment has entered ‘RVC Mode’, due to Reverse Camera selection present on the Infotainment, then RVC mode can be exited, by selecting the Cancel button appearing on the screen
•  RVC Mode is exited, whenever vehicle is in forward gear and vehicle speed exceeds 20 kmph
8.2.3 Camera Maintenance
Always keep the Camera lens clean from dust. Presence of dirt on lens may lead to poor image quality.
Always use clear water & soft nonabrasive cloth to clean the lens.
Don’t clean the camera lens and the area around the rear view camera with a power washer.
•  In case of any RVC-related issues, the Infotainment shall display Please ‘Contact Service Centre’ and vehicle needs to be taken to the Service Centre. Avoid using the Rear-View Camera under these circumstances
Graphic
Graphic
•  If rear of your vehicle is damaged or if the Camera position is changed, please contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Service Center, for recalibrating the Camera.
8.2.4 System Limitations
•  Reverse view camera may not operate normally, when you drive in the extremely high or low temperature area. (Operating temperature: -20°C ~ 65°C)
•  Under certain circumstances given below, the rear view camera system will work with limitation or will not function fully:
- In heavy rain, snow or fog.
- At night or in very dark places.
- If the camera is exposed to very bright light sources.
- Display may flicker, if the camera area is lit by LED or fluorescent lighting.
•  If there is a sudden change in temperature, from cold to hot areas
•  If the camera lens got dirty or obstructed
•  If the rear of your vehicle got damaged. And if the Camera position and the settings got changed. Please contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Service Center
•  Camera image reproduced slightly delayed and not in real time due to processing. As the display is 2-dimensional, pointed and protruding obstacles are hard to depict and thus very difficult to recognise. Please avoid reverse view camera in the above situation. It could you otherwise injure others or damage objects and your vehicle
•  The performance gets affected sometimes due to deposition of ice, dust, heavy rain, heavy wind, heavy exhaust on the camera
•  Images shown on the display is a mirror-inverted manner, as like the rearview mirror. Make sure that no persons or animals and any objects/materials are in the manoeuvring area. Pay attention and ensure safety before manoeuvring the car. Driver is legally responsible for their car
•  The reverse view camera is only a supplementary function and may display obstacles from a distorted perspective & inaccurately
•  Avoid using of rear view camera, if you are having eye colour blindness or impaired colour vision
•  Objects above the ground or hanged may appear to be far away than they are. But in reality, objects shall be closer to your car. In such cases, avoid using guidelines to judge the distance. Since it leads to mis-adjustments and increase the risk of collision with your car
•  It is driver’s responsibility to identify the suitable parking area to park his car safely
•  Rear view video is shown, whenever reverse gear is applied, but it cannot be used as a rear view monitoring system, which cannot replace the driver for looking into exterior and interior view mirrors
Rear View Camera is only meant to aid the driver and to enhance convenience while parking. It does not in any way replace the driver’s abilities and driving skills while using this system. Under any circumstances, Mahindra accepts no responsibility and cannot be held liable for any direct or indirect, incidental or consequential damage caused by this system.
8.3 Front View Camera (If equipped)
Graphic
Front View Camera is located on front grill applique.
Front View Camera assists the driver while manoeuvring the Car at lower speeds. It has the following features:
1. Normal Mode and Full Screen Mode​
2. Static & Dynamic Guidelines​
8.3.1 Feature Description
1. Normal View
By selecting view icon, Front View camera provides view of vehicle's front surrounding on the Infotainment screen.
TFT
Digital
Normal Mode
Normal Mode
Graphic
Graphic
It overcomes limitation of the driver to see the ground area in front of the bumper, FVC assist the driver to see closer area to the front bumper which will help for a better parking.
2. Static & Dynamic Guidelines
Guidelines shall assist the driver in understanding the position/placement of the vehicle with respect to the surroundings by displaying overlays with representation for the ego vehicle movement when driven straight and when driven in a path.
Dynamic Guidelines indicate path, the vehicle will traverse with current steering position.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
S.No
Icons
Description
1.
Screen Capture
To capture the current screen and save it in gallery.
2.
Automatic View switching
To toggle between front and rear view.
3.
Full screen
To change view to full screen mode.
4.
Guidelines
To enable and disable static and dynamic guidelines.
This will help the driver in adjusting the steering, towards hitting any obstacles.
Colour coding on the Static guideline help in assessing the distance of obstacle from the vehicles’ front. In the FVC Video, Red coloured section of Static Line falls on a object, then the object is within 0.5 meter distance from the vehicle’s front. Likewise, Amber indicates till 1 meter, Green indicates 1-2 mts.
8.3.2 Entry and Exit Conditions
Entry Conditions
Turn on ignition and Go to App drawer in the infotainment screen and select Front View Camera.
Front view screen when enter through infotainment displays video with close button, then again when reverse gear is engaged rear view without close button will be displayed
Front view can be opened through the hard button provided on the infotainment bezel.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
You cannot enter FVC Mode, through the infotainment screen button, if the vehicle is in forward gear and vehicle speed exceeds 20 kmph.
Exit Conditions
•  If the driver has selected entry to ‘FVC Mode’ by selecting Front View Camera option present on infotainment screen, then FVC mode exits when reverse gear is engaged.
•  Infotainment has entered ‘FVC Mode’, due to front Camera selection present on the Infotainment, then FVC mode can be exited, by selecting the Cancel button appearing on the screen
•  FVC Mode is exited, whenever vehicle is in forward gear and vehicle speed exceeds 20 kmph
•  Front view can be exited through the hard button provided on the infotainment bezel irrespective of the entry condition.
8.3.3 Camera Maintenance
Always keep the Camera lens clean from dust. Presence of dirt on lens may lead to poor image quality.
Always use clear water & soft nonabrasive cloth to clean the lens.
Don’t clean the camera lens and the area around the front view camera with a power washer.
•  In case of any FVC-related issues, the Infotainment displays ‘ Please Contact Service Centre’ and vehicle needs to be taken to the Service Centre. Avoid using the Front-View Camera under these circumstances.
•  If front of your vehicle is damaged or if the Camera position is changed, please contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Service Center immediately.
8.3.4 System Limitations
•  Front view camera may not operate normally, when you drive in the extremely high or low temperature area. (Operating temperature: -20°C ~ 65°C)
•  Under certain circumstances given below, the front view camera system will work with limitation or will not function fully:
- In heavy rain, snow or fog.
- At night or in very dark places.
- If the camera is exposed to very bright light sources.
- Display may flicker, if the camera area is lit by LED or fluorescent lighting.
- If there is a sudden change in temperature, from cold to hot areas.
- If the camera lens got dirty or obstructed.
•  If the front of your vehicle got damaged. And if the Camera position and the settings got changed. Please contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Service Center
•  Camera image reproduced slightly delayed and not in real time due to processing. As the display is 2-dimensional, pointed and protruding obstacles are hard to depict and thus very difficult to recognise. Please avoid front view camera in the above situation. It could you otherwise injure others or damage objects and your vehicle
•  The performance gets affected sometimes due to deposition of ice, dust, heavy rain, heavy wind, heavy exhaust on the camera
•  Make sure that no persons or animals or any objects/materials are in the manoeuvring area. Pay attention and ensure safety before manoeuvring the car. Driver is legally responsible for their car
•  The front view camera is only a supplementary function and may display obstacles from a distorted perspective & inaccurately
•  Avoid using of front view camera, if you are having eye colour blindness or impaired colour vision
•  Objects above the ground or hanged may appear to be far away than they are. But in reality, objects shall be closer to your car. In such cases, avoid using guidelines to judge the distance. Since it leads to mis-adjustments and increase the risk of collision with your car
•  It is driver’s responsibility to identify the suitable parking area to park car safely
Front View Camera is only meant to aid the driver and to enhance convenience while parking. It does not in any way replace the driver’s abilities and driving skills while using this system. Under any circumstances, Mahindra accepts no responsibility and cannot be held liable for any direct or indirect, incidental or consequential damage caused by this system.
8.4 PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM
Graphic
8.4.1 Parking Assistance System (PAS) – RPAS & FPAS (If equipped)
Parking assistance system is provided to aid the driver while parking the vehicle in reverse and in front. While Parking, PAS will detect the obstacles at the rear and front side of the vehicle within the sensing zone, which cannot be viewed through the internal rear-view mirror and the outside rear view mirrors and windshield. The PAS will then alert the driver by a beep sound and display about the location of the detected obstacle from the vehicle. The alert sound level will vary proportional to the distance. Smaller the distance shorter the interval between the beeps.
Parking Assistance System Sensors
Front Sensor Location
Rear Sensor Location
Graphic
Graphic
Two PAS sensors are located in the rear bumper and two sensors are located in front Bumper to assist driver for hassle free parking
RPAS and FPAS will give proper alerts at vehicle speed less than 8kmph.
Always keep the sensors clean and free from ice formation, dust, water etc. for proper working of the system.
Do not press or shock the sensors by hitting or using a high-pressure water gun while washing. The sensors could be damaged.
Magnetic devices present in the detection range could vastly affect the sensor performance and the distance displayed may not be accurate.
Driving and Operation
•  PAS is an aiding system. Under no circumstances mahindra will accept any responsibility or can be held liable for any direct or indirect, incidental or consequential damage caused by this system
•  System will not sense pot holes, trenches or drainages which are below the ground level
•  Repainting of the sensor will affect the performance of the system
Activation & De-activation of PAS
•  The Vehicle should be in IGN ON state to activate the Parking assistance system
•  RPAS will be activated automatically when reverse gear engaged and Hand Brake is disengaged
•  RPAS will get deactivated when reverse gear is disengaged or Hand brake is engaged
•  FPAS will be activated automatically when Vehicle speed is in between 1 to 8 kmph and hand brake is dis engaged or clutch is pressed, Hand brake is disengaged and vehicle is standstill or reverse gear is engaged and hand brake is disengaged.
•  FPAS will get deactivated when vehicle speed is more than 8 kmph or hand brake is engaged or reverse gear is disengaged.
•  When the obstacles come in the sensing range, the system starts giving the indication based on the distance and direction of the obstacles as defined in the detecting zones. The closer the obstacles, more display bars illuminated & beeps alerts
8.4.2 PAS (RPAS & FPAS) Information on Instrument Cluster Screen
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
RPAS display on instrument cluster screen gives the following information:
•  Left zone indicates obstacle on left side
•  Right zone indicates obstacle on right side
•  If Obstacle is in center then left and Right both zone will get highlight..
3 bars indicate how close the obstacle is from the vehicle rear bumper, with all bars highlighted being very close and 3rd bar alone indicate being distant.
FPAS display on instrument cluster screen gives the following information:
•  Left Corner zone indicates obstacle on left side
•  Right Corner Zone indicates obstacle on the right side
2 bars indicate how close the obstacle is from the vehicle front bumper, with all bars highlighted being very close and 2nd bar alone indicate being distant.
8.4.3 Operation of PAS
1. Start the vehicle.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
2. Change the gear to Reverse (engage reverse gear) and Dis engage Hand brake. RPAS & FPAS will be displayed in Instrument Cluster.
The RPAS & FPAS both will be displayed in the instrument cluster screen during obstacle detection.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
3. For FPAS alone, disengage Hand brake and drive the vehicle forward with speed limit within 1 to 8 kmph
FPAS will be displayed as like below in the instrument cluster screen during obstacle detection.
4. Display bars in the respective direction will glow according to obstacles in its path.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
5. The Beep sound can be heard from the Cluster speaker. Frequency of the beep will increase if obstacle detected by sensor is closer (crossing each display bar) and the sound will be continuous if any of the obstacle is near the vehicle.
Graphic
6. FPAS warning sound can be disabled using PAS Switch, available on IP. PAS switch LED will not glow when FPAS sound is in active state and will be in ON state when PAS sound deactivated.
8.4.4 Pay Attention
1. If bars in any one of the sides are displayed with ‘?’ marks and “Park Assist Fail” is displayed on instrumental cluster display, contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
2. If all bars are displayed with ‘?’ marks and “Park Assist Fail” is displayed on instrumental cluster display, contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
3. Obstacle in the blind zone cannot be sensed by the system. Applicable for all sensors.
Graphic
4. Please check the condition of the obstacle behind and in front of your vehicle before moving. In some cases, the display may be not as same as reality due to the installed sensor level, obstacle shape and reflection condition.
Graphic
5. Point B will be detected sooner or later, but A may not be detected at all. Applicable for all sensors.
Graphic
6. Not all obstacles are detected from 120 cm. For instance, a person is detected from 75 cm because of the weak reflection or absorption of the waves of the clothes.
Graphic
7. The distance indication may move up and down due to different sizes of the obstacle at different positions.
Graphic
8. Though the obstacle is in the sensing zone, obstacle may not be detected since the ultrasonic waves are not reflected back to the sensor.
Graphic
9. The obstacle of a conical shape may not be detected, since the ultrasonic waves get reflected away
8.4.5 Limitations of PAS
•  System may not sense obstacles like wire mesh, handrail, small objects which are below the bumper level
•  System may not sense obstacles with cotton or spongy surface, which will absorb ultrasonic waves emitted by PAS
•  System performance is dependent on the reflection angle of the obstacle
•  System may give false alert without obstacles while parking/reversing the vehicle on grasslands, gravels and bumpy roads considering it to be an obstacle
•  System may alert you by sensing the ground when the bumper is not fitted in its intended position or when the vehicle is overloaded
•  System may give false signal while the vehicle moves from plain ground to a slope terrain and vice versa
•  System may give false signal by sensing the ground when the bumper is tilted more from the normal position or when the vehicle is heavily overloaded
•  System may give false signal an alarm during heavy rain, snow and heavy wind conditions
•  The shape of the obstacle may prevent a sensor from detecting it. Some obstacles for example as follows:
–  Sharply-angled objects
–  Tall or curved curb
–  Low obstacles (with height of 40 cm above ground level)
–  Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of the vehicle
•  Depending upon the shape of the obstacle and other environmental factors, the detection distance may shorten or detection may be impossible
•  Obstacles may not be detected if they are too close to the sensor
•  Thin posts or objects lower than the sensor may not be detected when approached, even if they have been detected once
•  Because of other ultrasonic sources, sensor may give false alarm for e.g., sweeping machines, high pressure steam cleaners and neon lights
•  Due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves, the vicinity of the vehicle is noisy. It may cause sensor to give false alarm
8.5 Reverse Parking Assistance System (RPAS) – Type 1 (if equipped)
Reverse parking assistance system is provided to aid the driver while parking the vehicle in reverse at a speed of less than 8kmph. While reversing, RPAS will detect the obstacles at the rear side of the vehicle within the sensing zone, which cannot be viewed through the internal rear-view mirror and the outside rear view mirrors. The RPAS will then alert the driver by a beep sound and display about the location of the detected obstacle. The alert sound level will vary proportional to the distance. Smaller the distance shorter the interval between the beeps.
Activation & de-activation of RPAS
•  The Vehicle should be in IGN ON state to activate the Parking assistance system
•  RPAS will be activated automatically when reverse gear is engaged and Hand Brake is disengaged
•  RPAS will be deactivated when reverse gear is disengaged or Hand brake is engaged.
•  When the obstacles come in the sensing range, the system starts giving the indication based on the distance and direction of the obstacles as defined in the detecting zones. The closer the obstacles, more display bars illuminated & beeps alerts.
RPAS display on instrument cluster screen gives the following information:
•  Left zone indicates obstacle on left side
•  Right zone indicates obstacle on right side
•  If obstacle is in center then right and left both zone will get highlight
3 bars indicate how close the obstacle is from the vehicle rear bumper, with all bars highlighted being very close and bar 3rd bar alone being distant.
8.5.1 Operation of RPAS
1. Start the vehicle.
2. Change the gear from neutral to reverse and disengage the Hand brake for RPAS information on Instrument cluster screen.
Graphic
The RPAS will be displayed in the instrument cluster screen during obstacle detection.
3. Start moving the vehicle in reverse direction
Graphic
4. Display bars in the respective direction will glow according to obstacles in its path.
Graphic
5. The Beep sound can be heard from the driver side speaker. Frequency of the beep will increase if obstacle comes closer (crossing each display bar) and the sound will be continuous if any of the obstacle is less than 50 cm.
8.6 Reverse Parking Assistance System (RPAS) - Type 2 (if equipped)
Reverse parking assistance system is provided to aid the driver while parking the vehicle in reverse at a speed of less than 8 kmph. While reversing, RPAS will detect the obstacles at the rear side of the vehicle within the sensing zone, which cannot be viewed through the internal rear-view mirror and the outside rear view mirrors. The RPAS will then alert the driver by a beep sound about the location of the detected obstacle. The alert sound level will vary proportional to the distance. Smaller the distance shorter the interval between the beeps.
Activation & de-activation of RPAS
•  The Vehicle should be in IGN ON state to activate the Parking assistance system
•  RPAS will be activated automatically when reverse gear is engaged and Hand Brake is disengaged
•  RPAS will be deactivated when reverse gear is disengaged or Hand brake is engaged
•  When the obstacles come in the sensing range, the system starts giving the alert beeps. Closer the obstacles, higher the frequency of the alert beeps and when obstacle is very near to the vehicle, alert beeps will be continuous
The frequency of RPAS Alert beeps will increase as the obstacle comes closer to the vehicle and when the obstacle comes very close to the vehicle the alert beeps will become continuous
Operation of RPAS
1. Start the vehicle.
2. Change the gear from neutral to reverse and disengage the Hand brake for RPAS alert beeps.
3. Start moving the vehicle in reverse direction.
4. The alert beeps will become more rapid as the vehicle approaches the obstacle.
5. The Beep sound can be heard from the driver side speaker. Frequency of the beep will increase if obstacle comes closer (crossing each display bar) and the sound will be continuous if any of the obstacle is less than 50 cm.
Pay Attention: If Instrument Cluster gives 3 sec continuous beep alert tone whenever reverse gear engaged, Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer.
RPAS is an aiding system. Under no circumstances will Mahindra accept any responsibility or can be held liable for any direct or indirect, incidental or consequential damage caused by this system
8.7 Advanced Driver Assistance System (If equipped)
The Advance Driver Assist System (ADAS) uses a camera and radar to provide alerts and controls to improve safety and increase driver comfort. It should be noted that ADAS is only assistance given to the driver; it neither replaces the driver nor is a substitute.
The ADAS system gives enormous benefits to driver, however the driver shall remain solely responsible for the safe maneuvering of the vehicle. He must remain vigilant throughout the drive.
ADAS provides below features:
1. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
2. Collision mitigation System (AEB/FCW)
3. High Beam Assist (HBA)
4. Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)
5. Lane Keep Assist System (LKA/LDW)
6. Smart Pilot Assist (SPA)
In view of the policy of continuously improving our products, we reserve the right to alter specifications or designs without prior notice and without liability/obligation. Illustrations do not show the vehicle in the standard form. Please be aware that this manual may apply to various models/variants. As a result you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle. All the information, illustration, and specifications in this manual are based on the latest product information available at the time of publication.
We recommend you to contact the nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer for latest features applicable to your vehicle.
Maintenance Guidelines for Camera and Radar Sensor
Graphic
Camera Maintenance: To avoid incorrect, partial or disabled ADAS functionality due to Camera sensor failure, following points to be taken care of.
•  The outer area of the windshield must be cleaned regularly and to be kept free of dirt, oil, ice, water drops etc.
•  If there is condensation in the inner side of windshield in front of Camera, use the de-mister to clear it.
•  If there is any other dirt in the inner side of windshield in front of Camera, contact Mahindra Service Centre for cleaning.
•  Stickers, window tinting, electronic toll devices or similar objects should not be attached on the windshield in front of camera.
•  If the Camera needs to be removed or replaced, contact Mahindra Service Centre only.
•  If the windshield portion in front of camera has any cracks/scratches/stone chips, it should be taken to Mahindra Service Centre for complete windshield replacement.
•  If the vehicle met with any accident or impact, particularly for the front side, contact Mahindra Service Centre to check for any damage / calibration errors in the Camera.
•  In case any modification to be done for Camera, beauty cover, Inside Rear View Mirror or Ceiling, contact Mahindra Service Centre.
•  Any external object/accessories should not be installed on the hood area as it may affect the Camera’s field of view.
•  Ensure that flag post on the bonnet is not blocking the camera view.
•  The head lamp aimed should not be modified and in case of an head lamp replacement, head lamp aiming should be done by Authorised Mahindra Service Centre only
•  If the Windshield or Camera is replaced, the Camera must be recalibrated at Authorised Mahindra Service Centre only.
Radar Maintenance
To avoid incorrect, partial or disabled ADAS functionality due to Radar sensor failure, following points to be taken care of.
•  The Radar surface and bumper area in front of radar must be cleaned regularly and to be kept free of dirt, oil, ice, water etc.
•  Any external object should not be installed on the front grill or front bumper area as it may affect Radar’s performance.
•  Ensure that the number plate is not blocking the radar sensor.
•  Avoid any kind of customization to the front bumper and the Radar, such as attaching stickers, installing flags or any metallic objects, painting etc.
•  If the vehicle has met with an accident or impact, particularly an impact from the front side, then contact the Authorised Mahindra Service Centre to check for any damage to the Radar unit.
•  If the Radar sensor needs to be removed or replaced, contact Mahindra Service Centre only.
•  If any rework need to be done on front bumper or the Radar, the Radar must be recalibrated by the Authorised Mahindra Service Center only.
8.7.1 Adaptive Cruise Control (Only for Automatic Transmission variant)
When the ACC is engaged, it allows the vehicle to cruise at the desired ‘set speed’. In traffic conditions if a vehicle is detected in the front of the vehicle, then the ACC reduces the vehicle speed to match the front preceding vehicle speed. The distance from the front preceding vehicle is maintained as per the Distance level set by the driver.
Disclaimer
•  ACC is an aid to assist the driver. It is not a collision avoidance system.
•  Always drive carefully and attentively when using the ACC system. Read and understand the Owner’s Manual thoroughly before using the system.
•  ACC is designed to be a supplementary driving aid. It is not, however, intended to replace the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is responsible for observing all traffic and safety rules, including maintenance of safe distance and speed and must intervene if Adaptive Cruise Control does not maintain a suitable speed or suitable distance to the vehicle ahead
•  It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert and to be in control of the vehicle at all times.
•  Improper use of ACC can lead to a crash.
•  ACC has limited braking capability and may not stop the vehicle in time to avoid a collision, if the front preceding vehicle decelerates quickly or a new vehicle cuts-in front always be prepared to apply brake.
•  Failure to follow the alerts and instructions for proper use of system could result in serious injury.
•  Always observe posted speed limits and do not set the speed over them.
•  Use ACC in appropriate roads with proper lane marking and sign boards.
•  Do not use ACC in busy areas where multiple road users cross the vehicles intended path.
•  When two wheeler cuts out, ACC may not be able to identify the vehicle in front of two-wheeler.
•  ACC may not be able to stop behind stopped vehicles.
•  ACC may not be always able to follow two wheeler.
ACC may not detect all types of vehicle and driver has to be vigilant to be in control of the vehicle.
ACC Switches
Graphic
The ACC switches on the steering wheel consists of five switches which are used for ACC Operation.
A– CRUISE ON/OFF Switch: To Toggle between ACC ON and OFF
B– SET+ : To set desired speed
To increase Set speed when ACC is active
C– TIME GAP: To select the time gap to the front preceding vehicle between Level 4 to Level 1.
D– SET- : To set desired speed
To decrease Set speed when ACC is active
E– RESUME: To resume ACC to previous Set Speed.
Do not use RESUME button to Set Speed immediate after ACC ON. Do use only SET+/SET-
Instrument Cluster Display
Image
Display
Image
Display
Graphic
ACC Indicator
Graphic
Time Gap
Graphic
Set Speed
Graphic
Front preceding vehicle Indicator
front preceding vehicle Indicator shows an icon of a Car always though the front preceding vehicle may be a car/truck/two wheeler or any other type of vehicle.
How to turn ACC ON/OFF
Graphic
Press CRUISE switch to activate ACC feature. This turns ACC to Standby Mode.
Standby Mode
When CRUISE switch is pressed and desired speed by using SET +/– is not set.
During Standby mode
Graphic
ACC indicator will illuminate in white color.
Graphic
•  “Adaptive Cruise Control Standby” pop-up message will be displayed in cluster.
Graphic
•  Set speed will be displayed as “—”.
•  The vehicle will not maintain previous set speed or previous time gap to the vehicle ahead.
•  Press the ON/OFF switch again to deactivate ACC feature.
•  If ACC indicator illuminates in red , there could be a problem with ACC system. visit nearby mahindra service center.
Pressing the ON/OFF switch when ACC in Standby/Active will deactivate the ACC feature.
How to set Desired Speed
Graphic
Drive the vehicle to the desired speed (minimum 10 kmph) and Press Set+/Set- switch
Graphic
•  “Adaptive Cruise Control Active” pop-up message will be displayed in the cluster.
•  ACC will maintain the vehicle speed as set by the driver. Once set, it will be confirmed by the ACC telltale light. After that no accelerator pedal input from driver need to be given.
Graphic
ACC indicator will be displayed in green.
•  Set speed will be displayed as set by driver.
•  Time interval bars will be displayed.
ACC will have two modes:
1. Speed Control Mode: During Speed Control Mode, time gap indicator will be displayed
ACC operation When No Front Preceding vehicle detected ahead
When there is no front preceding vehicle detected ahead, ACC maintains the speed set by the driver.
2. Follow Control Mode: During Follow Mode, front preceding vehicle Indicator will be displayed if a front preceding vehicle is detected.
ACC operation When Front Preceding Vehicle detected ahead
When there is a preceding vehicle, ACC tries to maintain a safe gap to the front preceding vehicle by reducing the speed accordingly within comfortable deceleration limits.
ACC operation When Front Preceding Vehicle moved out from its lane
When the front preceding vehicle has moved out from your lane of travel, ACC accelerates and maintains vehicle speed to the set speed.
Whenever driver steers and system finds a new target ie., front preceding vehicle. ACC takes time to pick the new target and react.
•  If Set+/Set- switch is pressed when vehicle speed is below 30 kmph then ACC Set Speed will be initialized to 30 kmph.
•  When there is a front preceding vehicle, user can set desired speed by pressing SET+/- switch below 30 kmph as there is no minimum desired speed requirement
•  When front preceding vehicle and your vehicle are in stopped condition , apply brake and press SET+/SET-. Note that ACC will remain in standstill until the front preceding vehicle moves.
When the SET +/SET– switch is pressed under the following conditions, ACC cannot be activated. Visual and audio alert will be provided to driver to inform the same.
Condition
Alert
When traveling below 10 kmph and a vehicle ahead is not Detected
Graphic
Condition
Alert
When front preceding vehicle is very close or far away from host vehicle.
When the shift lever is not in D (Drive) Position
When the brakes are operated by the driver
Graphic
When braking system unavailable.
Graphic
When driving above maximum ACC operational speed limit.
Graphic
When driver door is open.
Graphic
When Collision Mitigation System is unavailable.
Graphic
When driver seat belt is not buckled.
Graphic
ACC interacts with other systems, such as braking, steering, EMS (Engine Management System), ACC Switch etc. If any of these systems are not functioning properly, ACC cannot be activated.
How to increase Set Speed
Use one of the following methods to increase set speed:
•  Press and quickly release the SET+ switch to increase the set speed by 1 kmph
•  Press and hold the SET+ switch to increase the set speed by 10 kmph. The set speed will be increased to the next nearest multiple of 10. Continuous hold / stuck of SET +/- button for 60 sec will turn OFF ACC.
•  Release the switch when the desired set speed reached.
How to decrease Set Speed
Use one of the following methods to decrease set speed:
•  Press and quickly release the SET- switch to decrease the set speed by 1 kmph
•  Press and hold the SET- switch to decrease the set speed.by 10 kmph. The set speed will be decreased to the next nearest multiple of 10
•  Release the switch when the desired set speed reached.
How to resume ACC to last set speed value
Press the RESUME switch
– ACC will resume back to the last set speed provided the conditions to engage ACC are satisfied.
How to change the Time Gap Level to the front preceding vehicle
Each time the Time gap switch C is pressed, the time gap will keep rolling between the time gap levels as per the below sequence
Time Gap Level 4->Time Gap Level 3 -> Time Gap Level 2->
Time Gap Level 1-> Time Gap Level 4
•  The set time gap value of the current ignition/driving cycle will be used for the next ignition/driving cycle.
•  When the system is used for the first time after starting the engine, the time gap value is set to the maximum value (Level 4).
How To Adjust ACC SENSITIVITY
The sensitivity of vehicle acceleration/deceleration can be adjusted to Slow, Normal or fast in the selection menu of ACC as shown below
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
ACC STOP & GO (Only for EPB Variants)
ACC operation When front preceding vehicle is detected in models equipped with Electronic Park Brake
When a front preceding vehicle is detected, front preceding vehicle indicator along with time interval bars will be displayed in cluster
In slow-moving, stop-and-go traffic or when stopped at a traffic light, if the front preceding vehicle comes to stop, ACC also decelerates your vehicle to bring it to stop within the limitations of the system. Your vehicle movement will resume automatically if the front preceding vehicle is not stopped for more than approx. 3secs.
Graphic
If it takes more than 3 seconds for the front preceding vehicle to begin moving again, ACC will be set to Standby and the stop-hold function will activate. A pop-up alert message “Press Resume Switch or Pedal to Accelerate” will be displayed for driver to resume.
ACC can be engaged by any of the following methods when in stop-hold mode if front preceding vehicle is present at distance more than 2m and less than 40m:
1. Press RESUME button
2. Slightly tap the accelerator pedal
3. Increase the speed above 10 kmph and press the RESUME button
When in ACC stopped condition, if driver is trying to unbuckle seat belt/open doors/ change gear etc, then ACC may get disengaged and based on gear lever position, vehicle may crawl. Driver has to apply brake and control the vehicle.
ACC without Stop & Go: For vehicles with manual parking brake, ACC without STOP & GO is applicable. Here, If the front preceding vehicle comes to stop, ACC decelerates to bring the vehicle speed up to 20 kmph and disengages. System provides pop up message “Adaptive Cruise Control Standby” for driver to take necessary action.
ACC decelerates when there is too much of lateral acceleration.
Graphic
When following the front preceding vehicle, if the front preceding vehicle disappears due to a cut-out maneuver, a pop-up message will be displayed as “Object Disappeared Pay Attention”
Please pay attention to the driving operation to maintain control of the vehicle as it accelerates to the set speed.
If ACC changes targets from a moving front preceding vehicle to a stationary front preceding vehicle at speeds above 30 km/h, the system may not react to the stationary vehicle and will accelerate to the previously set speed. The driver must actively apply the brake to slow/stop the vehicle.
ACC operation when Accelerator pedal is pressed
Even when ACC is engaged, driver can press the accelerator pedal if he wishes to accelerate the vehicle rapidly. When driver presses accelerator pedal, the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed.
•  ACC is overridden hence Set Speed and Distance is not followed
Graphic
•  ACC override pop-up will be displayed.
•  Set speed display will blink.
•  Set distance display will blink.
•  The front preceding vehicle indicator will turn off when the area ahead of the vehicle is open.
When the accelerator pedal is released, the vehicle will exit from the override mode and ACC operation will be resumed
Automatic cancellation of ACC
Under the following conditions ACC control will be cancelled automatically with an audio alert.
•  When the shift lever is not in D (Drive) position.
•  When the parking brake is applied
•  When Brake pedal is pressed.
•  When ESP is turned off
•  When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted.
•  When radar sensor area of the front bumper covered with dirt or is obstructed.
•  When accelerator pedal is depressed for more than 60 seconds continuously.
•  When collision mitigation system is in action.
•  When ESP operates
•  When driver door is open
•  When vehicle speed exceeds maximum ACC operating speed.
•  When driver seat belt is unbuckled
•  When the Zoom mode is selected.
•  The engine speed (rpm) is too high/low.
•  When ACC is engaged, and your vehicle stopped, and after 3 seconds the front preceding vehicle moves and disappears and when the driver tries to resume ACC without the front preceding vehicle.
•  When driver tries to resume ACC when front preceding vehicle (moving/stopped) is not in detection range.
•  When any 4x4 drive mode is engaged
Graphic
In above scenarios, the driver may be alerted by an audio alert and a message in the instrument cluster that ACC function is released/disengaged.
The driver is responsible for adapting to vehicle's speed, apply the brakes when necessary and keep a safe distance to the vehicle ahead.
ACC disengages whenever there is an ESP intervention. For example-: pot holes on a bumpy road
Graphic
In some situations where ACC braking is not enough to follow the front preceding vehicle, an audio alert along with pop-up message will be given in the instrument cluster "Collision Possible Apply Brake".
The driver has to apply brake to keep a safe distance.
Graphic
In case of temporary abnormal conditions, ACC Status telltale will illuminate in Yellow color and ACC function will be disabled temporarily by showing up a pop-up
“Adaptive Cruise Control Disabled due to Radar Limitation”
The following table lists possible causes for this message being displayed and suitable actions
Causes
Action
The bumper in front of the radar is dirty or covered with snow/ice.
Clean/Clear the bumper in front of the radar.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals.
No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the radar.
Do not use ACC during heavy rain or snow.
Clogged water or snow from the surface of the road may interface with the radar signals.
No action possible. A very wet or snow-covered road surface may affect the function of the radar.
Do not use ACC during these situations.
The bumper area in front of the radar is clean but the message remains in the display.
Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that it is no longer obstructed.
Graphic
In case of permanent failure, ACC Status telltale will illuminate in red color also and ACC function will be disabled permanently by showing up a pop-up
“Adaptive Cruise Control Disabled Service Required” Contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.
In case of collision in front bumper, the radar position may change which results in degraded ACC performance. Visit nearest service center for radar calibration.
ACC System Limitations
•  Adaptive Cruise Control cannot cover all driving situations and traffic, weather and road conditions.
•  Adaptive Cruise Control is not a collision  avoidance system. The driver is always responsible for applying the brakes if the system does not detect front preceding vehicle.
•  ACC may not assist in close cut-in scenarios.
•  Adaptive Cruise Control does not react to people or animals. It also does not react to slow moving, parked or approaching vehicles, or stationary objects.
•  In case of a hit in bumper / full or partial blockage to RADAR, turn off ACC and get the vehicle serviced as early as possible.
•  ACC will be disabled when trailer is connected
When using a trailer, make sure the trailer electrical connector is connected to the vehicle.
Avoid using ACC under the following conditions
•  On roads where the traffic is heavy or there are sharp curves
•  On slippery road surfaces
•  During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) and poor visibility.
•  When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the bumper around the sensor
•  On steep downhill roads (the vehicle may go beyond the set speed and in trying to maintain set speed, may result in overheating the brakes)
•  On repeated uphill and downhill roads
•  When traffic conditions make it difficult to keep a proper distance between vehicles because of frequent acceleration or deceleration
•  Interference by other radar sources installed in nearby protected areas like military, airports etc.
•  Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in demanding driving conditions, in slippery conditions, when there is a great deal of water or slush on the road, during heavy rain or snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on highway on or off ramps.
ACC Limitation Scenarios
ACC may not function in below scenarios
•  Close cut-in situation
Graphic
Sudden entry of other road vehicle in to host vehicle's lane may not be detected.
•  Situation of stopped vehicles
Graphic
Sudden vicinity of stationary object in host vehicle's lane may not be detected.
Graphic
When the preceding vehicle that follows is cutting out, it detects the preceding vehicle (Vehicle-B) as a new preceding vehicle because of an irregular radar reflection are occurred in particular.
As Vehicle-B stops, the host vehicle stops on Vehicle-B.
At this time, since there is no collision with Vehicle-A, the driver may misunderstand that it is under normal control of Vehicle-A.
When Vehicle-B starts, host vehicle may start without considering the new stationary Vehicle-A because of irregular radar reflection.
•  Curve entry / exit situation
Graphic
Graphic
In the curve entry / exit situation, based on the curvature of road on which the host vehicle is moving differs from the curvature of the predicted road, so the adjacent lane can be selected as the control target and the preceding vehicle in the host lane may be missed
•  Curves with larger curvature
Graphic
If the radius of curvature is very small, an inadequate or excessive acceleration/ deceleration may occur due to the limitation
•  Poor visibility: In case of poor visibility, Driver must take the control of vehicle
Graphic
•  When a preceding vehicle enters an intersection
Graphic
In an road intersection, target preceding vehicle may be lost and ACC may not function as intended. Driver must take the control of vehicle.
•  When the road gradient changes
Graphic
In case of road gradient variation, preceding target vehicle may be lost and ACC may not function as intended. Driver must take the control of vehicle.
•  Sensor cover blockage
Graphic
Any blockage to sensors, detection will degrade and ADAS features may not function as intended
•  Long cargo loading vehicle
Graphic
Graphic
If the height of the preceding target vehicle is very high, the sensor may not detect it and ADAS functionality may vary. Driver should take control of vehicle.
•  Inability to recognize pedestrians
Graphic
In case of Stop & Go situation, the host vehicle may not detect pedestrian. Driver should take control of vehicle.
•  Excessive braking of the preceding vehicle
Graphic
ACC might not slow down your THAR sufficiently if target starts to decelerate too fast as ACC only has only 30% of total brake force available in vehicle
If the preceding vehicle brakes beyond the ACC maximum deceleration limit, AEB may engage. However, driver shall be alert and take control vehicle.
•  Detection performance deterioration due to road side structures
Graphic
If the front radar is exposed to the surrounding road structures (steel laminates, tunnels, construction sections, etc.) that may affect the detection performance, the front preceding vehicle may not be detected normally.
Any metal road structures / bridges, tunnels or toll plazas may vary the system functionality, Driver shall be alert and take control of the vehicle.
•  False deceleration or no deceleration
If radar misaligned vertically or horizontally, ACC may produce frequent false deceleration or no deceleration for front preceding vehicle. Visit nearest service center for radar alignment
•  ACC does not slowdown for pot-holes and Speed breakers
Graphic
Graphic
•  ACC may not slow down for road curves
Graphic
Graphic
•  ACC may not slow down for barriers/blockades
Graphic
•  ACC does not slow down for crossing or merging vehicles at angles more than 30 degree
Graphic
Graphic
ACC might not slow down your THAR sufficiently if target starts to decelerate too fast as ACC only has only 30% of total brakeforce available in vehicle
•  ACC does not slowdown for oncoming/reversing front vehicles
Graphic
•  ACC does not slowdown for animals
Graphic
Adaptive Cruise Control does not react to special/modified vehicles such as Harvester, Tractor Trailor, Motorized Ice Cream Cart, construction vehicle, animals etc.
•  ACC may not reliably follow bicycle
Graphic
•  ACC cannot react to stationary target
Graphic
•  If a very slow moving target cutting in between your THAR and stationary target then there is a chance that ACC system does not pick-up the slow moving target since ACC is not able to discriminate between slow moving target and stationary target.
•  If a target in front takes a sharp turn and goes out of Field of view, then your THAR can start to accelerate fast.
•  ACC might not pick-up target at sharp curve
Graphic
•  When THAR follows two wheeler and two wheeler overtakes stationary target ahead, THAR may not slow down due to stationary target detection limitation.
Graphic
•  ACC cannot follow a motorized two-wheeler if two-wheeler speed is less than around 10kmph.
•  Do not use ACC with an offset to the target vehicle.
Graphic
•  Do not use ACC to follow motorbikes where there is no space for THAR to navigate.
Graphic
8.7.2 Collision Mitigation System
Collision Mitigation System alerts the driver by providing audio and visual warning when there is a possibility of collision with rear end of the preceding vehicles, cyclists or pedestrians detected ahead. if driver fails to take actions within a rational time, system will apply braking in certain situations to mitigate the collision.
Disclaimer
•  System can detect vehicles, cyclists and pedestrians but not in all situations. System's capacity to assess certain traffic situations is a supplemental aid to the driver and does not function in all driving/traffic situations or weather/road conditions. It can never replace the driver’s attention to traffic conditions or his/her responsibility for operating the vehicle in a safe manner. Refer system limitation section for more information about system limitation. Read the manual carefully in detail before using the system.
•  Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the system could result in serious injury or death.
•  The Collision Mitigation System is a supplemental aid to the driver . It is not a replacement for the driver. It is driver's responsibility to monitor traffic conditions and drive the vehicle safely. It cannot prevent accidents due to carelessness or dangerous driving techniques.
•  System does not function in all driving, traffic, weather and road conditions.
•  System does not detect all kind of vehicles ,bicyclists and pedestrians.
•  System is designed to intervene as late as possible i.e. in emergency to help avoid unnecessary activation.
•  Vehicles, Pedestrians or cyclists at an offset may not be detected by FCW/AEB system.
•  Collision Mitigation System works on prediction of possible collision with the objects in front of vehicle by assuming the objects movements in certain directions. Sometimes the objects movement direction may not match to the prediction and the system may react early and provide warning or perform braking even though the object may not be in the host vehicle path.
•  Only rear end of the preceding vehicles are identified by the system and warning or braking as needed will be provided by the system. System may not react or providing warning or braking for a crossing or oncoming vehicle. System may not react to a stationary vehicle if the vehicle is stationed in crossing or oncoming pose.
Collision Mitigation System comprises of the following functions:
Forward Collision Warning (FCW): When enabled, alerts the driver in case of a possible collision detected by the system.
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB): When enabled, can provide a braking assist to mitigate the collision detected by the system.
There are situations where the system may not detect a possible collision, driver has to take control of the vehicle always.
System Operation
Prerequisite for activation
AEB or FCW gets ready to be activated when turned ON from Instrument Cluster settings and when the following prerequisites are satisfied
- The braking system is ready.
- Vehicle speed is within system operating limit
- No other system failures or degradation of functions related to Collision mitigation systems like Braking system, Engine management system, Steering system etc.
AEB/FCW for Vehicles
To enable the system to detect rear end of preceding vehicles ahead, the vehicle driving speed must be at least 10 kmph
Below 10kmph FCW/AEB will not work.
System detects types of vehicles that are either stationary or moving in the same direction as your vehicle. In order to detect a vehicle in darkness, its headlights and taillights must be ON and clearly visible.
Minimum overlap with the bumper should be 50% for system to detect a front preceding vehicle. Minimum overlap with the bumper should be 50% for system to detect a motorbike/two wheeler
Level 1 Warning: The driver is alerted to the risk of an imminent collision by first level of visual and audible warning
Graphic
The icon displayed as visual alert may show the object in the front as car even though the system may react for cars, pedestrians two wheelers and cyclists.
Level 2 Warning
Graphic
•  If the driver does not take action or the driver braking force is not enough to mitigate collision, system issues the second level of visual and audible warning and applies partial braking.
Level 3 Warning
Graphic
•  After second level warning, If the driver does not take action or driver braking force is not enough and risk of a collision is imminent, the system applies harder braking along with third level of visual and audible warning.
System applying AEB braking can only mitigate a possible collision and does not guarantee in avoiding the collision. Driver has to take necessary braking or steering actions to avoid the collision.
During harder braking, there are possibilities that the occupants may experience a high amount of physical shock due to the braking force which may cause uncomfortable feeling or injury. Take necessary health checkups and precautions when experienced.
All the occupants should wear seat belts, as the system braking may lead of high level of motional inertia, where unbelted occupants are in a risk of getting injured.
Vehicle’s brake lights come on when braking is performed by the AEB system.
If driver applies hard brake during drive , dynamic braking system activates to boost braking force.
When Forward Collision Warning is selected in Instrument cluster settings, the driver is alerted to the risk of an imminent collision by visual and audible warnings. Braking will not be provided in this setting.
Graphic
When system has applied the brakes, a pop-up message will be displayed as "Automatic Emergency Braking Completed".
If AEB system has stopped the vehicle, the vehicle will remain at standstill for approximately 2 seconds before the brakes are released.
If the vehicle driving speed is above 85 kmph, AEB third level warning won’t come and system won’t apply full braking. In this case first and second level warning alone will be provided. Never wait for a warning or Collision Mitigation System to take action.
The maximum level of braking is limited to 50 kmph of speed drop. E.g. if the Collision mitigation system is initiated at 70 kmph, then by reaching 20 kmph, the collision mitigation system will be deactivated. Driver has to take control of the vehicle always.
AEB/FCW for Pedestrain
To enable the system to detect a pedestrian, the vehicle driving speed must be at least 10 kmph.
For pedestrian detection clear information about the person's head, arms, shoulders, legs, the upper and lower parts of the body and a person's normal pattern of movement are required. In order to detect a pedestrian, there must be a contrast to the background. If there is little contrast, the person may not be detected.
If major parts of the pedestrian's body are not visible to the camera, person may not be detected.
In order to detect a pedestrian, the system must have a full view of the person's entire body and the person must be at least 80 cm tall.
Fast moving pedestrians and pedestrians not in their walking pose are not detected by the system and hence there will not be any warning or braking provided by the system.
Minimum overlap should be 25% for system to detect a pedestrian.
System may not detect pedestrians in sitting, bent, crawling or lying poses.
If the vehicle driving speed is above 65 kmph, AEB second and third level warning won’t come for pedestrian. Hence system won’t apply full braking. If the vehicle driving speed is above 65 kmph and below 85 kmph, then first level warning alone will be provided. Never wait for a warning or for Collision Mitigation System to take action.
The maximum level of braking is limited to 50 kmph of speed drop. E.g. if the Collision mitigation system is initiated at 70 kmph, then by reaching 20 kmph, the collision mitigation system will be deactivated. Driver has to be in control of the vehicle always.
AEB/FCW for Cyclists
To enable the system to detect a cyclist, the vehicle driving speed must be at least 10 kmph.
For cyclist detection, clear information about the cycle itself and the rider's head, arms, shoulders, legs, the upper and lower parts of the body and a cyclist's normal pattern of movement is required
If major parts of the cyclist's body are not visible to the camera, the system cannot detect the cyclist.
The cyclist should be of height greater than 3 feet and should be driving an adult cycle.
Fast moving cyclists are not detected by the system. Hence the system may not react by providing warning or braking for the fast moving cyclists.
If the vehicle driving speed is above 65 kmph, AEB second and third level warning won’t come for cyclist. Hence system won’t apply full braking. If the vehicle driving speed is above 65 kmph and below 85 kmph, then first level warning alone will be provided. Never wait for a warning or for Collision Mitigation System to take action.
The maximum level of braking is limited to 50 kmph of speed drop. E.g. if the Collision mitigation system is initiated at 70 kmph, then by reaching 20 kmph, the collision mitigation system will be deactivated. Driver has to be in control of the vehicle always.
AEB for Vehicles - Junction Turning
To enable the system to detect an approaching vehicle in junction turning scenarios the vehicle driving speed must be between 10-30 kmph and oncoming vehicle should be clearly visible and moving in the speed range of 30 kmph to 70 kmph.
To detect an approaching vehicle in situations where there is a risk of a collision, that approaching vehicle must be within detection range and your vehicle must be in left lane making a right turn with the right turn indicator ON.
In junction turning scenarios, system applies braking and there is no warning.
Depending on vehicle speed and distance to the target ahead, as well as driving and roadway conditions, the system may help mitigate the consequences of a collision and cannot completely avoid the collision. The driver is responsible for maintaining a safe distance and speed. Never wait for a warning or collision mitigation system to take action.
The automatic braking will cease under the following conditions:
•  When steering is applied to avoid a collision
•  When the accelerator pedal is depressed
•  When there is no longer a vehicle detected ahead.
•  When driver presses and releases brake pedal.
How to turn ON/OFF AEB/FCW System
Perform the following steps to turn the AEB/FCW system ON or OFF:
1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the instrument cluster display. Use the button to select “Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK button.
2. Select “Auto Emergency Braking” and press the OK button.
•  Select “Auto Emergency Braking” and use the OK button to turn the AEB system on
•  Select “Forward Collision Warning” and use the OK button to turn the FCW system on
Graphic
•  Select “Off” and use the OK button to turn the AEB/FCW system off
Graphic
When the AEB system is turned off, the AEBS OFF telltale will be ON in instrument cluster
ESC OFF button can also deactivate the AEBS system. (Refer Brakes chapter for further details)
Graphic
Warning Level settings
The driver can select the level 1 warning activation time in the instrument cluster settings for driver assistance.
The options for the level 1 Warning include the following:
Late - When this condition is selected, warning is provided at shorter time to collision.
Normal - When this condition is selected, warning is provided at higher time to collision than "Late" setting.
Early - When this condition is selected, warning is provided at higher time to collision than "Normal" setting. if you are experiencing frequent warning, you can change setting to "Normal" or "Late"
There is a minimum time interval of 60 seconds required for system to provide successive AEB.
There is a chance for providing FCW warnings for some obstacles like Barricades and Cows since the RADAR may not be able to differentiate such big obstacles with respect to vehicles.
•  No automatic system can be guaranteed to function 100% correctly in all situations.
•  Never test Collision Mitigation System by driving toward a person or object. This could result in serious injury or death.
•  To help make Collision Mitigation System as effective as possible, it is recommended to always use the setting "Early"
Collision Mitigation System Troubleshooting
If any of below mentioned messages is displayed in the instrument cluster means that the system is not functioning properly and should be turned off.
However, message will not be displayed in all situations in which the camera/radar sensor is obstructed. For this reason, the driver must ensure that the area of the windshield in front of the camera and area on the bumper in front of radar sensor is always kept clean.
Graphic
1. In case of temporarily abnormal conditions due to camera sensor, AEB warning lamp will be ON in yellow color and a pop up message will appear in instrument cluster that "Automatic Emergency Braking Function Limited due to Camera Blockage" .
Graphic
The following table lists possible causes for this message being displayed and suitable actions:
Cause
Action
The area of the windshield in front of the camera sensor is dirty or covered by ice or snow
Clean the windshield or remove the ice/snow
Thick fog or heavy rain /snow blocks reduce the camera sensor’s range of visibility
No action. The driver should be extra alert in condition of this type.
There is dirt between the inside of the windshield and the camera sensor.
Have the area of the windshield cleaned by Mahindra Authorised service.
•  If the warning lamp continues to illuminate after above action and engine restart, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a Mahindra dealer for this service.
Graphic
2. In case of temporarily abnormal conditions due to radar sensor, AEB warning lamp will be ON in yellow color and a pop up message will appear in instrument cluster that "Automatic Emergency Braking Disabled due to Radar Detection Limitation".
Graphic
The following table lists possible causes for this message being displayed and suitable actions:
Cause
Action
The bumper in front of the radar is dirty or covered with snow/ice
Clean/clear the bumper in front of the radar.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals.
No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the radar.
Swirling water or snow from the surface of the road may interface with the radar signals.
No action possible. A very wet or snow-covered road surface may affect the function of the radar.
The windshield in front of the radar is clean but the message remains in the display.
Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that it is no longer obstructed.
If the warning lamp continues to illuminate after above action and engine restart, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a Mahindra dealer for this service.
Graphic
3. If system malfunctions, AEB warning lamp will be continuously ON in yellow color.
Graphic
A pop up message will appear in instrument cluster that "Automatic Emergency Braking Disabled: Service required". Contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.
Collision Mitigation System Limitations
Collision Mitigation System is subject to certain system limitations and may be unavailable or only partially available in the following situations:
Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with below system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
•  Collision mitigation system cannot detect all vehicles, cyclists or pedestrians under all conditions.
•  System can not detect the following objects:
–  Small pedestrians (including small children)
–  Sitting or bent pedestrians will not be detected.
–  Pedestrians other than their walking or standing poses may not be detected.
–  Pedestrians in wheelchairs or using mobile transport such as scooters, child-operated toys, or skateboards
–  Pedestrians who are seated or otherwise not in a full upright standing or walking position
–  Pedestrian who are partially obscured, wearing clothing that prevents a clear view of the person's body contours.
–  Oncoming vehicles
–  Crossing vehicles
–  Merging Vehicles
–  Cutting in Vehicles
–  Specialized vehicles
–  Obstacles on the roadside
–  Vehicles that are irregular in shapes like hand carts, cycle carts, motorized carts, animal carts
–  Vehicles that look irregular when loaded.
–  Vehicles that have long trailers above.
–  Two wheeler or bicycles without a rider.
–  Two wheeler carrying baggage extended beyond regular shape of two wheeler.
–  Obscured vehicles.
•  If the pedestrians has limited contrast to their immediate background, warning or braking may be delayed or not come at all.
•  System may not react for fast moving pedestrians.
•  System cannot detect all cyclists in all situations, such as:
–  a partially obscured cyclist.
–  a cyclist whose clothing is in such a way that prevents clear view of the person's body contours
–  a cyclist transporting a large object
•  System may not function in junction turning scenario under below conditions:
–  If the oncoming vehicle is detected at a late stage
–  If the oncoming vehicle is partially obscured by another vehicle
–  If the oncoming vehicle changes lane at a late stage
•  System may not function if speed difference between the two vehicles is too small or too high
•  System may not function properly or detect a target ahead in the following conditions:
–  Poor visibility (conditions such as rain, fog, snow, dust storms, sandstorms etc.)
–  Driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with sharp curves.
–  Driving on a bumpy road surface, such as an uneven dirt road
–  If dirt, ice, snow or other material is covering the radar sensor area
–  Interference by other radar sources.
–  The camera area of windshield is fogged up or covered with dirt, water drops, ice, snow, etc.
–  Strong light (such as, sunlight or high beams from oncoming vehicles) enters the front camera
–  A sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or a shaded area or lightning flashes.)
•  In case of a hit in bumper / full or partial blockage to RADAR, disable AEB and get the vehicle serviced as early as possible.
•  AEB will be disabled when trailer is connected
When using a trailer, make sure the trailer electrical connector is connected to the vehicle.
Collision Mitigation System limitation Scenarios
Collision Mitigation System may not function in below scenarios
•  False decelerations or no decelerations
If radar misaligned vertically or horizontally, Collision mitigation system may produce frequent false warning or deceleration or no warning/ no deceleration for front preceding vehicle. Visit nearest service center for radar alignment.
•  When any vehicle moves greater than +/- 20 deg. to host vehicle direction
Graphic
If any vehicle moves at heading angle greater than +/- 20 deg. to the host vehicle system may not consider it. Driver must be alert and take control.
•  When it is difficult to obtain view by the camera
Graphic
Due to poor visibility by camera like sunlight or any other source of light on camera. System may not function as intended Driver must be alert and take control of the vehicle
•  When the tail light of the front preceding vehicle is asymmetrical at night
Graphic
At night, if the preceding vehicle's tail lamps are not in symmetry or mounting positions are unusual, system may not function as intended. Driver shall be alert and take control of the vehicle.
•  Pedestrian suddenly jumping in to the host vehicle lane too closer to host vehicle
Graphic
System may not consider if a pedestrian suddenly jumps in to the lane / area very closer to host vehicle. Driver shall be alert and take control of vehicle
•  If a part of the body of the pedestrian is a covered or standing pedestrian
Graphic
In the case of pedestrians whose body part is obscured by umbrellas, bags, special clothes, etc., detection may not be accurate & system may not function as intended. Driver shall be alert and take control of vehicle
•  Difficult to distinguish pedestrians due to low illumination.
Graphic
If the illumination is low / poor visibility, system may not function as intended. Driver shall be alert and take control of vehicle.
•  Fast moving pedestrians
Graphic
System may not function as intended with fast moving pedestrians due to sensing limitations.
•  Pedestrians with lower height
Graphic
System may not function as intended with pedestrians with lower height
•  Risk of collision in proximity cut-in
Graphic
There is a close-sensing blind spot, and there is a risk of collision at close cut-in of adjacent lane vehicles.
•  Intersection situation
Graphic
The control target of the radar is selected as the control target only for the rear surface of the vehicle driving in the AEB vehicle driving direction. Therefore, there is a risk of collision for vehicles moving at right angles to the direction of intersection or for vehicles turning right.
•  The condition is that target is not detected at the road inclination change point
Graphic
Due to the vertical angle limit of the radar, it is impossible to detect the front target (vehicle, pedestrian) in uphill and downhill hill.
•  The situation where the load is protruding from the rear of the vehicle
Graphic
When a specific type of load is loaded or a special vehicle, it can collide if it is not selected as the control target due to the sensor detection limit
•  When target can not be detected due to sensor contamination
Graphic
In case of Sensor (Radar, Camera) contamination, blockage can occur and collision of the front preceding vehicle and pedestrians is possible
•  When driving on a large curve road
Graphic
When driving on a large curve road, due to the sensor limit, the front preceding vehicle and the pedestrian can collide.
•  When it is impossible to obtain the driver's field of vision
Graphic
If the driver uses the AEB in the unconfined (snow, rain, fog, etc.), the sensor limit may cause a collision between the vehicle and pedestrians ahead.
•  Detection problems due to complicated structures around roads
Graphic
If a construction section, railroad track, or other metallic object is on the road (eg, tollgate, subway construction site, tunnel, lane-proximity guard rail, etc.) AEB/FCW will not work.
•  Collision Mitigation System does not react for pot-holes
Graphic
•  Collision Mitigation System does not function for Speed Breakers
Graphic
•  Collision Mitigation System does not function for barricades/cone/barrels
Graphic
•  Collision Mitigation System does not function for oncoming vehicles
Graphic
•  Collision Mitigation System does not function for animals
Graphic
8.7.3 High Beam Assist
High beam assist function is intended to reduce the glare produced by the High Beam lamp which in turn aids the drivers of oncoming vehicles to maneuver safely .
High beam assist feature automatically turns high beam ON or OFF depending on the vehicle speed, intensity of the light source of preceding and oncoming vehicles and the surrounding light conditions
High beam assist is only intended to assist the driver. The driver is still responsible for controlling the headlights through manual ON/OFF depending on visibility requirements.
How to Turn ON/OFF HBA System
HBA Activation
Select High Beam Assist function from Driver assistance menu
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Turn Steering Column Head lamp Switch to 'AUTO' position
Graphic
HBA will activate when following conditions are met:
•  High beam Assist is selected through driver assistance menu
•  Auto light switch is turned ON in the Combination Switch
•  Night condition is detected and Low beam is already turned ON through the Light Sensor
•  High beam switch is turned ON
•  Vehicle speed is above 20 kmph
Graphic
When HBA feature is activated, HBA lamp will be ON.
Once HBA is activated, HBA feature will turn OFF High Beam when any of the light sources from oncoming / Preceding vehicle or streetlights is detected in front of vehicle.
HBA feature will turn ON High Beam when:
•  HBA function is activated as per above conditions.
•  No light source is detected by the camera from Oncoming/Preceding vehicle or from other light sources (depends on intensity) for few seconds.
If high beam was turned OFF due to street lights, then high beam will be turned ON once streetlight area is completely crossed
If system malfunctions , a pop up message will appear in Instrument Cluster as "High Beam Assist Unavailable". It is recommended that you visit a Mahindra dealer in this case.
Graphic
HBA System Limitations
HBA is subject to certain system limitations and may keep High beam OFF for certain limitations and ON for few other limitation conditions.
•  When the light from the on-coming or front preceding vehicle is not detected because of lamp damage, hidden from sight, etc.
•  When headlights or taillights are with non-standard color or Illuminance level or shape.
•  When the lamp of the on-coming or front preceding vehicle is covered with dust, mud, snow or water.
•  When visibility is poor due to fog, heavy rain or snow.
•  When head lamp aiming is not properly adjusted.
•  When driving on a narrow-curved road or rough road.
•  When driving downhill or uphill.
•  When vehicle is near bright street tower lamps, reflecting sign or mirror, flashing sign lamps.
•  When the vehicle is tilted may be due to a flat tyre or being towed.
•  When the light from bicycle is weak or located in long distance.
•  When the light from oncoming or preceding vehicle is very small or weak or located in low or too high position.
•  When windshield is dirty or if any object blocks the Camera sensor.
•  When vehicle is in Construction area due to temporarily installed reflectors.
•  When vehicle is near traffic lights, signboards of buildings, lightning rods of construction sections, center line separation rods (reflection type), traffic signs (including variable speed LEDs), vehicle lights reflected on building glass or road reflectors.
8.7.4 Traffic Sign Recognition
Traffic Sign Recognition feature assists the driver by displaying Speed limits signs in the instrument cluster display.
TSR system is limited to the detection capabilities of Camera sensor . The driver is always responsible for operating the vehicle as per the road regulations.
Traffic sign recognition can detect standard speed limit signs that are within the camera's visual field.
How to Turn ON/OFF TSR System
Select Traffic Sign Recognition Function from Driver Assistance menu in the cluster
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Traffic sign display in Instrument Cluster
Speed: limit Signs
Graphic
When the system recognises a speed limit sign, it displays on Instrument Cluster
Graphic
After a pre-defined time, road sign display is Grayed out to indicate to driver that the sign is of past value.
Graphic
End of Speed Limit
Graphic
If End of Speed Limit sign is detected, the icon in the cluster gets updated as shown in the image.
Graphic
If no new Speed Limit Sign detected for some time, the icon changes to 'No Recognition’ as shown in the image.
Over Take Not Allowed Sign
Graphic
When the system recognizes an overtaking not allowed sign, it is displayed on Instrument Cluster
Graphic
If system malfunctions, a pop up message will appear in Instrument Cluster that "Traffic Sign Recog. Unavailable". It is recommended that you visit a Mahindra dealer in this case.
Traffic Sign Recognition System Limitations
The Traffic Sign Recognition is subject to certain system limitations and may be unavailable or only partially available in the following situations:
•  The traffic sign is located on a sharp curve.
•  The traffic sign is improperly positioned (i.e being turned over, blocked by an object, or damaged).
•  Another vehicle blocks the traffic sign.
•  The LED light of the traffic sign is broken.
•  The visibility is poor due to heavy rain, snow, fog or poor light around the sign.
•  The traffic sign do not conform to the standards.
•  The traffic sign cannot be distinguished due to shadow caused by overpass or trees.
•  There is bright light around the traffic sign.
•  The vehicle speed is too low or too high.
•  There is dirt, ice or frost on the front windshield, where the camera is installed.
•  The camera lens is blocked by an object, such as sticker, paper, or fallen leaf.
•  Host vehicle driven right after preceding vehicle.
•  The bus or truck, on which the speed sticker is attached, passes by your vehicle.
•  TSR function may not detect electronic sign board.
•  TSR function may not detect conditional sign board.
•  TSR function may not detect rectangular sign boards.
8.7.5 Lane Keep Assist System
The Lane Keep Assist (LKA) system provides corrective steering to prevent the vehicle from departing the lane if the system judges that the departure is unintentional from driver's side.
The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system provides visual, audio and haptic alerts to the driver once the system detects that the vehicle is crossing the lane boundary unintentionally which is determined based on whether the turn signal towards the direction of departure is turned ON or not.
The driver can choose to have either Warning Only or both Warning + Assist feature.
It is important to know that the Lane keep Assist system shall work only if the lane markings on the road are clearly visible.
The Lane Keep Assist function is meant to provide assist to the driver and cannot take full control of the steering system.
It is driver’s responsibility to stay alert and be in control of the vehicle throughout the drive.
How to Turn ON /OFF Lane Keep Assist System
Go to Driver Assistance menu under Settings
Select Warning + Assist to enable both Lane Keep Assist as well as Lane Departure Warning
Select Warning Only to enable Lane Departure Warning alone.
Graphic
Graphic
System Operation
When the system can detect the lanes, the lane marking in instrument cluster will be in white.
Graphic
When system cannot detect lanes or if system is unavailable due to speed being less than 60 kmph, the marker lines will be grayed out.
LDW Operation in "Warning Only" mode
Graphic
Graphic
If both side lanes are not detected or the speed or road conditions are not satisfied, LDW feature will be in STANDBY mode and LDW indicator light will illuminate in white.
If any of the lane markers are detected and vehicle speed is above 60kmph and all the other road parameter values are satisfied, LDW feature is ready for operation and LDW indicator light will illuminate in green.
Graphic
When vehicle approaches either the left or the right lane boundary, the LDW indicator on the instrument panel will blink and lane marking color of respective side will change to orange. Haptic and audio alert will also be provided to warn the driver about lane departure.
The warning will be stopped either when vehicle changes the lane completely or if the vehicle returns back to original lane.
Lane Departure Warning will not be provided or stopped if already being provided, if in case either turn signal or hazard switch is turned ON
Lane departure warning shall be resumed in approximately 4 seconds after turning OFF the turn signal.
Lane Departure Warning may be provided for road edges or road marks which looks like lane boundaries.
The maximum warning time is limited to 2.2 sec. To provide re-warning, vehicle should have been out of warning region atleast once. i.e. Vehicle has to be in or near to center of the lane.
LKA Operation in "Warning + Assist" mode
Graphic
If both side lanes are not detected or the speed /road/vehicle dynamic conditions are not satisfied, LKA feature will be in STANDBY mode and LKA indicator light will illuminate in white.
Graphic
If both lane markers are detected, vehicle speed is above 60 kmph and all the road and vehicle related activation conditions are satisfied, LKA system is ready to provide assist and LKA indicator light will illuminate in green.
Graphic
When the system detects an unintentional departure of the vehicle from its lane, a slight counter steering torque is provided to prevent the departure and the driver is notified by blinking the LKA indicator on the instrument panel in green color. Also visual and audible alerts are provided if vehicle is about to cross the lane boundary.
The warning and assist will be stopped either when vehicle changes the lane completely or if the vehicle is returned back to original lane
Graphic
When LKA system provides steering assist, steering wheel indicator will illuminate in green.
Lane Keep Assist will not be provided or stopped if already being provided, if in case either turn indicator signal or hazard switch is turned ON.
Lane Keep Assist shall be resumed again only once vehicle has returned back to lane and 4 seconds is completed after turning OFF the turn indicator signal.
LKA may be provided for road markings if those are looking like lane boundaries. LKA may be provided for road edges/vertical road edges (cones/curbs/medians/guard rails) if the system detects them accurately, but not always guaranteed.
LKA will not be provided if the vehicle approaches the lane boundary with a higher heading angle.
LKA won’t be provided in the types of roads if road edge/vertical road edge is present on one side and neither road edge/vertical road edge nor lane marking is present on the other side.
The audible alert can be disabled through settings in the cluster if the driver wishes to do so.
LKA and LDW shall be activated above 60 kmph and gets deactivated below 55 kmph.
If the vehicle dynamics conditions are not safe for the operation of LKA, then LKA may not be provided at all or may get cancelled if it is already being provided.
Similarly when Left turn /Right turn/Hazard is activated LKA will not be provided or will be cancelled if already being provided.
The Lane Keep Assist torque will be adjusted according to the driver applied torque to reduce discomfort and to provide precedence to driver control.
If the driver intentionally tries to cross the lane boundary by applying more torque, then assist will be cancelled. In such conditions warning alone will be provided once the vehicle crosses the lane boundary.
If the driver is constantly holding the steering wheel very lightly while the LKA intervention is being provided, system may assume that the driver is not attentive enough and will provide visual alert to the driver as in image below:
Graphic
If the driver continues to hold the steering wheel lightly for a next intervention occurring within 3 minutes, then in addition to the visual alert, audio alert will also be provided until the system makes sure that driver is in full control.
If lane marking is suddenly not available or if lane widens suddenly , then for a short duration virtual lanes may get created and assist/warning may be provided once the vehicle approaches/crosses the virtual lane boundary .
The preference for steering control and alerts will be given to Smart Pilot Assist over Lane Keep Assist if Smart Pilot Assist is equipped and enabled by driver. Please go through Smart Pilot chapter for more details.
•  Do not wait for system to provide Visual /audio alerts to hold the steering wheel. Driver is always responsible to have control of the vehicle.
•  In some rare situations when system is unable to do proper judgement, system may generate visual / audio alerts even when the driver holds the steering wheel as a precautionary measure.
•  System will provide only a mild steering torque within the operating limits. This torque may not be sufficient during sharper curves. System may stop providing assist if it determines the torque provided is not sufficient to pull back to the lane. Driver is always responsible to steer the vehicle and bring vehicle back to lane.
Graphic
LKA/LDW will not be provided for barricades and barrels on the side of road.
Graphic
Graphic
If system malfunctions in Warning Only mode, LDW indicator light will illuminate in Amber color and a pop up message will appear in Instrument Cluster that "Lane Departure Warning Unavailable".
It is recommended that you visit a Mahindra dealer in this case.
Graphic
Graphic
If system malfunctions in Warning + Assist mode ,LKA indicator light will illuminate in Amber color and a pop up message will appear in Instrument Cluster that "Lane Keep Assist Unavailable". It is recommended that you visit a Mahindra dealer in this case.
LKA may not detect obstacles at the side of the vehicle and may try to pull back the vehicle laterally to the center of lane even though another vehicle may be occupying the lane at the side. This could lead to a possible collision. Driver should always be in control of the steering wheel and shall provide additional torque to override LKA in such situations.
Graphic
There could be vertical structures like curbs, medians etc. at the end of lane marking and assist provided by LKA system may not be sufficient enough to pull back the vehicle before the vehicle leaves the lane. User has to take control of steering always and provide necessary steering to avoid lane deviations or crash.
Lane Keep Assist System Limitations
LKA and LDW System is intended to assist the driver and cannot function as intended in all kinds of driving, weather, traffic and road conditions as mentioned below.
•  Road under construction
•  Reduced visibility due to bad weather on account of rain, fog, snow etc
•  Roads with indistinct/faded lane markings
•  Road sections with sharp curves
•  Narrow roads
•  High speed driving especially in sharp curves
•  Road sections where there are turn lanes or when the original lane merges or separates
•  Passing through tunnels when brightness changes suddenly.
•  Horizontal or vertical slope
•  Preceding vehicle obstructing lane visibility
•  Improper headlight aiming/headlight covered with dirt
•  Any other environmental conditions affecting camera vision
•  Poor visibility due to sun glare or blockage in lens
•  Lane Keep assist function will be disabled when the trailer is attached.
•  Lane Keep assist functions will not work properly when there is a heavy cross wind.
•  Lane Keep assist function may not work when the lane marking color is other than white and yellow.
In such situations, it may be advisable to turn the function OFF or driver shall take complete control of vehicle.
8.7.6 Smart Pilot Assist System
Smart Pilot Assist system is intended to help the driver to keep the vehicle in center of a traffic lane's side marker lines by providing steering assist as well as maintaining a set time interval.
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of system could result in serious injury or death.
•  Smart Pilot Assist System is not a self-driving system. Within the limits of its capabilities, as described in this manual, it helps the driver with certain driving activities.
•  Smart Pilot Assist system is not a replacement for proper driving procedures and is not designed to correct careless, inattentive of driver.
•  Always observe posted speed limits and do not set the speed over them.
•  Always keep your hands on the steering wheel so you can be ready to steer at any time. The driver is always responsible for staying in a lane and for assessing traffic situations.
•  Smart Pilot Assist must only be used where there are clearly visible traffic lane side marker lines on both sides of the current traffic lane. In other circumstances there is an increased risk of collision with surrounding obstacles that are not detected by the system.
How to activate Smart Pilot Assist
Select "Smart Pilot Assist" from "Driver Assistance" option in Instrument Cluster screen -> under Instrument Cluster Settings.
Graphic
Graphic
Smart pilot assist will be active only if ACC is active
System Operation
Smart Pilot Assist system is combination of Adaptive Cruise Control and Lane Centering.
Graphic
If speed/road/vehicle dynamic conditions are not satisfied, Smart Pilot Assist will be in STANDBY mode and Smart Pilot Assist indicator light will illuminate in white.
Graphic
If both lane markers are detected and all the road and vehicle related activation conditions are satisfied, system performs lane centering and indicator light will illuminate in green.
Graphic
When system performs lane centering, steering wheel indicator will illuminate in green.
If system was assisting and transiting to Standby due to any reasons, then Smart Pilot Assist will stop providing assist and indicator light will blink in white for few seconds
If a slower moving vehicle is detected ahead during lane centering, the system will reduce the vehicle speed so that your vehicle follows the vehicle in front as per the set time gap.
When lane markings are not available, system will follow set speed and set time gap as set by the driver for ACC.
Always use a time interval that is suitable in current traffic conditions. A short time interval gives the driver limited reaction time if an unexpected situation occurs in traffic. System will be deactivated/off when ACC system is turned off or Smart Pilot Assist is deselected from the settings or when 3rd stage hands-off warning displays.
When ACC is disengaged by pressing brake pedal, Smart Pilot Assist also gets into standby.
If lane centering was active and road is straight, Smart Pilot Assist may be provided for some more time even though lane markings are not available.
Smart Pilot Assist may follow preceding vehicle if lanes are not detected properly and following conditions are satisfied.
•  Lane centering was active before lane detection got dropped.
•  Preceding vehicle speed is less than around 75 kmph
•  Preceding vehicle is close enough for system to follow. Smart Pilot Assist may stop to follow preceding vehicle if above conditions are not satisfied or if the preceding vehicle has changed the path.
Hands-off Detection & Warning : When driver does not hold the steering wheel with adequate torque, Smart Pilot Assist triggers hands off warning and it is continued until the driver holds back the steering wheel.
First stage warning will be provided immediately once hands off is detected
Graphic
Second stage warning with audio alert will be provided if driver is not holding the steering wheel even after the first stage warning.
Graphic
Third stage warning with audio alert will be provided when driver does not hold the steering wheel even after second stage warning . Here after Smart Pilot Assist and ACC will go to Standby
Graphic
•  Do not wait for system to provide Visual /audio alerts to hold the steering wheel. Driver is always responsible to have control of the vehicle.
•  In some rare situations when system is unable to do proper judgement, system may generate visual / audio alerts even when the driver holds the steering wheel as a precautionary measure.
The driver is always responsible for steering the vehicle and maintaining a suitable speed and distance to the vehicle ahead and must intervene if necessary, even if Smart Pilot Assist is being used.
Due to the limitations of the camera and radar sensor, the system may apply the brakes in your vehicle suddenly or not at all.
System will provide only a mild steering torque within the operating limits. This torque may not be sufficient during sharper curves. System may stop providing assist if it determines the torque provided is not sufficient to pull back to the lane. Driver is always responsible to steer the vehicle and bring vehicle back to lane.
Graphic
Smart Pilot Assist regulates your vehicle's speed using the accelerator pedal and the brakes. Please be aware that there may be a faint sound from the brakes when the system is using them.
Smart Pilot Assist may not detect obstacles at the side of the vehicle and may try to pull back the vehicle laterally to the center of lane even though another vehicle may be occupying the lane at the side. This could lead to a possible collision. Driver should always be in control of the steering wheel and shall provide additional torque to override Smart Pilot Assist in such situations.
Graphic
There could be vertical structures like curbs, medians etc. at the end of lane marking and assist provided by Smart Pilot Assist system may not be sufficient enough to pull back the vehicle before the vehicle leaves the lane. User has to take control of steering always and provide necessary steering to avoid lane deviations or crash.
Smart Pilot Assist Automatic Cancellation
Smart Pilot Assist cancels and goes to standby when:
•  ACC system cancels.
•  The maximum speed that Smart Pilot Assist supports is exceeded.
•  When driver shifts out of Drive gear.
•  An Automatic Emergency Braking event occurs.
•  When turn indicator or hazard is activated.
•  When interface systems are not available.
•  When driver steers manually.
•  When vehicle dynamics/road conditions are not suitable for Smart Pilot Assist Operation.
When Smart Pilot Assist cancels, the Smart Pilot Assist indicator changes to White color to indicate that system is no longer active.
Graphic
Graphic
When there is any failure in the system , below pop-up message appears on Instrument Cluster screen and Smart Pilot Assist indicator illuminate in Amber color. Visit nearest Mahindra service center for assistance.
Smart Pilot Assist System Limitations
Smart Pilot Assist is subject to certain system limitations and may be unavailable or only partially available in the following situations:
Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with below system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
Note: All the limitations of ACC also apply for Smart Pilot Assist.
•  Smart Pilot Assist is unable to accurately determine lane markings due to poor visibility (heavy rain, snow, fog, etc.), or an obstructed, covered, or damaged camera or sensor.
•  When driving on hills.
•  The road has sharp curves or is excessively rough.
•  Bright light (such as direct sunlight) is interfering with the camera's view.
•  The sensors are affected by other electrical equipment or devices that generate ultrasonic waves.
•  When driving on winding or uneven roads.
•  When there is a lane closure due to road repairs.
•  When driving in a makeshift or temporary lane.
•  When driving on roads where the lane width is too narrow.
•  On roads where there are multiple parallel lane markers; lane markers that are faded or not painted clearly; non-standard lane markers; or lane markers covered with water, dirt, snow, etc.
•  On roads where the discontinued lane markers are still detectable.
•  On roads where the traveling lane merges or separates.
•  When the vehicle’s traveling direction does not align with the lane marker.
•  When the headlights are not bright due to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not adjusted properly.
•  Smart Pilot Assist function will not work properly when there is a heavy cross wind.
•  Smart Pilot Assist function may not work when the lane marking color is other than white or yellow on both the sides of the road.
Smart Pilot Assist system can activate Lane centering from deactivated state only if lanes are available on both sides. Smart Pilot Assist cannot activate Lane centering from deactivated state if lanes are not available on both sides or if lane is available only on one side.
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
– When the visibility of lane is blocked by a vehicle in front, Smart Pilot Assist cannot do lane centering
9 STARTING AND DRIVING 1
9.1 Safety Tips - Before Starting your Vehicle
9.1.1 General
•  Before starting the vehicle, thoroughly inspect both the interior and exterior for any damages, leaks, loose parts, or foreign objects/debris. If you find any issues, contact a Mahindra Authorized Dealer for assistance.
•  Before starting your journey, ensure that all safety devices and components are functioning properly, particularly the brakes, steering, lamps, signals, and tires. If you suspect any issues, promptly contact a Mahindra Authorized Dealer for assistance.
•  Adjust the seat head restraint, steering wheel, and fasten the seat belt as described in this manual. Never make any seat or steering adjustments while the vehicle is in motion.
•  Start the vehicle only when you are seated and belted in the driver's seat.
The Engine Management System controls the engine's idle speed. When the engine starts, the idle RPM is initially higher than normal to warm up the engine. The idle RPM decreases once the engine reaches its optimal temperature.
Never start your vehicle in a closed garage or any enclosed area, as exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always keep the garage door open or start the engine in an open area.
Mirror Adjustment: Ensure that the rear view mirror and both the ORVM’s are adjusted for an unobstructed view of the road behind.
Exterior Lamps: Have someone observe and confirm normal operation of all exterior lamps while you work on the controls from the driver seat. Also, check functioning of all lamps in the instrument panel.
Door Latches: Check for positive closing, latching, and locking of all doors, both from inside and outside.
Fluid Leaks: Check the area under vehicle after an overnight parking for fuel, power steering fluid, brake fluid, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. If leaks are observed, contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
9.2 Ignition Switch
Graphic
An illuminator ring is provided on the face of the ignition switch to help in locating the ignition switch at night. The ring will illuminate the moment the driver door is opened and will remain illuminated till the driver door is closed.
The different positions of the ignition switch are;
LOCK — This is the ignition and steering lock position. The vehicle circuits and engine are completely switched OFF. The steering wheel is also locked and the key can be removed from the ignition only in this position.
ACC — The steering is unlocked and can be rotated. In this position all electrical circuits are enabled. Use this mode when you want to listen to music, etc., with the engine temporarily switched OFF.
Note: This mode can be used for a short time. It may drain the battery with prolonged usage.
ON — All electrical circuits are enabled. Some of the warning or information lamps illuminate in this position. While some of the lamps will go out after a few 333s, some will continue to remain ON till the engine is started. When the vehicle is being driven, the ignition switch remains in the IGN position.
Select the ignition ON position when the vehicle is being towed.
Do not leave the ignition ON for long when the engine is OFF. This could lead to battery drain and ignition switch damage.
START — This position is to start the engine by cranking the starter motor. This is a momentary position. When the key is turned to the start position, the starter cranks the engine. Once the engine is running, release the key, and the key reverts back to the ON position and the starter motor disengages from the engine.
Do not continue cranking after the engine has started. This will lead to permanent damages to starter motor and engine components.
If turning the key is difficult, jiggle the steering wheel from side to side and try again. The key can be removed only in the LOCK position. When the key is removed, the steering column lock is activated and the steering wheel cannot be turned.
Never return the key to the LOCK position or try to remove the key, when the vehicle is in motion. Removing the key may lead to steering wheel locking. You will lose control of the vehicle and may cause a serious accident. Remove the key only when the vehicle is parked.
9.3 Pedals
Manual Transmission (MT)
Automatic Transmission (AT)
Graphic
Graphic
A
Accelerator Pedal
B
Brake Pedal
C
Clutch Pedal
9.4 Starting the Engine
Make sure all vehicle occupants are properly seated in their seats and have buckled their safety belts.
For more information on seat, refer to the “Seat Belts” section in this manual.
Before cranking the engine, A few warning lamps briefly illuminate after turning on the ignition. For further details of warning lamps, refer the section on "Warning Lamps in the Instrument Cluster".
Starting Procedure
1. Turn the ignition ON by pressing the Start Stop button or through ignition key.
2. Shift the gear shift lever to neutral position (for MT), to Park or Neutral position (for AT).
3. Apply parking brake or EPB (as applicable)
4. Do not press the accelerator.
5. Press the clutch pedal (for MT) brake pedal (for AT) and turn the key momentarily to the START position to crank the engine. Once the engine starts, release the key
6. For PKE: Press the clutch pedal (for MT) brake pedal (for AT) and press the start stop button to crank the engine. Once the engine starts, release the Start Stop button
The engine can be started from any position (OFF / ACC / ON) of the start/stop switch
•  Do not continue cranking the ignition key after the engine has started. This will lead to damage of the starter and other engine components
•  In PKE, if engine start/stop button is pressed without pressing the brake pedal, engine will not start and the vehicle power modes will change as follows: OFF - ON - OFF - ON
•  If the engine start/stop button is pressed from the OFF position directly, along with the brake in depressed position, there may be a small delay in the engine cranking. This is normal and not to be taken as a fault.
•  Never press the engine start/stop button while the vehicle is in motion except in an emergency. This will result in the engine turning off and loss of power assist for the steering and brake systems. This may lead to loss of direction control and braking function, leading to an accident.
•  Once the engine is started, it would not stop even if the key is not inside the vehicle. Before leaving the driver seat, always make sure engine start/stop button is in OFF position and always take the Smart Key with you. Vehicle safety and security would be affected if these precautions are not followed.
•  To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 secs before attempting to restart the engine
•  If the engine fails to start even after repeated attempts as per the procedure given above, contact the nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer.
If the vehicle battery has discharged, use booster cables, a booster battery or a battery from another vehicle to start. Jump-starting a vehicle can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to the “Jump-starting procedure” section in this manual.
If the engine still fails to start, contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer for assistance.
Ensure the following when the engine is running:
•  All warning lamps are OFF
•  Low oil pressure lamp is OFF
9.4.1 Engine Idling
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up.
Observe that all warning lamps are OFF when the engine is running.
After idling for a few seconds, follow the below steps to drive away:
1. Release the parking brake / EPB (as applicable).
2. Press the clutch (for MT) brake (for AT).
3. Shift the gear lever to 1st gear (for MT), D or M (for AT).
4. Release the brake pedal.
5. Drive by releasing the clutch pedal (for MT) brake pedal (for AT) and pressing the accelerator pedal simultaneously.
Engine Idling - In Cold Weather
Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is cold and prolonged idling at low ambient temperatures. Long periods of idling may be harmful to your engine. Combustion chamber temperatures can drop so low that the fuel may not burn completely. Incomplete combustion allows carbon and varnish to form on piston rings and injector nozzles. Also, the unburned fuel can enter the crankcase, diluting the oil and causing rapid wear to the engine.
You must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low Sulphur Diesel. For smooth functioning and reliable operation of the engine during cold weather conditions, use winter diesel for refuelling which is available at filling stations during winter months. Check with your fuel retailer for details.
The recommended engine coolant mixture will work fine till ambient temperatures do not drop below -32ºC approx. For ensuring above performance, it is a must that you use only recommended engine coolant.
9.4.2 Stopping the Engine
Before turning the engine OFF, always allow the engine to return to normal idle speed and run for few secs. This assures proper cooling and lubrication of the turbocharger. This is particularly necessary after any hard driving
To reduce the risk of personal injury, before turning OFF the engine and leaving the vehicle, always follow the below mentioned safety tips.
Stopping Procedure
1. Keep your right foot on the brake pedal
2. Turn front wheels towards the road curb
3. Engage the parking brake / EPB (as applicable)
4. Switch OFF the ignition, turn the key to the steering lock position and remove the key
5. Press the start stop button once to switch off the vehicle (for PKE only)
6. Shift the gear shift lever to 1st gear position or reverse gear position if parking on an incline (for MT), Park “P” position (for AT)
7. Slowly release the brake pedal
8. Lock your vehicle when leaving
Alert will be displayed in the infotainment screen if the gear shifter is not in P position. Engine will not switch off unless shifter is in P position
To reduce the risk of personal injury, before turning OFF the engine and leaving the vehicle, always:
•  When stopping for example, at a traffic light, be sure to depress the brake pedal firmly. For your safety, apply the parking brake, too when stopping on a hill.
•  While pressing the accelerator to raise the engine rpm in vehicle stationary condition, make sure that the gear is in "n" position. If the accelerator is operated in any other positions, the vehicle may move and cause an unexpected accident.
•  Do not leave your vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
•  When leaving the vehicle, stop the engine and park the vehicle with a gear engaged. If you need to leave the vehicle with the engine running, apply the parking brakes firmly, and shift the gearshift lever to the “N” position. Otherwise, the vehicle may move unexpectedly and may cause an accident.
On a slope, never hold the vehicle at a stop using only the accelerator pedal or the creeping function. If you perform this operation for a certain period of time, a warning buzzer will sound, and in some cases the engine will stall. This can also cause excessive damage to the clutch.
9.5 Manual Transmission
9.5.1 Gear Shift Lever
Graphic
The gear shift lever shifts the transmission into various gears. The gearshift pattern is shown on the gear lever knob. The clutch pedal should be depressed fully while shifting, and then released slowly.
With the gear shift lever in neutral and brakes released, the vehicle can move freely by pushing or towing. The engine can be started in this mode. It is always recommended to keep the brake pedal depressed in this position. It is advisable to shift into neutral when the vehicle is at a standstill for longer durations with the engine idling.
Coasting the vehicle with the gear lever in neutral and engine ON/OFF is not recommended. The steering and braking will be very hard without power assist while coasting with the engine OFF. In an event of panic braking, you will not have the power of engine braking to slow down the vehicle. This may lead to personal injury or accident.
Do not leave the vehicle with the gear shift lever in the neutral position. Always engage the manual parking brake before leaving the vehicle, to prevent any vehicle movement leading to possible injury to a by-stander or damage to the vehicle.
For brief stops, e.g. at traffic lights, keep the gear shift in neutral and hold the vehicle with the brake pedal. For prolonged stops, it is recommended to switch OFF the engine and apply the parking brake.
•  Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could move the gear shift lever, which could result in an accident or serious injury
•  On slippery/wet road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in a wheel slip and reduced vehicle control
Forward — Use the gears 1 to 6 as per vehicle load, road/traffic conditions or as per requirement.
Reverse — This gear is to enable the vehicle to move in the reverse direction. Move the gear shift lever into this position only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
To engage REVERSE gear from the NEUTRAL position, lift the REVERSE ring, located below the knob and move the gear selector all the way left and then forward.
To avoid transmission damage, shift into or out of reverse gear only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed. It is recommended you wait approximately for three seconds in neutral gear before shifting into or out of the reverse gear.
Uphill and Downhill Driving
To prevent the engine from laboring at a low RPM when driving uphill gradients or with your vehicle heavily loaded, downshift when necessary to maintain engine RPM within the best torque range. Similarly while driving downhill, downshift to utilize the engine braking in an optimum manner.
When stopping the vehicle on an uphill gradient, do not hold it with the clutch/ accelerator; use the brake to avoid unnecessary clutch wear/heat buildup. When parking on an incline, gear alone may not be sufficient to prevent the vehicle from moving. Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting the gear shift lever into gear. It is also recommended to turn the front wheels towards the curb.
9.5.2 Recommended Gear Shifting Speeds
Shift gears at suitable engine or road speeds to safeguard the transmission components. Avoid driving in high RPM’s (>3000 RPM).
Always depress the clutch fully before moving the gear shift lever from the current position to any desired position. Perform up-shifts or down-shifts one gear at a time, do not jump gears.
Upshifting - Diesel
Shift Range
Vehicle Road Speed (kmph)
Engine RPM Range
1–2
16
1600–2500
2–3
27
3–4
42
4–5
55
5–6
67
Down shifting - Diesel
Shift Range
Vehicle Road Speed (kmph)
Engine RPM Range
6–5
62
1300–1800
5–4
51
4–3
39
3–2
24
2–1
13
Upshifting - Petrol
Shift Range
Vehicle Road Speed (kmph)
Engine RPM Range
1–2
18
1600 – 2200
2–3
30
3–4
42
4–5
55
5–6
70
Downshifting - Petrol
Shift Range
Vehicle Road Speed (kmph)
Engine RPM Range
6–5
63
1100 – 1400
5–4
50
4–3
38
3–2
27
2–1
15
9.5.3 Intelligent Auto creep function (IAC) (If equipped)
The Intelligent Auto Creep (IAC) is a feature which allows the customer to drive away in gradient.
The system will understand the amount of gradient and adjust the amount of assist according.
To use the assist. The customer must smoothly release the clutch- without pressing the accelerator. (If the accelerator is pressed then the system hands over the complete control to customer)
Once the vehicle has started rolling the customer can press the accelerator and take back the control
The IAC feature should not be used to hold the vehicle in gradient without pressing the brakes. Can cause premature clutch failure.
9.6  Automatic Transmission
The first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat rough. This is a normal phenomenon, and precision shifts will develop within the initial few hundred kilometers of running.
9.6.1 Gear Selector Lever
Graphic
Your vehicle is equipped with 6 Speed automatic transmission having electronic controls with an Adaptive Transmission Control Strategy.
This adaptive Transmission strategy offers optimal transmission operation and shift quality in different driving conditions. The transmission electronics are self calibrating. Therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat rough. This is a normal phenomenon, and precision shifts will develop within the initial few hundred kms of running.
P : Park position
M : Manual Mode
R : Reverse position
M+ : Manual up-shift
N : Neutral position
M- : Manual down shift
D : Drive position
 
Shift Logic Table
Movement
Lock
P - R
Yes-Brake pedal + knob button
R - N
No
N - D
No
D - M
No
M - D
No
D - N
No
N - R
Yes-Only knob button
R - P
Yes-Only knob button
9.6.2 P : Park Position
Graphic
Use this position to park your vehicle, warm up the engine, or stay in a location for an extended length of time. To shift in to any other position, first depress the brake pedal, then press knob button and move the TGS to R or N or D as desired.
•  Stop the vehicle completely before shifting into ‘P’
•  Never shift to ‘P’ when the vehicle is moving, It will damage the transmission
•  If the lever is shifted to P when the vehicle has not come to stop and in forward motion, then a ratchet noise will be heard. This is not abnormal. However we do not recommend moving to P till the vehicle has come to standstill. As repeated, such instances can damage the internal parts
•  To shift from the “P” position to another position, the ignition switch must be turned to “ON” and the brake pedal should be depressed. Any forcible attempts to move the selector lever from “P” without the two procedures may damage the selector lever
9.6.3 R : Reverse position
Graphic
Use this position to reverse the vehicle
To shift into 'R' from 'N', completely stop the vehicle, depress the brake pedal and press the Knob button and to shift from 'N' to 'R'.
•  Never shift into “R” when the vehicle is moving
•  Please note that the vehicle may slowly move rearward when the selector lever is at “R”
9.6.4 N : Neutral position
Graphic
At this position, the engine does not transfer power to the wheels and the vehicle will not move on a flat road. However, for safety, apply the brake when the gear is in this position.
•  Warm up the engine for approximately 3 minutes when the ambient temperature is below -15°C. Otherwise, shifting of gears in Forward or Reverse direction may not be smooth
•  Never shift into “N” from the “D” position or vice versa when the vehicle is moving, or the transmission will be damaged
•  If you have to stop on a hill and would like to use this neutral position, depress the brake pedal firmly
•  Never attempt to move the gear selector lever to “N” when the vehicle is in motion
Depress the brake pedal while shifting the gear lever from “N” to “D” or “R” for your safety.
For shifting R to P, press the knob button and for shifting to N or D, only shift lever to moved. Refer the shift logic table for more clarity.
9.6.5 D : Drive position
Graphic
Use this position for normal driving conditions. The transmission is automatically shifted from 1st gear up to 6th gear according to the level of depression on the accelerator pedal
•  Do not abruptly drive off or sharply accelerate the vehicle immediately after shifting into “D” or the transmission will get damaged. Wait for D symbol to come in the cluster before pressing the accelerator pedal
•  Even while the gear is in ‘D’, the vehicle can roll down an uphill according to the gradients, so you have to depress the brake
•  Please note that the vehicle may creep forward on level ground when the selector lever is in “D”; even without pressing the accelerator pedal and this behavior is known as forward creep.
Note: Equivalent to - clutch release without acceleration in Manual Transmission)
9.6.6 M : Manual Shift Mode
Graphic
Driving gear can be adjusted by operating/moving the shift lever in front or back direction. In manual shift mode, the user can upshift or downshift from 1 to 6 or 6 to 1 forward gears by moving the shift lever in front or back direction.
Shift up: Move the shift lever forward towards + direction and release once to shift up one gear.
Shift Down: Move the shift lever backwards towards - direction and release once to shift down one gear.
The gears can be shifted without requiring to release the Accelerator pedal.
In manual mode, downshifts are made automatically when the vehicle slows down.
Auto upshift at Manual Mode is deactivated for only 1st to 2nd & 2nd to 3rd gears. Whereas 3rd to 4th , 4th to 5th & 5th to 6th gears auto upshift will happen at max threshold.
When starting to drive on a snow or icy road, upshift of the gear to 2nd or 3rd is possible to avoid loss of traction.
For safety reason maximum three shifts “+”/ ”-” can be allowed at given point of time.
•  Before leaving the Driver’s seat always make sure that the shift lever is in the P (park) position
•  Shifting into P position while the vehicle is in motion will cause the drive wheels to lock which will cause you to lose control of the vehicle
•  Always fully depress the brake pedal before and while shifting out of the Drive (D) position into another position (other than M Mode) to avoid inadvertent motion of the vehicle
•  The shift from D to M (Manual Mode) and M to D can be performed while the vehicle is moving
•  To maintain the required levels of vehicle performance and safety, the system may not execute certain gearshifts when the shift lever is operated
Use of Engine Brake
To use the engine as a brake, change into the manual gear shift mode first, then operate the gear lever to next lower gear.
•  Abruptly downshifting and using the engine brake may make the vehicle unstable, especially when driving on roads covered with snow or ice
9.6.7 Gear Shift Interlock system
Graphic
The Automatic Transmission has a shift lock system which prevents shifting the transmission from P or N into R unless the Brake Pedal is depressed
In case of malfunction of the shifter, remove the shift lock cap present on shifter bezel and then press the button inside with help of any circular/pen type object , and then press knob button to come out of P.
9.6.8 Starting and Driving Off
•  Always start the engine while the selector lever is in “P”. For your safety, avoid starting the engine from “N” even though you can do so.
•  Check whether or not the engine idling speed is normal. Keep the brake pedal depressed and shift into “D” or“R”.
•  To move the vehicle, release the brake pedal and depress the accelerator pedal gradually.
•  Do not abruptly drive off or sharply accelerate the engine after shifting into “D”. Otherwise the transmission will be damaged. Especially, when you start off after stopping, wait for a while until the “D” shift indicator comes on with the brake pedal depressed
•  When driving on a down hill, never shift the selector lever to “N” If you try to shift the lever to “D” from “N”, a sudden gear engagement can damage the drive train
•  HDC (Hill Descent Control) is designed for driving down a steep hill. When HDC is applied, do not shift to “N”. Otherwise, HDC will get deactivated
•  Even though you can start the engine with the selector lever in both “P” or “N”, for your safety, always start the engine with the selector lever in “P”
•  For your safety, always depress the brake pedal before moving the gear selector lever with the vehicle stopped
•  Never depress the accelerator pedal when moving the gear selector
•  If you have to stop on a hill, depress the brake pedal securely
•  When the parking brake is released while the engine is running at a high rpm, your vehicle may abruptly move. Therefore, wait until the engine speed returns to idling.
•  To avoid any mechanical damages or accidents, never shift into “P” or “N” while the vehicle is in motion
•  When driving at a high speed, any sudden attempt to shift from a higher to a lower gear can severely damage the vehicle. In addition, your vehicle may lose its stability and be at / be a high risk
•  A high engine speed can cause your vehicle to move abruptly from the parked position. To avoid this, wait until the engine rpm becomes stable
•  When you start off on a hill after stopping and parking the vehicle, wait for a while until the “D” shift indicator comes on, with the brake pedal depressed
•  Do not move the gear selector lever into “N” position while the HDC (Hill Descent Control) system is operating. Doing so stops the operation of HDC system
•  Do not press the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal at the same time
•  We suggest that right leg only should be used for operating brake and accelerator pedal.
9.6.9 Creep Function
Without any actuation of the accelerator pedal, your vehicle will move slowly if the selector lever is in any position other than “P” or “N”. This is called the creep effect. You can control your vehicle’s movement by only applying the brake in heavy traffic or narrow lanas.
On a steep decline or incline, your vehicle may move in the opposite direction of the intended direction despite the creep effect. When stopping on a steep hill, always depress the brake pedal
9.6.10 Kickdown Function
If you need to accelerate rapidly, or on sudden acceleration, a lower gear will automatically be engaged. Then, a lower gear will be automatically engaged. Then will provide required thrust /acceleration.
•  Do not use the kickdown function while driving on slippery or sharply curved roads
•  If you use the kickdown function too frequently, the durability and fuel economy of the vehicle will get worsen
9.6.11 Engine Braking
When the accelerator pedal is released while the vehicle is in motion, the engine speed decreases. On a down hill, engaging a lower gear can generate a higher engine braking and eventually slow down the vehicle speed. By using engine behavior as a brake, you can decrease your vehicle speed without excessively using the brake system. lower the gear, higher the braking force.
•  Do not excessively apply the brake pedal while going down a long slope. The brake system will overheat, experience vapor lock or the fade phenomenon, and lose the braking efficiency.
•  Be aware that the engine brake does not work when the gear selector lever is in the ‘N’ position
•  Avoid any abrupt engine braking on slippery roads, or the tyres may slip
9.6.12 Gear Indicator
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
Gear up-shift/down-shift is indicated win an up/down arrow head/triangle
9.6.13 Neutral Position
This position stops the transmission of power from the engine to drive axle. With the gear lever is in neutral and brakes released, the vehicle can move freely by pushing or towing. The engine can be started in this mode. It is always recommended to keep the brake pedal depressed in this position. It is advisable to shift into neutral when the vehicle is standstill for longer durations with the engine idling.
Coasting the vehicle with the gear lever in neutral and engine ON/OFF is not recommended. In an event of panic braking, you will not have the power of engine braking to slow down the vehicle. This may lead to personal injury or accident.
Do not leave the vehicle with the gear lever in neutral position. Always engage manual parking brake before leaving the vehicle, to prevent any vehicle movement leading to possible injury to a bystander or damage to vehicle.
9.6.14 Limp Home Mode (LHM)
When there is a malfunction in the transmission, it goes into Limp Home Mode to maintain minimum driving conditions and also to prevent critical transmission damage. This status is indicated by the transmission check lamp illumination in the instrument cluster. Contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further assistance.
The transmission is held either in 3rd/ 5th gear when LHM is activated is possible. Needs to be driven carefully to nearest service center.
9.7 Driving Your Vehicle
9.7.1 General Driving Precautions
Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of accidents leading to serious personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
•  Before you drive your vehicle, please read this manual carefully.
•  Before you start driving, check proper operation of the brakes and steering system.
•  If, while driving, you hear any strange noise or feel unusual vibration, or if you have any concerns whatsoever, or if any warning lamps illuminate or buzzers sound, park/stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible. Identify the cause and take necessary remedial action. Contact your Mahindra Authorised Dealer if necessary.
•  Never overload or improperly load your vehicle.
•  Always be attentive while driving and follow safe driving practices.
•  Always maintain the recommended inflation pressure in tires.
•  Always drive at a safe speed appropriate for given driving conditions. You must follow the speed limits.
•  While backing up, keep a constant lookout for people, particularly children, or other obstructions or hazardous material that might be present behind the vehicle.
•  Avoid loading any items on the roof that will raise the vehicle’s center of gravity and make your vehicle more unstable.
•  Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
•  Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. Because of its profile and higher center of gravity, your vehicle is more sensitive to side winds than an ordinary passenger car. Slowing down will allow you to have much better control.
•  When driving off-road or on rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover causing serious injury. You are also risking expensive damage to your vehicle's suspension and chassis.
•  Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially on rough terrains. Sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel motion. Make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not grip the spokes.
•  If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (e.g. from concrete to gravel/sand/mud/snow) there will be a change in the way the vehicle responds, especially the way it responds to steering, braking and accelerating inputs.
•  Be extremely careful while driving on loose pavements, loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.
•  If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but avoid severe brake or steering application. Ease the vehicle back onto the pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.
•  It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may loose control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too sharply or abruptly.
•  In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn must be made, turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid the emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and/or personal injury. Use all available road surfaces to return the vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
9.7.2 Off Road Driving Precautions
•  When driving off-road or on rugged terrains, never overspeed or make sharp turns. This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover causing serious injury.
•  Maintain steering wheel control at all times. Sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel motion.
•  Do not drive horizontally or diagonally across steep slopes, your vehicle can tip over sideways. Driving straight up or straight down is preferred.
•  Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as rocks and stumps. You should either know the terrain or map-out your route before driving in the area.
•  Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driving that has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud or water.
When the carpet gets wet, It is recommended to dry or clean properly.
Post off roading, heavy mud slurry need to be cleaned from Radiator, Condenser, Oil cooler etc., to avoid Engine overheating.
9.7.3 If your vehicle is submerged
If Your stationary Vehicle is Submerged over the bumper
Graphic
•  Contact your Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
•  Have the vehicle towed to nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer to check any entry of water into the engine
•  All fluids including engine and transmission fluids required to be changed incase of water ingress and contamination
Never attempt to start the engine, without the advice from Mahindra Authorised Dealer technician.
•  Never drive through water when it flows above the bottom portion of the bumper or above the tyre centre line
•  The engine could get damaged internally, if attempts are made to cross through deep water
•  Wet brake discs have a lower coefficient of friction resulting in reduced braking efficiency. Dab the brake pedal while driving to remove the film of water
9.7.4 Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow water, there are a number of precautions that must be considered before entering the water.
Never drive through still water that is higher than the bottom of the axle hubs. Not following this instruction will allow water to enter vehicle components causing internal damage to the components, affecting driveability, safety, emissions and reliability.
When driving through water, drive very slowly and at constant speed, less than 8 kmph. Drive with accelerator pedal in OFF and control speed using only the brakes. At higher speed waves can be generated by the front of the vehicle. These water waves may enter air intake, causing severe engine damage or cause a vehicle to get stalled.
You must slow down while driving through shallow water. Speeding may cause water to splash onto the windshield, impairing your vision In extreme conditions you may get a water wedge formation between the road and tyre causing loss of control in the vehicle.
•  The ground under the water might not be firm which could result the water being deeper than expected when driving the vehicle through it.
•  Do not stop or shut OFF the engine while immersed in water. It helps in preventing water getting inside the exhaust pipes.
•  When backing down a ramp, do not allow the exhaust tail pipe to immerse in water.
•  Water can wash the grease from wheel bearings, causing rusting and premature failure. It may also enter the differentials, transmission and transfer case, reducing the oil's lubricating qualities. If these are submerged in water, the lubricants should be replaced as required.
•  Water entering the transmission will cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damaging the transmission.
•  Sand, mud/sludge that has accumulated in brake drums and around brake discs may affect braking efficiency. This may also damage brake system components. Wet brakes cannot stop the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by driving the vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
•  When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be limited. Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driving that has taken you through water.
9.7.5 Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm run-off) avoid crossing until the water level recedes and/or the flow rate is reduced.
The flowing water can erode the streambed causing your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Determine the exit point(s) that are downstream of your entry point to compensate for drifting.
9.7.6 After Driving Off-road or through Water
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on-road driving. Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driving that has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud, or water.
•  After going off-road, it is always a good idea to check for damage. Completely inspect the underbody of the vehicle for any damages.
•  Check for accumulations of plants or bushes. or polyethylene / plastic These could be a fire hazard. They might damage to fuel lines, brake tubes/hoses, etc.
•  Inspect all the tubes/hoses and check for any fluid leakages.
•  Get heat exchangers (radiator and condenser) cleaned.
•  Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on the chassis, drive train components, steering, suspension and brakes. Visit nearest dealer for under body check and retorqueing the fasteners.
•  We also recommend that the vehicle be checked at the Authorised Dealer for any water entry into the transmission/ axle or the engine
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might not have full braking power when needed leading to accidents. If you have been operating the vehicle in off-road conditions, get the brakes checked and cleaned as necessary.
•  If any unusual vibration is experienced, check the wheels for impacted material. Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance. Get it inspected/corrected as soon as possible.
•  After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle fluids and lubricants (engine oil, transmission/transfer case/axle oils) to ensure the fluids have not been contaminated.
Mud splashes will deposit in various components under chassis and under bonnet depending on the nature of track you are driving. While your THAR is a capable off roader, it would need drivers attention & care under certain driving conditions. While driving into sludge (mud + water) tracks with your 4x4, be aware that the slush will splash and settle on various components. The following precautions need to be taken;
•  It is recommended to avoid usage of AC as it may result in fan vibrations. Removal of mud deposits through deep cleaning Immediately after off roading will resume the operation back to normal
•  Do not over-speed
•  Do not let the muddy slush dry up specially on radiator /condenser /fan motor etc which will cause suboptimal performance /Engine overheating due to restricted air flow
•  Take the vehicle to a wash immediately after off roading and get it cleaned under the chassis /under bonnet components before mud dries on it. This will protect your vehicle from unforeseen breakdowns
9.8 Cruise Control (if equipped)
Cruise control allows you to maintain a set speed without the need to keep your foot on the accelerator pedal. It should be used for cruising on straight, open highways. Never use it for city driving, inclines, winding roads, slippery roads, heavy rain or in bad weather conditions.
It works on the closed loop system principle to maintain the set speed of the vehicle; the system controls the fuel injection of the engine in order to maintain the set speed.
Graphic
A: Cruise ON/OFF
B: Cruise Set +
C: Cruise Set –
D: Resume
Cruise control enhances your comfort while driving and allows you to effortlessly maintain the desired lane speed limit. Improper use of the cruise control can lead to an accident.
Cruise control is designed to operate above a vehicle speed of 20 kmph - MT / 35 kmph - AT for all gears except 1st and reverse gears. The cruise lamp in the instrument cluster functions only if the cruise control is active.
Cruise control will function only under the following conditions:
•  The vehicle is cruising above 20 kmph - MT / 35 kmph - AT
•  Engine RPM above 1200
•  Vehicle is in any gear except 1st and reverse
•  Clutch pedal released
•  Brake pedal released
•  Cruise is enabled by pressing ON/OFF button
•  Cruise is activated first time in an ignition cycle by SET + / SET - button
•  Subsequent cruise engagements can be done by RESUME SET+ / SET - buttons in the same ignition cycle
Cruise control is deactivated under the following conditions:
•  CRUISE OFF button is pressed
•  Brake or clutch pedal depressed
If the vehicle speed exceeds the cruise set speed by 20 kmph - MT / 35 kmph - AT by accelerator pedal intervention
•  If vehicle speed is increased by 10 kmph for more than 30 secs. by pressing the accelerator pedal
When Set+ / Set- switch is pressed for more than 12 secs. (In this case, vehicle will not go into cruise mode in that ignition cycle. In order to restore the cruise function, switch OFF the ignition, wait for 30 secs. and switch ON the ignition)
Cruise influencing error not indicated by Check Engine Lamp, OBD lamp, etc.
9.8.1 Cruise Control Activation
Cruise is enabled by pressing ON/OFF button
Drive the vehicle to the desired cruising speed (any value greater than 20 kmph - MT / 35 kmph - AT), press and hold the SET+ button until the cruise lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates.
If cruise is deactivated (e.g. by depressing brake to handle an intervention in the road etc.) in current driving cycle, reactivate the Cruise to the last active Cruise Speed by pressing the RESUME button.
Cruise control may not hold the set speed when you are going up or down hills, and the vehicle may come out of cruise control. This is indicated by the cruise lamp going OFF in the instrument cluster.
9.8.2 Cruise Control De-activation
You can cancel cruise control in any of the following ways:
•  Press the CRUISE OFF button in the steering wheel
•  Press the brake pedal
•  Gear selector moved into neutral
•  HDC or ESC becomes active
9.8.3 SET+ Button
SET + button is used to activate cruise control and also to increase the cruise set speed.
To increase the speed in very small amounts, press the SET + Button. Each time you press, the cruise set speed increases by about 2 kmph. When you wish to continuously increase the cruising speed, press and hold the SET + Button and release when the desired speed is reached.
9.8.4 SET - Button
To decrease the speed in small amounts, press the SET - Button. Each time you press, the cruise set speed decreases by about 2 kmph.
When you wish to continuously decrease the cruising speed, press and hold the SET- Button. When the desired speed is reached, release the button.
If switch is pressed for more than 12 secs., the switch is assumed to be malfunctioning and the cruise functionality ceases to function in that ignition cycle. To resume functionality, ignition has to be toggled.
The cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation. The driver should be alert of road / traffic conditions and responsible for the vehicle brake operation / steering control.
Never activate cruise control in traffic or when driven in adverse road conditions (heavy rains, windy, slippery etc.)
9.8.5 RESUME Button
With the help of RESUME, you can opt for the previous set cruising speed of the vehicle in the same ignition cycle. This is best explained with the following example:
1. Assume, you have activated cruise mode and set the vehicle speed at 50 kmph.
2. Due to an obstacle or a sharp turn, you have deactivated the cruise mode either by pressing the brake pedal or by switching OFF the CRUISE control.
3. Vehicle comes out of the cruise mode.
4. When the road condition is suitable to switch over back to cruise control mode, press RESUME button once. The system activates the cruise control mode to the previous cruising speed of 50 kmph.
5. To resume the previous cruise set speed, the vehicle speed should be above 20 kmph - MT / 35 kmph - AT.
9.8.6 Override Function
This function enables user to ramp up the cruising speed to overtake front vehicle.
The cruising speed can be increased by using accelerator pedal. User has to complete this action within 30 secs. to maintain the cruise mode. If user exceeds the 30 secs. limit, cruise mode will be deactivated.
9.9 Terrain Mode (If equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a Terrain Mode System that enhances off-road performance by allowing the driver to select the best mode for specific terrain and driving conditions. Each mode adjusts various vehicle parameters, such as the engine, transmission, traction control, and Four-Wheel Drive systems, to optimize performance and control for a more capable and confident off-road experience. Terrain Mode can be activated only if the vehicle is in either 4WH or 4WL.
Terrain Mode System is designed to adjust the vehicle’s driving characteristics based on the terrain.
Use any of the following methods to activate Terrain mode
TFT Type
Through Center Fascia Switch Bank
Press the Terrain Mode hard switch on the center fascia switch bank.
Graphic
To open the Terrain Mode page on the Instrument Cluster screen.
Each subsequent press of the Terrain Mode hard switch will change the modes in cluster screen.
Graphic
If there is no press for few seconds between the modes, the last selected mode activated message will be displayed on the cluster as below.
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Also selected mode name displayed bottom of the cluster screen.
Graphic
Digital Type
Through Center Fascia Switch Bank
Press the Terrain Mode hard switch on the center fascia switch bank.
Graphic
To open the Terrain Mode page on the Infotainment screen.
Each subsequent press of the Terrain Mode hard switch will change the modes in infotainment screen. If there is no press for few seconds between the modes, the last selected mode activated message will be displayed on the infotainment screen.
Graphic
Through Infotainment Home Screen
Swiping down the infotainment Access drawer screen as shown in the image below.
Graphic
Then, Press the Terrain mode soft switch in the Infotainment screen.
Graphic
To open the Terrain Mode page on the Infotainment screen.
Then select the required Terrain Mode in the infotainment screen.
Graphic
Based on the selection, the selected mode activated message will be displayed on the infotainment screen.
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Also selected mode name displayed bottom of the cluster screen.
Graphic
Terrain modes can be engaged either through piano switches on the center fascia or via selection of the infotainment system, depending on the vehicle variant.
Terrain Mode
Mahindra's Terrain Mode System offers four driver-selectable modes that can be used with the shift-on-the-fly 4WD system. By selecting a mode, the system automatically adjusts the engine response, transmission shift pattern, traction control, and stability to suit different driving conditions. Terrain Mode can be activated only if the vehicle is in either 4WH or 4WL.
•  Normal mode is a default mode in terrain mode system. This Mode is an optimal setting for everyday driving on regular roads. This default mode adjusts vehicle settings to prioritize comfort, fuel efficiency, and stability, ensuring a smooth and efficient driving experience. This makes it ideal for typical driving conditions.
Graphic
Graphic
Cruise Control and Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and the Engine Stop Start (ESS) System are functional only in Normal Mode.
•  You can choose SNOW Mode for improved vehicle stability in low-traction conditions, ensuring better control and safety on snowy or icy roads.
Graphic
•  You can choose MUD Mode to ensure maximum torque availability at all four wheels, providing optimal traction and control in muddy conditions.
Graphic
•  You can choose SAND Mode to maintain the vehicle's momentum on soft ground, ensuring smooth and consistent movement.
Graphic
Do not drive in 4H when in tarmac or firm road, this is essential to avoid damage to drive line components.
All modes can be used in either 4WH or 4WL mode.
•  If the vehicle is in 2WD and user had selected any terrain mode other than normal, 'Select 4x4 mode alert' will come. User has to manually shift to 4WH or 4WL to activate any terrain modes.
•  4WH warning lamp turns ON in cluster
Graphic
•  Selected mode indication turns ON in cluster/Infotainment
•  Mode activation message displays in cluster
Mode
Normal
Snow
Mud
Sand
2H
Yes
No
No
No
4H
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
4L
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
9.9.1 Normal Mode
 This default mode activates automatically after each ignition cycle and is designed for optimal performance on normal road conditions.
4WH/4WL also can be engaged in this mode. For more information refer 4WD session
•  Selected mode indication turns ON in cluster/Infotainment
•  Mode activation message displays in cluster
9.9.2 Snow
Snow mode improves the overall traction of the vehicle, making it suitable for driving on surfaces covered with snow, ice, water, grass, or gravel.
MAX speed possible in 4WH is 120kmph & 4WL is 60kmph
•  Selected mode indication turns ON in cluster/Infotainment
•  Mode activation message displays in cluster
Graphic
ESC OFF lamp will be ON in this mode
For automatic transmission vehicles:
•  The vehicle will automatically launch in 2nd gear if the TGS lever is in Auto mode.
•  The driver can manually select 2nd gear to launch the vehicle using the TGS lever in Manual mode.
•  In this mode, early upshifting of gears and late downshifting is normal and characteristic of the driving experience.
In snowy conditions, it's advisable to avoid strong inputs such as sudden acceleration or sharp braking.
9.9.3 Mud Mode
Mud mode provies the best traction for slippery road conditions, making it ideal for driving on surfaces covered with mud.
•  Selected mode indication turns ON in cluster/Infotainment
•  Mode activation message displays in cluster
Graphic
ESC OFF lamp will be ON in this mode
For automatic transmission vehicles:
In this mode, it's typical for gear shifts to occur later during acceleration (late upshifts) and earlier during deceleration (early downshifts). This helps optimize traction and control in challenging driving conditions.
•  This mode provides best traction for slippery road conditions. Use this mode to drive in surfaces covered with mud.
•  4WL also can be selected manually based on requirements
•  MAX speed possible in 4WH is 120 kmph & 4WL is 60 kmph
•  Once it goes out from Mud mode , User can manually reengage the mud mode once again in the same driving cycle - only after the vehicle speed comes below 60 Kmph
9.9.4 Sand Mode
Sand mode ensures the vehicle maintains its momentum to keep moving on soft ground, making it suitable for driving on surfaces covered with sand
•  Selected mode indication turns ON in cluster/Infotainment
•  Mode activation message displays in cluster
Graphic
ESC OFF lamp will be ON in this mode
For automatic transmission vehicles:
In this mode, it's typical for gear shifts to occur later during acceleration (late upshifts) and earlier during deceleration (early downshifts). This helps optimize traction and control in challenging driving conditions.
•  This mode ensures maintains the momentum of the vehicle to keep the vehicle moving on soft ground. Use this mode to drive in surfaces covered with sand.
•  4WL also can be selected manually based on requirements
•  MAX speed possible in 4WH is 120kmph & 4WL is 60kmph
In sandy terrain, it's important to maintain vehicle momentum, especially when navigating up dunes. Avoid making sharp steering inputs to prevent the wheels from digging into the sand, which can compromise traction and control. These practices help ensure a smoother and safer driving experience in such challenging conditions.
Once you exit sandy areas, it's important to reinflate your tires to the recommended pressure promptly. Driving at high speeds on underinflated tires can compromise vehicle safety. If you don't have access to an air pump immediately, proceed at low speeds and exercise caution until you can reinflate your tires properly. This ensures optimal vehicle performance and safety on non-sandy surfaces.
9.10 4WD System (if equipped)
Failure to completely engage any transfer case position can cause 4WD system damage or loss of power and vehicle control. Do not drive the vehicle unless the transfer case is completely engaged. Accidents may happen.
Graphic
The 4WD system can be used for slippery & loose roads, off terrain driving, hilly terrain regions in which more traction is required. Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on hard-surfaced roads will cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components.
The 4WD/2WD shift is done by the small 4WD lever next to the gear lever. 4WD indicator on the instrument cluster alerts whether the vehicle is in 4WD mode. The 4WD system allows you to choose between Four different modes depending on the torque requirement.
•  2H (Two wheel drive high)
•  4H (Four wheel drive high)
•  N (Neutral)
•  4L (Four wheel drive low)
Transfer Case is a part time manual shift system. There is no synchronizer in transfer case and hence Shifting while the front or rear axles rotating at different speeds can cause damage to the transfer case.
Vehicle is equipped with electric front axle disconnect (FAD). There may be a slight delay and ratcheting noise while FAD is engaging as the splines may not be aligned. This is normal.
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause damage to the transfer case.
9.10.1 Operating Instructions/Precautions
Transfer case provides four mode positions; 2H, 4H, N and 4L.
2H:Only the rear wheels are driven at 1:1 speed ratio. Use this mode for normal driving on normal street, dry hard-surfaced roads & highway conditions. This position gives greater fuel economy, quietest ride and least tire wear.
4H: All four wheels are driven at 1:1 speed ratio. This mode provides additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces such as ice, snow, gravel, sand and dry pavement. Front and rear axles are locked together in this mode which forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
N: : Used only for towing in case of flat tyres or breakdown. (Vehicle equipped with automatic transmission to be towed strictly in N mode of transfer case)
Accidents may happen if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both the front and rear axle from the powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the automatic transmission is in PARK (or manual transmission is in gear). The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
4L: Use this mode for maximum pulling power and traction. Use the 4L position for climbing or descending steep hills, off-road driving, hard pulling in sand, mud or deep snow. Driving in the 4L position on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to driveline components. Take care not to over rev the engine and do not exceed 40 kmph when driving in this mode. When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed is considerably higher than that of the 4H position at a given road speed. Do not exceed 30kmph.
Exceeding 25 mph (40 km/h) while the transfer case is engaged in 4L may result in an engine overspeed condition and engine damage
Because the four-wheel drive provides improved traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds.
•  Do not believe than you can go faster than road conditions permit
•  Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain forward motion
•  Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost. You will not be able to stop or control your vehicle
•  Braking performance is dramatically reduced in wet/icy/slippery conditions. Avoid abrupt downshifts on slippery roads, engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control resulting in an accident
9.10.2 Shifting Procedure
Graphic
Shifting Between 2H and 4H
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the vehicle stopped or in motion (speed less than 4-5Kmph). If the vehicle is in motion, release the accelerator pedal and maintain very low speed until transfer case is completely engaged.
Never operate the 4WD shifter lever if the wheels are slipping. Stop the slipping or spinning before operating the shifter
If transfer case is not properly engaged, whine noise may come from driveline. This is because mating teeth not being properly aligned/engaged. In that case, stop the vehicle and start driving again. To shift from 4H to 2H, move the selector lever to the 2H position. Vehicle may needs to be stopped for completely for proper disengaging from 4WH/4WL.
To Shift from 4H to 4L (also for in between N mode):
1. When the vehicle speed is 3 to 5 kmph, shift an automatic transmission in to NEUTRAL (N), or press the clutch pedal on a manual tranmission and shift the transfer case lever firmly to 4L.
2. Push down the 4WD shifter knob and shift the transfer case lever to the N Position, release the knob and then shift to 4L position (Do not pause with the transfer case in N (Neutral).
3. Once the shift is completed, Press brake to stop vehicle and place the automatic transmission in to DRIVE or release the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
Shifting into or out of 4L with the vehicle completely stopped, difficulty may occur due to the mating teeth not being properly aligned. Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur. The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling at 3 to 5 kmph
Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle moving faster than 5 kmph
To Shift from 4L to 4H (also for in between N mode):
1. When the vehicle speed is 3 to 5 kmph, shift an automatic transmission into NEUTRAL (N), or press the clutch pedal on a manual transmission and shift the transfer case lever firmly to 4H
2. Shift the transfer case lever to the N position, push down the 4WD shifter knob and shift to 4H, release the knob (Do not pause with the transfer case in N (Neutral).
3. Once the shift is completed, Press brake to stop vehicle and place the automatic transmission into DRIVE or release the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
•  In heavy snow or when pulling a load, or for additional control at slower speeds, select a low gear and/or shift the transfer case to the 4L range.
•  Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost
•  Avoid abrupt gear shifts on slippery roads, engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control
9.10.3 Do’s and Don’ts
Do’s:
•  While shifting between 2H-4H-2H, it is a good practice to stop the vehicle and then shift the transfer case lever
•  While shifting from 4H to N and N to 4H, Shifter knob should be pressed down in order to avoid damage to the shift system
•  Learn to use the power band.
•  4-Low (4L) is recommended for soft and boggy conditions, while 4-High (4H) may be used in places where speed may be required. For example – Sand
•  Always use 4L to descent steep slopes to take maximum advantage of engine braking
While ascending or descending hills, always be parallel to the slope to ensure maximum stability of the vehicle
Don’ts:
Avoid taking the engine to the redline (maximum rpm). It’s not only inefficient but it also means you’re not getting the maximum power from the engine
Never half-clutch in off-road. Make it a practice to use it only to change gears. This will prolong clutch life and is also safer in off-road situations as you can utilize maximum engine braking
Do not drive with 4WD engaged (4H, 4L) on the tarmac road to avoid damage to the gearbox. Vehicle is having a part-time 4WD and is not meant to be driven in 4WD on the tarmac road
Do not press the clutch while descending steep hills as you may lose control of the vehicle. Always descend in-gear
Do not drive with 4WD on hard surfaced roads. This may lead to difficulty in shifting from 4WD. Incase need to release 4WD, drive the vehicle in reverse direction to some distance.
9.10.4 Electronic Locking Differential (ELD) (If equipped)
The electronic locking differential (ELD) is an electronically activated mechanism that locks the differential, causing both rear wheels to turn at the same speed. This feature provides additional traction when your vehicle is stuck on slippery surfaces. You can activate the ELD using a dashboard-mounted switch within the specified operating speed range. The ELD disengages automatically when the vehicle speed exceeds a set value and re-engages when the speed drops below that value. It also engages based on certain selected drive modes.
For optimal performance, engage the ELD before entering challenging terrains where wheel spin is likely. If you encounter wheel spin, bring the wheel speed to zero and activate the ELD. Note that in sand or mud modes, the ELD engages automatically. The ELD is designed for use in mud, rocks, sand, or other off-road conditions where maximum traction is required.
Recommended to disengage the ELD as soon as you are no longer on slippery terrain. Do not use the ELD on highway surfaces and during turns.
Continuous use on hard surfaces or in ghat sections can cause transmission wind-up and tire wear.
The electronic locking differential (ELD) is intended for off-road use only and should not be used on paved or sealed surfaces. Using the ELD on dry pavement can lead to increased tire wear, noise, and vibration.
ELD Manual Activation
Start the engine and recommend to maintain vehicle idling.
Engage 4WDL or 4WDH
ITA (Intelligent Turn Assist) /SCA (Smart Crawl Assist) should be in OFF
Press the ELD switch located in the center fascia switch bank.
Graphic
An LED tell-tale on the cluster illuminates to indicate the system is activated. Once the indicator light is on, the ELD is engaged.
ELD Automatic Activation
ELD will automatically get activated when Mud/Sand drive modes in 4WD are selected.
ELD Deactivation
Press the ELD switch (or)
Dis-engage 4WDL or 4WDH (or)
Activate ITA/SCA (or)
Vehicle Speed more than 40 kmph
Refer to the following table for the speeds at which the electronic locking differential turns on and off. It also engages automatically based on certain selected drive modes.
Terrain Modes (4WD)
Maximum Engagement Speed  
Automatic Disengage Speed  
Automatic Re-Engagement Speed  
4L
30 kmph
40 kmph
30 kmph
4H
30 kmph
40 kmph
30 kmph
Snow
30 kmph
40 kmph
30 kmph
Mud / Sand*
30 kmph
40 kmph
30 kmph
* - Automatically engages when these drive modes are selected. You can manually override the automatic engagement by pressing the electronic locking differential switch.
The Intelligent Turn Assist (ITA) and Smart Crawl Assist (SCA) systems can take control of the electronic locking differential and disable it during driving maneuvers when necessary.
For the protection of the system, the ELD will only activate based on certain boundary conditions and speeds. It is recommended to engage and disengage the ELD while the vehicle is moving in a straight line at slow speeds.
If the electronic locking differential has difficulty disengaging, release the accelerator pedal and turn the steering wheel in the opposite direction while rolling.
The Electronic Locking Differential (ELD) should not be used on-road or sealed surfaces, as it can cause excessive noise, vibration, and increased tire wear.
If the tell-tale does not come on or turns off while driving, follow the instructions on the cluster display.
If the system malfunctions, an alert message 'Locker needs Service Attention' will appear on the instrument cluster. Please see your authorized Mahindra dealer for assistance.
Operating ELD With a Spare or Mismatched Tyres
On vehicles equipped with an ELD, the size of the spare tire can affect the system's performance. Significant differences between the two rear tires may limit ELD functionality. If the electronic locking differential has difficulty disengaging, release the accelerator pedal to reverse torque and turn the steering wheel in the opposite direction while rolling. It is recommended to engage and disengage the ELD at a stop when the spare is mounted on the rear axle.
9.11 Drive Mode with Terrain Assist System (If equipped)
Use any of the following methods to activate Drive mode with Terrain Assist System.
Through Center Fascia Switch Bank
TFT Press Drive mode hard switch on center fascia switch bank
Graphic
To open the Drive mode page on the Instrument cluster screen.
Each subsequent press of the Drive Mode hard switch will change the mode in cluster screen.
Graphic
If there is no press for few seconds between the modes, the last selected mode activated message will be displayed on the cluster as below.
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
 
Also selected mode name displayed bottom of the cluster screen.
Graphic
Digital
Through Center Fascia Switch Bank
Press the Drive Mode hard switch on the center fascia switch bank.
Graphic
To open the Drive Mode page on the Infotainment screen.
Each subsequent press of the Drive Mode hard switch will change the mode in infotainment screen.
Graphic
If there is no press for few seconds between the modes, the last selected mode activated message will be displayed on the infotainment screen.
Through Infotainment Home Screen
Swiping down the Infotainment Access drawer screen as shown in the image below.
Graphic
Then, Press the Drive Mode soft switch in the Infotainment screen.
Graphic
To open the Drive Mode page on the Infotainment Screen.
Then Select the required Drive mode in the Infotainment Screen.
Graphic
Based on the selection, the selected mode activated message will be displayed on the infotainment screen.
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
 
Also selected mode name displayed bottom of the cluster screen.
Graphic
Drive modes can be engaged either through piano switches on the center fascia or via selection of the infotainment system, depending on the vehicle variant.
Drive Mode with Terrain Assist System is a quick and easy way to change driving style and adapt your vehicle to different on-road conditions. By selecting the required mode, you can instantly adjust the driving dynamics and make your vehicle adapt to different on-road conditions, all on the go. The system is incredibly easy to use, simply select your choice of mode and experience 5 different vehicles in one.
You can select from multiple drive mode options at any time during your drive, allowing you to switch to the perfect mode when the situation calls for it. Whether you're seeking a relaxed commute or a sporty back roads adventure, Drive Mode with Terrain Assist System enables you to perfectly tailor your vehicle to your unique driving style.
Drive Mode with Terrain Assist System essentially offers you the Driver a Drive Experience of 5 different cars in one car.
•  ZIP Mode mode is the default mode in the Drive Mode with Terrain Assist system. You can choose ZIP mode to experience a true SUV drive that embodies the essence of the Mahindra SUV experience. This mode is set as the default for an authentic driving experience.
Graphic
Cruise Control and Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) are functional only in ZIP Mode.
•  You can choose ZOOM Mode for an adrenaline rush. In this mode, engine power, gear shifts, and braking all work together to provide an exhilarating and thrilling driving experience.
Graphic
The Engine Stop Start (ESS) System is functional only in ZIP and Zoom Mode.
When the vehicle is in ZOOM mode and the user attempts to activate Cruise Control or Adaptive Cruise Control, the system will automatically switch to ZIP mode to enable these features.
•  You can choose SNOW Mode for improved vehicle stability in low-traction conditions, ensuring better control and safety on snowy or icy roads.
Graphic
•  You can choose MUD Mode to ensure maximum torque availability, providing optimal traction and control in muddy conditions.
Graphic
•  You can choose SAND Mode to maintain the vehicle's momentum on soft ground, ensuring smooth and consistent movement.
Graphic
Drive Modes with Terrain Assist System changes vehicle handling, dynamics and entire Drive Feel at a touch of an icon. This essentially enables Driver to experience multiple calibrations seamlessly.
Driving modes alters
1. Sensitivity of Accelerator pedal along with engine power delivery
2. Gear shift patterns
3. Steering effort
4. TCS Control
Based on the mode selected driving
ZIP Mode: ZIP Mode offers regular, everyday performance, ensuring that the car runs like a true Mahindra, making it ideal for day-to-day use. The vehicle will default to ZIP mode every time the ignition is turned on, providing a consistent and reliable driving experience.
ZOOM Mode: This mode is for a more spirited driving. ZOOM mode is offered to make the car more fun, as it produces more engaging and potent ride-quality. In this mode, accelerator will become more responsive, i.e. the car accelerates more readily. The steering gets heavier and Gear shifts are delayed to get a sporty performance.
Snow Mode: This mode improves the overall traction of the vehicle, making it suitable for driving on surfaces covered with snow, ice, water, grass, or gravel.
Graphic
ESC OFF lamp will be ON in this mode
For automatic transmission vehicles:
•  When in Snow mode, The vehicle will automatically launch in 2nd gear if the TGS lever is in Auto mode.
•  The driver can manually select 2nd gear to launch the vehicle using the TGS lever in Manual mode.
•  In this mode, early upshifting of gears and late downshifting is normal and characteristic of the driving experience.
In snowy conditions, it's advisable to avoid strong inputs such as sudden acceleration or sharp braking.
Mud Mode : This mode provides the best traction for slippery road conditions, making it ideal for driving on surfaces covered with mud.
Graphic
ESC OFF lamp will be ON in this mode
For automatic transmission vehicles:
In this mode, it's typical for gear shifts to occur later during acceleration (late upshifts) and earlier during deceleration (early downshifts). This helps optimize traction and control in challenging driving conditions.
Sand Mode: This mode ensures the vehicle maintains its momentum to keep moving on soft ground, making it suitable for driving on surfaces covered with sand
Graphic
ESC OFF lamp will be ON in this mode
For automatic transmission vehicles:
In this mode, it's typical for gear shifts to occur later during acceleration (late upshifts) and earlier during deceleration (early downshifts). This helps optimize traction and control in challenging driving conditions.
In sandy terrain, it's important to maintain vehicle momentum, especially when navigating up dunes. Avoid making sharp steering inputs to prevent the wheels from digging into the sand, which can compromise traction and control. These practices help ensure a smoother and safer driving experience in such challenging conditions.
Once you exit sandy areas, it's important to reinflate your tires to the recommended pressure promptly. Driving at high speeds on underinflated tires can compromise vehicle safety. If you don't have access to an air pump immediately, proceed at low speeds and exercise caution until you can reinflate your tires properly. This ensures optimal vehicle performance and safety on non-sandy surfaces.
Graphic
Once any of the modes is selected, we would have an ALERT message in cluster. Based on the mode selected the Alert message would vary. for
ZIP: ZIP MODE ACTIVATED
MUD: MUD MODE ACTIVATED
ZOOM: ZOOM MODE ACTIVATED
SAND: SAND MODE ACTIVATED
SNOW: SNOW MODE ACTIVATED
 
Once selected we would have a permanent indication in the CLUSTER. Also, the skin of the cluster also changes as per the mode.
Few things to note
1. When in Cruise control or Adaptive cruise control Vehicle will always be defaulted to ZIP MODE
2. ON every IGNITION Cycle, vehicle will always start in ZIP MODE
3. IN case of any faults at vehicle level , that doesn't allow the vehicle to be in the mode of choice Customer is alerted by an alert message – “DRIVE MODE INHIBITED” in Infotainment screen and the Mode choice in the Cluster would be Blank.
9.12 Micro Hybrid Technology (Engine Stop/Start System) – MT/AT (If equipped)
Engine Stop/Start system automatically “stops” and “starts” the engine when idle at signals or long traffic jams. This in turn gives a better fuel efficiency.
9.12.1 Engine Stop/Start System Overview
MT Overview
Graphic
AT Overview
Graphic
Graphic
Engine Stop/Start system is activated/de-activated by the Engine Stop/Start button in the driver side switch bank. The LED on the button indicates the status of the ESS system.
The ESS will be enabled by default while the ignition ON. If ESS turns off by switch, it will automatically reactivate after the ignition is reset.
How does the Engine Stop/Start System Work?
Let’s take a simple example of driving in traffic conditions within your city. Assume that your vehicle has stopped at a traffic junction due to a red signal. The following steps illustrate how the system functions:
•  The vehicle has come to a halt at a traffic signal, is in the neutral gear and the clutch pedal is released (For MT)
•  The vehicle has come to a halt at a traffic signal, is in the “D” mode and the brake pedal is pressed (For AT)
•  The Engine Stop/Start lamp in the cluster will blink indicating that the engine is going to stop shortly. The engine will shut down automatically after a specific time period
•  The Engine Stop/Start lamp will illuminate in the instrument cluster indicating the engine was stopped by the “Engine Stop/Start” System
•  Once the signal turns green, press the clutch pedal and the engine starts immediately (For MT)
•  Once the signal turns green, release the brake pedal and the engine starts immediately (For AT)
•  The indicator in the cluster goes OFF indicating that the engine has started again and you are ready to drive on
For auto stop to happen, the following all conditions are to be met:
•  Engine Stop/Start system is in active condition by default and should not be turned off using the selection switch
•  Bonnet is fully closed
•  In the current ignition cycle, the vehicle has crossed 7 kmph at least once
•  Current status of the engine is idling
•  Vehicle speed is zero
•  Accelerator pedal and clutch pedal are fully released (For MT)
•  Brake pedal is fully pressed (For AT)
•  Vehicle battery should be in healthy condition
•  Engine is warm (Engine coolant temperature is between 25 degree C and 100 degree C). This is an extra precaution to ensure safe working of the engine
•  Fuel temperature is less than 60 degree C (Only for Diesel Variant)
•  Gear in neutral (For MT)
•  Gear shift lever in “D” Mode (For AT) and vehicle should not be in slope
•  DPF REGEN should not be in active state (Only for Diesel Variant)
•  Vehicle should not have DEF error codes E14, E24 & E34 (Only for Diesel Variants)
•  AT Warning telltale in OFF condition (For AT)
•  OBD and CHECK ENGINE telltale in OFF condition
For auto start to happen, the following conditions are to be met: (For MT)
•  Gear lever is in the neutral position, Clutch pedal is fully pressed
For auto start to happen, Any one of the following conditions are to be met: (For AT)
•  Shift lever is moved out of “D” Mode (For AT)
•  Brake pedal is fully released
•  Turn the steering wheel either side by > 30 deg.
Engine auto stop conditions should be remains same to start the engine again by ESS system.
ESS will be operational when the engine coolant temperature reaches a minimum operating range.
9.12.2 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)
1. What is the advantage of the system?
The Engine Stop/Start System aids in attaining better fuel efficiency on your vehicle and thus reducing your running costs. However, the mileage improvement will depend upon various parameters such as prevailing traffic, driving patterns, etc.
2. What are the other advantages of the system?
•  Since the engine is switched off during traffic signals / jams, considerable amount of CO2 release in the atmosphere is avoided. This reduces global warming and thus provides us with a cleaner atmosphere to live
•  Ability to start the engine by pressing the clutch pedal
•  Reduces noise pollution at traffic signals
3. Is it possible to start the engine through the clutch pedal for the first time?
No, the engine can be cranked only with the ignition key for the first time. If the engine is stopped automatically by the system, only then it is possible to start the engine through clutch pedal in MT.
4. How to activate/deactivate the system?
The system is activated by default during every ignition cycle. The LED indication on the Engine Stop/Start switch indicates the status of the system. The system can be turned OFF or back ON using the Engine Stop/Start switch.
5. Whether the system will get activated as soon as the engine is started the first time with the ignition key?
No, the Engine Stop/Start system can be activated only by the Engine Stop/Start switch, provided all listed conditions (in the previous section) are met. This is to ensure better performance of the engine in terms of fuel economy and durability.
6. What is to be done, if I don’t want the system to stop my engine at traffic signals/jams?
The system can be turned OFF by the Engine Stop/Start button in the central bezel switch bank.
7. Whether the A/C will function, if the engine is switched off?
No, the A/C will not work. However, the blower will be in operation when the ignition is ON.
8. What will happen if I keep the clutch continuously pressed at traffic signals/jams?
The system will not stop the engine if the clutch is continuously pressed since it indicates the driver’s intention of moving the vehicle immediately.
9. When the battery charge is low, whether the engine will be switched off?
If the battery charge drops below a certain threshold level, the system will not stop the engine so as to preserve the battery from further draining.
10. Whether I will be able to operate the engine with the normal ignition key?
Yes, normal operation with the ignition key is always possible.
11. Whether the vehicle will start (or) stop in gear for MT?
The vehicle will not start or stop automatically in gear to ensure safety. It will do so only in the neutral position of the gear lever.
12. Whether the system will stop my engine in moving traffic?
No, the engine will be stopped only when the vehicle speed is zero.
13. Whether the audio system will be switched OFF, when the engine shuts down?
No, the audio system will not be switched OFF and you can continue to enjoy the music.
14. Whether the engine will re-crank whenever the clutch pedal is pressed in MT?
No, when the engine is running, the starter motor will not attempt to re-crank.
15. If any component involved in the system fails, what will happen?
The system has a built-in diagnostic module which understands the failure and immediately goes to bypass mode. In the bypass mode, the engine can be turned ON and OFF by ignition key as usual.
9.13 Fuel-BS VI
Graphic
For Diesel Variant -Use commercially available vehicular Ultra-low Sulfur Highway Diesel that meets the BIS standard (IS 1460; 2017 BS VI specification or equivalent). Information on diesel quality can normally be found in the fuel pump.
Please contact filling station personnel in case labels in the pump cannot be found. If the diesel fuel with high sulfur content (more than 10 PPM) and unspecified additives are used, it can cause the DPF system damage and emission warranty issues.
For Petrol Variant - Use only commercially available Petrol fuel conforming to IS 2796: 2017 BS-VI specification or equivalent and / or E20 fuel confirming to IS17021;2018 specification. In either case of fuel, minimum Research Octane Number (RON) to be 95. Information on Petrol quality can normally be found in the fuel pump. Please contact filling station personnel in case labels in the pump cannot be found.
Graphic
Do not fill the fuel tank or mix the fuel with alcohol based fuels and kerosene, etc. This will damage the engine, fuel and exhaust system components.
In Petrol vehicles fuel overfilling is not recommended, beyond the first auto-cut off or upto filler neck. It may harm the engine performance, Parts and emission warranty.
If you have accidentally filled the fuel tank with incorrect or non- approved fuel, do not start the vehicle. Contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer to have the fuel system drained completely.
Petrol/Diesel is highly flammable and poisonous. It burns violently and can cause serious injury. Never allow sparks, flames or smoking materials near petrol/Diesel. Turn OFF the engine before refuelling. Whenever you are around petrol/Diesel extingush all smoking materials.
During freezing weather if the fuel is not winterized or is insufficiently winterized, waxing/gelling may take place in the fuel, leading to interruption in fuel supply to the engine. For smooth functioning and reliable operation of the engine during cold weather conditions, use winterized ULSD which is available at the filling stations during winter months. Check with your fuel retailer for further details.
Avoid inhaling fuel vapors and any skin or clothing contact. Direct skin contact with fuel or the inhalation of fuel vapor may affect your health.
It is recommended to maintaining a minimum of 10 liters of fuel in the fuel tank. Driving the vehicle till the fuel tank is empty is not recommended. Always have sufficient fuel in the tank. Check the fuel level prior to starting your journey.
Never carry fuel in separate containers in the vehicle, it is dangerous and may lead to an inadvertent fuel leak or spillage.
9.14 Tips for Better Fuel Economy
Give due consideration to the points listed below for better performance of vehicle and enhancement of fuel economy.
•  Smooth, moderate operation will yield savings in fuel
•  Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel economy
•  Ensure that the parking brake is fully released
•  Idling for long periods of time will waste fuel
•  Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop
•  Sudden or hard accelerations reduce fuel economy
•  Slow down gradually
•  Drive at moderate speeds
•  Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy
•  The air conditioner may reduce fuel economy
•  Warming up a vehicle in neutral on cold mornings is not required and may reduce fuel economy
•  While idling put the gear shift lever in the neutral position
•  Resting your foot on the clutch pedal while driving will reduce fuel economy
•  Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving
•  Keep tires properly inflated. It is recommended to check your tire pressure in the morning when the tyre is cold
•  Use recommended engine oil. Refer to the Maintenance Section for specifications and capacities
•  Replace the fuel filter and air filter at the recommended intervals
•  Shift gears at the recommended speeds and rpm bands only. Refer to the gear shifting speed table for further details
•  Control the maximum speed between 90 to 100 kmph in 6th gear to achieve the best fuel efficiency
•  Follow the recommended maintenance schedule and perform the owner maintenance checks recommended
•  Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer will reduce fuel economy
•  Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy
•  Adding certain accessories to your vehicle may reduce fuel economy
•  Four-wheel-drive operation (if equipped) is less fuel efficient than two-wheel-drive operation
•  Driving on flat terrains offer improved fuel economy as compared to driving on hilly terrains
•  Close windows during high speed driving for better fuel economy
•  It is recommended to refuel in the mornings (cold weather condition)
9.14.1 How to Calculate Fuel Efficiency (Mileage)
1. Ensure recommended tire pressure is maintained
2. Refuel your vehicle till the fuel gun at the fuel station is auto-cut-off
3. Reset trip meter to zero
4. Drive at a moderate speed for a minimum distance of 150 km
5. Refuel at the same fuel station till the auto-cut-off mode
6. Assuming ‘a’ liters of fuel was filled and ‘b’ was the trip meter reading. Fuel Efficiency = b/a kmpl
7. We recommend that point no.2 and point no.5 should be done in cold conditions (In mornings)
9.15 Brakes
Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes in the front and either drum or disc brakes in the rear depending on the variant.
Disc brakes offer good braking capability and reduced stopping distance. Wet brake discs result in reduced braking efficiency. After a car wash or driving the vehicle through water, dab the brake pedal while driving to remove the film of water from the brake pads. Brake pads feature wear indicator. When the brake pad is worn, metallic squeal noise is heard indicating the pad wear. Have them replaced as soon as possible.
Driving with wet brakes is dangerous. Stopping distance increases considerably when braking.
Dry the brakes by driving at very slow speed and applying the brakes lightly until the brake performance becomes normal.
Even if the power assist (vacuum assistance) is completely lost, the brakes will still work. The brake pedal would be much harder than normal and the vehicle stopping / braking distance will be longer than usual.
Brake squeal occurs as a high frequency whistling noise usually at the end of the stop while pressing the brake pedal, squeal can occur from front or rear or from both ends. This is a normal condition caused by environmental factors such as cold, wet, snow, etc and vehicle usage pattern
Brake Creep-Groan occurs as a low-frequency (Kar-Kar) noise which occurs in AT vehicles when the vehicle is ON and D/R mode is selected and the brake pedal is released slowly to move the vehicle
9.15.1 Parking on a Hill/Incline
If you have to park facing uphill, select first gear and turn the front wheels away from the kerb. If you have to park facing downhill, select reverse gear and turn the front wheels towards the kerb. Always ensure the parking brake is engaged before leaving the vehicle.
While driving in a continuous down gradient at high speeds, always engage the appropriate gear to reduce aggressive and sustained brake usage. Aggressive and sustained brake usage can cause higher brake pad temperatures and fading.
9.15.2 Parking Brake - Manual (If equipped)
Graphic
To apply the parking brake, pull the park brake lever up as firmly as possible. When the parking brake is applied with the ignition ON, the brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates.
To release the parking brake, pull the parking brake lever up slightly, press the release button on the lever tip and lower the parking brake lever completely.
The brake warning lamp indicates only the parking brake status. It does not indicate the degree of brake application. Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and the gear shift lever is in gear. When parking on a hill you should apply the parking brake before shift lever in gear, since the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of gear.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving off. Failure to do so can lead to brake problems due to excessive heating of the rear brakes.
•  The parking brake should be adjusted as per recommended maintenance schedule
•  Always apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle, and be certain to leave the transmission engaged. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage, hit a bystander resulting in physical injury.
•  Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake or the gear shift lever. Do not leave the key in the ignition. A child could accidently move the vehicle leading to accidents
•  The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
Engaging the parking brake while the vehicle is in motion can cause the rear wheels to lock up. You could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident.
9.16 Electric Parking Brake -EPB (if equipped)
The EPB (Electronic Parking Brake) is a safety feature with enhanced comfort, the parking brakes are applied/released by simple switch operation.
The EPB system replaces the conventional manual parking brake which requires high effort to apply & release.
In addition to the switch based Apply, EPB also provides additional safety/comfort features like EPB auto apply, auto release, Auto vehicle hold, Controlled deceleration for parking, rear wheel un-locker and roll away re-clamp.
9.16.1 Applying EPB
Graphic
Park the vehicle in a safe place and pull up the EPB switch.
Graphic
The parking brake warning lamp on the instrument cluster and the red Illumination on the EPB switch is turned on, indicating that the parking brake is applied.
9.16.2 Releasing EPB
Graphic
Press down the EPB switch with the brake pedal depressed.
Graphic
The parking brake warning lamp on the instrument cluster and the red Illumination on the EPB switch is turned off, indicating that the parking brake is released.
9.16.3 AUTO Apply EPB
For added comfort and for safety reasons the EPB will get automatically applied in the following conditions.
1. Ignition is turned Off.
2. AT vehicle –gear shifted to Park
3. Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) in Active state and Driver door open.
4. Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) in Active state and Driver seat belt unbuckled.
5. Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) in Active state and AVH switch pressed to release AVH Active state.
6. Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) in active state continuously for more than 5 minutes
7. Auto vehicle hold (AVH) active and engine turned OFF by engine start stop feature
How to override EPB Auto Apply – MT
If in any case, EPB auto apply feature needs to be overridden, it can be achieved by a simple switch-based operation, which is mentioned below:
1. Stop the vehicle
2. Push and hold EPB switch in release position
3. Holding the EPB switch in released position, turn the ignition OFF
4. This prevents EPB from automatically getting applied
In any case, where the vehicle needs to be moved in ignition OFF condition, EPB auto apply override feature to be utlilized.
In case of any Switch related failure when vehicle in standstill, the EPB Auto release feature must be used to release EPB, if EPB Auto release feature doesn’t work, contact Service center in such cases to release the EPB
How to override EPB Auto Apply – AT
EPB manual override feature can be used to push the vehicle after turning the ignition OFF or in any breakdown condition.
•  Position TGS lever in neutral (N).
•  Push and hold the EPB switch, simultaneously press and hold the start stop button (SSB) till ignition is turned OFF.
•  This operation prevents EPB auto apply and EPB will be in disengaged state.
In this case, vehicle remains in accessory state (SSB LED in amber color) before completely getting turned OFF, for 30 seconds or till driver door is opened.
9.16.4 AUTO Releasing EPB/Drive Away
For Automatic Transmission Vehicles (AT)
1. Close the driver door and fasten the driver seat belt.
2. Shift the gear selector lever to the D / M or R position
3. Release the brake pedal and then depress the accelerator pedal slowly.
4. The EPB is released automatically, thus enabling forward or backward movement of the vehicle.
5. The red Illumination on the EPB switch and the brake tell-tale on cluster is turned off, indicating that the parking brake is released.
For Manual Transmission Vehicles (MT)
1. Close the driver door and fasten the driver seat belt.
2. Shift the gear to forward or reverse gear.
3. Then slowly release the clutch pedal and depress the Accelerator pedal to drive away.
4. The EPB is released automatically, thus enabling forward or backward movement of the vehicle.
5. The red Illumination on the EPB switch and the brake tell-tale on cluster is turned off, indicating that the parking brake is released.
The EPB AUTO release function will not be activated if driver door is not closed or if the driver seat belt is not fastened. The driver will get message on cluster to ensure the same.
If the EPB is being released using the accelerator pedal , be cautious if the vehicle is parked uphill. In this scenario if an aggressive accelerator pedal input is given, it can also result in wheel spin. The wheel spin will cause ESC to intervene.
9.16.5 EPB Warning Lamp / Parking Brake Warning Lamp
Graphic
This tell-tale is turned ON in the cluster when EPB is applied properly.
Graphic
This tell-tale is turned ON in the cluster when there is a malfunction in the EPB system.
If the warning lamp is turned on, have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Mahindra Dealer or Mahindra Authorized Service Centre
Do’s
Driving Conditions
•  For EPB Auto release and Drive Away always wear driver seat belt and ensure that the driver door is closed
•  In MT vehicles, drive away with clutch alone modulation not possible, thus always modulate the clutch pedal and accelerator pedal for effective drive away.
Don’ts
Driving Conditions
•  If the EPB Malfunction lamp is ON and the brake is engaged. Do not drive.
•  Avoid using EPB after doing water wading. Please get the vehicle checked in workshop.
Servicing: Do not get your vehicle serviced at an unauthorized service center.
•  The EPB can also be used in cases of emergency braking. Release the accelerator and Pull and hold the EPB button until your vehicle comes to standstill and EPB gets applied. This should be done only in emergency condition and not as a regular action.
•  The braking process is interrupted when the EPB button is released or the accelerator pedal is actuated in dynamic condition
•  The EPB AUTO release function will not be activated when the driver door or the seat belt is not fastened.
•  Motor noise can be heard during the EPB operation, this is normal behavior.
•  If the EPB warning lamp stays on, have the vehicle serviced at a Mahindra Dealer or Mahindra Authorised Service Centre.
•  Do not let children or other people who are not familiar with the EPB system operate the EPB switch. There is a danger of accidents depending on the parking/stationary state of the vehicle.
•  If you hear noises or smell a burnt odor from the related components after using the EPB emergency mode, have the vehicle checked and serviced
9.17 Electric Parking Brake (EPB) Alert
Display Operating Conditions
Graphic
This message is displayed on the Cluster when the EPB switch is released without depressing the brake pedal to deactivate EPB.
Graphic
This message is displayed on the Cluster in the following conditions:
1. When the accelerator pedal is depressed to auto release EPB, with EPB Applied and driver door open/driver seat belt unbuckled.
2. When the AVH switch is depressed to activate AVH, with driver door open/driver seat belt unbuckled.
9.18 Hazard on Panic Braking
Hazard lamps are turned ON during panic braking for 5 seconds when the following conditions are met:
•  Ignition is ON
•  Vehicle speed is greater than 50 kmph
•  Panic/sudden brake is applied and high deceleration rate is sensed
9.19 Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS)
Graphic
The Anti-lock Braking System (also called as ABS) is designed to help prevent lock-up of the wheels and stable stopping of vehicle during a sudden, panic emergency braking or braking on slippery road surfaces.
The ABS system takes input from wheel speed sensors and brake pedal switch to control the brake fluid pressures at the wheels to avoid wheel lock-up. It allows vehicle to be steered during braking.
The minimum speed for ABS to function is 12 kmph. ABS is activated only during wheel lock conditions where ABS takes over and prevents wheel lock. During the ABS operation, a slight pulsation may be felt in the brake pedal to indicate ABS is active. You may also hear motor noise from the engine compartment. It is recommended to hold the brake pedal firmly while the ABS is active rather than pumping the brake pedal or removing foot off the pedal in panic.
Depressing the brake pedal on slippery road surfaces as on a manhole cover, a steel plate at a construction site, a joint in a bridge, etc. on a rainy day, tends to activate the anti-lock braking system. The ABS warning lamp lights up when you switch the ignition ON and turns OFF after a few seconds. If the ABS warning lamp does not go out or if it comes ON while driving, it means there is a fault in the ABS system. In both cases, the normal braking system remains active, exactly as on a vehicle without ABS.
The vehicle should be examined as soon as possible by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer. The Anti-lock braking system, It is designed to shorten the stopping distance: Always drive at a moderate speed and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. The stopping distance may be longer in the following cases:
•  Driving on rough, gravel or snow covered roads.
•  Driving with tyre chains installed.
•  Driving over steps such as the joints on the road.
•  Driving on roads where the road surface is pitted or differences in surface height.
Graphic
The ABS warning lamp lights up when you switch ON the ignition and should turn OFF after a few seconds. If the ABS warning lamp does not turn OFF or if it turns ON while driving, it means there is a fault in the ABS system. In both cases, the normal braking system remains active, exactly as on a vehicle without ABS. The vehicle should be examined as soon as possible by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
Do not overestimate the Anti-lock Brake System: Although the Anti-lock Brake System assists in providing vehicle control, it is still important to drive with all due care and maintain a moderate speed and safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. There are limits to the vehicle stability and effectiveness of steering wheel operation even with ABS active. If tyre grip performance exceeds its capability, or if hydroplaning occurs during high speed driving in the rain or water logged roads, the Anti-lock Brake System will not assist with vehicle control.
9.20 Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
EBD, as a subsystem of the ABS system, controls the effective adhesion utilisation of the rear wheels. EBD aids in distributing the brake forces more evenly leading to better vehicle stability during braking.
Typically, the front end carries more weight and EBD distributes less braking pressure to the rear brakes avoiding a lock up/skid.
For example, under light loads EBD applies less effort to the rear brakes and for heavy loads it allows full braking effort to the rear wheels.
A fault with EBD is indicated by illumination of the brake as well as ABS warning lamps. The vehicle should be examined as soon as possible by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
Symbol
Warning Lamp/Tell Tale
Action/Remarks
EBD Malfunction Telltale
Graphic
Graphic
Both ABS and Parking brake Telltale lamp will be ON incase of EBD malfunction.
9.21 Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESC corrects for over-steering and under-steering behavior of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel automatically. Engine power may also be reduced or AT gears may be downshifted to assist in counteracting the condition of over-steer or under-steer and help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
ESC uses steering angle sensor and YAW rate sensor to determine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, the ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of over-steer or under-steer.
Over-steer - When the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Under-steer - When the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The ESC cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skilful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardise the user’s safety or the safety of others.
9.21.1 ESC ON
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in active mode. This mode should be used for most driving conditions.
Graphic
When the ESC is in operation, ESC indicator lamp blinks in the instrument cluster.
When the ESC is operating, you can feel a slight pulsation in the vehicle. This is only the effect of brake control and indicates nothing unusual.
When moving out of the mud or slippery road, accelerator response may be different because ESC system controls the engine RPM to come out of this slippery road condition. This is normal.
9.21.2 ESC OFF
Graphic
In some driving conditions, to maximise traction, it may be beneficial to de-activate ESC.
Such conditions are:
•  To start in deep snow or on a loose surface
•  Driving in deep sand
•  Driving through deep mud etc.
Graphic
To de-activate ESC, press ESC OFF button on the driver side switch bank. Once ESC OFF mode is selected, a warning indicator illuminates in the instrument cluster.
Press ESC OFF button again to activate ESC function.
ESC and AEBS OFF (If equipped)
ESC
AEBS
Graphic
Graphic
To de-activate ESC, press and hold ESC OFF button on the driver side switch bank for 5 seconds. Once ESC OFF mode is selected ESC and AEBS function will be deactivated. A warning indicator illuminates in the instrument cluster.
Press ESC OFF button again to activate ESC and AEBS functions.
ESC only can not be de activated, if AEBS is equipped.
Mahindra recommends that ESC be operational in all normal driving conditions.
When ESC is in OFF mode, other functions like HHC (Hill Hold Control) HBA (Hydraulic Brake Assist), HDC (Hill Descent Control), DTC (Drag Torque Control), ROM (Roll Over Mitigation) will be in working mode.
However, for safety reasons, if the ESC system detects that the vehicle is going into a unstable condition, ESC will be automatically activated on depressing the brake pedal
ESC, by default, will be in ON condition for every ignition cycle.
Graphic
If the ESC indicator blinks while driving, it indicates that ESC is working. If this indicator illuminates continuously, it indicates a malfunction in the ESC system. Drive carefully to the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer and get the ESC system checked.
9.22 Traction Control System (TCS)
TCS function is part of Electronic Stability Control (ESC). It is intended to enhance the stability & acceleration when wheel spin is occurred. It monitors the speed sensor input on each wheels and uses brakes or engine torque control to provide optimum tractive force on driven wheels during acceleration in slippery surfaces. A feature of TCS, Braking Traction Control (BTC), functions similar to the locking differential and controls the wheel spin across driven axle. If more than one wheel on driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake on spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be transferred to the wheel that is not spinning. BTC remains enabled even in ESC off mode. To effectively use the BTC system the driver should gradually accelerate in a situation where 'wheel slip' is occurring. This will allow the sensors to determine the need to apply the brake to the slipping wheels.
The ESC system has two available operating modes in 2H & 4H modes. The system has one operating mode in 4L mode.
Graphic
2H and 4H Modes:
ESC ON : This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 2H & 4H range.
ESC OFF
This mode is entered by momentarily pushing the ESC OFF switch.
Graphic
When in “ESC OFF” mode, the TCS portion of ESC (except for Braking Traction Control described in TCS section) gets disabled and the “ESC OFF” indicator light turns ON. This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand and gravel in order to gain the traction.  In ESC OFF mode, the engine torque reduction and stability features are disabled. For speeds at or exceeding approximately 64 kmph, the ESC goes into normal “ESC On” mode automatically in order to maintain the vehicle stability. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF switch. This will restore the normal “ESC ON” mode of operation
When in ESC OFF mode, the  engine torque reduction feature TCS (except Braking Traction Control feature described in TCS section) gets disabled and enhanced vehicle stability features offered by ESC systems are disabled. In an emergency maneuver, the ESC stability functions like Vehicle Dynamics Control & Roll Over Mitigation will not engage to assist in maintaining stability. This mode is intended for Off-Road use only. ESC OFF indicator will be illuminated continuously in this mode.
4L Mode:
ESC OFF
Graphic
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4L mode. Whenever the vehicle is started in 4L range, or the transfer case is shifted from 2H or 4H or Neutral mode to 4L mode, the ESC system will be in this mode. In 4L mode, the ESC & TCS, except for the Braking Traction Control (BTC) feature described in TCS section are disabled. The “ESC OFF” indicator lamp will be illuminated continuously in this mode.
When in “ESC OFF” mode, the TCS portion of ESC (except for Braking Traction Control described in TCS section) gets disabled and the “ESC OFF” indicator light will be illuminated. This mode is intended to be used in ‘Off-Roading’ conditions in order to gain the traction.  In ESC OFF mode, the engine torque reduction and stability features are disabled, the ESC stability functions like Vehicle Dynamics Control & Roll Over Mitigation will not engage to assist in maintaining stability. ESC OFF indicator will be illuminated continuously in this mode.
9.23 Hill Descent Control (HDC)
Assists the driver to descend a steep hill (max. 50% inclination) by means of brake intervention limiting the vehicle speed is without driver's input.
During HDC, if the wheel slip becomes excessive, ABS will be activated automatically.
Graphic
HDC is a user-intended function. To activate, press HDC button on the center fascia switch bank. The LED on the button illuminates indicating the status. Press the button again to deactivate HDC.
During a descent, if the vehicle speed is more than the rated speeds (refer recommended shift speeds), HDC (if selected) automatically operates the brakes to slow the vehicle and maintain a speed relative to the selected gear and the accelerator pedal position.
HDC will also work in neutral gear, and maintains the vehicle rolling speed by operating brakes automatically. HDC will deactivate automatically, if the vehicle speed is exceeds approximately 60 kmph.
While HDC is controlling the vehicle speed, descent speeds can be varied using cruise control switches mounted on the steering wheel.
To decrease speed, press and hold “SET -” button. The vehicle speed at the point of switch release will become the new descent speed.
To increase, press and hold “SET +” button. The vehicle speed at the point of switch release will become the new descent speed. Alternatively, descent speeds can be adjusted by tapping the “SET _” or “SET +” buttons. Each press of the button will adjust the speed by approximately 0.5 kmph.
The descent speed increases only if the gradient is sufficiently steep to cause the vehicle to accelerate as the braking effect is reduced. On a shallow slope, pressing the “SET +” button may result in no speed increase.
If the brake pedal is depressed when HDC is active, HDC is overridden and the brakes will perform as normal (a pulsation might be felt through the brake pedal). If the brake pedal is then released, HDC will recommence operating, if necessary.
HDC system monitors the brake temperature continuously. If brake application is continuous and brake temperatures are too high, HDC deactivates automatically. This is to ensure that the brake pads are not worn due to continuous brake application.
HDC will also work in neutral gear, and maintain the vehicle rolling speed by operating brakes automatically. HDC will deactivate automatically. If the vehicle speed exceeds 60kmph.
9.24 Hill Hold Control (HHC)
Hill Hold Control with acceleration sensor identifies gradients and holds the vehicle for about three to four seconds after the brakes have been released in order to prevent the vehicle from accidentally rolling backwards during a hill start.
Imagine a situation where your vehicle is stopped on an uphill incline. If you release the brake while moving off, there are chances that your vehicle may roll back. HHC helps in such situations by holding the vehicle from rolling back.
HHC operation cannot be intervened. For HHC to work, clutch pedal must be in fully pressed condition and gear engaged.
HHC will only operate when the road gradient is >4% on both uphill (nose up with any forward gears selected) and downhill (nose down with reveres gear selected). Maximum gradient for HHC is 30%.
9.25 Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA)
The HBA function is designed to optimize the vehicles braking ability during emergency braking situations, the system detects a panic braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and generates an additional brake-force boost to the driver if required.
During a panic braking situation, the brake pressure is raised to the locking pressure. For the HBA to become active, the brake Pedal must be pressed throughout the braking maneuver, that is the brakes must not be pumped and released.
The HBA function gets deactivated, when the brake pedal is released thus do not release brake pressure unless braking is no longer needed
•  The HBA system cannot prevent collisions, the capabilities of an HBA equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could risk the user’s safety.
•  The Safety of the vehicles always lies in the hands of the driver, never rely on the HBA feature to prevent accidents.
9.26 Roll Over Mitigation (ROM)
Roll Over Mitigation system is a safety function which anticipates the wheel lift due to lateral forces. The ROM function analyses the rate of change of steering wheel angle and the wheel speed to determine any possible wheel lift, the system then applies appropriate brake and may also reduce the engine power to reduce the chances of wheel lift.
In any instance where physical limits of Long. and lateral tyre road grip are not exceeded, RMF reduces the lateral forces that will lead to a critical roll moment about the center of gravity.
Minimum Vehicle speed for ROM = 25 kmph
Maximum Vehicle speed for ROM = 120 kmph
•  Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur.
•  The ROM system cannot prevent all roll overs; thus ROM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.
9.27 Second Collision Mitigation System (SCM)
The SCM feature in the ESC system is an autonomous braking system which decreases the speed of the vehicle after the first collision by means of autonomous braking interventions. This reduces the risk of a subsequent crash due to uncontrolled vehicle movement.
For the Second Collision Mitigation feature to get activated, the following conditions must be met.
1. There must be a front collision detected with a certain severity, where airbags gets deployed
2. The impact speed must be greater than approx. 10 km/h.
3. The brakes, the ESC and other required electrical systems remain functional after impact.
4. The accelerator pedal must not be actuated.
9.28 Intelligent Turn Assist (ITA) - (If equipped)
Graphic
Intelligent Turn Assist (ITA) is a value-added feature that works with Terrain modes to reduce the turning radius during off-road trailing or on low-friction surfaces.
The ITA function can be activated via the switch on the driver-side switch bank when the following conditions are met:
ITA Activation Conditions: ITA will function when the steering is fully rotated either left or right and the vehicle speed is between 0 to 15 KMPH. The ITA feature will remain active for 15 seconds with the following conditions.
1. Doors Closed
5. Select Terrain mode (Snow or Sand or Mud)
2. Driver Seat Belt Buckled
6. Select Drive mode D or R
3. ELD should be Disabled condition
7. Release Parking Brake
4. Engage 4WL
8. Press the ITA switch
If the ELD is already activated, pressing the ITA switch will automatically deactivate the ELD. The ELD will be unavailable while the ITA function is selected.
If the vehicle is idle for more than 20 seconds, the ITA feature will deactivate automatically. To re-enable the ITA function, press the ITA switch again, ensuring all conditions are met.
The ITA feature works by braking the inner rear wheel. Using the ITA function on asphalt surfaces may cause extensive damage to the drivetrain and wheels.
9.29 Smart Crawl Assist (SCA) - (If equipped)
Smart Crawl Assist is a value-added feature that enhances safety and increases the off-road capabilities, including ascending and descending steep, challenging terrains, without the need for accelerator or brake pedal input.It allowas the customer to pull the vehicle if it gets stranded, and without getting a support vehicle with winch. While similar to Adaptive Cruise Control, this function operates between 2.5 KMPH and 28 KMPH. You can increase or decrease the speed using the "+" and "-" cruise control buttons on the steering keypad.
Graphic
We suggest that once stuck and getting the vehicle off, start with the default speed specially on sand. increase the set value gradually in mud .
To activate SCA, press the switch on the Driver Side Switch Bank. The following conditions must be met for activation:
SCA Activation Conditions
1. Doors Closed
5. Select Drive mode D or R
2. Driver Seat Belt Buckled
6. Release Parking Brake
3. Engage 4WL
7. Press the SCA switch
4. Select Terrain mode (Snow or Sand or Mud)
 
Upon pressing the Brake Pedal or Accelerator Pedal, SCA will become unavailable or deactivate automatically.
•  ITA and SCA functions can be activated together for enhanced off-road performance.
•  SCA and ELD functions can be activated together for enhanced off-road performance.
During functioning of the ITA and SCA systems, the noise generated by the ESP motor might be perceivable inside the passenger cabin. This noise is typically a normal operational characteristic and indicates that the systems are functioning.
10 STARTING AND DRIVING 2
10.1 Steering
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric power steering (EPS) / Hydraulic power steering (HPS).
EPS: There is no fluid reservoir to check or fill. EPS uses energy from the battery to decrease the driver's effort in steering the vehicle. The EPS system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces.
HPS: Power steering uses energy from the engine to decrease the driver's effort in steering the vehicle. The power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will provide mechanical steering capability to steer the vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may produce noise for a short amount of time. This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any way damage the steering system.
Continued operation with reduced power steering performance could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Have the vehicle serviced at specified intervals or whenever a power steering problem is noticed.
When driving in rough/off roads, hold the steering wheel rim, do not hold the wheel spokes. A sudden bump can jerk/ turn the wheel and injure your hand. This may also lead to loss of vehicle control.
EPS: The EPS warning light should only be illuminated with the ignition ON before starting the engine. If the warning light remains illuminated after the engine has been started, there will be no assistance from power steering. The vehicle may be driven using the mechanical steering system although it is not recommended as the effort to turn the steering wheel will be significantly high. In this case, contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately.
Keep both hands on the steering wheel, with the thumbs resting on the outer wheel rim.
To help prevent damage to the power steering pump/motor:
•  Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme right or the extreme left for more than a few seconds when the engine is running
•  HPS: Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by low power steering pump fluid level. Check the low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service from an Mahindra Authorised Dealer
•  Do not fill the power steering pump reservoir above the MAX mark on the reservoir, this may result in leaks from the reservoir
If the power steering system (EPS/HPS) breaks down (or if the engine is turned OFF), you can still steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
•  Under inflated tire(s) on any wheel(s)
•  Uneven vehicle loading
•  High crown in the center of the road
•  High crosswinds
•  Wheels out of alignment
•  Wheels out of balance
•  Loose or worn suspension components
•  SAS (Steering Angle Sensor) calibration (EPS)
10.2 Tilt Steering
Graphic
The steering wheel can be adjusted as required using the lever in the steering shroud under the steering wheel.
To tilt/adjust the steering wheel;
Graphic
1. Ensure the vehicle is stationary and parking brake engaged
2. Push the steering tilt lever down to unlock
3. Raise or lower the steering wheel to the desired position
4. Pull the steering tilt lever back up to its original position to lock the steering
5. Adjust the seat according to the steering wheel position
An improperly locked steering wheel could cause loss of control and lead to accidents. Never adjust the steering wheel while driving.
10.3 Steering Controls - Audio Control System (if equipped)
Graphic
Audio control through the steering wheel switches/buttons helps the driver to operate the audio system from the steering wheel without losing concentration.
The system has four switches which are mounted on the steering wheel. Hold the Mute button to start the infotainment system.
Refer to the Audio/Infotainment e-Manual for complete information on audio controls and features. The map upgradation details are also available in the Infotainment manual.
Graphic
A: Mute
B: Volume (+)
C: Volume (-)
D: Call Receive
E: Source
F: SEEK (^)
F: SEEK (v)
H: Call Disconnect/Voice Command
Source
The source button switches between different modes in the audio system.
When the source button is pressed once, the next source is chosen in the following sequence, provided the required media is connected.
Tuner ð MP3 ð USB - Auxiliary
In case of the absence of USB mode, the system will toggle between Tuner and Auxiliary modes.
Seek/Call Receive/Call Disconnect
Press the SEEK switch once to increase radio reception frequency by 0.05 MHz. Press the SEEK switch continuously for more than 3 Sec for AUTO scan of radio stations. In USB modes, the next track can be selected by pressing the switch once.
This button can also be used to receive or disconnect calls while connected through Bluetooth.
Mute
Press the Mute button to mute the audio. Press again to Un-mute.
Volume (+) and Volume (—)
To increase the volume by one point press the (+) button once. To decrease the volume by one point press the (—) button once.
If the steering wheel audio control switches do not work, you can still control the system through the infotainment system or with the remote (if equipped).
10.4 Wheels and Tyres
10.4.1 Tyre Information
The tyres fitted in this vehicle meet the requirements of BIS and they comply with the requirements under the Central Motor Vehicles Rules (CMVR] 1989
Graphic
A
Max Load Limit
B
Tyre Size
C
Radial tyres or bias-ply tyre - A radial tyre has “RADIAL/STEEL BELTED RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tyre not marked with “RADIAL” is a bias-ply tyre.
D
“TUBELESS” or “TUBE TYPE” - A tubeless tyre does not have a tube inside the tyre and air is directly filled in the tyre. A tube type tyre has a tube inside the tyre and the tube maintains the air pressure.
10.4.2 Tyre Rating
Your vehicle is originally equipped with tyres supplied by a reputed manufacturer. If you ever have any questions regarding your tyres, please refer to literature supplied by the tyre manufacturer, or to the separate tyre warranty provided by the tyre manufacturer. You may also contact Mahindra directly, or the tyre manufacturer.
The tyre rating of your vehicle is : 255/65 R18 (or) 255/60 R19
Graphic
Tyre rating is explained as shown the given image.
Tyre size (example: P255/65 R18 100S)
(A):255 (Three-digit number):This number gives the width in millimeters of the tyre from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. This is called ‘Section Width’.
(B):65 (Two-digit number):This number, known as the aspect ratio, gives the tyres ratio of height to section width.
(C):R This is the tyre Construction Code. The ‘R’ stands for Radial.
(D):18 (Two-digit number):This number is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.
(E):100 (Two or three digit number):This number is the tyres load index. It is a measurement of how much weight each tyre can support.
(F):S Tyre speed rating or speed symbol. Never drive the vehicle faster than the tyre speed rating. The speed rating denotes the speed at which a tyre is designed to be driven for extended periods of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure.
Recommended replacement of tyre should be same type of tyre.
10.4.2.1 Speed Rating
SPEED SYMBOL
MAX SPEED CAPABILITY (KM/HR)
SPEED SYMBOL
MAX SPEED CAPABILITY (KM/HR)
L
120
T
190
M
130
U
200
N
140
H
210
P
150
V
240
Q
160
W
270
R
170
Y
300
S
180
Z
240+
10.4.3 Tyre Label (Vehicle Placard)
The tyre Label (Vehicle Placard) is located on the driver door B pillar inner edge/face. This placard gives you important information about the tyre size designed for your vehicle, and the tyre inflation pressures for the front and rear tyres.
Graphic
Graphic
Never overload your vehicle. Overloading can cause tyre failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance, resulting in an accident and/or personal injury.
Improperly inflated tyres can adversely affect vehicle handling or can fail unexpectedly, resulting in an accident and/or personal injury.
10.4.4 Tyre Pressure
Proper tyre inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary areas are affected by improper tyre pressure;
•  Safety
•  Economy
•  Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Proper tyre inflation contributes to a comfortable and safe ride. Overinflating produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering. Unequal tyre pressures can cause erratic and unpredictable steering response or may cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tyre tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tyre replacement. Under inflation also increases tyre rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.
The proper cold tyre inflation pressure is listed in the tyre Label (Vehicle Placard), located on the front passenger side inner B-pillar.
10.4.5 Inspection and Adjustment Procedure
The tyre pressure should be checked and adjusted, as well as inspected for signs of tyre wear or visible damage, at least once a month. Use a good quality pressure gauge to check tyre pressure. Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation. Radial tyres may look properly inflated even when they are underinflated. At the same time, each tyre should be inspected for signs of tyre wear or visible damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tyre inflation pressures. Cold tyre inflation pressure is defined as the tyre pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 km after a three-hour period. Check tyre pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tyre pressures vary with temperature changes. Tyre pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 7°C of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tyre pressure inside a garage, especially in the winter.
When it was new, the spare tyre in your vehicle was fully inflated. However, a spare tyre can lose pressure over time. In order to avoid being stranded, check the spare tyre air pressure frequently.
10.4.6 Inflating Your Tyres
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tyres are properly inflated. Remember that a tyre can lose up to half of its air pressure without appearing flat.
At least once a month or before long trips, inspect each tyre and check the tyre pressure with a tyre gauge (including spare tyre). Inflate all tyres to the recommended inflation pressure.
Under-inflation is the most common cause of tyre failures and may result in severe tyre cracking, tread separation or “blowout”, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tyre. It also may result in unnecessary tyre stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control and accidents.
Always inflate your tyres to the recommended pressure even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found on the tyre. The recommended tyre inflation pressure is found on the Tyre Label which is located on the front passenger side inner B-pillar. Failure to follow the tyre pressure recommendations can cause uneven tread wear patterns and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.
If you overfill the tyre, release air by pushing the metal stem in the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure.
After inspecting or adjusting the tyre pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the stem, resulting in an unexpected loss of tyre pressure, an accident and/or personal injury.
10.4.7 Radial Ply Tyres
Combining radial ply tyres with other types of tyres on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly, resulting in an accident and/or personal injury. Always use radial tyres in sets of four. Never combine them with other types of tyres.
Cuts and punctures in radial tyres are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your authorized dealer for radial tyre repairs.
10.4.8 Tread Wear Indicators (TWI)
Tread wear indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1/16 inch (2 mm). When the indicators appear in two or more adjacent grooves, the tyre should be replaced.
Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. This can cause tyre deterioration and lead to loss of steering or braking control.
10.4.9 Life of Tyre
The service life of a tyre is dependent upon various factors including but not limited to;
•  Driving style
•  Tyre pressure
•  Distance driven
Tyres and the spare tyre should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden and unexpected tyre failure, leading to an accident and/or personal injury.
Keep dismounted tyres in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tyres from contact with oil, grease and fuels.
Do not use a tyre, wheel size or speed rating other than that specified for your vehicle on the tyre placard. Combinations of unapproved tyres and wheels may change suspension geometric and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling, stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control of the vehicle or the tyre can unexpectedly fail, resulting in an accident and/or personal injury.
Replacing original tyres with tyres of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
10.4.10 Snow Chains
Snow chains cannot be used on these tyres.
In case of harsh winter driving conditions, it is recommended using winter tyres with the same specifications for better stability, safety and performance.
10.4.11 Tyre Rotation Recommendations
Type 1 - Applicable for all 5 Steel / 5 Alloy wheels
Graphic
Tyres on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering, handling, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates and develop irregular wear patterns.
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride. Follow the recommended tyre rotation frequency for your type of driving.
Type 2 – Applicable for 4 Alloy wheels and Spare wheel with Steel rim
It is recommended rotating the tyres as per the “Maintenance Schedule”.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross” shown in the diagram. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-road type tyres.
Graphic
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride. Follow the recommended tyre rotation frequency for your type of driving. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired.
The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
10.4.12 Changing a Flat tyre
Refer to “If you have a Flat tyre” section in the general chapter for details.
10.4.13 Wheel Tightness
When you change a wheel, remove all rust and dirt at all locations where the wheel contacts the wheel hub. Use a scraper or wire brush to be sure that you remove all rust and dirt. A loose wheel could have damaged or elongated the holes in the rim, or damaged the rim/hub assembly. If any of the wheel studs or nuts are damaged, contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
Always tighten the nuts in a crisscross sequence. Never use oil or grease on your wheel studs or nuts.
Never over tighten the nuts on the wheel stud. You could damage the stud or the nut.
Torque tighten the wheel nuts to the specified value at the nearest Authorized Mahindra Workshop.
The tyres fitted in this vehicle meet the requirements of BIS and they comply with the requirements under the Central Motor Vehicles Rules (CMVR) 1989.
10.5 Tiretronics (if equipped)
The tiretronics system checks the pressure and temperature of the air inside the pneumatic tyres of the vehicle. System alerts the driver during driving if any of the tyre parameters are not in acceptable limits due to any reason.
The system will continue to alert until the warning condition is resolved to the actual placard values.
Appropriate tyre pressure and tyre temperature is required for;
•  Adequate braking
•  Road grip
•  Vehicle handling
•  Vehicle maneuvering
•  Reduced tyre wear and tear
•  Reduced tyre strain and safety
•  Good fuel efficiency
The instrument cluster displays all alerts & visual warnings related to Tiretronics system.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
10.5.1 Operation of Tiretronics
Tiretronics uses wireless sensor technology that is mounted on the wheel rim to checks the tyre pressure levels. They transmit the data to the receiver inside the vehicle which is in turn is communicated and displayed on the instrument cluster.
In the instrument cluster screen all the tyre locations will display the status as pressure and temperature. Spare tyre (if TPMS sensor equipped) information on tiretronics screen shall be available only during any alerts and warning in the spare tyre. (User Shall verify spare tyre pressure manually, In certain conditions system may not update pressure for Spare tyre correctly)
The Tiretronics has been customized only for the manufacturer’s genuine tyres and wheels. Tiretronics pressure limits and warning messages have been established and calibrated for the tyre size equipped on your vehicle. Replacement of manufacturer’s parts with a different size, type or style of components may damage the sensor and lead to incorrect readings.
Do not use aftermarket tyre sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with Tiretronics. Failure to comply may lead to sensor damage.
The Tiretronics is not intended to replace normal tyre care and maintenance or to warn of any tyre failure condition. The system should not be used as a replacement for a pressure measuring gauge to adjust the vehicle tyre pressure.
Driving with under-inflated tyres cause the tyres to overheat and may lead to tyre failure. Under-inflated tyres reduce fuel efficiency, tyre tread life and may affect the vehicle's maneuverability and braking ability.
It is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tyre pressure using an accurate pressure gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tiretronics warning indicator.
10.5.2 Tiretronics Warning Lamp
Graphic
The Tiretronics warning lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates for any alert condition and also for low/high tyre pressure/High temperature alerts and malfunction.
10.5.3 Tiretronics Sensor Installation
Graphic
First apply lubricant (paste) or soapy water to rim hole or valve nozzle bar, as shown in the following figure (the diagram is for reference only, and it is operated according to the degree of automation of the customer's production line)
Graphic
Graphic
1. Line the sensor up with the rim hole and attach the TTV insertion tool to the end of the valve ready for pull in
2. Ensure the TTV insertion tool is positioned to the correct notch and that the sensor is pulled through in a direction parallel to the valve whole axis and NOT at an angle to it
3. The picture below shows a correctly fitted sensor. Note the rubber bulb of the valve resting against the rim and the front face of the enclosure is NOT touching the rim. Apply tyre soap solution to the rubber portion of the valve stem and the top of the enclosure
4. Place the inner tyre bead over the rim
5. Place the outer tyre bead over the rim
6. Inflate all tyres to the prescribed pressure, check the valve area for leakage and re-balance the wheels prior to installing back on the vehicle
Starting to mount the tyre from the valve location is a wrong fitment. The fixing tool/stem may hit the sensor and damage it. Start from the opposite direction.
10.5.4 Tiretronics Sensor Removal
Graphic
•  Remove the tyre from the rim
•  Remove the valve core to deflate the tyre.
•  Remove the tread and ensure that the extractor forceps is inserted into the tyre at the yellow position shown below and turn the rim clockwise.
Graphic
Graphic
•  To remove the sensor, firstly remove the screw using a T6 TORX screwdriver.
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
•  Carefully and firmly pull the enclosure straight back off the valve
•  Cut the rubber bulb and attach the TTV tool to the valve. Remove the valve from the rim by pulling through the rim, or simply pull through without cutting the bulb
•  Lift the outer tyre bead over the rim using a tyre tool
The valve must be positioned just left of the start position to avoid sensor damage. Do not touch the sensor with the tyre tool.
•  Lift the inner tyre bead over the rim using the tyre tool
•  Remove existing valve stem
Starting to mount the tyre from the valve location is a wrong fitment. Fixing tool/stem may hit the sensor and damage it. Start from the opposite direction.
10.5.5 Functionalities of Tiretronics System
•  Low Pressure Alert
•  High Pressure Alert
•  High Temperature Alert
•  Pressure Leakage Alert
•  Sensor Signal Missing (Communication error)
•  Tiretronics Sensor Faulty.
•  Tyre Auto Learn
•  Tyre Fill Assist (TFA)
•  Tyre Pressure Imbalance
Low Pressure Alert: Low pressure monitoring is to indicate low tyre pressure. Please note the following points.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
•  Low pressure alert will be set only when the tyre pressure value goes below threshold. Low pressure will be set based on the temperature value.
•  Low pressure alert in the main alert screen will pop up once for driver notification when the alert is set and the vehicle is in running condition. Otherwise the alert will remain in the information screen and alert register screen
•  If low pressure is observed, respective tyre should be rectified with cause of low pressure and then fill air
•  Once low pressure alert is set with tyre pressure below threshold the alert shall not be cleared until the pressure is filled to the placard value
High Pressure Alert
High pressure monitoring is to indicate high pressure alert. Please note the following points.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
•  High pressure alert will be set only when the tyre pressure value goes above threshold
•  High pressure alert in the main alert screen will pop up once for driver notification when the alert is set and the vehicle is in running condition. Otherwise the alert will remain in the tiretronics screen
•  If high pressure value is observed, air has to be released from the respective tyre until the pressure reduces to the placard value
•  The vehicle should be driven above 40 kmph for the new pressure value to be updated and the alert to be cleared
•  Once the high pressure alert is triggered the alert shall not get cleared until the respective tyre pressure is reaches to the placard value
Pressure Leakage Alert
Pressure leakage monitoring is to indicate pressure leakage in any of the vehicle tyres. Please note the following points.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
•  Pressure Leakage alert will be set only when the tyre pressure is leaking at a rate greater than defined threshold
•  In the pressure leakage condition if the tyre pressure goes too below threshold then the low pressure alert will also be set
•  The pressure leakage alert in the main alert screen will pop up once when the alert is set for driver notification and will be shown in tiretronics screen when the vehicle is in running ignition ON condition
•  Once pressure leakage is observed the respective tyre should be observed for air leakages and the puncture condition has to be rectified. Proper placard value should be filled after puncture rectification
•  If the vehicle is running in an extremely rocky and acute bumpy condition then fluctuating pressure leakage alert may get set which will get rectified when the vehicle runs back on a normal road. This happens due to sudden change in pressure levels due to rocky conditions
Sensor Signal Missing Alert
When the vehicle runs in speed above 40kmph, Tiretronics system receives signal from all the Tiretronics sensor installed in all running tyres.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
•  On account of any issue in signal reception or Tiretronics sensor damage or tyres changed with out performing manual learning then the signal will not be received
•  If the Signals from the tiretronics sensor are not received atleast once, when the vehicle is driven at a speed greater than 40kmph for more than 10 minutes, "Signal Missing" alert will be set for the respective tyre and Tiretronics Telltale will be ON.
•  When the Tiretronics signal missing is set then perform manual learning once. If manual learning is not done successfully then the corresponding position tyres sensor needs to be checked by carefully opening the tyre
•  If the sensor is found to be damaged then it should be replaced with a new one and manual/auto learning should be done
Sensor Faulty / Low Battery Alert
Each tiretronics sensor in the vehicle tyres has an internal individual battery . If the battery level is too low or the sensor by itself is malfunctioning then the Tiretronics system shall give this alert.
•  If the Tiretronics sensor low battery/faulty is set then the corresponding position tyres sensor needs to be removed by carefully opening the tyre and replacing it with a new sensor
•  Post replacing the new sensor, manual/auto learning should be done
Tyre Auto Learn Process (If Enabled in cluster)
TFT
Digital
NA
Graphic
In case of tyres location changed from its original location, Automatically tyre swap location shall be identified and pressure and temperature value for respective tyre shall be updated within 10 min of vehicle driving based on environmental condition & vehicle drive condition auto location shall take one or more drive cycle to auto learn.
In case of a new TPMS replaced in the tyre, automatically system shall identify the tyre swapped location and update the warnings and alert for new location.
If spare wheel tyre get swapped with any of the running tyres then display shall show Signal missing in the cluster for respective tyre location and TPMS indication lamp will blink for 90 sec and remain ON. TPMS indication lamp will continue until the error condition is rectified.
Refer cluster settings for the “TPMS Auto Learn ” in the” Instrument Cluster Features” chapter for further details
Tyre Fill Assist (TFA) (If Enabled in cluster)
During Air Filling in tyre, Hazard lamps shall blink until placard value reaches.
During air filling If tyre Pressure has reached the Placard Value, then Horn shall activate one time
TFT
Digital
NA
Graphic
During Air filling If tyre Pressure exceeds Placard Value, then Hazard lamps shall blink at faster rate.
Refer cluster settings for the “Tyre Fill Assist ” in the” Instrument Cluster Features” chapter for further details
Tyre Pressure Imbalance
During driving if the system identifies tyre Pressure imbalance on front two tyres / Rear two tyres then Instrument Cluster shall popup Tyre Pressure imbalance warning.
TFT
Digital
NA
Graphic
10.5.6 Tiretronics Manual Learning
After tyre rotation or Tiretronics sensor replacement, the receiver must be learnt, else the Tiretronics warning lamp will be ON, indicating malfunction.
Mandate Points
Manual learning is the process by which the identities of 4 sensors installed inside the tyres are learnt and programmed in to the memory of the receiver module.
1. Manual learning should be compulsorily performed on any of the following conditions or operations done
•  Any sensors replaced.
•  Any of the tyres are replaced
•  If any of the tyres or set of tyres are shuffled or swapped in position
•  If tyre rotation operation is performed
•  If it is observed that the alert indications in the tiretronics screen are not co-relating with respect to their actual position in the vehicle
2. Once manual learning is initiated, the sensors inside the tyres need to be triggered by leaking the air from each tyre one at a time and should be completed within certain value post to each event for learning all 4 tyres
3. Do not perform Manual learning process at the same time on two vehicles with in the radius of 20 meters
4. It is mandatory that manual learning of tyres should follow the sequence of ‘front left tyre position, front right tyre, rear right tyre and rear left tyre.
5. It is required to ensure the tyres have pressure > 32psi and < 36psi before initiating the manual learning process
6. Post manual learning, all tyres should be filled to the placard pressure value
It is mandatory that manual learning of tyres should follow the sequence of ‘front left tyre position, front right tyre, rear right tyre and rear left tyre.
Initiating the Manual Learning Process
Graphic
1. Turn the ignition OFF. Press and hold the up button in steering wheel
2. Turn the ignition ON
3. Wait for the cluster’s tachometer and speedometer to rotate to highest position and then release the enter button in up position. Then observe the cluster for the Tiretronics telltale to blink, vehicle siren will indicate by 2 chrips & 2 times turn lamps blink and instrument cluster screen shows ‘TPMS MANUAL LEARNING’
If failed to enter in to the manual learning mode;
•  Try initiating the manual learning once again
•  Check if the reverse gear is engaged, if it is engaged disengage it
•  Check if the Enter button is working fine
If problem still persist, contact an Authorized Mahindra Dealer for further assistance.
Starting from Front Left Tyre: Start leaking the air from the front left for 30 to 40 sec and stop for 5 sec. Repeat until the tyre gets learnt
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
If the front left tyre is learned, 1 siren chirp sound is heard and the FL tyre shows learned in the cluster screen.
Learning the Front Right Tyre: Start leaking the air from the front right for 30 to 40 sec and stop for 5 sec. Repeat until the tyre gets learnt.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
If the front right tyre is learned, 1 siren chirp sound is heard and the FR tyre shows learned in the cluster screen.
Learning the Rear Right Tyre: Start leaking the air from the rear right for 30 to 40 sec and stop for 5 sec. Repeat until the tyre gets learnt.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
If the rear right tyre is learned, 1 siren chirp sound is heard and the RR tyre shows learned in the cluster screen.
Completing the Learning with Rear Left Tyre: Start leaking the air from the rear left tyre for 30 to 40 sec and stop for 5 sec. Repeat until the tyre gets learnt.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
If the rear left tyre is learned, 1 siren chirp sound is heard and the RL tyre shows learned in the cluster screen.
If rear left tyre is also learned, then 1 siren chirp is heard and ALL tyres show learned at respective tyre positions and ‘All tyres Learned successfully’ in the centre of the screen.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
If learning is not successful at any point of time, or at any point of time during the learning process if the learning takes more than 90 secs of time for each tyre position then the system shall exit the learning mode and show the ‘TPMS Manual Learning Not Successful’ screen.
TFT
Digital
Graphic
Graphic
Limitations
•  The Tiretronics monitors only tyre pressure and temperature. It does not monitor conditions such as tyre wear
•  The Tiretronics will not be able to detect an instant tyre burst and inform the driver in advance
•  There may be the possibility of getting all the tyre location indicators on the Tiretronics display blinking along with the Tiretronics telltale, on passing environment area prone to heavy power lines and RF signal. It will come back to normal condition when interference gets cleared
10.5.7 Tiretronics — Points to Remember
•  It is recommended to fill the pressure to 32 psi at a digital gauge station only
•  Every 15 days, inflate all the tyres up to 32 psi and inflation should be done at cold condition/ambient temperature
•  Pressure deviation between the Tiretronics display and gauge will depend upon the following factors:
–  Atmospheric pressure
–  Error in pressure filling gauge (not calibrated)
–  Air leakage during inflation/deflation
•  Tiretronics measures pressure of the tyre
•  Pressure deviation is defined for 0.5 psi (min) and 3 psi (max)
•  If the vehicle battery/fuse is disconnected and reconnected, it will update the pressure after the vehicle is driven or sensor is activated
•  If the vehicle tyres are rotated or any of the tyres sensors are replaced, then tires have to be learned via either manual or auto learning. Refer Tyre Auto/Manual learn process in Tiretronics section for more details
•  If more than one tyre needs to be learned, learn all 4 tyres as per manual learning procedure
•  Tiretronics is only a warning or indicating device. Pressure and temperature values displayed by the system is for indication prior to alert purposes only. The Tiretronics system should not be used as a measuring device to correlate or calibrate against other systems
•  During winter or in cold conditions, there may be chances of getting a pressure alert with the corresponding tyre location indicator in the display, if the tyre pressure is near the thresholds level. i.e. between 28 psi to 24 psi. However, this alert will get cleared after driving a few kilometers depending upon the climatic condition
10.5.8 Recommended Playcard Value
Ambient Temp. (Deg C)
Recommended Pressure Front & Rear (32 Psi Placard)
<0
28
10
29
20
31
30
32
40
34
50
35
60
37
70
38
If the vehicle was previously halted for more than 45 min & is driven less than 15 min before filling the air then the tyres shall be filled to the respective playcard as per the ambient temperature else to the next playcard value.
Example: If a vehicle was halted at a ambient of 30 deg c for 50 min and driven to a air filling station within 5 min then respective play card value will be 32.0 PSI for front & rear. Else 33.5 PSI
11 EMERGENCIES
11.1 Hazard Warning Switch
Graphic
The hazard warning lamp switch is located below the AC controls on the instrument panel.
Use the hazard warning lamp when your vehicle is stationary or to warn other road users to be cautious while passing your vehicle.
To turn the hazard warning lamp ON, press the switch in. All the turn signal lamps flash. To turn OFF, press the switch again.
Hazard lamps are also switched ON during the following conditions;
•  Crash — Hazard would be turned on for 30 mins
•  Panic Braking — When the vehicle is running above 100 kmph and panic/sudden brakes are applied, hazard will turn on for 10 sec
Pressing the hazard switch twice deactivates this feature.
11.2 Towing
11.2.1 Towing your Vehicle During Emergency
Front
Rear
Graphic
Graphic
If your vehicle needs to be towed, call a professional towing service. If a towing service is unavailable in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed by a cable or chain secured to the emergency welded towing hook into the front and Rear.
Fasten a cable or chain specifically intended for use in towing vehicles to the towing hook.
Use only the towing hook provided, for towing in an emergency. Do not tow by the bumper or any other part which may be damaged.
Use only the cable or chain specifically intended for use in towing vehicles.
A driver must be in the vehicle being towed to steer and operate the brakes. Towing in this manner must be done only on hard-surfaced roads for short distances and at low speeds. Also, the wheels, axles, drive train, steering and brakes must all be in good working condition.
Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers, which would place excessive stress on the towing hook and towing cable or chain, resulting in breakage of the hook or the chain.
If the engine is not running, the power assist for the steering and brakes will not be functional, making it harder to steer or brake than usual.
When lifting the rear wheels, take care to ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the front end of the raised vehicle. The bumper and/or underbody of the vehicle may be damaged during towing.
11.2.2 Towing Equipment
Towing equipment are of two types.
•  Flat-bed equipment - Your vehicle is loaded on the back of a truck. This is the safest and best way of towing.
•  Rear-lift equipment - The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the tires (front or rear) and lift them off the ground. The other two tires remain on the ground.
•  Sling-type equipment - The tow truck uses metal cables with hooks on both ends. These hooks go around parts of the frame or suspension and lift the end of the vehicle off the ground. This is not a good method of towing as it may damage the vehicle's suspension and body. Avoid a tow with sling type equipment
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Option
2WD
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF the Ground
4WD
Graphic
ü
On Trailer
ALL
ü
Graphic
O
Flat Tow
NONE
O
Graphic
O
Dolly Tow
Front
O
Graphic
ü
Dolly Tow
REAR
O
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
11.3 Vehicle Does not Start - Checks
Before making these checks, make sure you have followed the correct starting procedure and that you have sufficient fuel.
If the engine is not cranking or is cranking too slowly/ intermittently
1. Check that the battery terminals are tight and clean
2. If the battery terminals are firmly fastened, Switch ON the interior lamps.
3. If the lamps do not illuminate, glow dim or go OFF when the starter is cranked, then it indicates a weak or discharged battery. Try jump starting. Follow ‘jump starting’ instructions given later in this chapter.
4. Check the fuses in the Engine Compartment Fuse Box and Central Fuse Box
If the engine cranks normally, but does not start
If the engine is cranking normally, but if the engine does not start even after repeated cranking, Contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
If the engine stalls while driving
•  Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place.
•  Turn ON your hazard warning flashers and check for any malfunction lamps in the instrument cluster.
•  Turn the ignition OFF, wait for approximately 90 seconds and try starting the engine again.
•  . If the vehicle still does not start, contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
If the engine stalls while running, the power assist for the brakes will not work. Braking will be much harder than usual.
If the engine speed does not increase
•  If the engine speed does not increase when the accelerator pedal is depressed, there may be a problem in the Engine Management System, electrical or electronic controls.
•  In case of certain faults, the engine may go to limp home mode, which is indicated by the check engine lamp.
•  Have your vehicle checked by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer as soon as possible.
11.4 Engine Overheating
If the temperature gauge bar in the instrument cluster is all the way up to the H and/or the high engine coolant temperature warning lamp is ON, your engine has overheated.
If the engine is getting overheated, the Engine Management System reduces engine power substantially and may even shut the engine OFF; it is dangerous to continue driving when the engine has overheated. You need to first cool the engine down before starting to drive again.
Follow the below instructions to cool the engine down
•  Progressively reduce the vehicle speed and bring the vehicle to a stop at the side of the road
•  Turn ON the hazard warning flashers
•  Keep the engine running at idle
•  Engage the parking brake
•  Switch off the air conditioner
•  Wait till the engine coolant temperature drops sufficiently such that the needle in the temperature gauge is around halfway between C and H
Now switch the engine OFF and carefully open the bonnet/hood to visually inspect the engine cooling system parts. Be cautious while doing an inspection as vehicle parts will still be too hot. Verify that the engine coolant level in the coolant recovery tank is maintained between the 'Min' and 'Max' mark. Check for possible fluid leakages. Check for damages to heat exchangers and connecting hoses. Also verify that the radiator shrouds, engine fan blades and the engine belt all are in good condition.
If any evidence of failure is observed, contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer for help. In case, no system leakage/ failure is suspected, driving can be continued.
Either due to severe operating conditions or due to any system leakages or failures, the engine can get overheated. However if the engine is getting overheated repeatedly, even in normal operating conditions, get the vehicle checked by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer as soon as possible.
Refer to the 'High Engine Coolant Temperature' section under the 'Features and Control' chapter for details.
If the high engine coolant temperature warning is ignored, the engine shuts OFF abruptly to safeguard engine components from overheating and consequent failure. Abrupt engine shut-off can lead to uncontrollable driving condition and accidents.
Stay clear of hot and rotating vehicle parts while visually inspecting the vehicle. The coolant inside the cooling system is under high pressure and temperature. Never open the pressure cap of the degassing tank when the engine is hot. Not taking precautions may lead to serious injury to your skin/eyes.
For optimum performance of the cooling system you must maintain the required coolant level and use only recommended engine coolant.
11.5 Jump Starting
Jump start can be performed when the battery charge is low which can be confirmed by performing the following operations:
1. Turn headlamp ON and check whether lights are dim
2. Try to start the vehicle and check whether engine cranks slowly or not crank at all.
3. Open the bonnet and locate the battery.
It may be necessary to remove the disabled vehicle’s battery cables from the battery terminals and clean both cables and terminals. Use a stiff wire brush to remove all corrosion. Reconnect the cables to the battery terminals before jump starting the vehicle.
4. The positive terminal will be marked with a plus sign (+) and will usually have a RED cable attached on it.
5. The negative terminal will be marked with a minus sign (-) and will usually have a BLACK cable attached to it.
6. A standalone booster battery can be used to start the engine when the vehicle battery is low.
7. Take jumper cables and unwind the red and black cables.
8. Wear safety gear and connect one end of red clamp of the jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery and other end to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery.
9. Similarly, connect one end of black clamp of the jumper cable to the negative (-) terminal of the booster battery and other end to the negative (-) terminal of the discharged battery.
10. Once the jump starting assembly is done, crank the engine for starting.
11. Once the vehicle gets started, carefully remove the jumper cables in the reverse order of attachment.
12. Disconnect the black clamp of the jumper cable from the negative (-) terminal of the discharged battery and the other end of the black clamp from the negative (-) terminal of the booster battery.
13. Similarly, disconnect the red clamp of the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery and the other end of the red clamp from the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery.
14. Close the bonnet
15. Keep the vehicle's engine running and slightly accelerate the vehicle to charge the battery.
If the problem persists on next starting cycle, please visit Mahindra Authorised Dealer
Graphic
•  Once the vehicle gets started, carefully remove the jumper cables in the reverse order of attachment
Make sure none of the cables are dangling into the engine compartment, where they could be exposed to moving parts.
•  Remove the jumper cables once the vehicle starts. Do this in the reverse of the order in which they were attached, and don't let any of the cables or clamps touch each other (or dangle into the engine compartment)
•  Disconnect the black clamp of the jumper cable from the negative (-) terminal of the discharged battery
•  Disconnect the other end of the black clamp from the negative (-) terminal of the booster battery
•  Disconnect the red clamp of the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery
•  Disconnect the other end of the red clamp from the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery
Replace any positive (+) red post protective covers if applicable (You have had to remove or open these in the beginning) These covers help prevent accidental short circuiting of the battery
•  Keep the vehicle's engine running. Run the vehicle above idle (slightly revved up with your foot on the accelerator). This should give the battery enough charge to start the vehicle again. If it does not start, either your battery might be dead or faulty alternator.
Improper jump starting procedures can result in battery explosion and acid burn hazard.
Loosely connected battery cables could damage the electronic control units.
To disconnect battery terminals, wait for at least 2 minutes to allow discharge of high voltage or it could lead to personal injury.
While disconnecting, always disconnect the -VE terminal first and while connecting, always connect the -VE terminal last.
Do not connect battery terminals with opposite polarity, it will lead to alternator, Electronic control unit failures.
Towing a vehicle to start could be dangerous. The vehicle being towed could surge forward when the engine starts, causing the two vehicles to collide, injuring the occupants.
Modern vehicles with electronic management systems should not be jump started without ‘protected’ jump starter leads.
11.6 Limp Home Mode
Limp home mode is an emergency situation declared by the EMS (Engine Management System) due to failure of one/more critical sensors/actuators. In this mode, the EMS (Engine Management System) will revert back to basic minimum requirement (fuel quantity / injection timings) to aid the driver to bring the vehicle back to the nearest workshop. Needless to say the drivability & fuel consumption will be greatly affected.
If vehicle acceleration worsens or if there is a drop in vehicle performance, there might be a malfunction in the engine management system which triggers/activates the Limp Home Mode. This condition is accompanied by the check engine lamp illuminating in the instrument cluster. In this mode, the vehicle speed is limited and the accelerator pedal may not function normally. It is recommended you contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately for assistance.
11.7 Fuses and Relays
A fuse is the most common electric protection device. The fuse is placed in an electrical circuit, so that when current flow exceeds the rating of the circuit/fuse, it blows off. The element in the fuse melts, opening the circuit and preventing other components of the circuit from being damaged by the over current. The size of the metal fuse element determines the rating. Once a fuse blows off, it must be replaced with a new one of the same rating.
Switch the ignition and all electrical equipment OFF before touching or attempting to change a fuse.
Replacement fuse must be with the same rating as the one you have removed.
You can identify a blown fuse by a break in the filament. All fuses except high current fuses are press fit.
Never touch fuses with bare hands. Always use the fuse puller to remove and refit the fuses.
Be careful while removing the relay, to avoid damage to relay terminal — do not shake or apply excessive force .
There are 3 fuse boxes in the vehicle;
1. Instrument Panel Fuse Box
2. Engine Compartment Fuse Box
3. Battery Mounted Fuse Box
11.7.1 Instrument Panel Fuse Box
•  Pull the Fuse box cover below the switch bank, outward to access the instrument panel fuse box
Spare fuses are available in this fuse box location.
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Fuse No
Fuse Rating
Circuit
F34*
10A
USB FAST CHARGING
F35
ROOF LAMP/RLS
F36*
30A
ANTI-PINCH MOTOR
F37*
20A
SUNROOF B+/PANO
F38
5A
CRANK
F39
15A
INFOTAINMENT B+
F40
5A
DIAGNOSTIC / TELEMATICS
F41
25A
MBFM BATT-2
F42*
5A
WIRELESS CHARGER
F43
5A
ABS IGN/EPS ADAS-EPB/SAS
F44
5A
AIR BAG IGN
F45*
10A
INFO/DISPLAY/RVC/FVC/SVS/PKE
F46*
10A
ORVM/RPAS/PKE
F47
5A
IC/HVAC B+
F48
5A/20A
IMMO B+/PKE B+/MGM B+
F49
25A
MBFM BATT-1
F50
10A
4WD ACTUATOR
F51*
15A
AT ECU B+
F52
10A
IC/HVAC/MBFM/CFS/HEAD LMP/HLLD/CCFS/AIS/FATC
F53*
10A
INF ACC/RR USB/BRD AUDIO
F54
10A
REV LMP/TGS/E-MLD IGN
F55
25A
MBFM BATT-4
F56
25A
MBFM BATT-5
F57
25A
MBFM BATT-3
F58*
10A
SUNROOF/WLC IGN/AUTO IRVM/VS
F59*
5A
AT ECU IGN
F60
5A
EMS ECU IGN
F61
20A
POWER WINDOW REAR
F62*
5A
IMMO/FCM/FRM/MGM IGN
F63
15A
POWER SOCKET
F64*
5A
MBFM ACC
F65
25A
POWER WINDOW
* - If equipped
Relay No
Relay Rating
Circuit
-
40A
PKE IGNITION RELAY*
-
40A
ACCESSORY START RELAY 40A*
11.7.2 Engine Compartment Fuse Box
The engine compartment fuse box is located adjacent to the vehicle’s battery.
Follow the below steps to remove the fuse cover;
•  To open the fuse box cover, press the lock and push the cover back and lift it.
Graphic
Graphic
Fuse puller is available in the fuse box cover.
Graphic
For Diesel Engine
Graphic
Fuse No
Fuse Rating
Circuit
F1
50A
BATT-1
F2
50A
GLOW PLUG
F3
50A
BATT-2
F4
40A
STARTER
F5
40A
ABS MOTOR
F6
30A
EMS ECU
F7
40A
BLOWER MOTOR
F8
50A
COOLING FAN
F9
50A
BATT-3
F10*
40A
CF LOW
F11*
40A
ABS-2
F12
15A
H/L LH
F13
15A
H/L RH
F14
20A
HORN
F15
-
-
F16*
25A
ABS SOLENOID
F17*
10A
REAR FOG
F18*
15A
E-MLD
F19*
30A
BRANDED AUDIO
F20*
30A
POWER SEAT
F21
15A
AC COMP B+
F22
30A
BATT 4
F23
20A
FUEL PUMP
F24
5A
BMS
F25
10A
PCJ&VOP
F26
10A
EMS BATT-1
F27
10A
BRAKE FUSE
F28
15A
AC COMP
F29
5A
EMS ECU B+
F30
5A
BACKFLOW PUMP
F31
15A
EMS BATT -2
F32
10A
HFM
F33
15A
F5
 
50A, 40A, 25A, 20A, 15A, 10A, 10A, 5A
SPARE
* - If equipped
Relay No
Circuit
R5
AC COMP
R6*
BACKFLOW RELAY
R7*
REAR FOG
R9
Horn
R10
FUEL PUMP
R11
BLOWER
R12
EMS ECU
R13
STARTER
R14*
COOLING FAN LOW
R15*
COOLING FAN
R16
GLOW PLUG
R17*
E-MLD
* - If equipped
For Petrol Engine
Graphic
Fuse No
Fuse Rating
Circuit
F1
50A
BATT-1
F2
F3
50A
BATT-2
F4
40A
STARTER
F5
40A
ABS MOTOR
F6
40A
EMS ECU
F7
40A
BLOWER MOTOR
F9
50A
BATT-3
F11*
40A
ABS-2
F12
15A
H/L LH
F13
15A
H/L RH
F14
20A
HORN
F15
F16*
25A
ABS SOLENOID
F17*
10A
REAR FOG
F18
F19*
30A
BRANDED AUDIO
F20*
30A
POWER SEAT
F21
15A
AC COMP B+
F22
30A
BATT4
F23
20A
FUEL PUMP
F24
5A
BMS
F25
10A
VBR_G
F26
30A
VBR_A
F27
10A
VBR_B
F28
10A
VBR_C
F29
5A
EMS ECU B+
F30
31
15A
VBR_D
32
15A
VBR_E
33
15A
VBR_F
 
40A, 50A, 30A, 25A, 20A, 15A,, 10A, 5A
SPARE
*- If equipped
Relay No
Circuit
R5
AC COMP
R6
AIR COOLER
R7*
REAR FOG
R9
Horn
R10
FUEL PUMP
R11
BLOWER
R12
EMS ECU
R13
STARTER
R14
R16
* - If equipped
11.7.3 Battery Mounted Fuse Box
Graphic
Graphic
The battery mounted fuse box is connected to the positive terminal of the battery.
Functionality of battery mounted fuse box is to provide short circuit protection to alternator and power supply to main engine compartment fuse box.
Battery mounted fuse box consist of following fuses:
•  Main charging fuse – 150A (Pink colour)
•  Bus bar fuse - 80A (White colour)
11.8 Changing a Flat Tyre
Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place well away from traffic. Park on a level spot with firm ground. Stop the engine and switch ON your hazard warning flashers.
Firmly apply the parking brake. Have everyone come out of the vehicle on the side away from traffic.
After stopping , use the hazard warning triangle to alert the oncoming traffic of the stopped vehicle
Never stop your vehicle in a traffic lane to change a tyre. Keep driving until you reach a safe location.
The jack provided along with the vehicle is to be used only for changing a spare tyre. It is never to be used to perform any other maintenance or repair on the vehicle.
Never place any part of your body under any portion of the vehicle when it is supported only by the jack. You could be crushed by the vehicle if it falls off a jack. Keep bystander’s away from the vehicle.
Find level, solid ground that is clear of oncoming traffic. If you cannot find a safe place to stop, it is better to drive on a flat tyre and damage the rim than it is to risk being hit by oncoming traffic.
After changing a flat tyre, never store the tyre or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle. This loose equipment could strike an occupant in the event of a sudden stop or collision. Store all of these items in the proper place.
The following sections outline the procedure for changing a flat tyre;
11.8.1 Jack & Tool Kit
The location of the jack and toolkit can vary depending on the vehicle variant.
Type 1 (If equipped)
Jack removing procedure
The jack assembly is located behind the rear seat on the floor.
Graphic
Remove the floor button and Lift the floor mat provided in the luggage compartment
Graphic
Graphic
To open the tool kit lid, using the coin and insert it into the slot of the lid screw. Rotate the lid screw in anti clockwise direction and to remove the tool kit lid. Then take out the jack.
Refix the jack and close the tool kit lid and rotate the lid screw clockwise direction to close.
Tool kit
Tool kit is located below the rear seat /Tool organizer above the screw jack
Graphic
The tool kit is consists of,
Screw Driver
DEO Spanner 10mm x 12mm
Wheel Spanner
Fuel filter water drain plug removal tool
Jack Operating Lever
 
Type 2 (If equipped)
Jack and Tool kit removing procedure
The jack and Tool kit assembly is located at the trunk lid.
Trim trunk lid to be folded using pull handle to access tool kit organizer.
Carefully lift the trunk lid along this axis to create enough space to access the tool kit organizer.
Now accessible all tools in the tool kit organiser.
For accessing Jack
Remove the locking knob to turn counterclockwise to loosen and remove it.
Use the holding feature to carefully lift the tool kit organizer assembly and to access the screw jack.
11.8.2 Spare Wheel Removal
The spare wheel is mounted on the rear end of the vehicle. It is held in place by a securing nuts. Loosen and remove the securing nut counter clockwise with a wheel spanner.
Spare Wheel Cover removing Procedure :
Graphic
1. Insert your hand at top side and hold Spare wheel bezel and pull out side
Graphic
2. Remove the screws with the help of a star screwdriver and rotate the plastic lock nut in the anti-clockwise direction.
Graphic
3. Take out the plastic nut from a metal tube.
4. Hold Spare wheel cover at marked areas. Pull out Spare wheel cover form the Metal tube slot.
Graphic
5. Loosen and remove the securing nut counter-clockwise with a wheel spanner
Graphic
6. Slowly support and lower the spare wheel.
Follow the reverse procedure to assemble the spare wheel cover in the bezel.
Ensure don't damage the rear camera during the removal and refitment of the spare wheel.
11.8.3 Warning Triangle
Graphic
The warning triangle is a necessary device for your safety.
It is placed below the rear seat.
When you pull over your breaking down vehicle to a safe place, set up a warning triangle behind your vehicle. (Daytime: 100 Metres behind, Night: 200 Metres behind)
When the Vehicle has a Serious Problem during Driving
Turn on the hazard flasher and move the vehicle out of traffic to a safe place.
Set up the warning triangle behind your vehicle (Daytime: 100 Metres, Night: 200 Metres) to warn other vehicles
Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stay away from the traffic.
When your safety is secured, contact your Authorised Mahindra dealer for your emergency service
11.8.4 Wheel Nut Loosening
Always loosen the wheel nut before raising the vehicle.
Turn the wheel nut counter clockwise to loosen as per the crisscross sequence shown.
Graphic
To get maximum leverage, fit the spanner to the nut so that the handle is on the left side. Grab the spanner near the end of the handle and push down on the handle.
Be careful that the spanner does not slip off the nut. Do not remove the nut, but loosen them by one or two turns.
Do not apply force with your legs (or stand) on the wheel spanner while loosening/tightening the wheel nuts.
11.9 Jack Points
Front jack up point - On the chassis long member behind the front wheels.
Rear jack up point - On either side of the rear axle.
Graphic
Graphic
11.9.1 Jacking
Position the jack at the correct jacking point. Make sure the jack is positioned on a level and solid ground. Ensure that no one is in the vehicle.
Block the wheel diagonally opposing the flat tyre to keep the vehicle from rolling when it is jacked up. While blocking the wheel, place a wheel block in front of one of the front wheels or behind one of the rear wheels.
A: Flat Tyre
B: Chock Blocks
Graphic
To raise the vehicle, insert the jack handle end along with the extension into the jack and turn it clockwise with the jack handle. As the jack touches the vehicle and begins to lift, check that it is properly positioned. Raise it high enough so that the spare tyre can be installed. Remember that you will need more ground clearance when putting the inflated spare tyre than when removing the flat tyre.
Make sure to locate the jack properly in the jacking point. Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned jack will damage the underbody of the vehicle and may allow the vehicle to fall off the jack and cause personal injury.
•  Use the jack only for lifting the vehicle during wheel changing
•  Do not raise the jack with any person inside the vehicle
•  When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath the jack
•  Raise the vehicle only high enough to remove and change the wheel
•  Follow jacking instructions
•  Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack
Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is supported by the jack alone.
Remove the wheel nuts. Remove the flat tyre straight off and then place it aside. Roll the spare wheel into position and align the holes of the disc/drum with the nuts. Lift the wheel and hand tighten the top wheel nut. Wiggle the wheel and press it back over the other nuts.
Re-install the wheel nut with the tapered end inward and tighten by hand. Press the wheel inward and tighten the wheel nuts further.
Graphic
Before lowering the wheel hand tighten the nuts in diagonal sequence so that wheel is flush against the hub/drum
Never use oil or grease on the bolts or nuts. Doing so may lead to over tightening of the nuts, wheel bolts spanner slip, damage the nuts and also may cause personal injuries. Also, nuts may loosen and the wheels may fall off, which could cause a serious accident. If there is oil or grease on any bolt or nut, clean before installing wheel nuts.
Lower the vehicle completely and tighten the diagonally opposite wheel nuts using the wheel nuts spanner. Turn the jack handle extension anti clockwise using the jack handle to lower the vehicle, making sure the handle remains firmly fitted onto the jack handle extension. Make sure the wheel spanner is securely engaged over the nut.
Tighten each nut a little at a time in the diagonally opposite order as shown. Repeat the process until all the nuts are tight.
Graphic
Do not use any other tools or any additional leverage other than your hands, such as a hammer, pipe or your foot.
Firmly tighten the wheel nuts as per the sequence shown in the illustration , two to three times.
Improperly or loosely tightened wheel nuts are dangerous. The wheel can wobble or come off. This can result in loss of vehicle control and cause a serious accident. Always make sure all the wheel nuts are properly/securely tightened to the specified torque.
When lowering the vehicle, make sure all portions of your body are clear off the vehicle as it is lowered to the ground. Have the wheel nuts tightened with the torque spanner to 120 Nm, as soon as possible after changing wheels.
If you have rotated, repaired, changed your tyres or changed the wheel rims, re-torque the wheel nuts after driving about 1,000 kms (Torque 120 Nm).
Put the wheel cap (if equipped) into position aligning the nozzle on the wheel to the nozzle clearance on the wheel cover. Tap it firmly on the sides with your hand to snap it into place.
Check the air pressure of the replaced tyre. If the pressure is lower than recommended, drive slowly to the nearest service station and inflate to the correct pressure. If it is too high, adjust it until it is correct. Always reinstall the valve cap after checking or adjusting tyre pressure. If the cap is not replaced, dirt and moisture could get into the valve core and cause air leakage. If you lose a valve cap, buy another and install it as soon as possible.
Wheel balancing to be done after tyre puncture rework.
11.9.2 Restore the Tools, Jack and Flat Tyre Securely
Restore the tools and jack back to their respective locations. Mount the flat tyre to the back door bracket at the rear of the vehicle. Firmly tighten the securing nuts. Double check to ensure the tyre is snug against the back door of the vehicle.
It is recommended to fix the flat tyre at the nearest tyre shop and swap the spare wheel back. The wheel balance and alignment differ from wheel to wheel which may lead to difference in steering and braking.
12 MAINTENANCE
12.1 Dimensions
Front View
Graphic
Rear View
Graphic
Side View
Graphic
 
Dimensions
Wheel Base
2850 mm
Overall Length
4428 mm (Without Spare Wheel)
Overall width
1870 mm
Overall Height
1923 mm
Front and Rear Track
1580 mm
The specifications are for reference only. Subject to change without prior notice
12.2 Technical Specifications
 
Diesel
Petrol
Engine
Model
2.2 L m Hawk Gen–II
2.0 L TGDi Petrol (G20)
Displacement/Cubic Capacity
2184 CC
1997 CC
Type
Compression Ignition, 4 Stroke, DI Turbocharged Intercooler
Positive Ignition, 4 Stroke, DI Turbocharged Intercooler
Bore x Stroke
84 X 98.5 / 76 X 82.5
83 x 92.25
No of Cylinders
4
4
Max. Engine Output
111.9 KW @ 3750 rpm (For 2WD AT & MT) / 128.6 KW @ 3500 rpm (For 4WD AT)
119 KW @ 5000 rpm (For 2WD MT)/130 kW @ 5000 rpm(For 2WD AT)
Max. Torque (Nm @ rpm)
330 Nm @ 1500 - 3000 rpm (For 2WD AT & MT) / 370 Nm @1500-3000 rpm (For 4WD AT)
330 Nm @ 1750 - 3000 rpm (For 2WD MT)
380 Nm @ 1750 - 3000 rpm (For 2WD AT)
Clutch
Type
Single Plate, Dry Diaphragm type (MT)
Wet Multi Plate (AT)
Transmission
Type
6 Speed Manual Transmission
6 Speed Automatic Transmission
No. of Gears
6 Forward, 1 Reverse
Axles
Rear Axle Ratio
4.3 : 1
Front Axle Ratio
4.3 : 1
NA
Wheels & Tyres
Rim (Front/Rear)
R18: 7.5J X 18 & R19: 8J X 19
Tyres (Front/Rear)
255/65 R18 & 255/60 R19
Steering
Type/Description
Rack and Pinion Type, Power Assisted - Electric / Power Assisted -Hydraulic
Suspension
Front
Double wishbone type IFS
Rear
Multi link Coil spring suspension
Shock absorbers
Hydraulic Double Acting
Brakes
Service Brake
Hydraulic & Vacuum assisted servo
Front
Disc
Rear
Disc/Drum
Parking Brake
Mechanical-Hand Operated (Conventional Type) (or) Electric Parking Brake (EPB)
Fuel
Fuel Capacity
57 Liters
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Capacity
20 Litres
NA
Electrical System
System Voltage
12 V
Battery Rating
72 Ah
72 Ah
12.3 Bulb Specification
Lamp Bulb
Wattage
Bulb Type
Quantity
Head lamp
 
LED
 
Front turn indicator / Position
 
LED
 
Boot Lamp
 
LED
 
Rear lamp - REVERSE
12V - 16W
W16W
2
Rear lamp - STOP
12V - 21W
PR21W
2
Rear lamp - TAIL
 
LED
 
Front fog lamp
 
LED
 
High Mounted Stop Lamp (HMSL)
 
LED
 
Registration plate lamp
 
LED
 
Map reading lamp
 
LED
 
Roof lamp
 
LED
 
Side repeater
12V - 5W
W5W
2
12.4 General Owners Information
Your vehicle has been designed for fewer maintenance requirements with longer service intervals to save both your time and money. However, each regular maintenance, as well as day-to-day care is more important to ensure a smooth, trouble free, safe and economical operation.
It is the owner's responsibility to make sure the specified maintenance, including general maintenance service is performed. Note that both the new vehicle limited warranty and emission control system limited warranties specify that proper maintenance and care must be performed. See Service Coupon Booklet for complete warranty information.
Where to go for service?
Mahindra technicians are well trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips and in dealership training programs. They learn to work on Mahindra vehicles before they work on your vehicle, rather than while they are working on it.
You can be confident that your Mahindra dealer's service department does the best job to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle reliably and economically.
Get the most from your vehicle with routine maintenance
Routine maintenance is the best way to help ensure you get the performance, dependability, long life and better resale value you expect from your vehicle. This is exactly why we've put together this Maintenance Section. It outlines the services required to properly maintain your vehicle and when they should be performed. The focus is on maintaining your vehicle while it's running great, which goes a long way toward preventing major repairs and expenses later.
Here are a few suggestions to help you get started on routine maintenance:
•  Familiarize yourself with your vehicle by going through your Owner's Manual
•  Take a few minutes to review this Maintenance Section
•  Make it a habit to use this manual to record scheduled maintenance in the Service Coupon Booklet
•  Consult with your Mahindra Authorised Dealer for all your vehicle's needs
12.4.1 Suggestions for Obtaining Service for your Vehicle
Prepare for the Appointment: If you have warranty work to be done, be sure to have the right papers with you. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's service history.
Prepare a List: Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the specific work you want done. If you've had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service advisor know about it.
Be Reasonable with Requests: If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
12.4.2 Need Assistance?
It is recommended talking to an Mahindra Authorised Dealer service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process. If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of the dealership.
If an Authorized Mahindra Dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact any Mahindra Customer Care executive. They would need the following information:
Owner's name and address, owner's telephone number (home and office), Authorized Dealership name, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), vehicle delivery date and mileage.
12.4.3 Warranty Information
Read the Warranty Information given in the ‘Warranty Information & Maintenance Guide’ for the terms and provisions of Mahindra warranties applicable to this vehicle. Mahindra genuine parts, fluids, lubricants and accessories are available at any Mahindra Authorised Dealer. They will help keep the vehicle operating at its best.
12.4.4 Protect your Warranty
Routine maintenance is not only the best way to help keep your vehicle performing as intended, it's also the best way to protect your warranty. Failure to perform scheduled maintenance specified in the Service Coupon Booklet will invalidate warranty coverage on parts affected by the lack of maintenance. We can't stress enough how important it is to keep records of all maintenance. Damage or failures due to neglect or lack of proper maintenance are not covered under warranty.
Keeping maintenance records is easy with the service coupon booklet
It's important to document the maintenance of your vehicle. For your convenience to maintain records of service, the scheduled maintenance coupons are provided in the service coupon booklet. Every time you bring your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance, be sure to present this booklet and certify the work. Also record the date of service and mileage at the time of service. This will make record keeping easy and, should your vehicle ever require warranty coverage, you will have all the documentation to show you've properly maintained it.
12.4.5 Maintenance Interval
Mahindra establishes recommended maintenance intervals based upon engineering testing to determine the most appropriate mileage to perform the various maintenance services. This protects your vehicle at the lowest overall cost to you. Mahindra recommends that you do not deviate from the maintenance schedules presented in this Maintenance Schedule.
12.4.6 Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal operating characteristic by itself, and does not necessarily indicate a concern or that the fluid needs to be changed. However, discolored fluids that also show signs of overheating and/or foreign material contamination should be inspected immediately by a qualified expert such as the factory trained technicians at your Mahindra Authorised Dealer. Your vehicle's oils and fluids should be changed at the specified intervals or in conjunction with a repair.
12.4.7 Chemicals and Additives
Non-Mahindra approved chemicals or additives are not required for factory recommended maintenance. In fact, Mahindra recommends against the use of such additive products unless specifically recommended by Mahindra for a particular application.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built with multiple complex performance systems. Every manufacturer develops these systems using different specifications and performance features. That's why it's important to rely on your Mahindra Authorised Dealer to properly diagnose and repair your vehicle.
When planning your maintenance services, consider your Mahindra Authorised Dealer for all your vehicle's needs.
12.4.8 Get the most from your service and maintenance visits
Getting your vehicle serviced at an Mahindra Authorised Dealer adds great value to your vehicle in number of ways. Hence, it is recommended to service your vehicle at an Mahindra Authorised Dealer only.
12.4.9 Vehicle Self Maintenance - General Precautions
•  Refer to relevant sections of the manual before starting
•  Set the parking brake
•  Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly
•  Turn OFF the engine and remove the key
•  Stay clear of hot vehicle parts
•  Avoid repeated contact with fluids
•  Do not let fuel, coolant and other fluids spill over electrical and hot vehicle parts
•  Keep all open flames and other burning material like cigarettes away from the battery and all fuel related parts
Do not start/run the engine when any engine/peripheral parts are removed.
12.5 Identifying Components in the Engine Compartment
Diesel
Graphic
A
Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir
B
Air intake
C
Engine Oil Cap
D
Degassing Tank (Coolant Filling)
E
Dipstick
F
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
G
Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
H
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
I
Battery
Petrol
Graphic
A
Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir
B
Air intake
C
Engine Oil Cap
D
Degassing Tank (Coolant Filling)
E
Dipstick
F
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
G
Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
H
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
I
Battery
12.6 General Maintenance
Exercise extreme caution when the hood is open and engine is ON.
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed frequently. In addition to checking the items listed below, if you notice any unusual noise, fluid leakages, smell or vibration, you should investigate the cause or take your vehicle to your Mahindra Authorised Dealer or a qualified service shop immediately.
Make these checks only with adequate ventilation if you intend to run the engine.
In the Engine Compartment
•  Front windshield washer fluid level
•  Engine oil level
•  Engine coolant level
•  Power steering fluid level
•  Battery condition
•  Fluid leaks
•  Brake/Clutch fluid level
•  Hoses, joints and pipes for any abnormalities
Inside the Vehicle
•  Lights
•  Accelerator pedal
•  Warning lamps
•  Brake pedal
•  Windshield wipe and wash
•  Brakes
•  Steering wheel
•  Parking brake
•  Seats
•  Gear lever shift mechanism
•  Seat belts
 
Outside the Vehicle
•  Lamps
•  Tire inflation pressure
•  Fluid leaks
•  Tire surface/thread and wheel nuts
•  Doors and engine hood latches
 
12.7 In the Engine Compartment
12.7.1 Fluid Leaks
Check the engine compartment and the underbody of the vehicle for any leaks. If you smell fuel vapor or notice any leak, Get the cause found and corrected immediately.
12.7.2 Engine Oil
Engine oil has the primary function of lubricating and cooling the inside of the engine. It plays a major role in maintaining the engine in proper working order. Therefore, it is essential to check the engine oil regularly.
12.7.3 Engine Oil Consumption
It is normal for engines to consume some engine oil during operation.
Causes of consumption in a normal engine are as follows;
•  Oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston rings and cylinders. Thin films of oil, left over when pistons move in cylinders, are sucked into the combustion chamber due to high negative pressure generated when the vehicle is decelerating. This oil gets burnt in the combustion chamber
•  Oil is also used to lubricate the stems of intake valves. Some of this oil is sucked into the combustion chamber together with the intake air and is burnt there
•  Engine oil consumption depends upon the viscosity and quality of the oil, and upon the conditions in which the vehicle is driven. Oil consumption will be more due to high speed driving and frequent acceleration and deceleration. A new engine may consume more oil since its pistons, piston rings and cylinder walls are not conditioned
12.7.4 Checking/Topping the Engine Oil
•  Make sure the vehicle is on level ground
•  Turn the engine OFF and wait a few minutes for the oil to settle down into the oil sump
•  Apply the parking brake
•  Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat
•  Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level dipstick
Diesel
Petrol
Graphic
Graphic
•  Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth. Insert the dipstick fully, then remove it again
•  If the oil level is between ‘Min ’and ‘Max’ marks, the oil level is acceptable. DO NOT ADD OIL
•  If the oil level is below the ‘Min’ mark, add enough oil through the oil filler neck to raise the level within the ‘Min’ and ‘Max’ marks. Wait for a few minutes after every top up for the oil to settle down before checking the level.
Graphic
•  Oil levels above the ‘Max’ mark may cause engine damage/poor performance.
•  Put the dipstick and the oil filler cap back and ensure it is fully/properly seated.
To avoid possible oil loss and injury due to hot blow-by gas, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the engine oil level dipstick and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.
Draining/Changing of engine oil should always be done by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
12.7.5 Checking/Topping Engine Coolant Level
•  Park the vehicle on a flat-horizontal surface. Keep the parking brake fully engaged. Shut-off the engine
•  Wait till the engine cools down and hence coolant temperature comes down to normal room temperature
Graphic
•  The coolant level should be between ‘MIN’ and ‘MAX’ marking provided on the coolant recovery tank
•  In case the coolant level is below the ‘MIN’ marking, the coolant should be topped-up
•  The coolant should be filled till the level rises above the ‘MIN’ but remain below the ‘MAX’ marking on the coolant recovery tank
•  However if the Coolant Recovery Tank is found to be near empty, it is recommended that the system be checked at an Mahindra Authorised Dealer
Never open the pressure cap when the engine is hot. Hot coolant may splash resulting in serious personal injury or severe burns by the erupting liquid.
Top up only with recommended Ready-To-Use (RTU) coolants for ensuring performance, anti-freezing and corrosion protection. Do not add water directly. Mixing with other brands of coolant is not recommended and should be avoided.
Draining or changing of engine coolant should always be done by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
12.7.6 Checking/Topping Brake/Clutch Fluid
The brake system is supplied with brake fluid from the brake fluid reservoir located adjacent to the air filter.
Graphic
The brake fluid level will drop slowly as the brakes wear, and will rise when the brake components are replaced. Fluid levels between the ‘MIN’ and ‘MAX’ lines are within the normal operating range; there is no need to add fluid. If the fluid levels are below the ‘MIN’ mark, the performance of the systems could be compromised; the brake/clutch operation could be spongy and gear change harder.
Top-up the recommended brake/clutch fluid till the ‘MAX’ mark or contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.
Carefully clean the cap on the reservoir before you remove it and be sure no debris fall in the reservoir. Do not keep the reservoir open for longer than necessary to add brake fluid.
Use only brake/clutch fluid that meets Mahindra specifications. Refer to the ‘Lubricant and Capacities’ section.
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake / clutch failure is noticed, immediate repair is must
If the vehicle not moved for long time, Clutch plate and Brake Liners can tend to be sticking to the Flywheel/Disc/Drum, depending on the Humidity and Temperature etc., As a good practice, if the vehicle parked for a longer time, We suggest for the following actions once in 15 days.
•  Release the parking brake
•  Start the engine
•  Move the vehicle back and forth
This will also ensure that the engine is run, Battery remain charged. Also avoid tyre developing flat spot.
12.7.7 Fuel Filter Water Draining (If equipped)
Graphic
Graphic
The fuel filter needs to be drained when there is water entry in the fuel filter. Follow the below procedure to drain the water;
1. Park the vehicle on a level ground
2. Apply Parking brake and block the wheels.
3. Switch the ignition OFF
4. Turn the drain plug (Tool is available in the tool kit) anti-clockwise 3–4 rounds, but DO NOT remove the plug
5. Wait till the water drains (few seconds)
6. Turn the drain plug clockwise to close and tighten the plug firmly
12.7.8 Checking/Topping Power Steering Fluid
Graphic
Check the power steering fluid level at the defined service intervals. Refer to Maintenance Chart for details.
The fluid level should be checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
Driving a vehicle with power steering fluid below the minimum mark will damage steering system.
Use only recommended power steering fluid. Do not use other types of power steering fluids which may damage the power steering system.
The fluid level in the reservoir should be checked on a level surface with the engine OFF to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading.
Follow the below steps for checking and topping up the power steering fluid;
1. Start the engine and let it run until it reaches normal operating temperature
2. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel left and right a couple of times
3. Turn the engine OFF
4. Check the power steering fluid level in the reservoir
5. The fluid level should be maintained between the ‘MIN’ and ‘MAX’ marks on the dipstick, integrated with the cap
6. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking the level until it reaches the correct operating range. Be sure to put the cap back on the reservoir
7. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces
Changing of power steering fluid should always be done by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
12.7.9 Windshield Washer Fluid Top-up
Graphic
Top up the windshield washer reservoir as and when required.
The fluid reservoir is located on the RHS of the engine bay behind the head lamp. The reservoir supplies washer fluid to both front and rear (if equipped).
In very cold weather conditions, fill the reservoir with washer fluid premixed with anti-freeze.
If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 4.5ºC, use washer fluid with anti-freeze protection. Failure to use washer fluid with anti-freeze protection in cold weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident.
12.7.10 Checking the Wiper Blades
Lift the wiper arm from its position. Expose the blade lip for inspection. Clean the wiper blade lips with water applied with a soft sponge. If the wiper blade is not wiping the glass satisfactorily or is worn-out, cut, cracked or bulging get it replaced at an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
12.7.11 Changing the Wiper Blade
1. Lift the arm and position the wiper blade at right angles to the wiper arm
2. Press the retaining clip in the opposite direction, disengage the wiper blade and pull it off the arm
Graphic
Graphic
To prevent damage to the windshield, don’t let the wiper arm slap down on to it.
3. Hold the end of the rubber and pull until the tabs are free of the metal support
4. Carefully insert the new blade rubber. Then install the blade assembly in the reverse order of removal
12.8 Maintenance - Inside the Vehicle
Lights: Make sure the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights and other lights are all working. Check headlight aim.
Warning Messages and Lamps: Check all warning lamps appearing in the instrument cluster and Infotainment. Refer to the relevant sections in this manual for further details.
Seats: Check that all seat controls such as seat adjusters, seat back recliner, etc. operate smoothly and that all latches lock securely in any position. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and that the locks hold securely in any latched position.
Seat Belts: Check that the seat belt system such as buckles, retractors and anchors operate properly and smoothly. Make sure the belt webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or damaged.
Accelerator Pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation, uneven pedal effort or stickiness. Check the foot well and remove obstructions if any.
Brake Pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation and proper clearance. Check the foot well and remove obstructions if any
12.9 Maintenance - Outside the Vehicle
The following checks should be carried out from time to time, unless otherwise specified.
Lamps: Check and ensure proper functioning of all exterior lamps.
Fluid Leaks: Check the engine compartment and the underbody of the vehicle for any leaks. If you smell fuel vapor or notice any leak, get the cause found and corrected immediately.
Doors and Engine Hood: Check all doors and latches including the tailgate for proper functioning. Make sure the engine hood secondary latch secures the hood from opening when the primary latch is released.
Tyre Inflation Pressure: Check the tire pressure with a pressure gauge every week.
12.10 Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a Mahindra genuine battery. For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. To prevent corrosion, apply petroleum jelly to the battery terminals. Tighten loose terminals and hold down clamp nuts only enough to keep the battery firmly in place. Tightening excessively may damage the battery terminals.
12.10.1 For Best Battery Service
•  Keep the battery securely mounted
•  Keep the battery top clean and dry
•  Keep the terminals and connections clean, tight and coated with petroleum jelly or terminal grease
•  Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the battery immediately with a solution of water and baking soda
Do not disconnect battery terminals while the engine is running. This will adversely affect all electronic controllers.
While removing the battery, always disconnect the negative terminal first. And while installing the battery, ensure the negative terminal is connected last.
It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an extended period of time. This will minimize the discharge of your battery during storage.
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not allow battery acid to contact eyes, skin or clothing. Don't lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes in the eyes or on the skin, flush contaminated area immediately with large quantities of water.
A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep any flame or spark away from the vent holes.
Keep batteries out of reach of children. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead components. Wash hands after handling batteries.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed, the clock (if equipped) and the preset radio (if equipped) stations must be reset once the battery is reconnected.
The replacement battery must meet the specification of the originally fitted battery.
12.10.2 Checking the Electrolyte Level
Check the electrolyte level and specific gravity at intervals of three months. Check all the six cells for proper electrolyte levels. If the level is below the lower marker, add distilled water until the level reaches the upper marker.
Adding distilled water;
•  Remove the vent plugs
•  Add distilled water to all the cells that require the fluid and secure the plugs properly
12.11 Appearance Care and Protection
12.11.1 Washing the Exterior
•  Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH soap
•  Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces
•  Never wash a vehicle that is ‘hot to the touch’ or during exposure to strong, direct sunlight
•  Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for best results
•  Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to eliminate water spotting
•  It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause damage to the vehicle
•  Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings and insect deposits; they can cause damage to the vehicle's paint work and trim over time
12.11.2 Engine Compartment
Graphic
Do not wash the engine or engine compartment or underbody with pressurized water.
12.11.3 Exterior Chrome
•  Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo
•  Use the custom bright metal cleaners, available at your Mahindra Authorised Dealer. Apply the product as you would wax to clean chrome parts; allow the cleaner to dry for a few minutes, and then wipe off the haze with a clean, dry rag
•  Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads as they can leave scratches on the chrome surface
•  After polishing the chrome parts, you can also apply a coating of Premium Liquid Wax, available at your Mahindra Authorised Dealer, or an equivalent quality product to help protect from environmental effects
12.11.4 Matt Finish Colours Do’s and Dont’s
•  Vehicle should be washed using a car shampoo that has a mild neutral (Zero) pH with a clean sponge or microfiber cloth to avoid scratching the vehicle’s surface.
•  Do not use detergent or hard shampoos when washing the vehicle, as they can damage the paint or finish. Instead, only use a mild, neutral pH car shampoo.
•  External contaminants such as bird droppings, adhesives, insects, and tree sap should be removed promptly and gently from the painted surface before pre-washing. Avoid applying excessive pressure to prevent damage to the paint.
•  Dry dust should not be wiped off, it may lead to permanent scratch marks, which are especially noticeable on matte colours compared to glossy colours. If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash the vehicle with only water to remove excess dirt before proceeding with a full wash.
•  Avoid using automatic car washers with high-pressure brushes, as they can damage the vehicle's surface. It's advisable to use automatic car washers without high-pressure brushes for a gentler cleaning process.
•  Do not apply paint protectors such as wax polish, ceramic coating, or any other surface treatments on matte painted surfaces, as they can cause permanent damage to the paint film.
•  Avoid using paper towels, dirty, or rough cloths to clean or wipe the car, as they can cause scratches. It’s recommended to use only microfiber cloths or sponges for a safe and effective clean.
•  It's recommended not to apply anything to the painted surface, such as stickers, foils, magnetic labels, or masking tapes, as they can cause adhesive transfer, potentially leaving permanent stains.
•  It is advisable to protect vehicle from Greasy, Oily products which may leave stains on paint film, difficult to remove.
•  Recommended to visit an Authorized Mahindra workshops for any paint related repairs.
12.11.5 Paint Chips
•  Mahindra dealers have the exact touch-up paint to match your vehicle's color
•  Take your vehicle to an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for paint touch-up or paint repairs
•  Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips
•  Always read the instructions before using the products
12.11.6 Aluminium Wheels And Wheel Covers (if equipped)
Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clear coat of paint finish. In order to maintain their shine;
•  Clean weekly with wheel and tire cleaner, which is available at your Mahindra Authorised Dealer. Heavy dirt and brake dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of water
•  Never apply any cleaning chemicals to hot or warm wheel rims or covers
•  Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergents
12.11.7 Plastic (Non-painted) Exterior Parts
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are available with your authorized dealer. You can use these cleaners;
•  For routine cleaning of plastic parts
•  For tar or grease spots
•  For plastic head lamp lenses
12.11.8 Windows and Wiper Blades
The front windshield, side windows and the wiper blades should be cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the vehicle's glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, water repellent coatings, tree sap, or other organic contamination; these contaminants may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades, and streaking and smearing of the windshield.
To clean these items follow these tips;
•  The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with a non-abrasive cleaner such as Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, available at your Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
•  The wiper blades can be cleaned with alcohol or Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate, available at your Mahindra Authorised Dealer. This washer fluid contains a special solution in addition to alcohol which helps remove the hot wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function properly.
•  Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
•  Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any glass parts.
If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion, clean the outer surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaning solution. After cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield with water.
Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to remove decals, as it may cause damage to the glass or rear windshield heater grid lines (if equipped).
12.11.9 Instrument Panel/Interior Trim and Cluster Lens
Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel.
Clean the instrument panel, interior trim areas and cluster lens with a clean and damp white cotton cloth, then with a clean and dry white cotton cloth; you may also use Dash and Vinyl Cleaner on the instrument panel and interior trim areas.
•  Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection
•  Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the finish of the instrument panel, interior trim and cluster lens
If a staining liquid like coffee/juice has been spilled on the instrument panel or on the interior trim surfaces, clean as follows;
•  Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean white cotton cloth
•  Apply Vinyl Cleaner to the wiped area and spread around evenly
•  Apply cleaner to a clean white cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled area and allow this to set in at room temperature for 30 minutes
•  Remove the soaked cloth, and if it is not soiled badly, use this cloth to clean the area with a rubbing motion for 60 seconds
•  Following this, wipe area dry with a clean white cotton cloth
12.11.10 Interior Maintenance
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts and seats:
•  Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner
•  Remove light stains and soil with carpet and upholstery cleaner
•  If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first with a stain remover
•  Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of the seat materials
•  Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle's safety belts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing.
12.11.11 Leatherette Seats (where applicable)
Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the leather.
•  To clean, use a soft cloth with a leather and vinyl cleaner. Dry the area with a soft cloth
•  To help maintain its resiliency and color, use the leather care kit, available from an Mahindra Authorised Dealer
•  Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of the clear, protective coating
In some instances, a color or dye transfer can occur when wet clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery. If this occurs, clean the leather immediately to avoid permanent staining.
12.11.12 Underbody
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and door drain holes free from packed dirt. You can also use an anti-corrosion spray for the underbody to avoid rusting and corrosion especially for vehicles in coastal places.
12.12 Air Conditioning System Maintenance
Your vehicle's air-conditioning is a sealed system. Any major maintenance, such as recharging should be done by a qualified technician. However, you can do a few things by yourself to make sure the air conditioning works efficiently.
Run the air-conditioning system at least once a week, even during the cold weather months. Run it for at least ten minutes with the engine running at normal operating temperature. This circulates the lubricating oil contained in the refrigerant.
Whenever you get the air-conditioning system serviced, make sure the service facility uses a refrigerant recycling system. This system captures the refrigerant for re-use. Releasing the refrigerant into the atmosphere may cause damage to the environment.
12.13 Vehicle Storage
If you are leaving your vehicle for more than 2 weeks you may want to take stopping to protect your battery. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air mode and high blower speed setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
It is recommended storing the vehicle in a covered, clean, dry, well leveled, ventilated and closed place.
12.14 Winter Care
12.14.1 Dealing With Ice
Make sure you have window ice scrapers and de-icers for the locks. When you're stuck, having a small shovel is useful to dig out of the snow. keep a bag of sand in the trunk will give added traction in rear-wheel drive vehicles and can be used to sprinkle on the snow and ice to gain better traction. And don't forget personal protection such as a warm coat, hat, gloves and a blanket, in case you get stuck in a storm.
12.14.2 Keep Enough Fuel in the Tank
Never let the fuel level in the tank drop below the half-full mark. A sudden storm with unexpected heavy rains could leave you stranded for hours. Having adequate fuel supply will allow you to idle the engine from time to time to keep warm.
Do not:
•  Tap the ice on the window to crack it or chip it for a good place to start scraping. You could end up cracking more than the ice and end up with a cracked or shattered windshield/ window
•  Pour warm or hot water on the windshield to melt ice. This will crack your windshield
12.14.3 During Winter Storage
Start the engine occasionally, here are a few pointers to keep in mind;
•  Run it in a well ventilated area. Carbon monoxide can build up quickly
•  Run for a minimum of 20 minutes to allow the engine to come up to the normal operating temperature. This will allow the oil to circulate and will also open up the thermostat so that your radiator anti-freeze circulates as well
•  Start up the air conditioner and/or heater and run both for 10 minutes or so. Again, circulating fluids is essential for good life of the system
•  If your vehicle has power steering, you may want to turn the wheels a few times to keep the fluids flowing
12.14.4 Exterior
Wash and wax your car to provide an extra layer of protection to your paint.
12.14.5 Vinyl and Rubber
Use a good conditioner on all vinyl and rubber parts to prevent from drying out.
12.14.6 Interior
Clean the glass, shampoo the carpets, dig in between the seats to see what's there, clean the upholstery in all nooks and corners.
12.14.7 Engine
Check all hoses and wires to make sure everything is in good condition and replace any that need to be. The last thing to do is to make sure the internal components of the engine remain lubricated and don't corrode.
If the engine is being started after a very long period of non-use, warm up the engine at an idle speed for 2-3 minutes before driving the vehicle.
12.15 Service Reminder Alert
The service reminder alert is to notify the driver/user when the next scheduled service is approaching. This alert is displayed on the instrument cluster and becomes active when the ignition is turned ON.
It will start showing up 500 kilometers before the service is due, providing a timely reminder to ensure the vehicle is serviced on schedule.
Alert will be reset by Mahindra Authorised Service Dealer after completion of every service (or)
Follow the below procedure to reset the service reminder alert by user.
1. Navigate to alert history page by pressing the menu button in the steering wheel switch
2. Ensure service reminder alert is visible in the menu
3. Press and hold OK button.
4. Turn ignition OFF and turn ON.
5. Release OK button after 10 seconds.
6. Check and ensure service reminder alert is not visible in the menu
13 INFOTAINMENT
13.1 Safety Precautions
Before using this device, take some time to read through this Instructions Manual.
Knowledge of the operation procedures will help in getting the best performance out of your new Infotainment System. Figures from the display and panel presented in this manual are examples provided for best explaining how the commands are used. Thus, display figures presented may be different from those actually presented on the device display. Illustrations, technical in­formation, specifications and descriptions of this brochure were correct until the date of printing. We safeguard the right to make any required amendments according to the ongoing development and improvement.
To avoid risk of damage and/or fire, observe the following precautions;
•  To avoid short-circuits, never insert metallic objects (for instance: coins or metallic tools) into the unit.
•  If you notice that the unit is releasing smoke or strange smell, promptly disconnect the supply and consult the nearest or Mahindra service Center.
•  Pay attention not to let the unit fall down, and neither beat the device strongly. Internal glass components of the unit may be damaged, making it non-operative.
•  This system has a Capacitive type touch panel. Select the desired option in the screen using his / her finger. Do not use any sharp objects on the touch screen. On selection the selected item is highlighted as an acknowledgement.
13.2 Cleaning of the Unit
If the front panel of this unit is dirty, clean it with a dry cloth or slightly soaked in water. If the front panel is too dirty, clean it with a cloth moistened with neutral soap and then repeat the prior operation.
Do not use any cleansing spray with this unit, as that can affect its mechanical parts. If you clean the front panel with a rough cloth that may scratch the surface.
Features described herein are subjected to availability depending on vehicle variants. Please contact authorized personal for more information.
13.3 User Controls
13.3.1 Touch Screen Display
The Infotainment system is equipped with a 10.0”  touch screen TFT display.
It displays information about Media (AM/FM, USB, Bluetooth music & etc.,), Vehicle controls & settings
Graphic
A few protected features that may not be appropriate for this model are shown on the infotainment screens.
13.3.2 Steering Controls - Audio Control System (if equipped)
Infotainment system can be controlled by Steering wheel switch mounted on the left side of the steering wheel.
Graphic
A: Mute
E: Voice Command
B: Volume +
F: Up
C: Volume -
G: Down
D: Call Connect
H: Call Disconnect
•  SOURCE - Press SOURCE button and use UP and DOWN arrow button to toggle between TUNER, USB, BT AUDIO and MYDRIVE
•  VOLUME CONTROL - Press ‘+’ and ‘- button to increase or decrease the volume
•  MUTE - Press MUTE button to mute audio while in TUNER mode and pause the song while in USB mode
•  TUNER MODE - Press the seek 'UP' / 'DOWN' button briefly: Manual Search, moves to selected channel. Press and hold the seek button 'UP' / 'DOWN' for 2 seconds to AUTO Search
•  Call Connect - Press to accept incoming call to the paired BT phone.
•  Call Dis Connect - Press to reject or end active call to the paired BT phone.
This provide the flexibility of controlling the infotainment system while driving, without any distraction
13.4 Home screen details
Home Screen shows all the media, phone, navigation, 3rd party application options.
Home Screen Details
Home Screen is the main screen for the user to interact with the Infotainment System
•  Home Screen is displayed when user press the Home icon or Home button
•  This screen also allows the user to have split screen menus.
•  The tiles in the THAR ROXX screen can be rearranged based on the user preference
•  Features which are available in infotainment screen is known as Tile.
•  For e.g., Radio, Music, Phone, Navigation and Application and can be accessed through Home screen tile
Graphic
 
Graphic
13.4.1 Radio
Graphic
Graphic
 
•  Touching the radio tile will open the full Radio screen, from the tile radio can be played and you can move between the radio channels.
•  When Radio is playing, station name & frequency will be shown in Radio Tile
The Radio tile allows quick access to radio features and the Radio menu.
•  Search the station name using seek up/down button on Steering Wheel and enter intended frequency by pressing Seek button.
Graphic
Graphic
A: Mute
E: Voice Command
B: Volume +
F: Up
C: Volume -
G: Down
D: Call Connect
H: Call Disconnect
Shortcut icon in Radio: Shortcut icon in Radio tile is used to
Change next/previous radio station
 
Graphic
Graphic
Stop button is used to stop/play the music
Graphic
 
13.4.2 Music
Graphic
Graphic
•  Touch Music tile screen to play the desired music
•  Song name will be displayed in the screen
•  To change a song, press the next/ previous buttons.
•  To pause music, press pause button
•  Music can be accessed through USB, My Drive, iPod and Bluetooth.
13.4.3 Phone
Graphic
•  The phone tile shows the phone that is currently connected with Bluetooth.
•  If no phone is currently paired, it will give a quick option to go to the pairing screen in the settings menu.
•  Touch the Phone tile to enter phone screen
•  When phone is connected to the infotainment system via Bluetooth, the phone name will display in vehicle infotainment
•  After pressing the phone screen, user can see below features on Phone Tile
Recent call list:
Graphic
The phone tile shows the phone that is currently connected to the AdrenoX with Bluetooth.
This screen will show recent call list details of person, who pair the mobile with infotainment
Contact Details:
Graphic
Contact details can easily be accessed by using this option
Dial:
Graphic
Using dial pad, we can enter new mobile number to contact a person or can find the person by tying his/her mobile number
SMS:
Graphic
While driving or other reasons user can send a SMS to desired person
Quick Dial:
Graphic
Favorites contacts can be seen in quick dial
13.4.4 NAVIGATION
Navigation in THAR ROXX is powered by MAPPLS AUTO.
If any route is currently set up for navigation, it will display the turn-by-turn directions.
MAPPLS AUTO will work only if internet connectivity is available.
Graphic
Graphic
User can set the desired target by searching in search box.
Graphic
Current location will be determined from vehicles GPS location.
Graphic
A short summary of searched place will be displayed.
Graphic
On clicking the direction button, a route map with live traffic details will be displayed. click start to enter Navigation screen.
Graphic
If user needs to exit the current navigation, he can click exit button.
13.5 Application
Applications tile allows the user to open all available 3rd party applications.
Touching the Applications tile will open the app drawer.
It has quick options to open News, Music & weather apps.
By pressing Application tile, App Drawer screen will open automatically
Graphic
Graphic
13.6 Widget
Graphic
Widgets will provide quick information to the user, and it will be available in left corner of the Home screen.
•  The widgets display will be fixed in the left corner of the home screen.
•  The following information will be available as part of widgets
1. Clock
2. Gallery
3. Weather
4. NEWS
5. Travel Explorer
6. Calendar
13.6.1 Clock
•  Time can be displayed in the selected area
•  Pressing the clock screen in widget will open the display settings on the clock.
•  Time can be fixed in both Analog or digital format
Graphic
Graphic
13.6.2 Gallery
•  Scroll down the clock screen and find the gallery screen in Widget
•  User can be able to see the photos/videos in MyDrive by press the gallery option
Graphic
Graphic
13.6.3 Weather
Graphic
•  Scroll down the gallery screen and find the Weather screen in Widget
•  Users can view weather information by selecting the weather icon on the widget
13.6.4 News
Graphic
•  Scroll down the Weather screen and find the NEWS screen in Widget
•  User can know the day-to-day news using India Today app by selecting the NEWS app in widget
13.6.5 Travel Explorer
Graphic
•  Scroll down the Weather screen and find the Travel explorer screen in Widget
•  User can search nearby hotels, locations etc., can be accessed by selecting the Travel explorer app
13.6.6 Calender
Graphic
•  Scroll down the Travel Explorer screen and find the Calendar screen in Widget
•  User can fix the Events, Journey Planner, Checklist, Schedule Destination & Pickup Remainder by using calendar
13.7 Split Screen Functionality
Graphic
Users can access the Split screen by swiping left on the home screen.
Graphic
User can set the Radio, Media, Phones, and other screens by long pressing the intended tile in Split screen.
Graphic
User can set any four contents in split screen to access the feature easily.
13.8 e-SIM (If equipped)
Graphic
THAR ROXX infotainment has inbuilt e-SIM which is used to access Just dial, Accuweather, Horoscope,
News, and some other apps can be accessed by using the e-SIM
THAR ROXX is applicable for a free AdrenoX subscription starting from the date of KYC till a specified period based on vehicle variant.
13.9 Quick Access Drawer Functionality
Graphic
Graphic
Quick Access Drawer can be opened by swiping down the screen.
Quick Access Drawer gives the user a swift way to access handy features like Volume control, SOS, Roadside Assistance, Valet Mode, Notifications, Help, Radio, My Drive, USB, Bluetooth, iPod, and video.
13.9.1 Volume Control
Graphic
User can increase, decrease or mute the volume by using Volume Control option 
13.9.2 SOS
Graphic
If there is any emergency, user can access the SOS
By enabling SOS in infotainment, a call will be triggered automatically from your THAR ROXX to 108 Ambulance Services for Medical Assistance
   
13.9.3 RSA
Graphic
If any abnormal condition is observed in vehicle, user can access RSA
By enabling RSA in infotainment, a call will be triggered automatically to Mahindra Roadside Assistance team
13.9.4 Valet Mode
Allows the user to park the vehicle in a predefined location while giving the vehicle to valet parking. The default PIN to access the Valet mode will be 1234.
Graphic
Once the Valet Mode is enabled,
•  Infotainment screen will not be accessible,
•  The vehicle speed will not go beyond 80 Kmph,
•  Geofencing alert will be triggered to the user's mobile when an unknown person drives the vehicle over 5 Km.
•  Above conditions are not applicable, if user disables the valet mode.
•  Don’t activate the valet mode during vehicle service
13.9.5 Notification
Graphic
•  User mobile should pair with THAR ROXX via Bluetooth
•  Notification will be shown by clicking the notification icon only if the user’s mobile is paired with THAR ROXX
13.9.6 Help
Graphic
•  Using Help option user can know the unknown alerts and telltale details in Owners Manual or Infotainment Manual
13.9.7 Radio
Graphic
Graphic
•  Radio option will be selected directly by using Quick access option
•  Once the Radio icon is selected, then Radio screen will appear in infotainment
13.9.8 MyDrive
   
Graphic
By using USB device, favorite songs can be stored in MyDrive
Press MyDrive option to enjoy the songs which is already stored in MyDrive
13.9.9 USB
Media port is available below the center switch bezel where USB device can be connected.
User can access music, video & Photos by USB device.
Graphic
Graphic
13.9.10 Bluetooth
Graphic
User can connect the mobile with THAR ROXX via Bluetooth
Once Mobile Bluetooth is connected with vehicle infotainment, user can play desired songs
13.9.11 iPod
Graphic
This option can be enabled only if the user have iPhone
If user have iPhone, then car play application can be disabled through iPhone settings. To play the music, connect the USB cable to media port and play songs through mobile APP.
Graphic
13.9.12 Video
Graphic
Graphic
•  When USB device is connected in Media Port, then user can play Videos.
•  In App drawer, select Gallery option & select the video in gallery. Video will play automatically.
•  User can see the video in parking condition
•  During driving, user can see the video in infotainment up to 20 kmph speed
13.10 App Drawer Functionality
Graphic
The App Drawer can be opened by dragging the screen from Down to up.
The app drawer displays all the applications available in Infotainment System.
Graphic
The App Drawer allows user to browse through available apps and folders and launch selected one.
Based on the usage of Apps, reordering will be done automatically.
 
13.10.1 Add Folder
Graphic
Graphic
•  User can select add folder and can drag the existing apps available in app drawer to New Folder
•  User can rename the folder as per his/her choice.
13.10.2 Climate Control (If equipped)
Graphic
Graphic
•  User can press Climate Control option and select different modes available in THAR ROXX.
•  Types of modes are described below
Graphic
Face Mode: User can access Face mode to get direct airflow through instrument panel air vents to the front row passenger.
Graphic
Face & Foot Mode: User can select Face & Foot mode to get airflow from both instrument panel air vents and footwell air vents
Graphic
Foot Mode: User can select Foot mode to get airflow from footwell air vents
Graphic
Foot & Defogger Mode: User can select Foot & Defogger mode to get airflow from footwell air vents & Defogger vents
Defogger vent is used to clear the frost/mist, which is formed on Front windshield.
Graphic
Front Defogger Mode: User can select Front Defogger mode to clear the frost/mist, which is formed on front windshield
Graphic
Blower Speed Control: Blower Fan Speed can be controlled by pressing '+' or '-' button on HVAC controller.
Graphic
Auto Mode: User can select auto mode by pressing the ‘Auto’ button on HVAC controller.
In AUTO mode, with respect to the surrounding condition, set temperature is automatically obtained. This is done by adjusting the blower speed and fresh/recirculation mode to optimum level.
Power Off:
Graphic
Graphic
HVAC system is turned off when the user presses the power button.
Press the power button to restart the HVAC system.
13.10.3 Connected Apps (If equipped)
Graphic
User can select Connected Apps and can see connected apps Features.
13.10.4 Documents
Graphic
Graphic
User can store the important files like License, Aadhar card, Pan card, Voter I’d , etc., in pdf format
1. My Drive Documents: In this folder user can store the important details like License, Aadhar Card, Pan Card, etc.. in digital format.
2. USB Documents: Connect the pen drive in file transfer socket and then user can access important files which are available in pen drive.
13.10.5 Download Manager
Graphic
In Download Manager, user can know the applications of third-party app available on Infotainment Systems
User can select the required APP and view various details available in it.
13.10.6 XPLOR Mode (If equipped)
Graphic
Graphic
In Drive mode user can be able to access three different drive modes.
1. Zip Mode
2. Zoom Mode
3. Snow Mode
4. Mud Mode
5. Sand Mode
Zip mode
Graphic
ZIP Mode mode is the default mode in the Drive Mode with Terrain Assist system. You can choose ZIP mode to experience a true SUV drive that embodies the essence of the Mahindra SUV experience. This mode is set as the default for an authentic driving experience.
ZOOM MODE:
Graphic
ZOOM Mode: ZOOM Mode for an adrenaline rush. In this mode, engine power, gear shifts, and braking all work together to provide an exhilarating and thrilling driving experience.
Snow mode
Graphic
SNOW Mode: SNOW Mode for improved vehicle stability in low-traction conditions, ensuring better control and safety on snowy or icy roads.
Mud mode
Graphic
MUD Mode: MUD Mode to ensure maximum torque availability, providing optimal traction and control in muddy conditions.
Sand mode
Graphic
SAND Mode: SAND Mode to maintain the vehicle's momentum on soft ground, ensuring smooth and consistent movement.
13.10.7 Gallery
User can save photos & videos in the Gallery by inserting USB device in Media Port. Also, user can copy the photos & videos in MyDrive Photos and MyDrive videos.
Graphic
Graphic
Graphic
Use can select MyDrive Photos, see the list of Photos and select to see it in full screen.
Similarly, user can play the video in infotainment system.
As a safety measure, there are some limitations to play the video in infotainment.
User can see the video in parking condition
During driving, user can see the video in infotainment up to 20 kmph speed.
13.10.8 Horoscope
Graphic
Graphic
By using the Horoscope app user can view daily fortune as per his/her zodiac sign
13.10.9 Just Dial
Graphic
Graphic
User can search various services by using the Just Dial app in the infotainment
13.10.10 MyDrive Manager
 
Graphic
Insert USB device in Media Port & open the My Drive Manager then user can copy required songs, videos, photos and documents to the infotainment system
Graphic
Select required file from USB device & by using copy (highlighted) option, user can store the required details from USB to the infotainment system.
Delete content option is used to remove the unwanted files in the infotainment system
Graphic
User can store max 1.9 GB data in infotainment system.
13.10.11 My SUV Info
Graphic
In MySUV Info option, user can know the Vehicle Details and can store License & other certificates in digital format.
Vehicle Details
Graphic
1. Vehicle Name
7. Number of cylinders
2. Color of the vehicle
8. Variant details
3. PUC (Pollution Under Control) Expiry Date
9. VIN Number
4. Last Service Date
10. Model
5. Engine Capacity
11. Make
6. Fuel Type
12. Insurance Expiry Date
Documents Wallet:
Graphic
In Documents Wallet user can store the following details in digital format
1. Pollution Under Control (PUC) certificates in Digital format
2. Insurance
3. License
4. Registration Certificate (RC)
13.10.12 News Update
Graphic
Graphic
By using NEWS app user can easily listen World NEWS, Top News, Automobile News, Business, Sports & etc.,
13.10.13 Owner’s Manual
By using Owner’s Manual option, user can see THAR ROXX Owner's manual
Graphic
Graphic
By using Owner’s Manual option, user can see THAR ROXX Owner's manual & Infotainment manual
13.10.14 Rear View Camera (if equipped)
Graphic
Rear View Camera assists the user during parking in two methods
•  Parallel Parking
•  Perpendicular Parking
13.10.15 Software Update
User can find whether the software is latest or not by using below option
Graphic
Graphic
13.10.16 Surround View System (if equipped)
Using this option, user can see different Surrounding views in infotainment system
Graphic
Graphic
Surround View System / 360-degree Camera View System assists the user during parking and during low speed maneuvering. Surround View Assistance is provided with the help of 4 cameras located in the front grille, in the tailgate applique and on both exterior mirrors.
Front Camera 2d View
Graphic
This view assist the user to drive the vehicle carefully in front area.
User can see the front surroundings while maneuvering in front.
Rear Camera 2d View
Graphic
This view assists the user with Rear surrounding view for maneuvering in rear of the vehicle.
Left Camera 2d View
Graphic
This view helps the user to see the left side view near the front tire when parking
Right Camera 2d View
Graphic
This view helps the user to see the right side view near the front tire when parking
Rear Bumper 2d View
Graphic
This view helps the user to see the objects closer to rear bumper
Front Bumper 2d View
Graphic
This view helps the user to see the object closer to front bumper
Bird’S Eye View
Graphic
The bird’s eye view/2D top view shows the view of the vehicle from a top-down view (as in right side of image) stitching all the 4 camera images
Wide-Angle View / Full Screen View- 2d & 3d
Single view can be switched to wide-angle view by pressing full view icon
Graphic
Graphic
Translucent Top View
•  The translucent (semi transparent) top view will provide the user to view the floor below the vehicle.
•  Gently, touch the bird’s eye view, then the infotainment view changes to semi transparent view. User can view beneath the ground which will be visible once the vehicle starts moving.
Graphic
 
3D Views
Graphic
Once user touches bird’s eye view/3D top view in infotainment screen, then oval ring will appear.
In oval ring, 3D view switching 8 icons will be visible. Selecting any icon will show the 3D view in icons direction.
If there is NO action from user side, then Icon will hide automatically after 5 seconds.
Graphic
Graphic
SVS - Settings
Graphic
User can access the Parking Guideline, Automatic Side View, Parking assistance & Drive video recordings by using SVS settings
Parking Guidelines
Graphic
Graphic
In Parking Guidelines, two modes are available i.e. Static Guideline & Dynamic Guideline.
Static Guideline indicates the placement of vehicle with respect to the parking slot.
Dynamic Guideline indicates the path that the vehicle will traverse with the current steering angle position.
Color codes (Red, Yellow, Green) on the static lines helps in assessing obstacle distance [at the ground plane] from the vehicle’s boundary.
•  By selecting 2D view, user can see either Front View or Rear View. 2D view is the Default view.
•  By selecting 3D view, user can see Full View of the vehicle.
Automatic Side View
Graphic
Graphic
•  When Left / Right Turn Indicator is turned ON and 3D view is active, then view will switch to 3D Left / Right in Infotainment Screen
•  This feature can be Enabled / Disabled from SVS SETTINGS menu
Parking Assistance:
Two types of Parking Assistances are available in THAR ROXX
•  Vertical (Perpendicular) Parking Assistance:
1. Choose Vertical Parking icon from SVS-Settings. Overlays will appear on either side as in image below.
2. Drive ahead of the parking slot, so that camera can have the parking slot view.
3. Chose vertical parking button from settings. Overlays will appear on either side.
Graphic
Graphic
•  Parallel Parking Assistance:
1. Drive ahead of the parking slot so that Camera can have the parking slot view, then choose Parallel Parking icon from SVS-Settings.
2. Two green rectangular boxes will appear on either side
Graphic
Graphic
Drive Video Recording:
•  The 4 cameras installed around the vehicle captures the video and capture special event of the vehicle during driving.
•  Recording from SVS-DVR is possible only if micro-SD card is installed
Graphic
Graphic
•  Use Class 10 micro-SD card for recording the video
•  For detailed information on the Surround View System topic, see the Interactive Owner's Manual 360° View section which is available in Mahindra’s M4U app
13.10.17 Ticket Tape
 
Graphic
Graphic
Ticker Tape feature on the THAR ROXX helps users to track the stock prices and other financial data by providing real- time information on various stock trades and other relevant financial data.
13.10.18 Travel Explorer
Travel Explorer takes the user thrillophilia app and it helps the user to find near by hotels, famous location etc.,
Graphic
Graphic
 
13.10.19 User Profile
Graphic
It is a personalized profile and user can choose this option to control climate setting, preferred audio source, audio settings, application drawer, link profile to key fob, Lock my Profile etc.
 
User Profile
Graphic
In the given screen user have two Profile and one guest profile.
Configure Active Profile
Graphic
User can assign person specific settings for First, Second and Guest Profiles.
Name
Graphic
User can create a distinct identity to the profile by providing a unique name.
Climate
Graphic
User can assign the comfortable climate settings according to his/her need.
Audio Source
Graphic
User can choose the preferred audio source for the profile. When preferred audio source is not available, default audio source will be played.
Audio Settings
Graphic
User can be able to assign the favorite audio settings to the profile.
Screen Saver
Graphic
By using screen saver option, user can select the photos from gallery & make it Screen Saver.
By selecting automatic screen saver, screens can be updated automatically by M&M
Application Drawer
Graphic
In Application Drawer user can fix the apps according to the profile usage
Link Profile To Key Fob
Graphic
User can link the profile with the key fob. By using this setting, once user enter the vehicle with the desired key fob, then all the saved settings will updated automatically.
Lock My Profile
Graphic
If lock settings is enabled by the user, then other user can’t change the saved details. Also, other user can't see the saved user specific settings on infotainment screen.
13.10.20 Weather Update
Graphic
Graphic
User can check weather condition by using Accuweather application
13.11 Settings
13.11.1 Quick Settings
Some settings, which are needed frequently are provided up-front as Quick Settings on Infotainment Screen.
Graphic
Graphic
Touch Sound
Graphic
Enabling the Touch Sound will give the Touch sound, whenever user selects particular icon or app
Clock In System OFF
Graphic
In Home Screen, user can turn ON or turn OFF the Clock by using this option.
Reset Home Layout
Graphic
Graphic
Home screen will revert to its default layout whenever user selects this option.
13.11.2 All Setting
List of details available in All Settings
Graphic
1. General
4. Audio
7. User Input & Feedback
2. Display
5. Phone
8. Wifi
3. Date & Time
6. Vehicle
9. ECOSENSE
1. General
Graphic
By using General, users can perform the following functions:
1. Unit
2. Factory Reset
3. Software Update
Graphic
1. Units: User can select UK (Metric) and US (Imperial) to calculate the units (i.e., Km)
Graphic
2. Factory Reset: If user selects 'Confirm', All settings will be restored to default factory settings
Graphic
3. Software Update : If Auto Download option is enabled and if any update is available, then software update will be downloaded automatically.
2. Display Settings
Graphic
List of features available in settings
Brightness: User can increase or decrease the brightness of Infotainment and Instrument Cluster.
Graphic
Graphic
Power and Sleep
Graphic
•  If power OFF is enabled in infotainment screen, then the clock will be displayed in Infotainment screen whenever Infotainment system gets off.
•  If the infotainment display is inactive for more than 60 seconds, then screen saver option enabled automatically if the user turn on the option in infotainment
•  User can manually select the screen saver photos from My Drive Photos
Clock Type
Graphic
User can select the digital or analog clock as per his/her choice.
This will be reflected in home screen when infotainment system goes OFF.
Home Layout
Graphic
In Home Layout, user can have the screen view as per his choice.
If another user wants to set the original settings, then the user can select reset option
.
3. Date & Time
Graphic
User can set the Date & Time by using this option.
Sync to GPS:
Graphic
Date and Time can be sync with GPS, it can be manually enabled or disabled by user
Time Zone
Graphic
By using this option user can manually fix the different time zones
Set Date
Graphic
User can set and fix the Date format either in DD/MM/YY or MM/DD/YY format.
Set Time
Graphic
User can set and fix the Time format either in 12 Hour or 24 Hour.
4. Audio Settings
Using Audio Settings, user can change the sound effects in different positions.
Graphic
Graphic
Studio
Graphic
This mode will enable the user to have the experience of music inside a recording studio.
Sonic Expanse
Graphic
This mode will enable the user to experience the immersive experience by extending the stereo width beyond physical boundaries of a device. The feature will widen the sound stage across the frequency of the speaker system.
   
Ambiance
Graphic
Stage : Stage mode is just like watching the musician's performance at stage, The audio shall be experienced at ear level such that the audio source is placed at the front of the vehicle.
Party : Party Mode is Just like Disco Club, music will come from multi direction, user can feel special instrument tones like guitar, keyboard, etc., coming from separate speakers.
User can feel the powerful and punchy sound experience.
Retreat :Gives the user the calming and soothing sound experience.
Immersive :This will give the user the improved immersive experience by enhancing the stereo audio.
Sound Field Position
Graphic
User can adjust the sound according to his preferences and button center is given to get the sound balance from back to center
Equalizer
Graphic
Equalizer is provided to change all frequency range settings according to preferences. Additionally, subwoofer bass can also be adjusted here.
Clarifi
Graphic
Clari-Fi analyses digital audio files in real-time and corrects waveform deficiencies based on the existing audio information. Thereby it scales the amount of treatment based on the quality of the individual source signal "rebuilding" much of what was lost in the compression process.
VNC+
Graphic
The goal of VNC+ (Vehicle Noise Compensation) is to automatically adjust the loudness to compensate vehicle noise to improve auditory experience when driving.
Bass Enhancer
Graphic
Bass Enhancer technology can be adapted to the capabilities and characteristics of the playback system as well as personal preferences, generate subtle bass support, transparent enrichment or powerful, punchy and rich saturation.
Volume Settings
Graphic
The volume settings can be adjusted for different applications.
Each application like radio, android auto and notifications can be set with separate volume levels.
Default Audio Settings
Graphic
By enabling the default audio settings, the Audio settings will be restored to the default settings
5. Phone
Graphic
By using the Phone option, users can perform the following function
Graphic
I) Bluetooth : User enable or disable Bluetooth connection according to his/her need
Graphic
II)Device List: User can view the list of devices, already connected to vehicle infotainment.
Graphic
III)Add Devices: By using this option, user can find the nearby devices.
Graphic
IV) BT Discoverability: Pressing BT Discoverability shows the vehicle's Bluetooth for 90 seconds to nearby devices. Once connected, Bluetooth functions become available.
Graphic
V)Ring Tone: User can fix the ringtones for incoming calls
Graphic
VI) SMS Settings: SMS settings in the infotainment system include configuring text message notifications, display preferences, and handling incoming messages for an enhanced user experience.
6. Vehicle Settings (If equipped)
Graphic
By using the Vehicle option, users can perform the following functions.
Access
Graphic
User can see following features on THAR ROXX by using access option
Selection Unlock: While activating this option only the driver door can be unlocked
Remote Engine Start Stop: activating this option can be turned ON and OFF remotely
Light & Illumination
Graphic
By enabling this option DRL will be activated automatically in ignition ON for better visibility
7. User Input & Feedback (If equipped)
Graphic
By using the User Input & Feedback option, user scan perform the following function
Screen Touch Feedback
Graphic
Button Touch Sound: By enabling this user can hear the touch sound while selecting any application
Voice Alerts
Graphic
Voice Alerts: By enabling this, system give voice commands to user (like Welcome, goodbye, etc.,)
8. Wifi
Graphic
User can connect the mobile with vehicle Wi-fi
Graphic
Graphic
By using Wi-fi device option, user can know the name of vehicle Wi-Fi and can change the password of the Wi-fi.
9. ECOSENSE
Graphic
User can connect the mobile with vehicle ECOSENSE
13.12 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)
1. How to connect phone via Bluetooth in Infotainment?
User can connect Bluetooth using any of the below methods, in Bluetooth settings.
Add device: Kindly ensure, Mobile device should be in Bluetooth settings screen to accept the connection
Bluetooth discoverability: Kindly ensure, Mobile device start scan after discoverability is turned On
2. My contacts are taking time to load in IVI?
Based on the Mobile device and number of contacts, loading time may vary from few seconds to few minutes
3. Bluetooth Music is not playing in Infotainment?
After connecting mobile device to Bluetooth, user need to select his device for media in device list and then select Bluetooth music source in Infotainment to Play music
4. Few Phone Contacts are not visible in Infotainment Screen?
Ensure that your phone book contacts do not have special characters before their name. If there are such contacts, please rename them.
5. I can’t Accept or decline WhatsApp call from IVI?
IVI will support Bluetooth phone voice call and supportability of WhatsApp, MS Team call depends on the controls provided by Mobile device/app to Infotainment
6. During active call, I’m getting Navigation Prompts?
During call, Navigation prompts will still come so user don’t miss any direction. User can adjust the volume of navigation prompts as required
7. Next /Previous, fast forward/rewind etc. controls not working for Bluetooth music?
The availability of the features/control is dependent on the Bluetooth version of phone device and music application used in phone
8. While playing USB song album art not displaying?
Album art will display in the screen, only if the song has album art information
9. While playing songs from USB, few files are getting skipped?
If the Infotainment system comes across a corrupt music track in media source, the system might skip to next music track in the media source
10. Date & Time in my Infotainment is Incorrect?
User can Sync to GPS or manually set Date & time in settings. After selecting Sync to GPS, need to drive vehicle few Kms in open sky to ensure proper date and time based on the time zone selected.
11. Sources are disabled in QAD?
Source will be active only when device is connected e. g., for USB, Pen drive should be connected.
12. Can I reduce the Navigation Volume?
Yes, user can adjust Navigation or other source volume, in Audio Settings
13.13 Appendix
Abbreviations
Acronym
Description
BT
Blue tooth
SWC
Steering Wheel control
IVI
In Vehicle Infotainment